Manual de Operación - Grúa Tadano ATF220 G5

Operation Manual
ATF 220G-5
Carrier
Vehicle identification number

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2019-10_EN
All rights reserved, particularly the right of reproduction and distribution.
Copyright 2019
TADANO Ltd.
The reproduction, editing, copying and distribution of this manual, including excerpts, are only permitted
with the express written approval of TADANO.
Any type of reproduction, distribution or storage on data carriers in any form not authorized by TADANO
represents a violation of the applicable copyright laws and will be prosecuted.
We reserve the right to carry out technical changes, which serve to improve our mobile cranes, or which
increase the safety standard - even without separate prior notice.
Manufacturer
TADANO FAUN GmbH
Faunberg 2
91207 Lauf a. d. Pegnitz, Germany
Phone: +49 9123 185 0
Fax: +49 9123 7 53 20
E-mail: info@tadanofaun.de
www.tadanofaun.de
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Preface 11
1.1 Using the operating manual 11
1.2 Vehicle identification number, name plate 13
1.3 In case of Damage 14
1.4 Warranty 14
2 General safety instructions 15

2.1 Basic Safety Information 15
2.1.1 Use of the Mobile Crane 15
2.1.2 Personnel Requirements 16
2.1.3 Planning Use 19
2.1.4 Ramming or pulling out posts or sheet piles 24
2.1.5 Outrigger 25
2.1.6 Service and Maintenance 27
2.1.7 Welding and alignment work 29
2.1.8 Painting work 30
2.1.9 Risk of fire and explosion 31
2.1.10 Different lengths of the hydraulic cylinders 31
2.1.11 Dismounting and disposal 32
2.2 Basic information concerning safety in the carrier 33
2.2.1 Warning and instruction signs 33
2.2.2 Before driving 40
2.2.3 Initial Operation and Running-in 41
2.2.4 Driving mode 41
2.2.5 Notes and Regulations on the Installed Pressure Tanks 44
2.2.6 Stopping the Mobile Crane 45
2.2.7 Towing 46
3 Safety equipment 47
3.1 Safety equipment of the mobile crane 47
3.2 Emergency stop of carrier engine *) 47
3.3 Amot Control (engine stop) *) 48
3.4 Wheel chocks 49
3.5 Emergency hammer 51
4 Components and operating elements 53

4.1 Carrier - location of components 53
4.2 Carrier cab – interior fittings 54
4.3 Carrier cab – operating elements on instrument panel 55
4.4 Steering column switches 67
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
4.5 Carrier cab - shifting an driving 70

4.6 Carrier cab - gear selector lever 71
4.7 Carrier cab - controller for rear steering 72
4.8 Ignition key 72
4.9 Working speed 73
4.9.1 Safety instructions 73
ATF 220G-5 3
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
4.9.2 Overview 74
4.9.3 Switching working speed on/off 74
4.10 Ladders 75
4.11 Storage box-Timber storage 76
4.12 Double ladder 76
4.13 Crank handle 79
4.14 Roller sun visor 80
4.15 Lounge bed *) 81
4.16 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases (SCR system) 83
4.17 AdBlue tank heating *) 84
4.18 Rear area monitoring 85
4.19 Asymmetrical outrigger base 86
5 Operation of on-board computer 91

5.1 Description of function 91
5.2 Elements of the on-board computer 92
5.3 Layout of the main display 96
5.3.1 Overview 96
5.3.2 Status information 97
5.3.3 Navigation area 99
5.3.4 Pilot and warning lamps 101
5.3.5 Error symbols 104
5.3.6 Navigation in a menu 107
5.4 "Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" menu 109
5.5 "Outrigger information" menu 112
5.6 "Suspension" menu 113
5.6.1 Tyre pressure monitoring system *) 114
5.7 "Engine information" menu 115
5.8 “Camera view” menu 117
5.9 “Other menus” menu 118
5.10 "Error messages" menu 120
5.11 "Software and hardware information" menu 121
5.12 "User settings" menu 122
5.12.1 Overview 122
5.12.2 “Front camera start menu” setting 123
5.12.3 “Automatic menu change” setting 124
5.12.4 “Navigation control button assignment” setting 126
5.12.5 “Brightness” setting 128
5.13 Menu "Service" 129
5.13.1 "Engine fault" menu 130
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5.13.2 "Tyre pressure" menu 131

5.14 Messages, pilot and warning lamps 133
5.14.1 Messages 133
6 Transport 144
6.1 Ladders 144
4 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
6.2 Loading the mobile crane 146
7 Putting into operation 150

7.1 Carrier cab 150
7.1.1 Unlocking and locking doors from inside / outside 150
7.1.2 Adjusting seats 155
7.1.3 Adjusting the steering wheel 160
7.1.4 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt 160
7.1.5 Adjusting the external mirror 161
7.1.6 Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system 164
7.1.7 Opening/closing the carrier cab side window 167
7.1.8 Interior lighting 169
7.2 Checking the lighting 170
7.2.2 Checking exterior lighting 170
7.2.3 Checking interior pilot lamps and indicators 171
7.2.4 Checking lighting, pilot lamps and indicators individually 172
8 Outrigger 175
8.1 Installation location of control panel 175
8.2 Safety instructions 175
8.3 Control panel 177
8.3.1 Structure of control panel 177
8.3.2 Buttons of the control panel 178
8.3.3 "Start menu" button 180
8.3.4 Menu "Main menu" 182
8.3.5 Menu "Retracting/extending outrigger beams" 184
8.3.6 Menu "Retracting/extending outrigger floats" 190
8.3.7 Menu "Suspension cylinders" 197
8.4 Supporting the mobile crane 203
8.4.1 Preparations in carrier cab 203
8.4.2 Extending outrigger beams to the required outrigger extension 204
8.4.3 Mounting or shifting outrigger floats 206
8.4.4 Supporting the outrigger plates from below 209
8.4.5 Extending outrigger float 210
8.5 Retracting outrigger beam 212
8.5.1 Preparations in carrier cab 212
8.5.2 Retracting the outrigger floats 213
8.5.3 Dismounting or shifting outrigger floats 213
8.5.4 Retracting outrigger beams 215
9 Removing outrigger beams *) 217
10 Installing outrigger beams *) 225
11 Driving mode 233

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
11.1 General principles 233

11.2 Before driving 233
11.2.1 Set down the hook block in the holder 233
11.2.2 Attaching the hook block for road travel 235
11.2.3 Checking resources and tyres 236
11.2.4 Requirements for driving mode 238
11.3 Starting/stopping engine 241
ATF 220G-5 5
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
11.3.1 Starting the engine 241

11.3.2 Switching off the engine 245
11.4 Shifting and driving 245
11.4.1 Starting and stopping 245
11.4.2 Activating of steering programs 249
11.4.3 Engaging and switching off axle drive and differential locks 256
11.4.4 Transfer case 261
11.4.5 Brakes 263
11.4.6 Cruise control 270
11.4.7 Tilt adjustment / driving level 273
11.4.8 Driving with trailer 277
11.4.9 Parking the mobile crane 279
11.5 Moving the fully rigged mobile crane on the construction site 280
11.5.2 Conditions for driving fully rigged mobile crane 281
11.5.3 Axle loads for driving fully rigged mobile crane on constructions sites 281
11.5.4 Overview 301
11.5.5 Driving fully rigged mobile crane, without load 301
11.5.6 Driving with load 302
12 Driving mode in winter 303

12.1 General safety instructions 303
12.2 Engine 303
12.2.1 Fuel 303
12.2.2 Engine oil 304
12.2.3 Coolant and anti-freeze 304
12.2.4 AdBlue in winter operation 304
12.3 Hydraulic system 304
12.4 Gearbox 307
12.5 Windshield washing system 307
12.6 Anti-skid chains 307
13 Special equipment 309

13.1 Carrier auxiliary heater 309
13.1.2 Operating the auxiliary heater 310
13.2 Spare wheel 311
13.3 Charging socket and jump start socket 312
13.4 Calix coolant preheating 313
13.5 Acoustic warning in the event of pressure drop in the braking system *) 316
14 Troubleshooting 317
14.1 General hints 317
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
14.2 Engine 317

14.3 Gearbox 318
14.4 Differential locks, axles and drive 318
14.5 Chassis hydraulic system - general 319
14.5.1 Suspension hydraulics 319
14.5.2 Inclination adjustment and leveling 320
6 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
14.5.3 Outrigger hydraulic system 320

14.6 Steering 320
14.6.1 Steering - mechanical part 320
14.6.2 Steering - hydraulic/electrical part 321
14.7 Braking system 321
14.8 Electrical system 322
14.9 Eddy-current brake*) 322
14.10 Centralized lubrication system 323
14.11 Auxiliary heater 323
15 Self-help 325
15.1 Charging batteries 325
15.1.2 Charging batteries with charger 326
15.1.3 Charging batteries through the charging socket *) 327
15.2 Starting/stopping the engine with the start/stop pushbutton 329
15.3 Start engine with external current 333
15.3.1 Starting the engine with help from jump leads 333
15.3.2 Starting the engine with help from jump start socket *) 336
15.4 Bleeding the fuel system 338
15.5 Filling the tyres 339
16 Emergency operation 343

16.2 Retracting/extending outriggers in case of failure of operating elements 343
16.3 Centring rear wheels if the electronic system fails 346
16.4 Switch cooling system ventilator on manually 349
17 Service and maintenance 355

17.1 Description of maintenance chart 355
17.3 Daily maintenance tasks 357
17.4 Recurring maintenance tasks 358
17.5 Preparing mobile crane for maintenance activities 366
17.5.1 Introduction 366
17.5.2 Raising telescopic boom 366
17.5.3 Opening/closing the maintenance hatches 366
17.6 Filling up fuel or AdBlue 371
17.7 Checking the fasteners 373
17.7.1 Checking folding plugs and spring clips 373
17.8 Checking carrier for leaks 375
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

17.8.2 Checking engine for leaks 376
17.8.3 Checking assemblies for leaks and condition 376
17.8.4 Checking gearbox for leaks 376
17.8.5 Checking hydraulic system for leaks 376
17.9 Engine and assemblies 377
ATF 220G-5 7
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
17.9.1 Engine 377

17.9.2 Engine cooling system 386
17.9.3 Air cleaner 394
17.9.4 Fuel system 400
17.9.5 Exhaust system 408
17.10 Drive train 409
17.10.2 Gearbox 409
17.10.3 Transfer case 412
17.10.4 Drive shafts 415
17.11 Axles and brakes 415
17.11.1 Axle drives 415
17.11.2 Wheel drives 421
17.11.3 Visual inspection and switching function test 424
17.11.4 Braking system 424
17.11.5 Test the compressed air system 427
17.11.6 Cleaning drain valves 428
17.11.7 Replacing air dryer cartridge 429
17.11.8 Engine brake and exhaust flaps 429
17.11.9 Test the pressure regulator 429
17.11.10 Inspect the protective caps, bushings and seals 429
17.11.11 Inspecting the diaphragm cylinder 429
17.11.12 Checking the ABS system *) 430
17.11.13 Steering 430
17.11.14 Checking the screws on axles, steering levers, push rods for tightness 430
17.11.15 Eddy-current brake *) 430
17.12 Hydraulic system 432
17.12.2 Checking the hydraulic oil level 434
17.12.3 Replacing filter cartridges 435
17.12.4 Changing hydraulic oil 435
17.12.5 Replacing filter element of the pressure filter 435
17.12.6 Checking hydraulic hoses 436
17.12.7 Replacing hydraulic hoses 436
17.12.8 Checking the hydraulic accumulator preloading pressure 436
17.12.9 Mixing, changing hydraulic oils 436
17.13.1 Checking the battery 436
17.13.2 Greasing the battery terminals 438
17.13.3 Checking the battery fluid level 438
17.13.4 Fuses 439
17.13.5 Relay 445
17.13.6 Bulbs and lamps 449
17.14 Breathers 450
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
17.14.3 Requirements 451

17.14.4 Installation location 452
17.14.5 Checking bleeder valve of axle drives 452
17.14.6 Checking braking system bleeder valves 453
17.14.7 Checking hydraulic oil tank bleeder valve 454
17.14.8 Checking fuel tank bleeder valve 454
17.14.9 Checking gearbox bleeder valve 455
8 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
17.14.10 Checking transfer case breathers 456

17.14.11 Checking the drive shaft intermediate bearing breather 456
17.15 Wheels and tyres 458
17.15.1 Service life of wheel rims 458
17.15.2 Checking wheels and tyres 458
17.15.3 Checking the wheel nuts 459
17.15.4 Retightening wheel nuts (axle load up to 13 t) 460
17.15.5 Retightening wheel nuts (axle load over 13 t) 461
17.15.6 Checking and adapting tyre pressure 462
17.15.7 Interchanging wheels in case of tire wear 463
17.15.8 Changing wheel module for air pressure display *) 465
17.15.9 Checking wheel tracking 465
17.15.10 Checking the toe-in 465
17.16 Outrigger 466
17.16.3 Overview 467
17.16.4 Checking and maintaining outrigger 467
17.16.5 Check and adjust the wear plates of the outrigger 467
17.16.6 Check and adjust the outrigger cylinder guide 468
17.16.7 Checking hoses and cables 468
17.17 Carrier cab 468
17.17.1 General information 468
17.17.2 Doors and flaps of carrier cab 469
17.17.3 Oil/lubricate joints, hinges and all moving parts 472
17.17.4 Windshield washer system 473
17.17.5 Air conditioning system 476
17.17.6 Heating 476
17.17.7 Rear area monitoring *) 477
17.17.8 Changing battery of ignition key 477
17.18 Trailer hitch *) 480
17.18.1 Maintaining trailer hitch 480
17.18.2 Inspecting the compressed air coupling heads 481
17.19 Oiling and lubricating 481
17.19.1 Oiling and lubricating 481
17.19.2 Lubricating joints, pins, hinges and all moving parts 481
17.19.3 Lubricating the steering knuckles 481
17.20.2 Overview of lubrication points 484
17.20.3 Checking fill level of reservoir 485
17.20.4 Inspect the lines and screw couplings for leaks and damage 485
17.21 Sliding coupling 486
17.21.1 Checking the sliding coupling for damage 486
17.22 Amot-Control (engine stop) *) 487
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
17.22.1 Valve function check 487

17.23 Suspension 489
17.23.1 Checking the bellows 489
18 Crane testing instructions 491

18.1 Periodic tests of cranes 491
ATF 220G-5 9
2019-10_EN
Table of contents
18.2 Checking the load-bearing steel structures 491
19 Removal from operation 493

19.1 Maintenance activities in the event of temporarily decommissioned mobile crane 493
19.1.1 Preparing mobile crane for temporary decommissioning 493
19.1.2 Monthly maintenance activities on temporarily decommissioned mobile crane 493
19.1.3 Putting mobile crane into operation after temporary decommissioning 494
20 Technical data 495

20.1 Filling levels 495
20.2 Dimensions and weight 497
20.3 Engine 498
20.4 Gearbox 498
20.5 Brakes 498
20.6 Wheels and tyres 499
20.7 Outrigger 499
20.9 Lubricants 499
21 Annex 501
21.1 Gearbox 501
21.2 Intarder 581
21.4 Heating, ventilation, air-conditioning of chassis cab 634
21.5 Modular tachograph 669
Glossary 822
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
10 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
1 Preface
1 Preface
1.1 Using the operating manual
Introduction
This operating manual should make it possible for the user to operate the mobile crane safely
and use its functions. It provides important information that is a prerequisite for safe operation.
Carrier (chassis) and superstructure have been separately explained.
Safety instructions
DANGER
Risk of accident due to incorrect use.
Incorrect use or maintenance of the mobile crane can lead to accidents.
This could cause fatal injuries to persons.
1. Operation and maintenance of the mobile crane may be carried out
only by qualified and trained experts.
2. Observe the notes in the operating manual during all activities.
Using the operating manual

The operating manual is primarily intended for the operator and the maintenance expert. The
operator and the maintenance personnel must be able to access it at all times. The operating
manual should thus be kept near the workplace of the operator, i.e. in the carrier or superstruc-
ture cab. The operating manual is a part of the mobile crane.
If you receive additional information from our after-sales service, make a note of it and keep it
with the operating manual.
Read the operating manual carefully before the commissioning of the mobile crane. Be well ac-
quainted with the content as well as the instruction signs and their meanings. You must also be
acquainted with the structure, function and the actuation direction of all operating elements be-
fore operating the mobile crane.
Scope of delivery
The documents of the mobile crane consist of the following parts:
▪ Operating manual of the superstructure.
▪ Operating manual of the carrier.
▪ Schemata, wiring diagrams.
▪ Operating manual of the engine.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Further operating manuals depending on the installed special equipments or options.

▪ Electronic data carrier with operating manuals, diagrams, load rating charts, and, if neces-
sary, the operating manual of the engine.
ATF 220G-5 11
2019-10_EN
1 Preface
Structure
The operating manual describes the delivered design as well as the special equipment, if any.
The Table of Contents helps you find the desired information. In addition, the header on every
page also contains the title of the relevant chapter.
The crane components, as well as the checking, switching and control devices within the cabs,
are mentioned on many pages of the operating manual. Overviews of the key crane compon-
ents for the crane operator (and references to further chapters with detailed information) are loc-
ated in the chapter Components. Overviews of the instrument panels, crane control levers / foot
pedals, as well as the software operating consoles are located in the chapters Components,
Operating elements, and AML crane control.
The images in the operating manual may deviate from the actual design. The functional inform-
ation is not affected by this.
Please follow the specifications in the additional pamphlets of the vehicle documentation.
This operating manual has been translated to the best of the knowledge and capacity of the
translator. Only the German version is definitive for the functional correctness.
The TADANO After-sales Service is at your disposal for answering any questions that you may
have. Please contact the Customer Service Department if you have any questions even after
reading through the operating manual. Put get all questions clarified before operating the mobile
crane.
The operating manual is not a work instruction for carrying out greater commissioning work. The
TADANO After-sales Service will explain this to you.
If the mobile crane is sold, give the operating manual to the new owner!
Definition of the direction specifications

Driving forwards means: Driving with the carrier cab facing forward.
Driving backwards means: Driving with the tail-lights of the carrier facing forward.
Forward, backward, right, left on the mobile crane means that the carrier cab and the boom
head point in the same direction. The front is then always the direction of the carrier cab.
Forward, backward, right, left in the carrier cab refers only to the carrier cab. The carrier cab is
then always forward.
Forward, backward, right, left in the superstructure cab refers only to the superstructure. For-
ward is then always the direction of the boom head.
Option
Options, special equipment and country-specific versions are marked with *).
Symbols and safety instructions

The following safety instructions are used in this operating manual.
DANGER
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Type and source of danger

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
12 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
1 Preface
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could res-
ult in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Tips and recommended actions
Provides information if adherence to specific instructions is important for

economical use of the mobile crane or in case of additional information
and tips about the use of the mobile crane.
1.2 Vehicle identification number, name plate

1
2
WFN5xxxxxxxxx
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Name plate 2 Chassis number
The following labels should be present on the mobile crane:

▪ Name plate, in the carrier cab, on the right-hand side, next to the passenger seat.
▪ Chassis number on the right side of the vehicle between the axles 2 and 3.
ATF 220G-5 13
2019-10_EN
1 Preface
1.3 In case of Damage
Introduction
In case of damage, contact the nearest TADANO workshop or TADANO dealer.
Specify the following:
▪ Chassis number or serial number
▪ Type and scope of damage.
1.4 Warranty
Introduction
Observe the stipulated guarantee provisions.
The type and manner of use of the mobile crane must be completely in accordance with the
specifications in the operating manual.
The mobile crane may be modified only after a written approval of the manufacturer.
In case of non-adherence, the warranty of the mobile crane becomes invalid. We assume no li-
ability for damage resulting from non-adherence to the operating manual and the instructions
contained therein, or due to improper use of the mobile crane. The operating manual does not
specify our sales and delivery conditions.
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Loss of guarantee
If parts installed in the company are removed, changed or replaced with
non-original parts, the crane authorization as well as the manufacturer's
guarantee expires.
1. Do not dismantle original parts!
2. Do not modify original parts!
3. Use only original parts from TADANO.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
14 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
2 General safety instructions
2.1 Basic Safety Information
2.1.1 Use of the Mobile Crane
Introduction
This mobile crane has been built in accordance with the latest technology and approved safety
regulations. Nevertheless, danger to life and limb and damage to property may occur during its
use. It is therefore necessary to pay attention to the manual to reduce these risks.
It is only permitted to operate the mobile crane when it is technically in sound condition and in
accordance with its regulations. Problems or faults which affect the safety of the mobile crane
must be rectified immediately. Please contact TADANO After-sales Service if you have any
questions.
All specifications and descriptions in the manual assume that the mobile crane is being oper-
ated and used as described in the chapter Proper use.
Safety instructions
DANGER
Improper use of the mobile crane!
Improper use causes danger to life and limb.
1. Read and understand the manual.
2. Only trained, qualified personnel may operate the mobile crane.
Proper Use
Introduction
Proper use of the mobile crane consists exclusively of the lifting and lowering of unfixed loads.
To do this, the weight and center of gravity of the load must be known. The weight of the load
may not exceed the lifting capacity of the mobile crane.
A bottom block or hook tackle, in either case approved by TADANO, must be reeved to the
hoisting rope. The bottom block must be centered over the center of gravity of the load before
lifting. It may only be operated in the permissible setup conditions.
The mobile crane may only be moved if this is permitted according to the available moving and
lifting capacity charts. The setup conditions and specifications given in the operating instructions
must be adhered to.
With its standard equipment, the mobile crane may only be operated at a temperature range
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
from -25 °C to +40 °C ambient temperature.

Any other use is classified as improper.
The manufacturer bears no liability for damage resulting from improper use of the mobile crane.
The responsibility for this is exclusively that of the director of operations and the crane operator.
ATF 220G-5 15
2019-10_EN
Improper Use
Introduction
Incorrect use includes:
▪ using equipment parts not approved for the mobile crane,
▪ using load rating charts which do not correspond to the actual setup condition,
▪ working in slewing ranges and jib lengths which are not permitted according to the load rat-
ing charts,
▪ working with setup conditions which are not permitted according to the load rating charts,
▪ by-passing safety devices e.g. anti-two-block device,
▪ increasing the jib length of the lifted load after an automatic safe load indicator shut-off,
▪ pushing, pressing or lifting loads with the outrigger beams, the outrigger floats, or the level-
ling,
▪ sliding, pushing or lifting loads with the luffing or the slewing gear,
▪ using the mobile crane to break off fixed objects,
▪ using the mobile crane for handling operations,
▪ loading or unloading the mobile crane suddenly (use with chutes, containers or claws),
▪ using the mobile crane for work in which the swinging load alters in weight, e.g. filling a con-
crete container, containers or chutes,
▪ using the mobile crane to transport flammable or other hazardous materials,
▪ using the mobile crane to catch falling objects or parts,
▪ using the mobile crane for bungee jumping,
▪ driving the mobile crane in an unsuitable condition,
▪ driving on public roads when the equipment is not in a permitted state (dimensions, axle
loads),
The mobile crane may not be used for:
▪ rigging loads whose centers of gravity and weights are unknown and which are then re-
leased, e.g. by dismounting, separating,
▪ working without the necessary additional equipment, e.g. two hook block operation,
▪ transporting loads on the carrier,
▪ carrying persons outside the carrier cab,
▪ carrying persons in the superstructure cab while driving,
▪ carrying persons on the load or the load lifting device,
▪ carrying persons in workman's baskets without written authorization from the responsible au-
thorities. National regulations of the area of use must also be observed.
2.1.2 Personnel Requirements

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Introduction
General and type-specific driver and after-sales service training courses are carried out at
TADANO Ltd..
Persons who are still undergoing training may only work on the mobile crane under the supervi-
sion of qualified members of staff.
16 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to untrained handling of the mobile crane.
Improper operation or maintenance of the mobile crane can lead to acci-
dents.
This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Have the operation, maintenance, and repair only carried out by quali-
fied professionals that a are trained on the mobile crane.
2. Read and understand the operating manual.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate work clothes.
Loose clothing can get caught in rotating parts. Body parts may get
crushed or torn. Loose clothing can get caught on to protruding vehicle
parts. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Wear tight-fitting clothes.
2. Tie up long hair and protect them with a hair net.
3. Use personal protective gear.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to influence of alcohol, drugs and medicines.
The maintenance personnel and the operating personnel must not be un-
der the influence of alcohol, drugs, or any medication, and must not be
overtired. In such a case, the risks cannot longer be assessed clearly.
This may result in accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Operation or maintenance activities must only be carried out by
healthy individuals.
WARNING
Risk of falling due to unsafe or defective ladders.
When climbing and stepping on ladders, take utmost care especially in
case of humid weather. There is risk of slipping and risk of falling. This
could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Keep ladders clean at all times.
2. Wear sturdy, non-slip footwear.
3. Always hold the ladder beams or handles while climbing up or down.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
4. Replace faulty ladders immediately.

5. Ensure that the ladders are safe.
ATF 220G-5 17
2019-10_EN
Crane Operators
Introduction
Only trained and authorized personnel may work with the mobile crane.
The crane operator must be able to recognize hazards to themselves and others, and to prevent
them adopting suitable measures.
The crane operator must fulfil the following requirements:
▪ He must hold the permission to drive and operate the mobile crane required in the country of
use.
▪ He must hold comprehensive knowledge of handling mobile cranes as well as the qualifica-
tions prescribed in the country of use.
▪ He must possess the intellectual and physical requirements to be able to independently op-
erate a mobile crane.
▪ He must be trained in the intended use of the mobile crane.
▪ He must hold the knowledge and understanding of the operating manual for the mobile
crane.
▪ He must hold the knowledge and understanding of the relevant accident prevention regula-
tions.
▪ He must hold knowledge of the emergency equipment of the mobile crane and be able to ap-
ply it.
Only those persons who have been briefed and are aware of the valid accident prevention regu-
lations may engage in the rigging of loads and signaling to the crane operator.
Maintenance personnel
Introduction
Maintenance activities on the mobile crane must only be carried out by qualified, trained profes-
sionals, which hold the appropriate training and experience in the fields of electrical, electronic,
hydraulic , and pneumatic systems.
The maintenance personnel must possess the intellectual and physical requirements for the
activities.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Skilled Repair Technicians
Introduction
Only qualified and trained, expert personnel may carry out repairs on the mobile crane. These
are, for example, trained specialists from the fields of mechatronics or the automotive trade.
18 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Only personnel from a specialist brakes workshop or with equivalent qualifications may carry out
work on the brakes and compressed air system.
National regulations which differ from the above regulations should be observed.
Personal Protective Equipment
Introduction
Observe the accident prevention regulations of the country of use.
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of falling of unsecured personnel.
If the personnel is not adequately secured during mounting and mainten-
ance activities, this may lead to accidents. This may result in fatal or seri-
ous injury.
1. Secure personnel against falling during mounting and maintenance
activities on the mobile crane with suitable aids, e.g. auxiliary crane,
lifting platform, scaffolding or ladders.
2. Use the provided handrail and ladders.
3. Wear personal protective gear.
4. Use safety harnesses if required.
2.1.3 Planning Use
Introduction
The national legislation and regulations applicable at the place of use must be observed.
Smooth operation requires careful planning of use.
The operator must have all the required specifications and documents before going to the in-
stallation location.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 19
2019-10_EN
Safety instructions
WARNING
Missing information on use!
A lack of information may make the planned work at the site of use unfeas-
ible and may force the crane operator to improvise.
1. Work with the crane may only be carried out when all documents/spe-
cifications are complete and correct.
When going to the installation location

▪ an exact route plan,
▪ a plan to the place of use for the vehicle with regard to its length, width and height as well as
its total weight, taking into accounting bridge loads, access heights and the width of streets,
▪ if necessary request police escort and obtain approval from the authorities,
▪ the necessary driving and special approvals,
▪ observe the paragraphs of the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations and the Highway Code
(observe the regulations valid in the area of use),
▪ permissible axle loads and total weight for the journey.
When carrying out the planned work

▪ a precise schedule,
▪ the type of planned crane use,
▪ weight and size of the load to be lifted,
▪ required jib length and lifting height,
▪ load bearing capacity of the ground at the site of the mobile crane (channels, water and gas
pipes, underground channels or cavities);
▪ space and possible limitations at the site of the mobile crane,
▪ overhead electric lines and their voltage,
▪ more personnel for instructing or for loading/equipping work,
▪ communication procedure, contact addresses, emergency addresses,
▪ any authorization from the authorities.
Required crane equipment

Because of the existing specifications, the necessary crane equipment must be assembled to
carry out the planned use:
▪ hook tackle or hook blocks,
▪ jibs,
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ counterweights,
▪ slinging ropes, chain suspension, cross beams and similar aids,
▪ support base plates,
▪ additional transport vehicle.
20 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Choice of Site
Introduction
A basic prerequisite for working safely with a mobile crane is that it is used on ground which can
bear sufficient load.
Safety instructions
WARNING
Weak ground!
Wear ground implies risk of tipping and thus risk of accidents.
1. Only position and operate the mobile crane on ground which can bear
sufficient load.
2. Thus, place outrigger plates underneath.
Choice of Site
When selecting the site, it should be ensured that
▪ the available ground conditions can withstand the resulting strain,
▪ the outriggers can be extended in accordance with the value specified in the load rating
chart,
▪ the work can be carried out with as small a jib length as possible,
▪ there are no obstacles in the slewing range of the superstructure.
Permissible Ground Pressure
Introduction
When the mobile crane is supported, the outrigger cylinders transmit the forces to the ground.
The maximum force can reach almost the weight of the mobile crane including the load. These
forces are sent directly into the ground via the surfaces of the outrigger floats. If these surfaces
are insufficient, the ground must be appropriately supported.
The maximum reaction forces which can occur with 360° slewing of the load are specified in the
reaction force tables.
Safety instructions
WARNING
Tipping of the mobile crane due to unstable support!
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
In case of an unstable support, there is a risk of tipping and thus a risk of

accidents.
1. Only use stable materials to support the crane, such as adequate
wooden planks.
2. The support must be situated centrally underneath the outrigger floats
so that the distribution of pressure is equal.
ATF 220G-5 21
2019-10_EN
Calculating the support area

The minimum support area required may be calculated from the reaction force of the mobile
crane (refer to reaction force chart) divided by the permissible load bearing capability of the
ground.
supporting force
required support area = permissible load bearing capability of ground
On no account may the support area be smaller than the required area calculated.
If the load bearing capability of the ground is unknown, its strength must be determined with ap-
propriate tests, for example with a penetrometer.
Permissible ground pressure (extract from DIN 1054)

Type of ground daN/cm2
Backfilled ground, not artificially compressed: 0-1
Natural, obviously untouched ground:
Mud, peat, moor earth 0
Fine to medium sand 1.5
Coarse sand to gravel 2.0
Cohesive soils:
mushy 0
soft 0.4
firm 1.0
semi-solid 2.0
hard 4.0
Rock with minimal jointing in good, unweathered condition and favourable strati-
fication:
in closed sequence of strata 15
in bulky and columnar formation 30
Artificially compressed ground:
Asphalt 5 - 15
Concrete B I 50 - 250
Concrete B II 350 - 550
Slopes and depressions
Introduction
When choosing the site to position the mobile crane, it must be ensured that the mobile crane
does not stand too close to ditches, slopes or trenches.
A safe distance between the outriggers and the edge of the trench must be maintained, accord-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ing to the type of ground.

The safe distance is measured from the edge of the trench.
Subsurface Safe distance
Firm, natural, non-grainy soil (∝ ≥ 45°) 1 times depth of depression (A = 1 x T)
Grainy, soft or backfilled soil (∝ ≤ 30°) 2 times depth of depression (A = 2 x T)
22 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Safety instructions
WARNING
Vehicle tips over!
The edge of the slope or trench could cave in under the resulting stress
and cause the mobile crane to turn over.
1. A safe distance must be maintained between the mobile crane and the
edge of the trench.
2. Support slope or trench.
Overview
T Depth of depression A Safe distance α Gradient

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 23
2019-10_EN
Counterweight
Safety instructions
WARNING
Danger to life from falling counterweights.
In case of technical defects, counterweights may come loose and fall. Per-
sons staying underneath the counterweights may get seriously or fatally in-
jured.
1. Do not stay underneath counterweights.
2. Make sure that no persons are staying underneath the counterweights.
2.1.4 Ramming or pulling out posts or sheet piles
Introduction
When ramming or pulling out posts or sheet piles with the mobile crane, vibrations can be trans-
ferred to the load-bearing steel structure of the mobile crane. These vibrations can lead to pre-
mature fatigue of the material and, thus, to cracks in the load-bearing steel structure.
Vibratory equipments that, due to their design, do not transfer any vibrations to the mobile crane
can be attached directly to the mobile crane. Otherwise, an additional device shall be attached
as damping element.
The national legislation and regulations applicable at the place of use shall be complied with.
Measures
Vibratory ramming or pulling out of posts and sheet piles with the mobile crane is permissible on
the following conditions:
▪ The automatic safe load indicator may not be overridden.
▪ The ramming equipment shall only be attached to the mobile crane via the wire rope and the
hook block. Any contact of the ramming equipment to other parts of the mobile crane is not
permissible.
▪ The posts and sheet piles to be driven in shall be adequately secured against tipping over.
▪ The ramming equipment may not start vibrating before the entire weight load of the post or of
the sheet pile is on the ground.
▪ While pulling the ramming equipment away from the driven-in post or sheet pile, the hook
block shall be positioned vertically above the attachment point.
▪ While pulling out, it must be avoided that the post or the sheet pile come out of the ground
with a jerk.
▪ As soon as the post or the sheet pile come out of the ground, the vibration of the ramming
equipment shall be stopped to prevent vibrations from being transferred to the mobile crane.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ After finishing any ramming tasks, the load-bearing parts of the mobile crane shall be
checked for cracks and loose parts.
Before the mobile crane is used again for normal lifting tasks, a thorough inspection of the
mobile crane shall be performed, refer to chapter Crane testing instructions in the operating
manual.
24 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
▪ The frequency and scope of the checks for wear and signs of fatigue shall be adapted cor-
respondingly.
▪ The instructions and restrictions of the ramming equipment's manufacturer shall be complied
with.
2.1.5 Outrigger
Introduction
All outrigger beams must be extended on the outrigger base in accordance with the selected
load rating chart.
All outrigger floats must hold. All wheels shall have a distance of at least 5 cm to the ground.
The mobile crane must be levelled after extending the outrigger beams and the outrigger floats.
Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of the mobile crane tipping due to abrupt unloading!
If the wire rope tears or the load falls while it is being lifted, the mobile
crane is unloaded abruptly. In this case, if the non-load side outriggers are
not extended, the sudden unloading of the crane can cause it to overturn
backwards.
1. All outrigger beams that are on the load side and non-load side always
support according to the outrigger extensions in the load rating charts.
2. Insert all locking pins completely into the outrigger beams.
WARNING
Risk of accidents when extending the outriggers.
If the operator cannot see the outrigger area, people who are present in
this area may get injured.
1. Evacuate people from the outrigger area of outriggers.
2. Only extend and retract outriggers if the operator or another person
can see the outrigger area for the duration of the outrigger process.
Aligning the Mobile Crane
Introduction
It is of great importance for safe operation that, as well as the correct and stable support of all
outrigger floats, the mobile crane is also evenly aligned.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 25
2019-10_EN
Safety instructions
DANGER
Tilted position causes danger that the mobile crane will tip over!
If the boom is slewed towards the slope on a mobile crane which is not
evenly aligned, there is an increase in the jib length which can cause the
mobile crane to tip over.
1. Align the mobile crane horizontally.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
26 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Overview
Example:
Boom length: 60 m
Inclination: 5°
Jib length (a) increases by approx. 5 m.
2.1.6 Service and Maintenance

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Introduction
The maintenance personnel must be able to recognize hazards to themselves and others, and
to prevent them adopting suitable measures. Refer also to chapter "Service and maintenance".
Causes of damage from maintenance errors:
ATF 220G-5 27
2019-10_EN
▪ lack of oil, grease, coolant or de-icing fluid in the various units,

▪ use of impermissible lubricants,
▪ water in the compressed air system,
▪ filter in the air dryer not changed on time,
▪ damage to the plastic tubing of compressed air and central lubrication system from drilling or
welding, e.g. plastic tubing not covered or removed,
▪ sudden loss of pressure in the tyres due to tyre damage which has not been rectified,
▪ tightening torques of the nuts or screws not observed, e.g. when changing wheel or other in-
stallation work,
▪ units not functional e.g. brakes or steering, because of inadequate maintenance,
▪ faults on the brake and compressed air system, e.g. worn hoses,
▪ insufficient visual inspections carried out on steel construction, welded parts and parts sub-
ject to heavy loads,
▪ faults on the hydraulic system, e.g. worn hoses,
▪ worn ropes which need to be replaced and could break suddenly,
▪ faulty or insufficiently functional safety devices, e.g. automatic safe load indicator or anti-two-
block device/limit switch of the hoisting winch.
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accident due to impermissible commissioning.
If the vehicle is operated during maintenance and inspection, there are
risks of accidents and damage to the vehicle.
1. Do not operate the mobile crane during maintenance and inspection
work.
2. Secure the danger zone and do not allow unauthorized persons.
3. Indicate the maintenance work on the mobile crane using appropriate
warning tags, e.g. on doors, on the steering wheel, on the control
lever.
WARNING
Danger of accidents from incorrect maintenance.
A significant proportion of cases of damage on/with mobile cranes is
caused by the lack of and/or incorrect maintenance of the mobile crane.
1. Maintenance work may only be carried out by trained personnel in ac-
cordance with the maintenance plan.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
28 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
CAUTION
Improper disposal or lubricants, consumables and cleaning agents
can cause environmental damage.
Lubricants, consumables and cleaning agents must be treated as hazard-
ous waste. Lubricants, consumables and cleaning agents must not enter
the ground, water, sewage system or ground water.
1. Do not allow lubricants, consumables and cleaning agents to run off
uncontrolled.
2. Dispose of lubricants, consumables and cleaning agents properly. Fol-
low the national regulations.
2.1.7 Welding and alignment work
Measures in the event of damage on the steel structure
Introduction
Consult a crane expert if damage (e.g. cracks, distortions) are detected on the mobile crane.
Consult the crane manufacturer after investigating the fault.
The repair method should then be decided on in consultation between the crane manufacturer
and the expert.
Safety instructions
WARNING
Improperly carried out welding or alignment work!
If welding, heat treatments or alignment work is carried out improperly,
loss of material properties must be expected.
Measures to protect electronic parts during welding
Introduction
If it is necessary to carry out welding on the mobile crane, the following steps must be carried
out before beginning work to protect the electronic control units:
▪ Switch off battery main switch (on the superstructure as well, if present),
▪ Remove the battery cable at the negative pole, then remove the battery cable at the positive
pole and connect them with each other (on the superstructure as well, if present),
▪ Pull out plugs of electronic parts.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 29
2019-10_EN
Safety instructions
NOTICE
High current during welding!
The flow of current can cause damage to loose connections during weld-
ing, e.g. tooth flanks, bearings, spline ends, shafts, the electronics, the
automatic safe load indicator, etc.
1. When electrowelding, the ground terminal of the welding machine must
be connected directly to the part to be welded.
2. Welding regulations must be observed.
2.1.8 Painting work
Introduction
The following components must be covered prior to painting work and uncovered again after
painting:
▪ Breather and ventilation valves.
▪ Contact surfaces between rims and wheel hubs.
▪ Contact surfaces between wheel nuts and rims.
▪ Running areas and sliding surfaces of piston rods.
▪ Sliding surfaces and fits.
▪ Hoses.
▪ Glass panes.
▪ Hinges.
▪ Moving parts.
▪ Guide rollers.
▪ Lighting devices.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
30 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
2.1.9 Risk of fire and explosion
Safety instructions
DANGER
Risk of fire and explosion!
Non-compliance with the following items may lead to burns or life-threaten-
ing injuries.
➢ The mobile crane must not be used in areas with a risk of explosion.
➢ It is prohibited to smoke and use open flames when working with fuels
or operating materials while performing maintenance tasks on the bat-
teries.
➢ Fire or open flames are forbidden on the mobile crane.
➢ The mobile crane must be refueled only when the engine is switched
off and in outdoor or well ventilated areas.
1. Follow the accident prevention regulations.
2. Wipe off spilled fuel or oil immediately using suitable tools (e.g. oil
binders).
3. Replace insulation or sound insulation mats which have become con-
taminated with fuel, oil or grease with new, clean insulation mats. Con-
taminated insulation mats near hot surfaces present a serious fire risk.
4. Do not use flammable solvents.
5. Keep flammable objects such as dry leaves or paper waste away from
the engine.
6. Only carry out maintenance on units which have cooled down, other-
wise there is a danger of burns.
7. During grinding and welding, ensure that dangerous objects and ma-
terials are located at a safe distance.
2.1.10 Different lengths of the hydraulic cylinders
Introduction
The hydraulic oil heats up while the crane is being used.
Temperature variations alter the oil volume in the hydraulic cylinders, e.g. luffing cylinders or
outrigger cylinders. This can lead to differences in length of the cylinders and has a particular
impact after long periods of operation. The difference in length can be determined using the dia-
gram below.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Example:
An hydraulic cylinder with 6.5 m stroke alters its length by approx. 24 cm with a 50 °C difference
in the hydraulic oil temperature.
ATF 220G-5 31
2019-10_EN
Safety instructions
WARNING
Extending/retracting of hydraulic cylinders due to temperature differ-
ences!
Temperature variations alter the oil volume of the hydraulic oil. This can
lead to variations in the length of the hydraulic cylinders.
The mobile crane can therefore become unstable.
This may result in accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries to
persons.
1. Check the condition of the hydraulic cylinders if temperatures fluctuate
or after long periods of operation.
Overview
t= Temperature difference
s= Length difference
s= Total stroke
2.1.11 Dismounting and disposal
Introduction
Dispose of operating materials, lubricants and auxiliary materials in an environment-friendly
manner.
Separate the components of the mobile crane as per their reuse value and feed them into the
recycling loop.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Scrap the remaining metallic components.

▪ Give plastic parts for recycling.
▪ Sort the remaining components as per their material composition and dispose them appropri-
ately.
Follow the legal regulations applicable in the country of application for proper and environment-
friendly disposal.
32 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
2.2 Basic information concerning safety in the carrier
2.2.1 Warning and instruction signs
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 33
2019-10_EN
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
34 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Warning and instruction signs
1 2 3
A
D
B
C E
Check wheel nuts.
Initially after 50 km, then after
Multiple warning sign: Release spring-loaded accu-
100 km and again after a fur-
ther 200 km. A = Do not remain in the car- mulator cylinder.
rier cab during crane opera-
tion.
B = Do not remain under or on
the mobile crane while it is be-
ing lowered.
C = Only lower the mobile
crane when engine is running.
D = Caution when engaging
the differential locks.
E = Observe the operating
manual.
4 9 19
The braking system is supplied

Name plate. with plastic tubing. Caution
when drilling, welding and
grinding. No contact with
acids. Temperature-resistant
from -40 °C to +100 °C.
Parking brake.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 35
2019-10_EN
35 37 43
Tyre pressure.
No access to unauthorised
persons.
Engage parking brake before

leaving the carrier cab.
44 45 46
8.3 m width of outrigger exten- 5.6 m width of outrigger exten-

sion. sion.
Outrigger width identification.

47 *) 48 *) 49
7.0 m width of outrigger exten- 4.6 m width of outrigger exten- 2.7 m width of outrigger exten-
sion. sion. sion.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
36 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
52 53 54
Fastening eye.
Protect against direct splash Fastening strap.
water.
70 71 85
AdBlue.
Maximum load 100 kg.

86 88 89
24 V socket. 12 V socket.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Maximum load 50 kg.
ATF 220G-5 37
2019-10_EN
90 100 600
Engine instruction sign

Coolant.
Oil level.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
38 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Additional warning and instruction signs for Great Britain

Overview
Warning and instruction signs

300 *) 400 *) 401 *)
Maximum vehicle height STGO category B. STGO category C.

403 *)
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
STGO.
ATF 220G-5 39
2019-10_EN
Additional warning and instruction signs for Italy
500 *)
Maximum driving speed
Ensure legibility of the warning and instruction signs

All warning and instruction signs put up on the mobile crane describe important safety precau-
tions. Note that the warning and instruction signs must always be clean and completely legible.
Reorder and fit damaged or missing signs via TADANO customer service or TADANO dealers.
2.2.2 Before driving
WARNING
Risk of accident!
The mobile crane must be in a sound technical condition during its entire
period of use. Improper components can fail and cause accidents.
➢ If defects or irregularities are identified, the travel should not be star-

ted.
1. Always check the mobile crane before beginning to drive and rectify
any faults identified.
The condition of the mobile crane should be checked before the travel, see part B "Before
travel".
It must be checked that:
▪ all covers are present and closed,
▪ all safety devices are present, correctly installed and in good condition,
▪ wheels and tires do not display any visual defects,
▪ the anemometer is not installed,
▪ the bottom block/hook tackle is attached properly,
▪ Windows, mirrors, lamps and lights are clean and a good view in all directions is ensured,
▪ there are no persons or objects under or near the mobile crane,
▪ The seat and the steering wheel should be adjusted such that the pedals are correctly actu-
ated and the steering wheel can be easily operated,
▪ the driver and the passenger have put on the seat belt,
▪ there are no loose objects in the leg space on the driver side that can slide under the accel-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
erators during the travel.

Before starting the engine:
▪ check the control and operating elements as described in part B "Commissioning" and
▪ sound the horn to warn persons who are in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Pay attention to all control elements and lights after starting the engine.
40 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
2.2.3 Initial Operation and Running-in

The mobile crane can be fully used and loaded from the start. However, it is recommended to
pay close attention to checking and display instruments during the first operating hours.
Running in the Brake Lining

New brake linings need to be worn in, i.e. activated so that they achieve the full braking effect.
WARNING
Overheating of the wheel brakes!
Violent braking at high speeds or repeated continuous braking can lead to
loss of brake power or increased braking distance.
1. Avoid repeated violent braking at high speeds.
2. Do not brake for long periods of time.
3. Use interval braking to activate the linings.
2.2.4 Driving mode
Requirements for Driving Operation
WARNING
Slewing or sheering crane parts!
If the mobile crane is not in the proper transport condition, there is a risk of
accident due to swiveling or protruding mobile crane parts.
1. Establish the transport condition. Follow the following points.
When driving on public roads, observe the following:

▪ The superstructure must be turned in the direction of travel, mechanically secured so that it
cannot turn and the slewing brake must be engaged.
▪ The telescopic boom must be driven in the position specified in the vehicle approval and
mechanically secured there so that it cannot move out of place.
▪ Any special equipment present (e.g. boom extension, hook blocks) must be fixed securely to
the appropriate places in accordance with the specifications in the operating instructions. If
this leads to the permissible axle loads being exceeded, they must be removed and trans-
ported separately, e.g. counterweights.
▪ The outriggers must be completely retracted and the support beams mechanically secured.
▪ The support plates must be inserted and mechanically secured in the transport position, or
removed and transported separately if this is stated in the vehicle documents.
▪ The axle suspension system may not be blocked when driving on the road. The suspension
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
system must be brought to the level for the traveling configuration "On-road travel", in ac-
cordance with the operating instructions.
▪ The "On-road travel" steering program must be activated.
▪ The differential locks must be deactivated.
▪ No one may stay in the crane cab.
▪ Work lights, if present, must be turned off.
ATF 220G-5 41
2019-10_EN
The vehicle certificate specifies which setup conditions maintain the permissible axle loads and
total weight. These setup conditions may not be altered by the addition or removal of parts.
Additional loads can lead to the axle load being exceeded.
The specifications in the operating instructions for driving on public roads must be adhered to.
At least 2-4 chocks (depending on vehicle type), at least two warning triangles and 2 portable
warning lights must be carried.
Notes to driving mode

Much damage to mobile cranes is caused by user error.
A decisive factor in the avoidance of accidents is therefore the thorough training of the crane
operator in the operation and use of the mobile crane.
The crane operator must be able to recognize risks to themselves and others and to implement
suitable measures to avoid these risks.
Regulate for the safe travel mode:
1. Adapt the manner of driving and speed to the travel and road conditions.
2. Keep a sufficient distance from the preceding vehicles and apply brakes early.
3. Avoid sudden acceleration, braking or fast steering movements.
4. Use a signal person when working at invisible places such as curves or narrow passages
as well as at blind sight corners.
5. Pay attention to access heights and widths such as bridges, overpasses, tunnels, roofs,
electrical free lines, etc. Vehicle dimensions must be known to the crane operator
6. Avoid excessive use of the service brake. The brakes can overheat and fail. Downshift the
gear in time and use the engine brake when driving over steep stretches for a long time.
7. If the engine stops during traveling, immediately stop the mobile crane at a safe place. A
pressure drop in the operating system leads to a brake failure.
WARNING
Breakdowns when driving!
Broken down vehicles are threats to the traffic coming from behind, espe-
cially at night and at unclear places.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and stop the mobile crane at a
safe place.
2. Secure the mobile crane against inadvertent rolling.
3. If required, put up a warning triangle and a warning light to warn the
traffic coming from behind.
Causes of damage in driving operation

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ engine and/or gears overwound when skidding,

▪ differential locks not switched off when driving on the road,
▪ parking brake not engaged when parked, no additional chocks used when parked on slopes,
▪ loose objects left lying on the mobile crane,
▪ collisions with bridges, roofs due to low access height,
42 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
▪ exceeding the permissible axle loads/the total weight (observe regulations valid in place of
use),
▪ driving at excessive speed.
WARNING
Increased Braking Distance!
Driving with impermissible axle loads, impermissible total weight, or in-
creased speed leads to an increase in the braking distance. The entire
braking system thus no longer corresponds to legal regulations.
1. Permissible axle loads and total weight may not be exceeded.
Tyres capacities as a function of the travel speed
Description
On the subject of axle loads, there is a difference between technically permissible axle loads
and legally prescribed axle loads of the licensing country. In the countries of the European
Union, axle loads of over 12 t are not permitted on public roads, in accordance with EU regula-
tions.
General
Pay attention to the following when driving with axle loads in excess of 12 t:
▪ The braking distance can be increased significantly.
▪ Increased wear, particularly on the brake linings.
▪ Wheel nuts must be checked to make sure that they are tight and tightened in accordance
with the maintenance plan.
The wheel rims used have a limited service life, in accordance with their technical specifications.
Since the wheel rims represent an important safety component in the mobile crane, they
must be regularly checked and documented.
A service life of the wheel rim of the mobile crane of approx. 80,000 – 100,000 km can be as-
sumed with normal use.
Large, spasmodic stresses or driving with excessive axle loads, more than the constructional
guidelines, can lead to a reduction in the specified service life.
The wheel rims should therefore be inspected regularly, depending on the conditions of use of
the vehicle, and checks for cracks carried out on the critical areas e.g. welding seam between
disc and rim. Any cracks which may be present may not be repaired by welding.
Relation between the permissible axle loads and the maximum speed
NOTICE
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Tyre failure due to overload.

The 445/95 R 25 177F tyres from Dunlop or Yokohama can be over-
loaded. This may lead to tyre failures.
1. When using 445/95 R 25 177F tyres from Dunlop or Yokohama, do not
cover greater distances than 75 km in one hour.
ATF 220G-5 43
2019-10_EN
The vehicle operator may only use wheel rims which are approved by the
mobile crane manufacturer.
Tyre size Max. speed [km/

h]
385/95 385/95 445/95 445/95 525/80 525/80
R25 R25 R25 R25 R25 R25
170F 170E 174F 177E 176F 179E
Max. permissible axle load [t]
11.6 — 13.0 — 13.8 11.8 85
12.0 9.9 13.4 12.0 14.2 12.7 80
12.6 12.0 14.1 14.5 14.9 15.5 70
13.2 13.3 14.7 15.0 15.6 17.4 60
13.4 14.0 15.0 15.5 15.9 18.3 50
2.2.5 Notes and Regulations on the Installed Pressure Tanks

The installed pressure tanks comply with EEC (EU) directive 87/404/EEC and are exclusively
approved for compressed air braking systems.
Checking the pressure tanks!

National regulations should be observed.
The pressure tanks are subject to tests in accordance with the maintenance regulations of state
legislation.
Check and drain the pressure tanks periodically of any accumulated water., refer to Testing
function of air dryer [} page 424].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
44 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
2.2.6 Stopping the Mobile Crane
Safety instructions
DANGER
The mobile crane can roll away out of control.
So that the wheel chocks have sufficient hold, the mobile crane may only
be parked on a surface with a sufficient load-bearing capacity.
Fatal accidents can result if the following points are not obeyed.
➢ The uphill or downhill gradient must not exceed 18 %, without trailer.
➢ The uphill or downhill gradient must not exceed 12 % if the mobile

crane is parked with a trailer.
1. Engage the parking brake.
2. Secure the mobile crane with wheel chocks.
DANGER
The mobile crane can roll away out of control!
If the mobile crane's wheels are not secured with wheel chocks directly on
the side facing downhill, the mobile crane can roll away out of control and
kill people.
1. Place wheel chocks tightly under the wheels on the side facing down-
hill so that the mobile crane remains in its parked position.
2. Select a firm parking surface so that the wheel chocks cannot sink into
the ground.
Requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled:
▪ The mobile crane must be on a stable surface.
▪ The parking brake is engaged.
▪ In the case of mobile cranes with trailers, the retention force of the entire combination is
checked and ensured via the test position of the hand brake valve.
In addition to the parking brake being applied, the mobile crane must also be secured with the
specified number of wheel chocks when:
▪ The mobile crane is parked on an uphill or downhill gradient
▪ The mobile crane is parked unsupervised
▪ The mobile crane is defective, particularly in the case of parking brake system defects.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Securing the mobile crane against unauthorized use

1. Switch off engine.
2. Remove the ignition key and put it in a safe place.
3. Switch off the battery main switch.
4. Make sure that there is nobody in the carrier cab or the superstructure cab.
ATF 220G-5 45
2019-10_EN
5. Lock carrier cab and superstructure cab.
2.2.7 Towing
It is only permitted to tow the mobile crane when it can no longer be moved out of a dangerous
area with its own power. Additional measures must be taken to tow the vehicle for longer dis-
tances.
DANGER
Risk of accidents due to brakes that are not working.
The supply pressure in the braking system must be at least 8 bar during
towing for the brakes to function sufficiently.
The engine must be running to build up sufficient brake pressure.
1. If the engine does not run, load mobile crane.
CAUTION
Damage to the vehicle frame in the case of incorrect towing.
The slide coupling is intended for towing the mobile crane. If the traction
force is too strong, cracks may occur on the vehicle frame.
1. Fasten the towbar at the sliding coupling.
2. Max. towing load: 30.0 t.
3. Avoid jerky and sudden movements.
The towing vehicle must be adequately dimensioned and equipped with an appropriate towing
hitch.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
46 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
3 Safety equipment
3 Safety equipment
3.1 Safety equipment of the mobile crane
Safety instructions
WARNING
Non-functioning safety devices!
Non-functioning safety devices may cause accidents.
1. Check the safety devices described below for their flawless functioning
before starting work.
Safety equipment of the mobile crane

The mobile crane is equipped with the following safety devices:
▪ Emergency stop of carrier engine *) [} page 47].
▪ Amot Control (engine stop) *) [} page 48].
▪ Wheel chocks [} page 49].
▪ Emergency hammer [} page 51].
3.2 Emergency stop of carrier engine *)
Overview
1 Emergency stop switch

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
The two Emergency stop switches are located on the left-hand and right-hand side of the carrier
cab, respectively.
ATF 220G-5 47
2019-10_EN
3 Safety equipment
Function
Stopping the engine

1. Press Emergency stop switch.
ð The engine will stop.
Starting the engine
1. Press the Emergency stop switch again.
ð The Emergency stop switch then springs back to its initial position.
2. Start engine, refer to Starting the engine [} page 241].
3.3 Amot Control (engine stop) *)
Installation location
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Maintenance hatch 2 Air shut-off valve
The air shut-off valve is located under the maintenance hatch.

1. Open the maintenance hatch.
ð The air shut-off valve is accessible.
48 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
3 Safety equipment
Function
If the engine speed is to high, the air shut-off valve closes automatically and blocks the engine's
air supply. The engine is stopped.
The air shut-off valve must be opened manually before the engine can be restarted.
Opening the air shut-off valve manually
1 Reset lever, open position 2 Reset lever, closed position
1. Open air shut-off valve.

ð The air shut-off valve is open.
2. Check the intake hoses for deformation and replace if necessary.
3.4 Wheel chocks
Introduction
The mobile crane is equipped with (folding) wheel chocks in line with the legal requirements.
For transport, fold up the wheel chocks and stow them securely.
Fold out the wheel chocks to prevent the mobile crane from rolling away.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 49
2019-10_EN
3 Safety equipment
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of crushing when unfolding the wheel chock.
The folding chock automatically unfolds into its working position when
pressing the lock. While doing this, there is a risk of crushing the fingers.
1. Do not reach into the marked area.
Overview
1 Folding chock ! Area of danger of crushing
Folding out the wheel chocks
Overview
A B
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
A Transport position 1 Lock

B Working position 2 Wheel chock
50 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
3 Safety equipment
Procedure
1. Open the folding chock pressing the lock.
ð The wheel chock automatically unfolds into its working position.
ð The wheel chock has been unfolded.
Positioning the wheel chock at the wheel
Overview
2 Wheel chock 3 Wheel
Procedure
1. Place the unfolded wheel chock tightly on the lower side of the wheel (facing the valley) (as
shown).
ð The mobile crane has been secured with wheel chocks against rolling away.
3.5 Emergency hammer

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Introduction
If the mobile crane cannot be left in the event of an emergency, a window can be broken with
the emergency hammer. In case of emergency, a blocked safety belt can be cut with the belt
cutter.
ATF 220G-5 51
2019-10_EN
3 Safety equipment
For safety reasons, the windshield is made of laminated glass and cannot be penetrated with
the emergency hammer.
Overview
1 Hammer head 2 Belt cutter
Procedure
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Cut safety belt with the belt cutter.

2. Strike the window firmly with the tip of the hammer head until the window breaks.
3. Push or knock the broken window out.
ð The mobile crane can be left.
52 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4 Components and operating elements
4.1 Carrier - location of components
1 Swivelling ladder 6 Swivelling ladder

2 Swivelling ladder 7 —
3 Tool box *) 8 Front outrigger
4 Rear outrigger 9 Access step to carrier cab
5 Ladder 10 Carrier cab
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 53
2019-10_EN
4.2 Carrier cab – interior fittings
Overview
7 8 10 11
12
5 2
6
18
9
4
3
15
16
13
14
1 17
1 Steering wheel adjustment 10 Fire extinguisher
2 Interior ventilation 11 Safety belt
3 Side window ventilation 12 24 V socket
4 Instrument panel 13 12 V socket
5 Control unit for heating, ventilation and air- 14 Ashtray/cup holder
conditioning system
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
6 Radio/CD 15 Refrigerator box *)

7 Storage tray 16 Storage box
8 Fuses, relays, diagnostic connector 17 First aid kit *)
9 Roller sun visor 18 Auxiliary heater*) control unit
54 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4.3 Carrier cab – operating elements on instrument panel
Overview
2
1
1 Instrument panel 1 3 Instrument panel 3

2 Instrument panel 2
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 55
2019-10_EN
Instrument panel 1
1 2 3
2 4
5 6 7 8
9 10
11
1 Mirror heater switch 7 Rotary beacon switch

2 Super-tone horn/signal horn *) switch 8 Rear rotary beacon *) switch
3 Reversing signal *) switch 9 Carrier operation/superstructure operation
switch
4 Carrier cab ambience interior lighting 10 Parking light / low beam light switch
switch
5 Fog light *) switch 11 Battery main switch key switch
6 Rear fog light pushbutton
Switches and pushbuttons

"Mirror heater" switch
Press upper part = switch off mirror heater.
Press lower part = switch on mirror heater.
All the mirrors except the front mirror can be heated.
"Super-tone horn/signal horn" switch *)

Press upper part = select signal horn.
Press lower part = select super-tone horn.
"Reversing signal" switch *)

Press upper part = switch off warning device.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press lower part = switch on warning device.

NOTICE! Only switch off warning device if it is possible to view the area behind the
vehicle.
56 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
"Carrier cab ambience interior lighting" switch

Press upper part = Deactivate carrier cab ambience interior lighting lamp.
Press lower part = Activate carrier cab ambience interior lighting lamp.
"Fog light" switch *)

Press upper part = switch off fog light.
Press lower part = switch on fog lamps (when low beam light is switched on).
"Rear fog light" pushbutton

Press upper part = switch off rear fog light.
Press lower part = switch on rear fog light.
"Rotary beacon" switch *)

Press upper part = switch off rotary beacon.
Press lower part = switch on rotary beacon.
"Rear rotary beacon" switch *)

Press upper part = switch off rear rotary beacon.
Press lower part = switch on rear rotary beacon.
"Parking light / low beam light" switch

Rotation 0 = switch off light.
Rotation 1 = parking light.
Rotation 2 = low beam light.
"Battery main switch" switch

Press upper part = disconnect connection to battery.
Press lower part = establish connection to battery.
NOTE Switch with lockout: Press down to release the locking button.
"Carrier operation/superstructure operation" key switch
Rotation 1 = carrier operation.
Rotation 2 = superstructure operation.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 57
2019-10_EN
Instrument panel 2
12 13 18 16 14 15 17 19 20 21
22 29
23 30
31
24 25 26 28 27
12 Service brake circuit I air pressure gauge 22 Service brake warning lamp
13 Service brake circuit II air pressure gauge 23 Parking brake warning lamp
14 Direction indicator pilot lamp 24 Engine fault warning buzzer
15 Trailer direction indicator pilot lamp *) 25 Speedometer with trip meter
16 Serious engine fault warning lamp 26 Gearbox fault warning buzzer
17 Minor engine fault warning lamp 27 Hands-free kit microphone
18 Fill level and quality monitoring of AdBlue® 28 Speed indicator
warning lamp
19 Operating restriction active warning lamp 29 Gearbox fault warning lamp
20 Engine temperature gauge 30 Carrier central warning warning lamp
21 Fuel gauge 31 Steering or service brake fault, braking sys-
tem pressure drop warning *), slewing gear
lock-out for dolly *) warning buzzer
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
58 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Indicator and warning lamps

Safety notice
DANGER
Risk of accidents or damages on the vehicle if red warning lamp
lights up.
If one ore more warning lamps light up on the instrument panel, there is a
risk of accidents or damages on de mobile crane.
1. Stop the mobile crane as quickly as possible taking account of the
traffic situation, and park it in a safe place. Switch off the engine.
2. Determine the cause of the fault and rectify it immediately.
3. Do not operate de mobile crane again before the damage has not
been eliminated.
"Direction indicator" pilot lamp

Flashes = direction indicator is activated.
Flashes faster = defective flashing light.
"Trailer direction indicator" pilot lamp *)

Flashes = direction indicator is activated.
Flashes faster = defective flashing light.
"Gearbox fault" warning lamp

Is lit = gearbox fault.
"Serious engine fault" warning lamp

Is lit = serious engine fault.
"Minor engine fault" warning lamp

Is lit = minor engine fault.
"Fill level and quality monitoring of AdBlue®" warning lamp

Is lit = AdBlue filling level is low.
Flashes = start of operating restriction.
NOTICE! There can be an operating restriction when the warning lamp lights up.
For further information, see Aftertreatment of exhaust gases (SCR system) [} page 83].
"Operating restriction active" warning lamp
Flashes = start of operating restriction.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Flashes = serious operating restriction.
NOTICE! There can be an operating restriction when the warning lamp lights up.
For further information, see Aftertreatment of exhaust gases (SCR system) [} page 83].
ATF 220G-5 59
2019-10_EN
"Service brake" warning lamp

Is lit while driving = brake pressure is too low.
"Parking brake" warning lamp

Is lit = parking brake is engaged.
Is lit while driving = brake pressure is too low.
"Carrier central warning" warning lamp

Is lit = fault in the electronic system.
Checking devices
Air pressure gauge
The supply pressure of brake circuit I or II is displayed.
"Engine" temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature is displayed.
Fuel gauge
Fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
Speedometer with trip meter

The current driving speed is displayed.
The trip distance is displayed.
Speed indicator
The engine speed is displayed.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
60 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Warning buzzers
Safety notice
DANGER
Risk of accidents or damages on the vehicle if buzzer sounds.
When the warning buzzer in the instrument panel sounds, there is a risk of
accidents or damages on the mobile crane.
1. Stop the mobile crane as quickly as possible taking account of the
traffic situation, and park it in a safe place. Switch off the engine.
2. Determine the cause of the fault and rectify it immediately.
3. Do not operate de mobile crane again before the damage has not
been eliminated.
"Engine fault" warning buzzer

Sounds = fault in the engine.
"Gearbox fault" warning buzzer

Sounds = fault in the gearbox.
"Steering or service brake fault, braking system pressure drop warning *), slewing gear
lock-out for dolly *)" warning buzzer
Sounds = steering or service brake fault, braking system pressure drop warning*)/ slewing gear
lock-out for dolly *).
Miscellaneous
"Hands-free kit" microphone
Microphone of the hands-free kit.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 61
2019-10_EN
Instrument panel 3
34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 42 43 44 45
58 59
46 47 48 49 50 51
60 62 63 64
52 53 54 55 56 57
61 65
34 Working floodlights on external mirrors *) 50 —

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
switch
35 Dolly operation *) switch 51 Intarder switch
36 Raise/lower axle 3 *) pushbutton 52 Cancel operating restriction pushbutton
37 Driving level pushbutton 53 AdBlue® tank heating *) switch
38 Front left-hand suspension cylinder push- 54 —
button
62 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
39 Front right-hand suspension cylinder push- 55 Working speed / cruise control switch
button
40 Working floodlight on the outrigger switch 56 Emergency operation superstructure power
supply *) pushbutton
41 Change vehicle height pushbutton 57 Off-road mode ABS *) pushbutton
42 Axle oscillation pushbutton 58 —
43 Axle suspension locking switch 59 Heating/ventilation/air conditioning system
control unit
44 Rear left-hand suspension cylinder push- 60 Starting/stopping engine pushbutton
button
45 Rear right-hand suspension cylinder push- 61 Ignition lock
button
46 Rear working floodlight *) switch 62 Steering program (on-road/off-road mode)
switch
47 — 63 —
48 On-road/off-road gear pushbutton 64 Hazard warning lights switch
49 Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton 65 Gearbox display
Switches and pushbuttons

"Working floodlights on external mirrors" *) switch
Press upper part = switch off working floodlights on the external mirrors.
Press lower part = switch on working floodlights on the external mirrors.
Switch with lockout: Press down to release the locking handle.

"Dolly operation" switch *)
Press upper part = Switch dolly operation off.
Press lower part = Switch dolly operation on.
"Raise/lower axle 3" *) pushbutton
Press and hold upper part = raise axle 3.
Press and hold lower part = lower axle 3.
"Driving level" pushbutton

Press and hold upper part = bring mobile crane into driving level.
"Front left-hand suspension cylinder" pushbutton

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press and hold upper part = extend suspension cylinder.

Press and hold lower part = retract suspension cylinder.
ATF 220G-5 63
2019-10_EN
"Front right-hand suspension cylinder" pushbutton

"Working floodlight on the outrigger" switch

Press upper part = switch off working floodlights on the outrigger.
Press lower part = switch on working floodlights on the outrigger.
"Change vehicle height" pushbutton
Press and hold upper part = lift all suspension cylinders.
Press and hold lower part = lower all suspension cylinders.
"Axle oscillation" pushbutton

Press and hold upper part = activate axle oscillation.
"Axle suspension locking" switch

Press upper part = switch off axle suspension locking.
Press lower part = switch on axle suspension locking.
"Rear left-hand suspension cylinder" pushbutton
"Rear right-hand suspension cylinder" pushbutton

"Rear working floodlight" switch *)

Press upper part = switch off rear working floodlight.
Press lower part = switch on rear working floodlight.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"On-road/off-road gear" pushbutton

Press upper part = on-road gear.
Press lower part = off-road gear.
64 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
"Axle drive/differential locks" pushbutton

Press lower part once = engage 4th axle and inter-axle differential locks.
Press lower part twice = engage inter-wheel differential locks.
Press upper part = switch off all engaged drives / differential locks together.
"Intarder" switch
Press upper part = switch off intarder.
Press lower part = switch on intarder.
"Cancel operating restriction" pushbutton

Press = operating restriction is cancelled.
NOTICE! The operating restriction can be cancelled a maximum of three times for
30 minutes.
"AdBlue® tank heating" switch *)

Press upper part = switch off heating of AdBlue® tank.
Press lower part = switch on heating of AdBlue® tank.
"Working speed / cruise control" switch
Press upper part = switch off working speed and cruise control.
Press lower part = switch on working speed and cruise control.
"Emergency operation superstructure power supply" pushbutton *)

Press upper part = switch off power supply.
Press lower part = establish superstructure power supply from the carrier.
"Off-road mode ABS" pushbutton *)

Press upper part = switch off ABS off-road mode.
Press lower part = switch on ABS off-road mode.
With the ABS off-road mode, you can reduce the braking distance off-road and on dirt roads.
"Starting/stopping engine" pushbutton

Press pushbutton = start engine.
Press pushbutton = switch off engine.
"Steering program (on-road/off-road mode)" switch

Press upper part = on-road mode is activated.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press lower part = off-road mode is activated.
ATF 220G-5 65
2019-10_EN
"Hazard warning lights" switch

Press upper part = switch off hazard warning lights.
Press lower part = switch on hazard warning lights.
Checking devices
Gearbox display
The current gearbox status is displayed.
Miscellaneous
Ignition lock
Insert the ignition key: Ignition is switched on. The immobilizer is deactivated.
Remove the ignition key: Ignition is switched off. The immobilizer is activated.
Heating/ventilation/air conditioning system control unit

Regulates the following:
▪ Blower.
▪ Heating.
▪ Air switchover.
▪ Air regulation.
▪ Air conditioning system.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
66 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4.4 Steering column switches
1 Left steering column switch 2 Right steering column switch
NOTICE! Switch positions of the steering column switch that are not described in the fol-
lowing are without any function.
Left steering column switch

Windshield wipers / windshield washers
Shift ring in position 0 = switch off windshield wipers.
Shift ring in position INT = intermittent operation.
Shift ring in position I = wipe slowly.
Shift ring in position II = wipe quickly.
Moving shift ring = switch on windshield washers.
High beam light / headlight flasher

Press steering column switch away from driver = switch on high beam light
(locking position).
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Pull steering column switch towards driver = switch on headlight flasher.
ATF 220G-5 67
2019-10_EN
NOTICE! The low beam light must be switched on for high beam light operation.
Direction indicator
Push steering column switch up = switch on turn signal indicator on right
side of vehicle.
Push steering column switch down = switch on turn signal indicator on left
side of vehicle.
Signal horn
Push pushbutton on steering column switch = switch on signal horn.
Right steering column switch

Engine brake/Bremsomat/Intarder
Position 0 = switch off engine brake/Bremsomat/Intarder.
Position 1 = switch on engine brake and Bremsomat.
Position 2 = switch on 40 % intarder and engine brake.
Engine brake / Bremsomat / eddy-current brake *)

Position 0 = switch off engine brake / Bremsomat / eddy-current brake.
Position 1 = switch on engine brake / Bremsomat.
Position 2 = switch on 25 % eddy-current brake, 40 % intarder and engine
brake.
brake.
brake.
brake.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
68 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Cruise control
Position 1 = switch on cruise control.
NOTICE! The Working speed / cruise control switch must be switched on for cruise con-
trol operation.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 69
2019-10_EN
4.5 Carrier cab - shifting an driving
Overview
1 Safety belt 9 Side bordering light

2 Accelerator pedal 10 Rotary beacon
3 Brake pedal 11 Gear selector lever
4 Direction indicator 12 Rear steering control unit
5 Left steering column switch 13 Mirror adjustment
6 Steering wheel 14 Parking brake
7 Right steering column switch 15 On-board computer monitor
8 Speedometer 16 Navigation control
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
70 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4.6 Carrier cab - gear selector lever
Overview
1 Gear selector lever DM Forward maneuvering

2 Gear pre-selection switch D Forward driving
A Shift up gears N Neutral position
First spring position = shift up one gear
Stop spring position = shift up two gears
B Shift down gears R Reverse driving
First spring position = shift down one gear
Stop spring position = shift down two gears
M/A Toggle between manual/automatic driving RM Reverse maneuvering
modes
S —
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 71
2019-10_EN
4.7 Carrier cab - controller for rear steering
Overview
1
3 4 5 6
10 9 8 7
1 Steering program (on-road/off-road mode) 6 Error reading pushbutton
switch
2 Display 7 Rear swing-out suppression pushbutton
3 — 8 Crab steering pushbutton
4 Manual steering towards left pushbutton 9 —
5 Manual steering towards right pushbutton 10 Minimum turning radius pushbutton
4.8 Ignition key
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Unfold/fold ignition key button 4 Lock carrier cab door pushbutton

2 Key 5 Unlock carrier cab door pushbutton
3 Ignition key 6 —
72 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Procedure – Unfolding
1. Press and hold the Unfold/fold ignition key button.
ð The key unfolds.
Procedure – Folding
1. Press and hold the Unfold/fold ignition key button.
2. Fold in the key.
ð The ignition key is folded.
Procedure – Unlocking
1. Press the Unlock carrier cab door pushbutton on the ignition key.
ð The door is unlocked.
Procedure – Locking
1. Press the Lock carrier cab door pushbutton on the ignition key.
ð The door is locked.
4.9 Working speed
4.9.1 Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents when driving with working speed.
If the engine runs at an increased and fixed speed when driving, the driv-
ing behaviour of the mobile crane can only be controlled to a certain ex-
tent. This may lead to accidents.
1. Before driving, reduce working speed to idling speed.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 73
2019-10_EN
4.9.2 Overview
1 Working speed / cruise control switch
NOTE Before changing the engine speed from the outrigger control panels, the Working speed
mode must be activated.
4.9.3 Switching working speed on/off
Activating Working speed mode

1. Press Working speed / cruise control switch.
The maximum working speed is approx. 1800 rpm.
Deactivating Working speed mode

1. Press Working speed / cruise control switch.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
74 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4.10 Ladders
Overview
1 Swivelling ladders 2 Ladders, permanently attached

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 75
2019-10_EN
4.11 Storage box-Timber storage
Overview
1 Storage box 2 Timber storage
4.12 Double ladder

A stepladder is provided with the mobile crane for carrying out mounting and maintenance activ-
ities on the jib. The ladder is provided under the carrier cab. If a storage box is mounted on the
carrier cab, the stepladder is located on the rear panel of the carrier.
DANGER
Risk of falling!
Improperly attached ladders and their improper use may pose the risk of
falling.
1. Place the ladder only on the plane and non-slippery surface having ad-
equate load-bearing capacity.
2. Check the stability.
3. Follow the accident prevention regulations when using ladders and ac-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
cess steps.
76 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Angle bracket 5 Turnbuckle eye

2 Turnbuckle 6 Locating cramp
3 Lock tab 7 Padlock
4 Spring latch
Removing the stepladder:

1. Remove the padlock.
2. Turn the lock tab upwards by 180°.
3. Press the spring latch up.
4. Release the turnbuckle eye and lower the bracket.
5. Open the second turnbuckle.
6. Remove the stepladder.
Stowing and securing the stepladder
WARNING
Risk of accident!
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
If ladders come off when driving, they may result in serious accidents.
1. Check the ladders for secure fastening and firmness.
ATF 220G-5 77
2019-10_EN
Fixing the ladders
1. Fold out the ladders completely and rest at a suitable position.

Remove and stow away the ladders in the logical reverse order.
4.13 Crank handle
Standard position
1 Crank handle
Optional position
If a storage box is mounted on the bottom side of the carrier cab, the handle is attached at an
optional position.
The crank handle may be located at one of the two positions indicated, depending on the fittings
of the mobile crane.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 79
2019-10_EN
1 Crank handle
2 Crank handle
Crank handle holders
1 Crank handle holders (3 ea.)
4.14 Roller sun visor
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Roller sun visor 2 Link
80 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4.15 Lounge bed *)
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to folding down of the lounge bed.
When driving, the lounge bed must be folded up and secured against fold-
ing down.
Overview
Transport position
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Lounge bed, part 1 3 Strap (3 ea.)

2 Lounge bed, part 2
Lounge bed, part 1 may be folded out to sleeping position when driving.
ATF 220G-5 81
2019-10_EN
Lounge bed, part 2 must be folded up and secured with straps in transport position when driv-
ing.
Sleeping position
1 Passenger's seat 4 Lounge bed, part 2

2 Driver seat 5 Support bracket
3 Lounge bed, part 1
Folding lounge bed, part 1 out

➢ Lounge bed, part 1 and part 2 are folded up and secured with straps.
1. Push passenger seat completely forward and fold the backrest forward.
2. Fold support bracket out.
3. Release two straps from lounge bed, part 1 and fold lounge bed, part 1 down.
ð Lounge bed, part 1 is folded out.
Folding lounge bed, part 2 out
➢ Lounge bed, part 1 is folded out and part 2 are folded up and secured with straps.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Push driver’s seat completely forward and fold the backrest forward.
2. Release one strap from lounge bed, part 2 and fold lounge bed, part 2 down.
ð Lounge bed, part 2 is folded out.
Folding lounge bed, part 2 up
➢ Lounge bed, part 1 and part 2 are folded out.
1. Fold up lounge bed, part 2 and secure with strap.
82 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
2. Push driver’s seat backward and fold the backrest backward.

ð Lounge bed, part 2 is folded up.
Folding lounge bed, part 1 up
➢ Lunge bed, part 2 is folded up and secured with strap.
1. Fold up lounge bed, part 1 and secure with two straps.
2. Fold up the support bracket.
3. Push passenger seat backward and fold the backrest backward.
ð Lounge bed, part 1 is folded up.
4.16 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases (SCR system)
Explanation
The diesel engine is capable of the aftertreatment of exhaust gases in order to comply with the
statutory exhaust emissions requirements. Urea (AdBlue®) is injected into the exhaust gas and
reduces the nitrogen oxides by up to 90 % in the SCR system.
The diesel engine may only be operated with AdBlue®, otherwise the operating permit is void.
If no AdBlue® is available or if the quality of the AdBlue® is too poor, operation will be restricted
after about one hour. The engine's power and speed will be gradually reduced, with the result
that it will barely be possible to work or drive after about three hours.
Topping up with AdBlue® can remedy this operating restriction.
In emergencies, the operating restriction can be lifted for a brief period.
Several pilot lamps indicate the gradual establishment of the operating restriction.
A malfunction in the aftertreatment of exhaust gases may be due to the following reasons:
▪ AdBlue® tank is empty or AdBlue® is frozen.
▪ AdBlue® has been heated to more than 60 °C and is thus useless.
▪ AdBlue® is contaminated or of poor quality.
For further information refer to engine manufacturer's operating manual.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 83
2019-10_EN
4.17 AdBlue tank heating *)
General
The diesel engine is capable of the aftertreatment of exhaust gases in order to comply with the
statutory exhaust emissions requirements. Urea (AdBlue®) is injected into the exhaust gas and
reduces the nitrogen oxides by up to 90 % in the SCR system.
The diesel engine may only be operated with AdBlue®, otherwise the operating permit is void.
AdBlue freezes at temperatures below -11 °C.
Principle
If necessary, the vehicle's auxiliary heater can heat the AdBlue tank.
If outside temperatures below 0° C are expected, the AdBlue tank heating must be switched on.
When the temperature of AdBlue falls below 0 °C, the vehicle's auxiliary heater will heat the Ad-
Blue tank. During this time, neither the cab nor the engine will be preheated.
When the temperature of the AdBlue is above 0 °C, the cab and the engine will be preheated.
During normal engine operation, the AdBlue tank is heated by the cooling water of the engine.
For further information, see Operating the auxiliary heater [} page 310].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
84 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
4.18 Rear area monitoring
A B
1
2
A Monitor installation location 1 Rear view camera
B Rear view camera installation location
Rear area monitoring

The rear section of the mobile crane is monitored with a video camera.
When engaging the reverse gear, the image of the rear view camera is displayed on the mon-
itor.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 85
2019-10_EN
4.19 Asymmetrical outrigger base
Starting position
Introduction
Sometimes, it is not possible to fully extend all outrigger beams due to lack of space. The outrig-
ger beams extended to various lengths result in an asymmetrical outrigger base.
Overview
Explanation
In the example, all outrigger beams of the mobile crane are extended differently using the per-
missible outrigger bases.
The automatic safe load indicator detects the position of the outrigger beams and enables the
load rating chart depending on the slewing angle of the superstructure.
In the case of an asymmetrical outrigger base, different load rating charts will apply along the
rotary movement of the superstructure.
When the mobile crane reaches the limit of the load rating chart while rotating with load in a de-
termined rigging status, the automatic safe load indicator switches over to another load rating
chart. Depending on the current load, the rotary movement of the superstructure might be
stopped.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
86 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Movement range within load rating charts
Introduction
The following example shows the principle. Differences in number and type of the outrigger
bases are possible in the case of different crane types.
Overview
A Symmetrical, maximum possible outrigger 1 Direction of travel

base
B Symmetrical, half the outrigger base 2 Load rating chart corresponding to the out-
rigger base
C Asymmetrical outrigger base 3 Load rating chart depending on outrigger
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
base and slewing angle of the superstruc-

ture
4 Possible outrigger bases
5 Active outrigger bases
ATF 220G-5 87
2019-10_EN
Explanation
These examples shall be used to describe the function of the asymmetrical outrigger base.
Each type of crane has its own outrigger bases. This means that there are numerous possible
load rating charts.
The grey area represents the applicable range of the respective load rating chart, the thick bor-
dering the outer limit. At a cornerstone of the bordering, the crane control switches over to an-
other load rating chart.
Behaviour of the automatic safe load indicator
Introduction
In the following example, the switchover behaviour of the automatic safe load indicator when us-
ing an asymmetrical outrigger base is described generically. A certain load and a certain rigging
status are assumed. Only the rotary movement is considered.
On the basis of the active outrigger bases, the automatic safe load indicator determines the load
rating chart depending on the slewing angle of the superstructure.
Overview
1 Switchover point to lower load rating chart 2 Switchover point to higher load rating chart
Explanation
While rotating clockwise, the mobile crane reaches a switchover point at position 1. The auto-
matic safe load indicator switches over to another load rating chart with lower load. If the current
load exceeds the load of the lower load rating chart, the rotary movement of the superstructure
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
stops.
If necessary, the superstructure can be rotated beyond position 1 by adopting the following
measures:
▪ Raise the telescopic boom.
▪ Retract the telescopic boom.
▪ Put down the load.
88 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Continuing the clockwise rotation, the mobile crane reaches a further switchover point at posi-
tion 2. The automatic safe load indicator switches over to another load rating chart with higher
load. In this case, the rotary movement can continue unhindered; the telescopic boom can e.g.
be lowered.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 89
2019-10_EN
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
90 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
5 Operation of on-board computer
5.1 Description of function
Introduction
The mobile crane's carrier is equipped with a on-board computer.
The on-board computer consists of a monitor and operating elements.
Various monitoring and control functions are performed by the on-board computer.
NOTICE! The following numerical values are examples and are intended for illustrative
purposes only. The may vary from the original condition.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 91
2019-10_EN
5.2 Elements of the on-board computer
Overview
1 Main display 2 Navigation control

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
92 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Main display
Overview
11 12
13
1
2
3
10 9 8 7 6 5 4
1 Up button 8 Outrigger information button
2 Confirm selection or Service menu button. 9 Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering
button
3 Down button 10 One menu level back button
4 Menu selection button 11 Communication OK (green) indicator
5 Camera view button 12 Communication disturbed (red) indicator
6 Engine information button 13 Brightness sensor
7 Suspension button
Explanation
In the start menu, press the Service menu button and hold for 5 seconds to go to the Service
menu. For further information, refer to Menu "Service" [} page 129].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 93
2019-10_EN
Alternative operation of the main display
Overview
1
2
1 Button in the main display 2 Button in the frame
Explanation
The menus can be selected with both the buttons in the frame and the buttons in the main dis-
play.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
94 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
Navigation control
Introduction
Alternatively, the main display can be controlled via the Navigation Control.
Overview
1 2 3
4 5
1 Function key 1 4 Function key 4

2 Function key 2 5 Function key 5
3 Function key 3 6 Pushbutton/rotary knob/tilt button
Explanation
The Navigation Control has five buttons and one pushbutton/rotary knob/tilt button.
The pushbutton/rotary knob/tilt button can be moved as follows:
▪ Tilting: changing between navigation area and submenu.
▪ Rotating: selection of buttons.
▪ Pressing: confirmation of selection.
The function keys 1 to 4 have not been allocated in the factory. Navigation control button as-
signment, refer to "User settings" menu [} page 122].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 95
2019-10_EN
5.3 Layout of the main display
5.3.1 Overview
1 Status information 4 Display area of the front camera

2 Menu area 5 Status displays
3 Navigation area
The layout of the main display is as follows:

▪ Status information, see Status information [} page 97].
▪ Menu area.
▪ Navigation area, see Navigation area [} page 99].
▪ Display area of the front camera.
▪ Status displays, refer to Pilot and warning lamps [} page 101].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
96 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
5.3.2 Status information
Overview
1 2 34 9 5 6
2/17 W0 0032 7h 00103
E F
AdBlue AVG
7 8
1 Error count indicator 6 Menu number indicator

2 Error type indicator 7 Fuel and AdBlue fill levels indicator
3 Classification indicator 8 Fuel consumption indicator
4 Error number indicator 9 Carrier engine hour meter indicator
5 Warning lamps indicator
Indicators
"Message" indicator
17/17 W0 0032 The Message indicator shows existing messages.
Pressing the indicator will display a list with messages. For further information, refer to
Messages [} page 133].
"Pilot and warning lamps" display

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
The Pilot and warning lamps display shows the occurrence of errors.
For further information, refer to Error symbols [} page 104].
“Menu number” indicator

00103 The Menu number indicator shows the number of the active menu.
ATF 220G-5 97
2019-10_EN
By pressing the indicator and entering the menu number you can go to other menus.
"Fuel consumption" indicator
AVG
The Fuel consumption indicator shows the fuel consumption in l since the last reset to
zero. For further information, refer to "Engine information" menu [} page 115].
"Fuel and AdBlue® fill levels" indicator
AdBlue
E F The Fuel and AdBlue® fill levels indicator shows the fill level of the fuel tank and of the Ad-
Blue® tank.
The upper indicator shows the fill level of the fuel tank, the lower the fill level of the Ad-
Blue® tank.
E = empty.
F = full.
"Carrier engine hour meter" indicator

_._ h The Carrier engine operating hours indicator shows the operating hours.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
98 ATF 220G-5
2019-10_EN
5.3.3 Navigation area
Overview
00000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 One menu level back button 5 Engine information menu button
2 Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering 6 Camera view menu button
menu button
3 Outrigger information menu button 7 Other menus button
4 Suspension menu button
Buttons
"One menu level back" button
Press button = go to the menu one level above.
"Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering menu" button

Press button = go to the Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering menu.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
For further information, refer to "Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" menu
[} page 109].
"Outrigger information menu" button

Press button = go to the Outrigger information menu.
For further information, refer to "Outrigger information" menu [} page 112].
ATF 220G-5 99
2019-10_EN
"Suspension menu" button

Press button = go to Suspension menu.
For further information, refer to "Suspension" menu [} page 113].
"Engine information menu" button

i Press button = go to the Engine information menu.
For further information, refer to "Engine information" menu [} page 115].
"Camera view menu" button

Press button = go to the Camera view menu.
For further information, refer to “Camera view” menu [} page 117].
Note: Pressing the Camera view button again changes the displays of the cameras.
"Other menus" button

Press button = go to the Other menus menu.
For further information, refer to “Other menus” menu [} page 118].
B
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
100 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.3.4 Pilot and warning lamps
1
1 Indicator and warning lamps
The following pilot and warning lamps are shown in the order of occurrence.
"Steering program" pilot lamp
Is lit = Steering program (on-road/off-road mode) switch is switched to special steering program.
Note: Gearbox shifts up only to the third gear.
"Rear swing-out suppression" pilot lamp

Is lit = special steering program rear swing-out suppression is activated.
"Crab steering" pilot lamp

Is lit = special steering program crab steering is activated.
"Minimum turning radius" pilot lamp

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Is lit = special steering program minimum turning radius is activated.
"Cruise control" pilot lamp

Is lit green = cruise control is switched on and active.
Is lit yellow = malfunction of cruise control.
ATF 220G-5 101

2019-10_EN
"Boom raised" pilot lamp

Is lit = telescopic boom is not in boom rest.
"Axle oscillation" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = axle oscillation is switched on.
"Dolly operation" *) pilot lamp
DOLLY
Is lit yellow = Dolly operation.
Is lit red = pressure for releasing the slewing brake is too low.
"Upshift lock" pilot lamp
4+
Is lit = upshift lock is switched on.
Note: Gearbox shifts up only to the third gear.
"Axle suspension locking" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = axle suspension locking terminated successfully.
Is lit blue = axle suspension is not entirely locked.
"Superstructure operation" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = superstructure operation function is active.
"Levelling" pilot lamp

Is lit blue = levelling has not been achieved.
LEVEL
Is lit yellow = levelling terminated successfully.
"High beam light" pilot lamp

Is lit = high beam light is activated.
"Intarder" pilot lamp
R
Is lit = intarder is activated.
Flashes = intarder malfunction.
"Centralized lubrication system" warning lamp

Is lit yellow = fault in centralized lubrication system.
"ABS trailer" *) warning lamp

Is lit yellow = failure of the ABS trailer components.
However, the functional safety of the pneumatic braking system is fully maintained.
"Hold axles" pilot lamp

Is lit = axles are held in the current position.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1-5
"Mobile crane ABS" *) warning lamp

Flashes = ABS off-road mode is active.
102 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
"Starting/stopping engine" warning lamp

Is lit yellow = key is not recognized. Immobilizer is active. Engine cannot be started.
"Rear fog light" pilot lamp

Is lit = rear fog light is activated.
"Windshield washer system fill level" warning lamp

Is lit yellow = fill level of windshield washer system is too low.
"On-road gear" pilot lamp

Is lit = on-road gear is engaged.
"Off-road gear" pilot lamp

Is lit = off-road gear is engaged.
"Inter-axle lock blocked" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = all inter-axle locks are blocked.
"Inter-wheel differential locks blocked" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = all inter-wheel differentials are blocked.
"Inter-axle lock blocked" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = inter-axle differentials are blocked.
"Superstructure locked" pilot lamp

Is lit yellow = superstructure is locked.
"Eddy-current brake" pilot lamp

Is lit = eddy-current brake is activated.
"Fog lights" pilot lamp

Is lit blue = fog lights are switched on.
"AdBlue® tank heating" pilot lamp *)

Is lit = heating of the AdBlue tank is switched on.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 103

2019-10_EN
5.3.5 Error symbols

1
2/17 W0 0032 7h 00103
E F
AdBlue AVG
1 Error symbol indicator
The following error symbols are shown in the order of occurrence.

"Sensor error" warning lamp
Is lit red = an error has occurred.
Is flashing red = an error has occurred in the control unit.
"CAN error" warning lamp

Is lit red = a general communication error (CAN bus) has occurred.
"Engine oil level" warning lamp

Is lit yellow = engine oil level is low.
Is lit red = engine oil level is too low. Low level threshold is reached.
"Engine oil pressure" warning lamp

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Is lit red = engine oil pressure is too low.
"Emergency steering pump" warning lamp

Is lit permanently red = status display of emergency steering pump.
Is flashing red = error in the emergency steering pump.
104 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
"Steering pump" warning lamp

Is lit when switching the ignition on = function check.
Is flashing = an error has occurred.
"Coolant and coolant level" warning lamp

Is lit red = an error has occurred.
"Parking brake" warning lamp

Is lit red = parking brake is active.
"Air cleaner" warning lamp

Is lit = air cleaner is contaminated.
"Brake lining wear" warning lamp

Is lit red = brake linings are worn out.
"Hydraulic oil filter" warning lamp

Is lit red = hydraulic oil filter is contaminated.
"Hydraulic oil level" warning lamp

Is lit red = hydraulic oil level is too low.
"Hydraulic oil temperature" warning lamp

Is lit = hydraulic oil temperature is too high.
"Immobilizer error" warning lamp

Is lit red = an error is present in the immobilizer.
"Fuel tank fill level" warning lamp

Is lit yellow = fuel tank level is too low. Low level threshold is reached.
"Air pressure gauge" warning lamp

Flashes red = supply pressure of brake circuit 1 and/or 2 has dropped below 6.5 bar.
Is lit red = supply pressure of brake circuit 1 and/or 2 has dropped below 5.5 bar.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 105

2019-10_EN
"Raising/lowering axle three" warning lamp *)

Is lit = axle three is raised.
3
Is lit = axle three raised.

3
Is lit = axle three is lowered.

3
"Tyre pressure monitoring system" warning lamp

Is lit = tyre pressure too low.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
106 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.3.6 Navigation in a menu
Overview
1 Status information 4 Display area of the front camera

2 Menu area 5 Status displays
3 Navigation area
The layout of the main display is as follows:

▪ Status information, see Status information [} page 97].
▪ Menu area.
▪ Navigation area, see Navigation area [} page 99].
▪ Display area of the front camera.
▪ Status displays, refer to Pilot and warning lamps [} page 101].
The menu area’s layout is as follows:

▪ "Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" menu [} page 109].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ "Outrigger information" menu [} page 112].

▪ "Suspension" menu [} page 113].
▪ "Engine information" menu [} page 115].
▪ “Camera view” menu [} page 117].
▪ “Other menus” menu [} page 118].
ATF 220G-5 107

2019-10_EN
▪ "Error messages" menu [} page 120].

▪ "Software and hardware information" menu [} page 121].
▪ "User settings" menu [} page 122].
Buttons
The following buttons are of general importance and appear in the individual menus, as the situ-
ation requires.
"One page up" button
Press button = menu moves one page up.
"One page down" button

Press button = menu moves one page down.
"Confirm" button
Press button = confirm and save selection.
Note: All changes must be saved with the Confirm button.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
108 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.4 "Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" menu
Introduction
You will automatically go the menu when pressing the following pushbutton on the instrument
panel:
▪ Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton.
An automatic change to this menu can be activated and deactivated in the Automatic menu
change menu. For further information, refer to “Automatic menu change” setting [} page 124].
Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6
00101
00s
17º 10º 0º -12º -20º
8 9 7
1 Remaining period of inter-wheel differential 6 Rear swing-out suppression pilot lamp
locks indicator
2 Inter-axle differential locks pilot lamp 7 Differential locks indicator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3 Inter-wheel differential locks pilot lamp 8 Axle drive indicator

4 Minimum turning radius pilot lamp 9 Steering angle indicator
5 Crab steering pilot lamp
NOTICE! The pilot lamps or warning lamps are shown in the order of occurrence.
ATF 220G-5 109

2019-10_EN
Indicators and lamps

"Remaining period of inter-wheel differential locks" indicator
The Remaining period of inter-wheel differential locks indicator shows the remaining period
00s of activated inter-wheel differential locks.
"Inter-axle differential locks" pilot lamp

The Inter-axle differential locks pilot lamp shows the activated inter-axle differential locks.
"Inter-wheel differential locks" pilot lamp

The Inter-wheel differential locks pilot lamp shows the activated inter-wheel differential
locks.
"Minimum turning radius" pilot lamp

The Minimum turning radius pilot lamp indicates the special steering program Minimum
turning radius.
"Crab steering" pilot lamp

The Crab steering pilot lamp indicates the special steering program Crab steering.
"Rear swing-out suppression" pilot lamp

The Rear swing-out suppression pilot lamp indicates the special steering program Rear
swing-out suppression.
"Differential locks" indicator

The Differential locks indicator shows the activated or deactivated differential locks.
Cross = engaged.
Empty circle = switched off.
"Axle drive" indicator

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
The Axle drive indicator shows the driven or not driven axle drive.
Filled circle = driven.
Non-filled circle = not driven.
110 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
"Steering angle" indicator

10° The Steering angle indicator shows the steering angle.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 111

2019-10_EN
5.5 "Outrigger information" menu
Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10º 0º -12º 00102

-20º
2.75 8 20 0.00
m t t m
0.1 º
F Re
-0.1 º
m 16 117 m
2.72 t t 0.00
12 11 10 9
1 Mobile crane longitudinal and lateral inclin- 7 Outrigger pressure, rear right indicator
ation indicator
2 CAN error warning lamp 8 Outrigger base, rear right indicator
3 Sensor error warning lamp 9 Outrigger base, rear left indicator
4 Outrigger base, front right indicator 10 Outrigger pressure, rear left indicator
5 Outrigger pressure, front right indicator 11 Outrigger pressure, front left indicator
6 Circular spirit level 12 Outrigger base, front left indicator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
112 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.6 "Suspension" menu
Introduction
You will automatically go the Suspension menu when pressing the following switch or pushbut-
ton on the instrument panel:
▪ Axle suspension locking switch.
▪ Rear left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
▪ Rear right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
▪ Front left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
▪ Front right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
▪ Axle oscillation pushbutton.
▪ Change vehicle height pushbutton.
Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
00103
1-5 0t
LEVEL
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
10 9 8
1 Axle suspension locking pilot lamp 6 Mobile crane levelled pilot lamp
ATF 220G-5 113

2019-10_EN
2 Axles lifted pilot lamp 7 Position of the suspension cylinder indic-

ator
Yellow = mobile crane is not levelled
Green = mobile crane levelled
3 Axle oscillation pilot lamp 8 Axle suspension locking indicator
Yellow and empty = locked
Green and filled = not locked
4 Axle 3 lifted *) pilot lamp 9 Indicator (pilot lamp) Axle 3 depressurised
*)
Off = Axle 3 depressurised
5 Axle 3 put on without pressure unbraked *) 10 Axle oscillation indicator
pilot lamp Yellow = axles oscillating
Green = axles not oscillating
5.6.1 Tyre pressure monitoring system *)
Overview
1 Tyre fill colour Green 3 Tyre fill colour Red

2 Tyre fill colour Yellow 4 Tyres without fill colour
Checking the tyre pressure

1. Press the Suspension menu button.
ð The fill colour of the wheels displays the pressure of the respective tyre.
▪ Fill colour Green: tyre pressure is in order.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Fill colour Yellow: minor pressure error; reduce the speed and adjust the tyre pressure as
soon as possible.
▪ Fill colour Red: serious pressure error; stop the mobile crane immediately at a secure
place, check the tyre, and correct the error.
▪ Without fill colour: transmission disturbed or empty battery in the tyre module. Refer to
Changing wheel module for air pressure display *) [} page 465].
114 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.7 "Engine information" menu
Overview
00104
1
11
32 %
_ ºC
10
-.- %
-.- l 2
9 -.- kmh -.- v 3
8 _ 4
-.- %
_._ h
7 _._ h _._ l
5
1 Hydraulic oil temperature indicator 7 Carrier engine hour meter indicator

2 Engine oil refill quantity indicator 8 Engine speed indicator
3 Battery voltage indicator 9 Set driving speed (cruise control) indicator
4 Accelerator pedal position indicator 10 Engine oil level indicator
5 Drive time and fuel consumption day 11 Hydraulic oil level indicator
counter indicator
6 Reset drive time and fuel consumption day
counter indicator to zero button
Indicators
"Hydraulic oil temperature" indicator
_ ºC The Hydraulic oil temperature indicator shows the temperature of the hydraulic oil.
"Engine oil refill quantity" indicator

-.- l The Engine oil refill quantity indicator shows the refill quantity for engine oil.
A negative display means overfilled.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Battery voltage" indicator

-.- v The Battery voltage indicator shows the voltage of the battery.
"Accelerator pedal position" indicator

-.- % The Accelerator pedal position indicator shows the position of the accelerator pedal.
ATF 220G-5 115

2019-10_EN
"Drive time and fuel consumption day counter" indicator

_._
_._
h
l The Drive time and fuel consumption day counter indicator shows the drive time and the
fuel consumption.
"Carrier engine hour meter" indicator

_._ h The Carrier engine operating hours indicator shows the operating hours.
"Engine speed" indicator

_ The Engine speed indicator shows the speed of the carrier engine.
"Set driving speed (cruise control)" indicator

-.-
km
h
The Set driving speed (cruise control) indicator shows the driving speed set in the cruise
control.
If cruise control is switched off, "-.-" is displayed.
"Engine oil level" indicator
-.- %
The Engine oil level indicator shows the engine's oil level approx. 5 minutes after engine is
switched off.
"Hydraulic oil level" indicator

32 % The Hydraulic oil level indicator shows the oil level of the hydraulic oil tank.
Button
"Reset drive time and fuel consumption day counter indicator to zero" button
Press button = the Drive time and fuel consumption indicators are reset to zero.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
116 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.8 “Camera view” menu
Introduction
The camera image from the rear view camera is displayed in the menu area when reverse gear
is engaged. The camera image of the front camera moves to the left and downward into the dis-
play area of the front camera.
Pressing the Camera view button changes the displays of the cameras.
Overview
00105
1 2 3
1 Camera image from the front camera 3 Camera view menu button
2 Camera image from the reversing camera
Note: The camera image of the front camera is displayed up to a speed of 10 km/h.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 117

2019-10_EN
5.9 “Other menus” menu
Overview
1 2 3
00106
1 Error messages menu 3 Software and hardware information menu

2 User settings menu
Buttons
"Error messages menu" button
Press button = go to the Error messages menu.
For further information, refer to "Error messages" menu [} page 120].
"User settings menu" button

Press button = go to the User settings menu.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
For further information, refer to "User settings" menu [} page 122].
118 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
"Software and hardware information menu" button

Press button = go to Software and hardware information menu.
For further information, refer to "Software and hardware information" menu [} page 121].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 119

2019-10_EN
5.10 "Error messages" menu
Overview
00261
1 2 3
1 Error message list indicator 3 One page down button

2 One page up button
Indicators and buttons

"Error message list" indicator
The error message list displays an error with a symbol, an error code, component designa-
tion in the electrical circuit diagram, name of the module, and a brief description.
The errors are sorted according to time of occurrence.
"One page up" button

Press button = menu moves one page up.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"One page down" button

Press button = menu moves one page down.
120 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.11 "Software and hardware information" menu
Overview
1 2
00263
Crane Information
...
Hardware-Information - Display
...
4 3
1 Software version indicator 3 One page down button

2 Hardware information indicator 4 One page up button
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 121

2019-10_EN
5.12 "User settings" menu
5.12.1 Overview
00262
User Settings
Start to front camera ON OFF 1
Automatic Mask Change

Differentials ON OFF
2
Rear View Camera ON OFF
Suspension ON OFF
Shortcuts
Button 1 Page 101 - Differentials
Button 2 None 3
Button 3 None
Button 4 None
AUTO
5 4
1 Front camera start menu setting 4 Confirm button
2 Automatic menu change setting 5 Brightness setting
3 Navigation control button assignment set-
ting
Settings and buttons

“Front camera start menu” setting
Start to front camera ON OFF
Change the automatic display of the camera image of the front camera.
For further information, refer to “Front camera start menu” setting [} page 123].
“Automatic menu change” setting

Differentials
Rear View Camera
Suspension
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Change automatic menu change.
For further information, see “Automatic menu change” setting [} page 124].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
“Navigation control button assignment” setting

Shortcuts
Button 2 None
Button 3 None
Button 4 None
Change button assignment of the navigation control.
For further information, see “Navigation control button assignment” setting [} page 126].
122 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Menu "Brightness"
Changing the brightness of the display.
AUTO
For further information, see “Brightness” setting [} page 128].
"Confirm" button
Press button = confirm and save selection.
Note: All changes must be saved with the Confirm button.
5.12.2 “Front camera start menu” setting
Overview
Start to front camera ON OFF
1 2
1 Front camera start menu indicator 2 Front camera start menu button

"Front camera start menu" button
Press button = activate or deactivate front camera start menu.
"Front camera start menu" indicator

ON OFF
The Front camera start menu indicator changes between ON and OFF.
In the case of the ON position, the camera image of the front camera will be displayed in
the menu area when starting the on-board computer.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 123

2019-10_EN
5.12.3 “Automatic menu change” setting
Introduction
You can switch the automatic menu change on and off in case of the following menus:
▪ "Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" menu [} page 109].
▪ “Camera view” menu [} page 117].
▪ "Suspension" menu [} page 113].
Overview

Differentials ON OFF
Rear View Camera ON OFF
Suspension ON OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering 4 Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering
indicator button
2 Camera view indicator 5 Camera view button
3 Suspension indicator 6 Suspension button
Buttons
"Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" button
Press button = activate or deactivate the automatic Axle drive, differential locks, rear steer-
ing menu change.
"Camera view" button

Press button = activate or deactivate automatic Camera view menu change.
"Suspension" button
Press button = activate or deactivate automatic Suspension menu change.
Indicators
"Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" indicator
ON OFF
The indicator changes between ON and OFF.
In the case of the ON position, when pressing the Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton,
the menu will automatically change to the Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering menu,
refer to "Axle drive, differential locks, rear steering" menu [} page 109].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Camera view" indicator

ON OFF
In the case of the ON position, the camera image of the rear view camera will be displayed
in the menu area when reverse gear is engaged.
124 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
"Suspension" indicator
ON OFF
In the case of ON position, the menu automatically changes to the Suspension menu when
pressing the following pushbuttons, refer to "Suspension" menu [} page 113]:
▪ Axle suspension locking.
▪ Front left-hand suspension cylinder.
▪ Front right-hand suspension cylinder.
▪ Rear left-hand suspension cylinder.
▪ Rear right-hand suspension cylinder.
▪ Axle oscillation.
Operation example
1. Press the Change automatic menu change button next to the desired function.
ð The setting in the Automatic menu change display area changes.
2. Save the selection with the Confirm button.
ð The change of the automatic menu change is stored.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 125

2019-10_EN
5.12.4 “Navigation control button assignment” setting
Introduction
Different menus can be assigned to the function keys 1 to 4 of the navigation control.
Pressing the function key selects the preassigned menu.
Overview
Navigation control
1 2 3
4
1 Function key 1 (Button 1) 3 Function key 3 (Button 3)
2 Function key 2 (Button 2) 3 Function key 4 (Button 4)
Navigation control button assignment
Shortcuts
Button 2 None
Button 3 None
Button 4 None
A B 1 C
A Function keys display area 1 Reassign function key button
B Function keys assignment display area
C Function keys reassignment button area
Button
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Reassign function key" button

Press button = change assignment of the adjacent function key.
Operation example
1. Press the Reassign function key button until the desired menu appears in the Function key
assignment display area.
126 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
2. Save the selection with the Confirm button.

ð The function key assignment is changed.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 127

2019-10_EN
5.12.5 “Brightness” setting
Overview
AUTO

"Minus" button
Press button = reduce value.
"Brightness Display AUTO" indicator

Press button = automatic brightness setting of the main display.
A sensor will automatically set the brightness of the main display according to the bright-
AUTO
ness of the surroundings.
"Plus" button
Press button = increase value.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
128 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
5.13 Menu "Service"
Overview
00109
Service Menu
Enter Service Key :
OCD
Update
I/0
4 3 2 1
1 Engine fault menu button 3 —

2 Tyre pressure menu button 4 —
Buttons
"Engine fault menu" button
Press button = go to the Engine fault menu.
For further information, refer to "Engine fault" menu [} page 130].
"Tyre pressure menu" button

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press button = go to the Tyre pressure menu.

For further information, refer to "Tyre pressure" menu [} page 131].
ATF 220G-5 129

2019-10_EN
5.13.1 "Engine fault" menu
Introduction
In this menu, error codes are issued. For further information about the error codes, please ask
the TADANO After-Sales Service.
Overview
00293
Active Controller: CPC4 - Engine1

SPN FMI OC SPN FMI OC
6 5 4 3 2
1 Active control unit indicator 4 Error rate indicator

2 Change control unit button 5 Error type indicator
3 Change control unit button 6 Error category indicator
Indicators
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Active control unit" indicator

Active Con- The Active control unit indicator shows the active control unit.
troller
"Error rate" indicator

OC The Error rate indicator shows the frequency of the error since switching on the ignition.
130 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
"Error type" indicator

FMI The Error type indicator shows the error type.
"Error category" indicator

SPN The Error category indicator shows the error category.
Buttons
"Change control unit" buttons
Press buttons = the menu scrolls to the previous or the next control unit.
5.13.2 "Tyre pressure" menu
Overview
00267
Pressure: _._ _._

Temperature: _._ _._
Pressure: _._ _._

Pressure: _._ _._

Pressure: _._ _._

Pressure: _._ _._

_._ _._
Temperature:
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2 1
1 Display Symbol 2 Tyre parameters indicator
ATF 220G-5 131

2019-10_EN
Indicators
"Tyre parameters" indicator
Pressure: The Tyre parameters indicator shows the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature.
Temperat-
ure:
"Display symbols"
The display symbols show information and error messages on the respective tyre.
No display = tyre pressure is in order.
Lights up yellow = minor pressure fault.
Lights up red = serious pressure fault.
Lights up red = Communication error.
Display Symbol
Overview
1
Pressure: 2
Temperature:
3
Pressure:
Temperature: 4
5
Pressure:
Temperature: 6
7
Pressure:
Temperature: 8
Pressure: 9
Temperature: 10
1 Left-hand Axle 1 tyre parameters indicator 6 Right-hand Axle 3 tyre parameters indic-
ator
2 Right-hand Axle 1 tyre parameters indic- 7 Left-hand Axle 4 tyre parameters indicator
ator
ator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ator
ator
132 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Tyre parameters
Overview
1
Pressure: _._ _._
_._ _._ 2
Temperature:
3
Pressure: _._ _._
Temperature: _._ _._ 4
5
Pressure: _._ _._
Temperature: _._ _._ 6
7
Pressure: _._ _._ 8
9
Pressure: _._ _._
_._ _._ 10
Temperature:
ator
ator
ator
ator
ator
5.14 Messages, pilot and warning lamps
5.14.1 Messages
Errors of components
Desig- Component name Description, Function
nation
00 0000 B613 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber FR: SC
00 0001 B613 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber FR: CB
00 0002 B609 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber FL: SC
00 0003 B609 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber FL: CB
00 0004 B611 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber RL: SC
00 0005 B611 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber RL: CB
00 0006 B615 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber RR: SC
00 0007 B615 Outrigger SP sensor piston chamber RR: CB
00 0008 B614 Outrigger SP sensor annulus FR: SC
00 0009 B614 Outrigger SP sensor annulus FR: CB
00 0010 B610 Outrigger SP sensor annulus FL: SC
00 0011 B610 Outrigger SP sensor annulus FL: CB
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
00 0012 B612 Outrigger SP sensor annulus RL: SC

00 0013 B612 Outrigger SP sensor annulus RL: CB
00 0014 B616 Outrigger SP sensor annulus RR: SC
00 0015 B616 Outrigger SP sensor annulus RR: CB
00 0016 K120 Outrigger Bordering light outrigger: CB
00 0017 K120 Outrigger Bordering light outrigger: SC
ATF 220G-5 133

2019-10_EN

nation
00 0018 B410 Suspension Sensor Axle load limitation 1: SC
00 0019 B410 Suspension Sensor Axle load limitation 1: CB
00 0024 B409 Suspension Sensor Suspension level: SC
00 0025 B409 Suspension Sensor Suspension level: CB
01 0000 B016 Brake Sensor brake circuit 1: CB
01 0001 B016 Brake Sensor brake circuit 1: SC
02 0001 Y031 Hydraulics Hydraulic valve: short-circuit
03 0001 Y038 Brake Valve axle 3 unbraked: SC
04 0001 Y618 Hydraulics Toggling fan/consumers: SC
01 0002 B019 Brake Sensor brake circuit 2: CB
02 0002 Y033 Hydraulics Hydraulic valve: cable break
03 0002 Y139 Emergency control Valve emerg. supply superstructure:
CB
04 0002 Y619 Hydraulics Pressure limiting setting level 1: CB
01 0003 B019 Brake Sensor brake circuit 2: SC
02 0003 Y033 Hydraulics Hydraulic valve: short-circuit
03 0003 Y139 Emergency control Valve emerg. supply superstructure:
SC
04 0003 Y619 Hydraulics Pressure limiting setting level 1: SC
01 0004 A015 Hydraulics Fill level sensor hydraulic oil: CB
02 0004 B515 Instrument panel Warning buzzer: cable break
03 0004 Y401 Suspension Lower mobile crane FL: CB
04 0004 Y620 Hydraulics Pressure limiting setting level 2: CB
01 0005 A015 Hydraulics Fill level sensor hydraulic oil: SC
02 0005 B515 Instrument panel Warning buzzer: short-circuit
03 0005 Y401 Suspension Lower mobile crane FL: SC
04 0005 Y620 Hydraulics Pressure limiting setting level 2: SC
01 0006 A015 Hydraulics Temperature sensor hydraulic oil: CB
02 0006 E010 Lighting Daytime running light: cable break
03 0006 Y402 Suspension Raise mobile crane FL: CB
04 0006 B606 Outrigger CAN bus: conn. to length sensor FR
lost
01 0007 A015 Hydraulics Temperature sensor hydraulic oil: SC
02 0007 E010 Lighting Daytime running light: short-circuit
03 0007 Y402 Suspension Raise mobile crane FL: SC
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
04 0007 B608 Outrigger CAN bus: conn. to length sensor RR

lost
01 0008 J1939 Communication CAN bus: conn. to engine bus J1939
lost
02 0008 K008 Lighting Rear fog light: cable break
03 0008 Y403 Suspension Lower mobile crane RL: CB
134 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

nation
04 0008 B607 Outrigger CAN bus: conn. to length sensor RL
lost
01 0009 B016 Brake Brake circuit 1: Pressure < 5.5 bar
02 0009 K008 Lighting Rear fog light: short-circuit
03 0009 Y403 Suspension Lower the mobile crane RL: SC
04 0009 B605 Outrigger CAN bus: conn. to length sensor FL
lost
02 0010 K061 Instrument panel Warn. lamp central warning: cable
break
03 0010 Y404 Suspension Raise mobile crane RL: CB
04 0010 D016 Outrigger CAN bus: connect. to tilt sensor lost
01 0011 A020 Dolly Stop immediately! Dolly incorrect
02 0011 K061 Instrument panel Warn. lamp central warning: SC
03 0011 Y404 Suspension Raise mobile crane RL: SC
01 0012 A502 Steering Steering: rear steering reports error
02 0012 K001 Electrical system Relay ignition: cable break
03 0012 Y405 Suspension Lower mobile crane FR: CB
01 0013 S039 Steering Steering: steer pump active eng run-
ning
02 0013 K001 Electrical system Relay ignition: short-circuit
03 0013 Y405 Suspension Lower mobile crane FR: SC
01 0014 S040 Steering Steer: emerg steer pump 1 act veh
stat
02 0014 K006 Lighting Relay fog lamp: cable break
03 0014 Y406 Suspension Raise mobile crane FR: CB
01 0015 S522 Steering Steer: emerg steer pump 2 act veh
stat
02 0015 K006 Lighting Relay fog lamp: short-circuit
03 0015 Y406 Suspension Raise mobile crane FR: SC
01 0016 S039 Steering Steering: steer pump inact eng run-
ning
02 0016 K009 Lighting Relay hazard warning lights: CB
03 0016 Y407 Suspension Lower mobile crane RR: CB
01 0017 A020 PTO Error PTO conn. lift. plat. op.: code 1
02 0017 K009 Lighting Relay hazard warning lights: SC
03 0017 Y407 Suspension Lower the mobile crane RR: SC
02 0018 K012 Electrical system Relay signal horn: cable break
03 0018 Y408 Suspension Raise mobile crane RR: CB
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
02 0019 K012 Electrical system Relay signal horn: short-circuit
03 0019 Y408 Suspension Raise mobile crane RR: SC
04 0019 A020 Platform Electrical emergency pump: CB
02 0020 K013 Instrument panel Relay battery main switch: CB
ATF 220G-5 135

2019-10_EN

nation
03 0020 Y411 Suspension Axle suspension locking: CB
04 0020 A020 Platform Electrical emergency pump: SC
02 0021 K013 Instrument panel Relay battery main switch: SC
03 0021 Y411 Suspension Axle suspension locking: SC
02 0022 K035/ Electrical system Relay self-retaining: CB
K036
03 0022 Y412 Suspension Axle oscillation: Cable break
02 0023 K035/ Electrical system Relay self-retaining: SC
K036
03 0023 Y412 Suspension Axle oscillation: short-circuit
01 0024 A020 Platform Error PTO conn. lift. plat. op.: code 8
02 0024 K044 Cruise control Relay speed/cruise control minus: CB
03 0024 Y415 Suspension Valve axle balance axle 3: CB
02 0025 K044 Cruise control Relay speed/cruise control minus: SC
03 0025 Y415 Suspension Valve axle balance axle 3: SC
02 0026 K045 Cruise control Relay speed/cruise control plus: CB
03 0026 Y438 Suspension Raise axles: cable break
02 0027 K045 Cruise control Relay speed/cruise control plus: SC
03 0027 Y438 Suspension Raise axles: short-circuit
02 0028 K066 Lighting Relay working floodlights left: CB
03 0028 Y440 Suspension Hold axles: cable break
02 0029 K066 Lighting Relay working floodlights left: SC
03 0029 Y440 Suspension Hold axles: short-circuit
02 0030 K067 Lighting Relay working floodlights right: CB
03 0030 Y45X Suspension Valve axle 3 depressurised: CB
01 0031 A020 Suspension Lift axle: axle not lifted
02 0031 K067 Lighting Relay working floodlights right: SC
03 0031 Y45X Suspension Valve axle 3 depressurised: SC
01 0032 A020 Suspension Lift axle: error lowering axle
02 0032 K101 Brake Relay ABS off-road mode: CB
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
03 0032 Y602 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam RR: CB

01 0033 A020 Suspension Lift axle: error lifting axle
02 0033 K101 Brake Relay ABS off-road mode: SC
03 0033 Y602 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam RR: SC
01 0034 A020 Suspension Lift axle: error in program sequence
03 0034 Y603 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam RR: CB
136 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

nation
01 0035 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Communication to CPC4
lost
03 0035 Y603 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam RR: SC
01 0036 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Communication to MCM
lost
02 0036 S016 Instrument panel Supply switch transfer case: CB
03 0036 Y604 Outrigger Extend outrigger float RR: CB
01 0037 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm. to gearbox ECU
lost
02 0037 S016 Instrument panel Supply switch transfer case: SC
03 0037 Y604 Outrigger Extend outrigger float RR: SC
01 0038 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm. to braking system
lost
02 0038 Y007 Drive Request inter-wheel diff. locks: CB
03 0038 Y605 Outrigger Retract outrigger float RR: CB
01 0039 J1939 Communication CAN bus Comm. to gearbox retarder
lost
02 0039 Y007 Drive Request inter-wheel diff. locks: SC
03 0039 Y605 Outrigger Retract outrigger float RR: SC
01 0040 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm to tyre pr monit sys
lost
02 0040 Y0XX Drive Request inter-axle diff. locks: CB
03 0040 Y606 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam RL: CB
01 0041 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm. to steering comp. 1
lost
02 0041 Y0XX Drive Request inter-axle diff. locks: SC
03 0041 Y606 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam RL: SC
01 0042 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm. to steering comp. 2
lost
02 0042 Y111 AMOT AMOT-Control shut-off valve: CB
03 0042 Y607 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam RL: CB
01 0043 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Communication to ACM lost
02 0043 Y111 AMOT AMOT-Control shut-off valve: SC
03 0043 Y607 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam RL: SC
01 0044 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm. to converter lost
03 0044 Y608 Outrigger Extend outrigger float RL: CB
01 0045 J1939 Communication CAN bus: Comm. to tachograph lost
03 0045 Y608 Outrigger Extend outrigger float RL: SC
01 0046 A020 EEPROM EEPROM data damaged
02 0000 Y031 Hydraulics Hydraulic valve: cable break
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
02 0046 B011 Fuel Fill level sensor fuel: CB

03 0046 Y609 Outrigger Retract outrigger float RL: CB
02 0047 B011 Fuel Fill level sensor fuel: SC
03 0047 Y609 Outrigger Retract outrigger float RL: SC
02 0048 S439 Suspension Length measurement suspension FR:
CB
03 0048 Y610 Outrigger Extend outrigger float FL: CB
ATF 220G-5 137

2019-10_EN

nation
02 0049 S439 Suspension Length measurement suspension FR:
SC
03 0049 Y610 Outrigger Extend outrigger float FL: SC
02 0050 S440 Suspension Length measurement suspension RR:
CB
03 0050 Y611 Outrigger Retract outrigger float FL: CB
02 0051 S440 Suspension Length measurement suspension RR:
SC
03 0051 Y611 Outrigger Retract outrigger float FL: SC
02 0052 S438 Suspension Length measurement suspension RL:
CB
03 0052 Y612 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam FL: CB
02 0053 S438 Suspension Length measurement suspension RL:
SC
03 0053 Y612 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam FL: SC
02 0054 A020 Communication CAN bus: conn. to cent. cont. sys. lost
03 0054 Y613 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam FL: CB
02 0055 A040 Communication CAN bus: connect. to main display
lost
03 0055 Y613 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam FL: SC
02 0056 D613 Communication CAN bus: connect. to IO node lost
03 0056 Y614 Outrigger Extend outrigger float FR: CB
03 0057 Y614 Outrigger Extend outrigger float FR: SC
03 0058 Y615 Outrigger Retract outrigger float FR: CB
03 0059 Y615 Outrigger Retract outrigger float FR: SC
03 0060 Y616 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam FR: CB
03 0061 Y616 Outrigger Extend outrigger beam FR: SC
02 0062 D0XX Communication CAN bus: connect. to IO node lost
03 0062 Y617 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam FR: CB
02 0063 D611 Communication CAN bus: comm lost outrig ctrl pan
right
03 0063 Y617 Outrigger Retract outrigger beam FR: SC
02 0064 D610 Communication CAN bus: comm lost outrig ctrl pan
left
03 0064 Y463 Platform Activation hydraulic generator: CB
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
02 0065 A965 Communication CAN bus: connect. superstructure lost

03 0065 Y463 Platform Activation hydraulic generator: SC
02 0066 A049 Immobilizer Immobilizer: communication error
03 0066 Y618 Hydraulics Toggling ventilation/consumers: CB
02 0067 A049 Immobilizer Immobilizer: antenna error
03 0067 Y618 Hydraulics Toggling ventilation/consumers: SC
02 0068 A049 Immobilizer Immobilizer: invalid data received
138 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

nation
03 0068 Y409 Suspension Automatic levelling: CB
02 0069 A049 Immobilizer Immobilizer: invalid key received
03 0069 Y410 Suspension Connection Axle 5 and 6: CB
03 0070 Y455 Suspension Axle oscillation: Cable break
03 0071 Y421/ Suspension Axle load limitation 1: CB
Y422
02 0072 K004 Drive Generator: inactive, engine running
Y426
02 0073 K004 Drive Generator: active, engine not running
Y430
02 0074 S001 Drive Check wiring of start/stop pushbutton
03 0074 Y423 Suspension Lower mobile crane RL 2: CB
02 0075 A007 Communication CAN bus comm lost to Navigation-
Control
02 0076 A020 Platform CAN bus comm lost to lifting platform
03 0000 Y038 Brake Valve axle 3 unbraked: CB
03 0075 Y424 Suspension Raise mobile crane RL 2: CB
03 0076 Y427 Suspension Lower mobile crane RR 2: CB
03 0077 Y428 Suspension Raise mobile crane RR 2: CB
03 0078 Y621 Outrigger Extend auxiliary support FR: CB
03 0079 Y622 Outrigger Retract auxiliary support FR: CB
03 0080 Y623 Outrigger Extend auxiliary support RR: CB
03 0081 Y624 Outrigger Retract auxiliary support RR: CB
03 0082 Y626 Outrigger Extend auxiliary support FL: CB
03 0083 Y627 Outrigger Retract auxiliary support FL: CB
03 0084 Y628 Outrigger Extend auxiliary support RL: CB
03 0085 Y629 Outrigger Retract auxiliary support RL: CB
03 0086 Y631 Outrigger Extend centre support: CB
03 0087 Y632 Outrigger Retract centre support: CB
03 0088 Y633 Outrigger Toggl Centre support - distance cyl:
CB
04 0000 Y618 Hydraulics Toggling fan/consumers: CB
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 139

2019-10_EN
Errors related to safety condition

nation
10 0000 A015 Hydraulics Hydraulics: oil level too low
10 0001 A015 Hydraulics Hydraulics: oil temperature too high
10 0002 X121 Brake Brake lining wear
10 0003 S038 Engine Air cleaner is contaminated
10 0004 A020 Dolly Dolly: pre-warn. pres. sle. brake drop.
10 0005 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure on axle 1 left: too low
10 0006 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure on axle 1 left: too high
10 0017 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure on axle 1 right: too low
10 0018 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure on axle 1 right: too high
10 0029 Y0XX Drive Diff: inter-axle diff req but inactive
10 0030 Y0XX Drive Diff: inter-axle diff not req but active
10 0031 Y007 Drive Diff: inter-wheel diff req but inactive
10 0032 Y007 Drive Diff: inter-wheel dif not req but active
10 0033 B011 Fuel Fill level fuel tank low
10 0034 A101 Brake ABS system is inactive
10 0035 X101 Brake Trailer ABS system is inactive
10 0036 S413 Suspension Axle susp locking FR: not req but act-
ive
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
10 0037 S415 Suspension Axle susp locking RR: not req but act-
ive
10 0038 S414 Suspension Axle susp locking RL: not req but act-
ive
10 0039 S412 Suspension Axle susp locking FL: not req but act-
ive
140 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

nation
10 0040 S413 Suspension Axle susp locking FR: req but not act-
ive
10 0041 S415 Suspension Axle susp locking RR: req but not act-
ive
10 0042 S414 Suspension Axle susp locking RL: req but not act-
ive
10 0043 S412 Suspension Axle susp locking FL: req but not act-
ive
10 0044 M005 Electrical system Fill level windshield washer system
low
10 0045 B011 Heating Fill level fuel low
10 0046 A010 Engine Particulate filter: regen. inhibited
11 0000 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pres. axle 1 left: critic. too low
11 0001 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pres. axle 1 left: critic. too high
11 0012 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pres. axle 1 right: critic. too low
11 0013 A107 Tyre pressure Tyre pres. axle 1 right: crit. too high
11 0024 A020 Drive Diff.: speed for deactivation exceeded
11 0025 S139 Superstructure Emerg. operation superstructure act-
ive
12 0000 S058 Hydraulics Hydraulics: oil filter soiled
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
12 0001 S529 Steering Steering: oil filter soiled

12 0002 A030 Instrument panel Tachograph shows errors
ATF 220G-5 141

2019-10_EN
Warnings
nation
30 0000 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases AdBlue®: fill level warning
30 0001 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases AdBlue®: fill level low
30 0002 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases AdBlue®: operating restriction
30 0003 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases AdBlue®: operating restriction
30 0004 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases AdBlue®: error exhaust gas aftertreat.
30 0005 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases AdBlue®: error exhaust gas aftertreat.
30 0006 A010 Engine Both drop arm inputs active
30 0007 A010 Engine Cruise contr. active, although deactiv.
30 0008 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases Partic. filter soiled, start regen.
30 0009 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases Partic. filter: regener. neces. or act.
30 0010 S030 Superstructure Inc. speed in superstr. oper. not poss.
31 0000 A301 Drive Converter: oil temperature too high
31 0001 A010 Engine Stop immediately! Engine fault
31 0002 A010 Engine Stop immediately! Engine fault
31 0003 A010 Engine Coolant level too low
31 0004 A010 Engine Coolant temperature too high
31 0005 A010 Engine Oil pressure too low
31 0006 A010 Engine Oil level too low
31 0007 A031 Aftertreatment of exhaust gases Partic. filter full - start regen. now
32 0000 A010 Engine Check engine error
32 0001 A010 Engine Check engine error
32 0002 A010 Engine Oil level low
32 0003 Y320 PTO Valve PTO OFF: CB
32 0004 Y320 PTO Valve PTO OFF: SC
32 0005 Y319 PTO Valve PTO ON: CB
32 0006 Y319 PTO Valve PTO ON: SC
32 0007 Y321 PTO Valve transfer case neutral: CB
32 0008 Y321 PTO Valve transfer case neutral: SC
32 0009 Y014 PTO Valve transfer case road: CB
32 0010 Y014 PTO Valve transfer case road: SC
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
142 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Information
nation
21 0000 A020 Steering Logic errors: both direct. valv. activ.
21 0001 A020 Steering Log. errors: dir. switch act. both dir.
21 0002 A020 Steering Interlock inactive
21 0003 A020 Steering Upshift lock unlocked axle inactive
22 0000 A020 Steering Total volt. angle sensor implausible
22 0001 A020 Steering Axle not in interlock position
22 0002 A020 Steering Unwanted steering movement
22 0003 A020 Steering Upshift lock during locking inactive
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 143

2019-10_EN
6 Transport
6 Transport
6.1 Ladders
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of falling due to unsafe or defective ladders.
When climbing and stepping on ladders, take utmost care especially in
case of humid weather. There is risk of slipping and risk of falling. This
could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Keep ladders clean at all times.
2. Wear sturdy, non-slip footwear.
3. Always hold the ladder beams or handles while climbing up or down.
4. Replace faulty ladders immediately.
5. Ensure that the ladders are safe.
WARNING
Risk of accidents when driving with swivelled out ladders.
Swivelling ladders protrude at the sides of the mobile crane. This could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Before driving, swivel in the ladders.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
144 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
6 Transport
Overview
1 Swivelling ladders 2 Ladders, permanently attached
Overview of ladder swivelling
A Transport position 1 Ladder

B Climbing position 2 Clamp
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Swivelling ladder out

▪ Wheels must be in straight position.
1. Extract the ladder from clamp by pulling upwards.
2. Swivel the ladder into climbing position.
ATF 220G-5 145

2019-10_EN
6 Transport
Swivelling ladder in
1 Lever
Swivelling ladder in
1. Unlock ladder. Push lever upwards.
2. Swivel the ladder into transport position.
3. Press the ladder into de clamp.
ð The ladder is secured in transport position.
6.2 Loading the mobile crane
Safety instructions
DANGER
Risk of accident due to improper securing.
If improperly secured, the mobile crane can move and possible break
away. This can cause serious accidents.
1. Secure the mobile crane to prevent it from rolling away.
2. Completely retract the mobile crane's hydraulic suspension.
3. Secure the mobile crane at all the specified attachment points.
Introduction
The lifting loads indicated below relate to a crane configuration with an axle load of 12 t.
Other axle loads result in other lifting loads.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
146 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
6 Transport
Overview of lifting points
1 38.8 t 2 21.1 t
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 147

2019-10_EN
6 Transport
Overview of attachment points
Loading onto trailers

If the mobile crane cannot be driven onto the trailer with its own power, the following conditions
must be fulfilled:
▪ The hydraulic steering must be functional.
▪ Use a towbar that is dimensioned for this work.
▪ An signalling person is present.
▪ The people involved must have visual contact with each other.
▪ The pushing vehicle must have a towing hitch.
1. Connect the mobile crane and the pushing vehicle to the towing hitches using the towbar.
2. Manoeuvre the mobile crane onto the trailer with the aid of the pushing vehicle.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5. Lash down the mobile crane.

6. Detach the towbar from the mobile crane.
On a ship or railway
1. Extend the outrigger as far as necessary and secure it.
148 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
6 Transport
2. Lift the mobile crane onto the outriggers.

3. Lower the mobile crane onto the transport area.
6. Lash down the mobile crane.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 149

2019-10_EN
7 Putting into operation
7.1 Carrier cab
7.1.1 Unlocking and locking doors from inside / outside
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to carrier cab door that opens.
A carrier cab door, which is not closed correctly, can open when driving.
Persons may fall out off the carrier cab.
A carrier cab door that opens inadvertently when driving may lead to acci-
dents.
1. Close de carrier cab doors before driving.
2. Fasten the seat belts.
CAUTION
Risk of injury when closing the carrier cab door.
If the carrier cab doors are held by the frame while closing from outside,
the fingers can get caught and crushed.
1. Always hold the carrier cab door by the handle when closing from the
outside.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
150 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Unlocking and locking doors with the key
1 Key 2 Door lock
1. Put the key in the door lock and turn it to the left (anti-clockwise).
1. Put the key in the door lock and turn it to the right (clockwise).
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 151

2019-10_EN
Unlocking and locking doors with remote operation
1 Door lock 4 Unlock carrier cab door pushbutton

2 Ignition key 5 —
3 Lock carrier cab door pushbutton
1. Press the Unlock carrier cab door pushbutton on the ignition key.
1. Press the Lock carrier cab door pushbutton on the ignition key.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
152 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Opening and closing doors from outside
1 Button 2 Handle
Procedure – Opening
1. Pull the handle.
ð Door is open.
Procedure – Closing
1. Hold the door by the handle and push it to lock it.
ð The door is closed.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 153

2019-10_EN
Opening and closing doors from inside
1 Door opener 2 Handle
Procedure – Opening
➢ If the door is to be opened, it must be unlocked.
1. Pull on the door opener. Open the door.
ð Door is open.
Procedure – Closing
1. Hold the door by the handle and pull it into the lock to lock it.
ð The door is closed.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
154 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Locking doors from inside
1 Door lock
Procedure – Looking
1. Press the door lock.
Procedure – Unlooking
1. Pull the door lock or the door opener.
7.1.2 Adjusting seats
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to objects in the adjusting range of the seat.
Objects in the range of the seat controls can cause injuries when adjusting
the seat.
1. Eliminate objects in the adjusting range of the seat.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 155

2019-10_EN
WARNING
Risk of accidents when adjusting the seat while driving.
If the seat is adjusted while driving, this may lead to driving errors. This
may lead to accidents.
1. Before driving, adjust the seat such that the pedals can be actuated
correctly, and the steering wheel can be operated securely.
2. Before driving, check if the seat is fixed securely.
3. Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Driver seat
Overview
1 Backrest lever 8 Longitudinal adjustment lever

2 Side contour switch 9 Inclination of seat surface lever
3 Lumbar support, top switch 10 Comfort seat rail release strap
4 Lumbar support, bottom switch 11 Fast lowering switch
5 Seat height lever 12 Seat depth lever
6 Vertical shock absorption lever 13 Armrest actuator wheel
7 Seat heater switch
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Procedure – Adjusting backrest

1. Pull the Backrest lever up and hold it.
2. Move the backrest forwards or backwards.
156 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
3. Release the Backrest lever and lock the backrest in place. The interlock shall engage aud-
ibly.
ð The backrest has been adjusted.
Procedure – Adjusting side contour

1. Press + or - on Side contour switch.
ð The right and left side contour changes.
Procedure – Adjusting lumbar support

1. Press Lumbar support, top or bottom switches towards + or -.
ð The top or bottom lumbar support changes.
Procedure – Adjusting seat height

1. Pull seat forcefully upwards.
ð The seat engages in higher seat position.
2. Pull seat upwards exceeding the highest locking position.
ð The seat moves downwards and engages in the lowest seat position.
ð The seat height has been adjusted
Procedure – Adjusting vertical shock absorption

1. Push Vertical shock absorption lever in direction soft or in direction hard and engage (four
stages).
Highest position = soft absorption.
Lowest position = hard absorption.
ð The vertical shock absorption is adjusted.
Procedure– Switching seat heater on/off

1. Press the Seat heater switch to position I or II.
ð The seat heater is switched on in position I or II.
2. Press the switch to the 0 position.
ð The seat heater is switched off.
Procedure– Adjusting seat in longitudinal direction

1. Pull the longitudinal adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Put the seat in the desired position.
3. Release the longitudinal adjustment lever and lock the seat in place. The interlock shall en-
gage audibly.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð The longitudinal adjustment is set.
Procedure– Adjusting the inclination of the seat area

1. Pull the Inclination of the seat area lever up and hold it.
2. Put the seat area in the desired position.
ATF 220G-5 157

2019-10_EN
3. Release the Inclination of the seat area lever. The interlock shall engage audibly.
ð The seat area is set.
Procedure – Adjusting comfort seat rail release

1. Pull the comfort seat rail release.
ð The seat rail is released.
2. Let go of the comfort seat rail release.
ð The seat rail is locked.
Procedure– Switching fast lowering on/off

1. Press the Fast lowering switch.
ð The seat lowers into the lowest position.
1. Press the Fast lowering switch again.
ð The seat returns to its initial position.
Procedure – Adjusting seat depth

1. Pull the seat depth lever up and hold it.
2. Put the seat area in the desired position.
3. Release the seat depth lever. The interlock shall engage audibly.
ð The seat depth is set.
Procedure – Adjusting armrest

1. Turn the armrest actuator wheel clockwise or anti-clockwise.
ð The armrest angle is adjusted.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
158 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Passenger's seat
Optionally, a driver's seat can also be installed as passenger seat. For the
description, refer to Driver seat [} page 156].
Overview
1 Longitudinal adjustment lever 2 Backrest lever
Procedure– Adjusting seat in longitudinal direction

1. Pull the longitudinal adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Put the seat in the desired position.
3. Release the longitudinal adjustment lever and lock the seat in place. The interlock shall en-
gage audibly.
ð The longitudinal adjustment is set.
Procedure – Adjusting backrest

1. Pull the Backrest lever up and hold it.
2. Move the backrest forwards or backwards.
3. Release the Backrest lever and lock the backrest in place. The interlock shall engage aud-
ibly.
ð The backrest has been adjusted.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 159

2019-10_EN
7.1.3 Adjusting the steering wheel
Overview
1 Steering wheel adjustment pushbutton
Procedure
➢ Mobile crane is standing still and parking brake is engaged.
1. Press the steering wheel adjustment pushbutton.
2. Adjust the inclination and height, hold the steering wheel in the desired position.
3. The locking takes place automatically after a few seconds.
ð The steering wheel is adjusted.
7.1.4 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
Safety instructions
WARNING
Danger to life if the seat belt is not fastened.
The passengers can be severely injured or killed in case of accident if the
seat belt is not fastened.
1. Fasten seat belt when driving.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
160 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Safety belt 3 Buckle

2 Tongue 4 Button
Fastening the seat belt

1. Pulling forward slightly, pull the seat belt out of the bracket.
2. Engage the tongue in the buckle.
ð The seat belt is fastened.
Unfastening the seat belt

1. Push the buckle button.
2. Return the seat belt into the bracket.
ð The seat belt is unfastened.
7.1.5 Adjusting the external mirror
Safety instructions
WARNING
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Risk of accidents due to incorrectly adjusted mirrors.

Incorrectly adjusted mirrors may lead to inadequate visibility. This may
lead to accidents.
1. Adjust the external mirrors such that adequate visibility is ensured.
ATF 220G-5 161

2019-10_EN
Adjusting mirror supports
1 Driver side mirror α 75°

2 Passenger side mirror β 75°
1. Adjust mirror supports according to specified values.
Adjusting the external mirror

Requirements
▪ Battery main switch switch is switched on.
▪ The ignition is switched on.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
162 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Mirror adjuster installation location
1 Mirror adjustment
Electrical adjustment of external mirrors
A Select left mirror 1 Mirror adjustment rotary knob

B Select right mirror
1. Turn the Mirror adjustment rotary knob to the right or to the left.
ð The right or left mirror is selected.
2. Push the Mirror adjustment rotary knob forward, backward, to the left or to the right.
ð The mirror moves in the desired direction.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð The mirror is adjusted.
ATF 220G-5 163

2019-10_EN
7.1.6 Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system
Overview
1 2 3
4
5
1 Blower rotary knob 4 Circulating air switch

2 Temperature control rotary knob 5 Air conditioning system switch
3 Air distribution rotary knob
Requirements
Blower
Positions of the rotary knob

▪ Blower off (top).
▪ First stage: Low power.
▪ Second stage: Medium power.
▪ Third stage: High power (right).
Procedure – Switching the blower on

1. Switch the blower on; to do this, turn Blower rotary knob to the right.
Control air flow as required.
ð The blower has been switched on.
Procedure – Switching the blower off

1. Switch the blower off; to do this, turn Blower rotary knob to the left.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð The blower has been switched off.
164 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Temperature control
Positions of the rotary knob

▪ Left = Cold.
▪ Right = Warm.
Procedure – Setting temperature

1. Adjust temperature control as required.
ð The temperature has been set.
Air distribution
Overview – Positions of the "Air distribution" rotary knob
Air into interior Air into interior and to windows Air to windows
Changing air distribution

1. Turn the Air distribution rotary knob into the desired position.
Circulating air
Introduction
The supply of outside air can be interrupted. The air circulates in the cab's closed circuit.
Positions of the Circulating air switch:
▪ Left = supply of outside air.
▪ Right = circulating air operation, closed circuit.
Procedure – Switching on circulating air operation

1. Push Circulating air switch to the right into position 1.
ð The circulating air operation has been switched on.
Procedure – Switching off circulating air operation

1. Push Circulating air switch to the left, into position 0.
ð The circulating air operation has been switched off.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 165

2019-10_EN
Air conditioning system
Run the air conditioning system for approx. 10 minutes each month during
cold and dry periods in winter and if it is not being used frequently.
The air conditioning system is not operational if the outside temperature is
particularly low.
Requirements
▪ Carrier cab is closed.
▪ Engine is running.
Procedure – Switching the air conditioning system on

Positions of the Air conditioning system switch:
▪ Left = off.
▪ Right = on.
1. Push Air conditioning system switch to the right into position 1.
ð The air conditioning system has been switched on.
Procedure – Regulating temperature

1. Set the temperature as required with the Temperature control rotary knob.
2. Set the air distribution as required with the Air distribution rotary knob.
3. Set the blower as required with the Blower rotary knob.
ð The temperature has been set.
Procedure – Switching the air conditioning system off

1. Push Air conditioning system switch to the left into position 0.
ð The air conditioning system has been switched off.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
166 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
7.1.7 Opening/closing the carrier cab side window
Safety instructions
WARNING
Danger of crushing when closing the side window.
When closing the side window, body parts that are in between the side
window and the door frame may get crushed.
1. When closing the side window do not reach into the space between
the side window and the door frame.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to moisture in the carrier cab.
If moisture penetrates into the carrier cab, components may be damaged.
The resulting failures may lead to accidents. This may lead to personal in-
juries and material damage.
1. Close side windows and doors when leaving the carrier cab.
Opening/closing the side window on the driver's side
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Side window, driver's side pushbutton
Procedure — Opening side window

1. Press back and hold the Side window, driver's side pushbutton.
ATF 220G-5 167

2019-10_EN
Procedure — Closing side window

1. Press forward and hold the Side window, driver's side pushbutton.
Opening/closing the side window on the passenger side
Overview
1 Side window, passenger side pushbutton
Procedure — Opening side window

1. Press back and hold the Side window, passenger side pushbutton.
Procedure — Closing side window

1. Press forward and hold the Side window, passenger side pushbutton.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
168 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
7.1.8 Interior lighting
1 Switch position Interior lighting on 3 Switch position Interior lighting when door
is open
2 Switch position Interior lighting off
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 169

2019-10_EN
7.2 Checking the lighting
CAUTION
Risk of accidents due to defective lighting.
Soiled, missing or not functioning lighting may affect the operational safety
of the mobile crane. This may lead to accidents.
1. Check the lighting before driving, and clean if necessary.
2. Have the defective lighting repaired or exchanged by professionals.
7.2.2 Checking exterior lighting
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Rotary beacon 12 Clearance lamp

2 Clearance lamp 13 Clearance lamp
3 Side marker lamp 14 Flashing light
4 Reverse light 15 —
5 Rear fog light 16 Direction indicator flashing light
6 Rear light 17 Daytime running light and position light
170 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
7 License plate light 18 Fog light

8 Reflector 19 Low beam light and high beam light
9 Brake light 20 Clearance lamp
10 Direction indicator flashing light 21 Roof lights (Canada) *)
11 Clearance lamp
Requirements
Checking the lighting

1. Check all lighting devices for soiling or damages. If necessary, clean or exchange.
2. For checking the lighting, refer to Checking lighting, pilot lamps and indicators individually
[} page 172].
7.2.3 Checking interior pilot lamps and indicators
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of accidents due to defective operating elements.
Warning and lighting devices can no longer be operated. This may lead to
accidents.
1. Before driving, have defective operating elements repaired or ex-
changed by professionals.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 171

2019-10_EN
Overview
1
2 3
12
4
11
10
8
9 7
6 5
1 Direction indicator pilot lamp 7 Left steering column switch

2 Blower switch 8 Parking light / low beam light switch
3 Temperature control switch 9 Battery main switch switch
4 Hazard warning lights switch 10 Rotary beacon switch
5 Rear fog light indicator 11 Fog light switch
6 High beam light indicator 12 Rear fog light pushbutton
Checking switches and pilot lamps

1. For checking the switches and pilot lamps, refer to Checking lighting, pilot lamps and indic-
ators individually [} page 172].
7.2.4 Checking lighting, pilot lamps and indicators individually
Requirement
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Tests when ignition is switched off

Switch on the following functions consecutively and check functionality. If necessary, have a
second person present.
172 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
1. Check hazard warning system.

2. Check parking light.
3. Check rotary beacons.
4. Check the headlight flasher.
Tests when ignition is switched on

Switch on the following functions consecutively and check functionality. If necessary, have a
second person present.
1. Check Parking light / low beam light switch.
2. Check High beam light switch. The High beam light indicator is lit.
3. Check Direction of travel switch. Direction indicator pilot lamp is flashing.
4. Check Fog light switch.
5. Check Rear fog light pushbutton. The Rear fog light indicator is lit.
6. Check Signal horn pushbutton.
7. Check windshield wiper and wash system switch.
8. Check Blower switch.
9. Check Temperature control switch.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 173

2019-10_EN
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
174 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8 Outrigger
8.1 Installation location of control panel
1 Control panel
8.2 Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of the mobile crane tipping due to abrupt unloading!
If the wire rope tears or the load falls while it is being lifted, the mobile
crane is unloaded abruptly. In this case, if the non-load side outrigger
beams are not extended, the sudden unloading of the crane can cause it
to overturn backwards.
1. All outrigger beams that are on the load side and non-load side always
support according to the outrigger bases in the load rating charts.
2. Insert all locking pins completely into the outrigger beams.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 175

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
WARNING
Risk drive in of accidents when extending or retracting the outrigger
beams.
If the operator cannot see the outrigger area, people or objects in this area
may get caught. This may lead to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Evacuate people from the outrigger area.
2. Ensure that the extension area is free of objects.
3. Only extend or retract outrigger beams if the operator or another per-
son is able to see the outrigger area.
WARNING
Risk of accidents if the wheels have contact with the ground during
crane operation.
Wheels and axles are part of the counterweight mass. If they have contact
with the ground during crane operation, the mobile crane may become un-
stable and overturn. This may lead to personal injuries and material dam-
age.
1. Extend the outrigger float until the wheels are no longer in contact with
the ground.
2. Do not support the wheels.
WARNING
Risk of accidents if the outriggers are not locked during crane opera-
tion.
If the outrigger beams are not locked during crane operation, they may ex-
tend or retract uncontrollably. This can cause an accident. This may lead
to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Lock all outrigger beams before crane operation.
NOTICE
Damages on mobile crane if outrigger beams are not unlocked.
If the outrigger beams are not unlocked before extending or retracting, this
may lead to damages on the frame of the mobile crane.
1. Unlock outrigger beams before extending or retracting.
NOTICE
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Damages on the outriggers if the outrigger floats are not retracted.

If the outrigger floats are not retracted before retracting or extending the
outrigger beams, this may lead to damages on the outriggers.
1. Retract the outrigger floats before retracting or extending the outrigger
beams.
176 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.3 Control panel
8.3.1 Structure of control panel
Overview
G _
G
1 Buttons with fixed assignment 3 Display
2 Buttons with variable assignment 4 Emergency stop switch
Buttons with fixed assignment

For button assignments refer to Buttons of the control panel [} page 178].
Buttons with variable assignment

In the individual menus, the buttons are assigned to different functions.
These are described in the respective menus.
The following menus may be represented on the display:

Menu "Main menu" [} page 182].
Menu "Retracting/extending outrigger beams" [} page 184].
Menu "Retracting/extending outrigger floats" [} page 190].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Menu "Suspension cylinders" [} page 197].
ATF 220G-5 177

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.3.2 Buttons of the control panel
Introduction
The control panels on both sides of the mobile crane are identical. The graphics in the display
differ in order to show the mobile crane's direction.
Overview
2
1
4
2
1 Buttons for engine functions 4 Movements buttons
2 Buttons with variable assignment 5 Navigation button
3 Service button 6 Contrast button
"Start engine" button

Press button = start engine.
"Switch off engine" button

Press button = switch off engine.
"Reduce engine speed" button

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press button = reduce engine speed.

NOTICE! The engine speed is reduced in stages.
"Increase engine speed" button

Press button = increase engine speed.
NOTICE! The engine speed is increased in stages.
178 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Buttons with variable assignment

"Movements" buttons
"Navigation" button
Press button in Start menu = go to main menu.
Press button in a sub-menu = return to main menu.
Press button in main menu = go to Start menu.
"Contrast" button
Press and hold button = change contrast.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 179

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Overview of indicators
3 2 1
1 Navigation indicator 3 Superstructure operation indicator
2 Fault warning lamp
Indicators
"Navigation" indicator
Indicator is lit = change to main menu is possible.
"Fault" warning lamp

Warning lamp is lit = fault in the electronics.
Supporting is not possible.
Error code can be read on the display of the on-board computer in the carrier cab.
"Superstructure operation" indicator

Indicator flashes = superstructure operation. It is not possible to work in the control panel. Ob-
serve the Carrier operation/superstructure operation key switch.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 181

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.3.4 Menu "Main menu"
Buttons
Overview
A B C
Step 2 / 3
RPM 1200
D E F G
A Retracting/extending outrigger beams E Lift axles button
menu button
B Retracting/extending outrigger floats menu F Signal horn button
button
C Suspension cylinder menu button G Working floodlights on outriggers button
D Hold axles button
"Retracting/extending outrigger beams menu" button

Press button = go to Retracting/extending outrigger beams menu.
"Retracting/extending outrigger floats menu" button

Press button = go to Retracting/extending outrigger floats menu.
"Suspension cylinder menu" button

Press button = go to Suspension cylinder menu.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Hold axles" button

Press button = hold axles in current position.
182 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Lift axles" button

Press and hold button = lift axles.
Then, Hold axles is activated automatically.
"Signal horn" button

Press and hold button = signal horn sounds for as long as the button is pressed.
"Working floodlights on outriggers" button

Press button = switch working floodlights on the outriggers on/off.
Indicators
Overview
1 2 3 4
Step 2 / 3
RPM 1200
5 6 7
1 Retracting/extending outrigger beams 5 Hold axles indicator
menu indicator
2 Retracting/extending outrigger floats menu 6 Lift axles indicator
indicator
3 Engine speed indicator 7 Signal horn indicator
4 Suspension cylinder menu indicator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Engine speed" indicator

Step 2 / 3
RPM 1200 Indicator is lit = the selected engine speed is displayed.
NOTICE! The button above the "Engine speed" indicator has no assigned function.
"Hold axles" indicator

Indicator is lit = axles are not held in the current position.
ATF 220G-5 183

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Indicator is lit inversely = axles are held in the current position.
"Lift axles" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = axles are lifted.
"Signal horn" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = signal horn sounds.
8.3.5 Menu "Retracting/extending outrigger beams"
Buttons – left-hand control panel
Overview
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400 H
1.4 m 1.4 m
+1,4° D
! 0,0°
E
1.4 m 1.4 m
A B C
A Preselect outrigger beam, front left button D Retract outrigger beam button
B Pre-select both outrigger beams, left button E Extend outrigger beam button
C Preselect outrigger beam, rear left button H Button lock override button
"Preselect outrigger beam, front left" button

Press button = preselect left-hand front outrigger beam.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press button again = deselect left-hand front outrigger beam.
"Pre-select both outrigger beams, left" button

2 Press button = preselect left-hand front and rear outrigger beams.
Press button again = deselect left-hand front and rear outrigger beams.
184 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Preselect outrigger beam, rear left" button

Press button = preselect left-hand rear outrigger beam.
Press button again = deselect left-hand rear outrigger beam.
"Retract outrigger beam" button

Press and hold button = retract preselected outrigger beam.
"Extend outrigger beam" button

Press and hold button = extend preselected outrigger beam.
"Button lock override" button

Press and hold button = override locked buttons.
To do this, simultaneously press and hold the Retracting/extending buttons.
Indicators – left-hand control panel
Overview
1.4 m 1.4 m
13
12 +1,4° 1
11 ! 2
10 0,0°
9 3
1.4 m 1.4 m 4
2
8 7 6 5
1 Retracting outrigger beam indicator 8 Outrigger base, front left *) indicator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2 Extending outrigger beam indicator 9 Superstructure not locked indicator

3 Outrigger beam, rear left indicator 10 Mobile crane lateral inclination indicator
4 Outrigger base, rear left *) indicator 11 Button lock indicator
5 Preselect outrigger beam, rear left indicator 12 Mobile crane longitudinal inclination indic-
ator
6 Outrigger beam, front left indicator 13 Boom not in boom rest indicator
ATF 220G-5 185

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
7 Preselect outrigger beam, front left indic-

ator
"Outrigger base" *) indicator

1.4 m The current outrigger base of the individual outrigger beams is displayed.
"Outrigger beam" indicators

Indicators are lit = outrigger beam is extending.
Indicators are lit = outrigger beam is retracting.
"Preselect outrigger beam, front left" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = front left outrigger beam is preselected.
"Preselect outrigger beams, front and rear left" indicator

Indicators are lit inversely = both left outrigger beams are preselected.
"Preselect outrigger beam, rear left" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = rear left outrigger beam is preselected.
"Mobile crane longitudinal inclination" indicator

+1,4° The Mobile crane longitudinal inclination indicator shows the current longitudinal inclination of the
mobile crane. The numerical display shows the exact deviation in °.
"Mobile crane lateral inclination" indicator

0,0° The Mobile crane lateral inclination indicator shows the current lateral inclination of the mobile
crane. The numerical display shows the exact deviation in °.
"Superstructure not locked" indicator

Indicator is lit = superstructure is not locked, all buttons are locked.
"Button lock" indicator

Indicator is lit = button lock is active.
!
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Boom not in boom rest" indicator

Indicator is lit = the boom is not located in the boom rest, all buttons are locked.
186 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Buttons – right-hand control panel
Overview
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400 H
1.4 m 1.4 m
+1,4°
D
!
0,0°
E
1.4 m 1.4 m
A B C
A Preselect outrigger beam, rear right button D Retract outrigger beam button
B Preselect both outrigger beams, right but- E Extend outrigger beam button
ton
C Preselect outrigger beam, front right button H Button lock override button
"Preselect outrigger beam, rear right" button

Press button = preselect right-hand rear outrigger beam.
Press button again = deselect right-hand rear outrigger beam.
"Preselect both outrigger beams, right" button

2 Press button = preselect right-hand front and rear outrigger beams.
Press button again = deselect right-hand front and rear outrigger beams.
"Preselect outrigger beam, front right" button

Press button = preselect right-hand front outrigger beam.
Press button again = deselect right-hand front outrigger beam.
"Retract outrigger beam" button

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Press and hold button = retract preselected outrigger beam.
"Extend outrigger beam" button

Press and hold button = extend preselected outrigger beam.
ATF 220G-5 187

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger

Indicators – right-hand control panel
Overview
13
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400
12 1.4 m 1.4 m
+1,4°
1
11 ! 2
0,0° 3
10
1.4 m 1.4 m
9 4
2
8 7 6 5
1 Retracting outrigger beam indicator 8 Outrigger base, rear right *) indicator
2 Mobile crane lateral inclination indicator 9 Outrigger beam, rear right indicator
3 Extending outrigger beam indicator 10 Superstructure not locked indicator
4 Outrigger base, front right *) indicator 11 Button lock indicator
5 Preselect outrigger beam, front right indic- 12 Boom not in boom rest indicator
ator
6 Outrigger beam, front right indicator 13 Mobile crane longitudinal inclination indic-
ator
7 Preselect outrigger beam, rear right indic-
ator
"Outrigger beam" indicators

Indicators are lit = outrigger beam is extending.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Indicators are lit = outrigger beam is retracting.
188 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Outrigger base" *) indicator

1.4 m The current outrigger base of the individual outrigger beams is displayed.
"Preselect outrigger beam, rear right" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = rear right outrigger beam is preselected.
"Preselect outrigger beams, rear right and front right" indicator

Indicators are lit = both right outrigger beams are preselected.
"Preselect outrigger beam, front right" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = front right outrigger beam is preselected.




!
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 189

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.3.6 Menu "Retracting/extending outrigger floats"
Overview
A B C
Step 0 / 3
4 RPM 400 I
15t 15t
+1,4° D
!
0°
E
15t 15t
F G H
A Preselect outrigger float, front right button F Preselect outrigger float, front left button
B Preselect all outrigger floats button G Preselect levelling button
C Preselect outrigger float, rear right button H Preselect outrigger float, rear left button
D Retract outrigger float button I Button lock override button
E Extend outrigger float button,
Level mobile crane button
"Preselect outrigger float, front" button

Press button = preselect outrigger float.
Press button again = deselect outrigger float.
"Preselect all outrigger floats" button

4 Press button = preselect all outrigger floats.
Press button again = deselect all outrigger floats.
"Preselect outrigger float, rear" button

WFN5RUXV9L2067295

"Retract outrigger float" button

Press and hold button = retract preselected outrigger float.
190 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Extend outrigger float" button, "Level mobile crane" button

Press and hold button = extend preselected outrigger float or level mobile crane.
"Preselect levelling" button

Press button = preselect levelling.

Overview
1 2 34 5 6
Step 0 / 3
4 RPM 400
15 t 15 t 7
24
23 +1,4°
8
22 ! 9
21 0° 10
20 11
19 15 t 15 t 12
18 17 16 15 14 13
1 Parking brake indicator 13 Preselect outrigger float, rear left indicator
2 Outrigger pressure, front right indicator *) 14 Outrigger pressure, rear left indicator *)
3 Outrigger float, front right indicator 15 Preselect levelling indicator
4 Preselect outrigger float, front right indic- 16 Levelling OK indicator
ator
5 Outrigger pressure, rear right indicator *) 17 Preselect outrigger float, front left indicator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
6 Preselect outrigger float, rear right indicator 18 Outrigger pressure, front left indicator *)
7 Outrigger float, rear right indicator 19 Outrigger float, front left indicator
8 Retracting outrigger float indicator 20 Mobile crane lateral inclination indicator
9 Circular spirit level indicator 21 Superstructure not locked indicator
10 Extending outrigger float indicator 22 Button lock indicator
11 Mobile crane levelling indicator 23 Boom not in boom rest indicator
ATF 220G-5 191

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
12 Outrigger float, rear left indicator 24 Mobile crane longitudinal inclination indic-
ator
"Parking brake" indicator

Indicator flashes = parking brake of the carrier is not engaged.
NOTICE! It is not possible to lower the mobile crane onto its wheels.
"Outrigger pressure" *) indicator
15 t The current outrigger pressure of the individual outrigger floats is displayed.
"Preselect outrigger float, front" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = outrigger float is preselected.
"Preselect all outrigger floats" indicator

Indicators are lit inversely = all outrigger floats are preselected.
"Preselect outrigger float, rear" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = outrigger float is preselected.
"Outrigger float" indicators

Indicators are lit = outrigger float is extending.
Indicators are lit = outrigger float is retracting.
Indicator "Circular spirit level"

The circular spirit level shows the current inclination of the mobile crane.
The marking must be in the centre during crane operation.
"Levelling OK" indicator

Indicator is lit = mobile crane is levelled.
"Preselect levelling" indicator

Indicator is lit = levelling is preselected.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295

192 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Mobile crane levelling" indicator

Indicator is lit = the mobile crane is being levelled.



!
Overview
A B C
Step 0 / 3
4 RPM 400 I
15 t 15 t
D
+1,4°
!
0°
E
15 t 15 t
F G H
A Preselect outrigger float, rear left button F Preselect outrigger float, rear right button
B Preselect all outrigger floats button G Preselect levelling button
C Preselect outrigger float, front left button H Preselect outrigger float, front right button
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
D Retract outrigger float button I Button lock override button

E Extend outrigger float button,
Level mobile crane button
ATF 220G-5 193

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Preselect outrigger float, rear" button

"Preselect all outrigger floats" button

4 Press button = preselect all outrigger floats.
Press button again = deselect all outrigger floats.
"Preselect outrigger float, front" button

"Retract outrigger float" button

Press and hold button = retract preselected outrigger float.
"Extend outrigger float" button, "Level mobile crane" button

Press and hold button = extend preselected outrigger float or level mobile crane.
"Preselect levelling" button

Press button = preselect levelling.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
194 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Overview
1 23 4 5 6 7
Step 0 / 3
4 RPM 400
15 t 15 t
24 8
23 +1,4° 9
22 ! 10
21 0° 12 11
15 t 15 t 13
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
1 Outrigger float, rear left indicator 13 Mobile crane levelling indicator
2 Preselect outrigger float, rear left indicator 14 Outrigger pressure, front right *) indicator
3 Outrigger pressure, rear left *) indicator 15 Outrigger float, front right indicator
4 Preselect outrigger float, front left indicator 16 Preselect outrigger float, front right indic-
ator
5 Outrigger float, front left indicator 17 Preselect levelling indicator
6 Outrigger pressure, front left *) indicator 18 Outrigger pressure, rear right *) indicator
7 Parking brake indicator 19 Preselect outrigger float, rear right indicator
8 Retracting outrigger float indicator 20 Outrigger float, rear right indicator
9 Mobile crane longitudinal inclination indic- 21 Superstructure not locked indicator
ator
10 Levelling OK indicator 22 Button lock indicator
11 Extending outrigger float indicator 23 Circular spirit level indicator
12 Mobile crane lateral inclination indicator 24 Boom not in boom rest indicator
"Outrigger float" indicators

Indicators are lit = outrigger float is extending.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Indicators are lit = outrigger float is retracting.
"Preselect outrigger float, rear" indicator

Indicator is lit = outrigger float is preselected.
ATF 220G-5 195

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Preselect all outrigger floats" indicator

Indicator is lit = all outrigger floats are preselected.
"Preselect outrigger float, front" indicator

Indicator is lit = outrigger float is preselected.
"Outrigger pressure" *) indicator
15 t The current outrigger pressure of the individual outrigger floats is displayed.
"Parking brake" indicator

Indicator flashes = parking brake of the carrier is not engaged.
NOTICE! It is not possible to lower the mobile crane onto its wheels.


"Levelling OK" indicator

Indicator is lit = mobile crane is levelled.

Indicator is lit = the mobile crane is being levelled.
"Preselect levelling" indicator

Indicator is lit = levelling is preselected.
Indicator "Circular spirit level"

The circular spirit level shows the current inclination of the mobile crane.
The marking must be in the centre during crane operation.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295

196 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger

!
8.3.7 Menu "Suspension cylinders"
Overview
A B C
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400
F G H
A Preselect suspension cylinder, front right E Extending suspension cylinder button
button
B Preselect all suspension cylinders button F Preselect suspension cylinder, front left
button
C Preselect suspension cylinder, rear right G Level mobile crane button
button
D Retracting suspension cylinder button H Preselect suspension cylinder, rear left but-
ton
"Preselect suspension cylinder" button

Press button = preselect suspension cylinder.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
"Preselect all suspension cylinders" button

Press button = preselect all suspension cylinders.
ATF 220G-5 197

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Retract suspension cylinders" button

Press and hold button = retract preselected suspension cylinders.
"Extend suspension cylinders" button

Press and hold button = extend preselected suspension cylinders.
"Level mobile crane" button

Press and hold button = level mobile crane.
When the indicator changes, the mobile crane is levelled.
Overview
1 2
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400
11 3
4
12 5
13 6
7 8 9 10
1 Preselect suspension cylinder, front right 8 Mobile crane levelling indicator
indicator
2 Preselect suspension cylinder, rear right in- 9 Preselect suspension cylinder, rear left in-
dicator dicator
3 Suspension cylinder, rear right indicator 10 Mobile crane levelling indicator
4 Retracting suspension cylinder indicator 11 Suspension cylinder, front right indicator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5 Extending suspension cylinder indicator 12 Hold axles indicator

6 Suspension cylinder, rear left indicator 13 Suspension cylinder, front left indicator
7 Preselect suspension cylinder, front left in-
dicator
198 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
"Preselect suspension cylinder" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = suspension cylinder is preselected.
"Suspension cylinder" indicators

Indicator is lit = suspension cylinder is extending.
Indicator is lit = suspension cylinder is retracting.

Indicator is not lit = mobile crane is not levelled.
Indicator is lit inversely = mobile crane is levelled.

Indicator is not lit = axles are not held in the current position.
Overview
A B C
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400
E
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
F G H
A Preselect suspension cylinder, rear left but- E Extending suspension cylinder button
ton
B Preselect all suspension cylinders button F Preselect suspension cylinder, rear right
button
ATF 220G-5 199

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
C Preselect suspension cylinder, front left G Level mobile crane button

button
D Retracting suspension cylinder button H Preselect suspension cylinder, front right
button
"Preselect suspension cylinder" button

Press button = preselect suspension cylinder.
"Preselect all suspension cylinders" button

Press button = preselect all suspension cylinders.
"Retract suspension cylinders" button

Press and hold button = retract preselected suspension cylinders.
"Extend suspension cylinders" button

Press and hold button = extend preselected suspension cylinders.
"Level mobile crane" button

Press and hold button = level mobile crane.
When the indicator changes, the mobile crane is levelled.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
200 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Overview
1 2
Step 0 / 3
RPM 400
11 3
4
12 5
13 6
7 8 9 10
1 Preselect suspension cylinder, rear left in- 8 Mobile crane levelling indicator
dicator
2 Preselect suspension cylinder, front left in- 9 Preselect suspension cylinder, front right
dicator indicator
3 Suspension cylinder, front left indicator 10 Mobile crane levelling indicator
4 Retracting suspension cylinder indicator 11 Suspension cylinder, rear left indicator
5 Extending suspension cylinder indicator 12 Hold axles indicator
6 Suspension cylinder, front right indicator 13 Suspension cylinder, rear right indicator
7 Preselect suspension cylinder, rear right in-
dicator
"Preselect suspension cylinder" indicator

Indicator is lit inversely = suspension cylinder is preselected.
"Suspension cylinder" indicators

Indicator is lit = suspension cylinder is extending.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Indicator is lit = suspension cylinder is retracting.
ATF 220G-5 201

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger

Indicator is not lit = mobile crane is not levelled.
Indicator is lit inversely = mobile crane is levelled.

Indicator is not lit = axles are not held in the current position.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
202 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.4 Supporting the mobile crane
8.4.1 Preparations in carrier cab
Overview
3 6
4
5
2
1
1 Battery main switch switch 4 Ignition lock

2 Carrier operation/superstructure operation 5 Working speed / cruise control switch
key switch
3 Axle suspension locking switch 6 Starting/stopping engine pushbutton
Requirements
▪ The mobile crane is parked on the installation location.
▪ Parking brake is engaged.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Gear pre-selection switch is adjusted in N position.
Procedure
1. Start the carrier engine.
2. Switch on Working speed / cruise control switch.
3. Switch on Axle suspension locking switch.
ATF 220G-5 203

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
4. Turn Carrier operation/superstructure operation key switch to switch position 1.

ð The carrier has been prepared for outrigging process.
8.4.2 Extending outrigger beams to the required outrigger extension

The following section describes the principle of extending the outrigger beams to the required
outrigger base.
Outrigger beams can only be extended and retracted on the respective operator side.
Outrigger floats can be extended or retracted on both sides.
Requirements
▪ Carrier engine running.
▪ Outrigger beam is unlocked.
Lock positions and unlocking positions
A B
1
1
A Outrigger beam locked 1 Lock pin
B Outrigger beam unlocked
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
204 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Move to lock positions on the outrigger beams
1 2.7 m (both outrigger beams retracted) 4 7.0 m

2 4.6 m 5 8.3 m
3 5.6 m
Explanation
The first outrigger base corresponds to the retracted condition for road travel. The outrigger
beams do not need to be extended.
Extending outrigger beams to other outrigger bases

1. Unlock both outrigger beams.
2. On the control panel, select the Retracting/extending outrigger beams menu.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Press the Outrigger beam pre-selection button.

4. Press and hold Extend outrigger beam(s) button until the required lock position has been
reached on both outrigger beams.
5. Lock both outrigger beams at the required position.
ð Outrigger beams have been extended to the required outrigger base and locked.
ATF 220G-5 205

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.4.3 Mounting or shifting outrigger floats
Operating instruction
After driving the mobile crane on the construction site (without load), the outrigger floats must
be shifted into working position, refer to Shifting outrigger floats in working position [} page 207].
Mounting outrigger floats
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of accidents due to outrigger float falling down.
Weight of an outrigger float: Approx. 46 kg. During mounting/dismounting,
the outrigger float may fall down. This may cause injuries.
1. If necessary, mount/dismount outrigger float with the help of a second
person.
Overview
A Transport position 1 Holder

B Working position 2 Hole for transport position
3 Locking pin
4 Hole for working position
5 Guide frame
Mounting outrigger floats

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Remove locking pin.

2. Fit guide frame into retainer of outrigger cylinder and push up to the end stop.
3. Insert the locking pin into the hole for the working position of the guide frame and secure it.
ð Outrigger float is mounted.
206 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Shifting outrigger floats in working position
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to unsecured or damaged outrigger floats.
Unsecured or damaged outrigger floats may separate from the mobile
crane during crane operation. The mobile crane could turn over. This may
lead to personal injuries and material damage.
Damaged outrigger plates may break under load. As a result, the mobile
crane may become unstable and overturn. This may lead to personal injur-
ies and material damage.
1. Before crane operation, adjust and secure all outrigger floats in work-
ing position.
2. Check all outrigger floats for damages on the guide frames and hold-
ers.
3. Exchange damaged outrigger floats.
4. Remove foreign objects from the bearing surfaces.
Overview

3 Locking pin
5 Guide frame
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

2. Pull outrigger float into working position up to the stop on the outrigger cylinder.
3. Insert the locking pin into the hole for the working position and secure it.
ð Outrigger float is shifted into working position and secured.
ATF 220G-5 207

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to unsecured or damaged outrigger floats.
Unsecured or damaged outrigger floats may separate from the mobile
crane during crane operation. The mobile crane could turn over. This may
lead to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Before crane operation, adjust and secure all outrigger floats in work-
ing position.
2. Check all outrigger floats for damages on the guide frames and hold-
ers.
3. Exchange damaged outrigger floats.
Overview

3 Locking pin
5 Guide frame
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

2. Pull outrigger float into working position up to the stop on the outrigger cylinder.
3. Insert the locking pin into the hole for the working position and secure it.
ð Outrigger float is shifted into working position and secured.
208 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
8.4.4 Supporting the outrigger plates from below
Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of tipping due to unsuitable ground.
If the ground subsides, the mobile crane may tip. This may lead to per-
sonal injuries and material damage.
1. Select a safe location on a stable ground.
2. Support the outrigger floats from below.
3. Observe the indications in the safety instructions.
DANGER
Danger of tipping due to damaged outrigger floats.
1. Check the outrigger floats for damages and deformation.
2. Before crane operation, exchange damaged outrigger floats.
WARNING
Danger of tipping due to slipping on smooth steel plates.
On smooth steel surfaces, the outrigger floats cannot have enough adhe-
sion. The mobile crane can slip from the supporting substructure and over-
turn. This may lead to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Use materials with structured surfaces.
2. Weld struts and rips onto smooth surfaces.
Requirements
▪ The required support surface must be known.
▪ The bearing surface of outrigger floats must lay flat on an even ground.
▪ When required, the outrigger floats are supported from below (see examples in graph).
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 209

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
X = incorrect
O = correct
The materials for supporting from below must be sufficiently stable.
Examples:
▪ Square timber of hard wood (no conifer wood). Minimum height 100 mm. Free of knots,
without fractures. Same height in every position. The positions must have an offset of 90°
with respect to each other.
▪ Thick steel plates.
▪ Broad welded double T-beams.
Support positioning
1. Place the supports centrally under the outrigger floats.
2. Align the supports such that after extending the outrigger cylinders the remaining distance
is 10 - 15 mm.
8.4.5 Extending outrigger float
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of accidents if it is not possible to see complete working area.
If all the outrigger floats are extended together, it is not possible to see the
entire working area. This may lead to accidents. This may lead to personal
injuries and material damage.
1. Only extend the outrigger float on operator side.
2. Extend all outrigger floats only to level the mobile crane.
Requirements
▪ Outrigger floats are shifted into working position and secured.
▪ Outrigger beams are extended to desired outrigger base and locked.
Holding and blocking axles

1. Select Main menu on the control panel.
2. Press the Hold axles button.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð Axles are held and locked in the current position.
Supporting and levelling mobile crane

1. On the control panel, select the Retracting/extending outrigger floats menu, refer to Menu
"Retracting/extending outrigger floats" [} page 190].
2. On the control panel, press the Preselect all outrigger floats button.
210 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
3. On the control panel, press and hold the Extending outrigger float button until all wheels are
raised off the ground.
Important: All wheels shall have a distance of at least 5 cm to the ground.
4. Press the Preselect levelling button on the control panel.
5. Press and hold the Mobile crane levelling button on the control panel until the Levelling OK
indicator appears.
ð Mobile crane is levelled automatically.
6. Check if all wheels of the mobile crane have a distance of at least 5 cm to the ground.
If individual wheels have contact with the ground after levelling, the axles will have to be lif-
ted, refer to Lifting axles.
ð The mobile crane is stabilized and levelled for crane operation.
Lifting axles
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to movements of the axles.
When the axles are lifted, the mobile crane and the axles may move. This
could result in death or injury of persons standing close by.
1. During lifting of axles, only operating personnel are allowed to remain
in the danger zone of the mobile crane.
2. Do not store objects in the danger zone.
NOTICE
Damage of the mobile crane when lifting the axles.
Lifting the axles when the mobile crane is not stabilized may lead to dam-
ages of the axles and suspension cylinders.
1. Conduct lifting of axles only when mobile crane is stabilized.
1. Select Main menu on the control panel.

2. On the control panel, press and hold the Lift axles button until all axles have been lifted
completely.
ð Axles are held in the current position.
Final activities
On the "Outrigger" control panel

1. Bring the carrier engine to the idling speed.
2. Switch carrier engine off.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Close and lock both control panels.
In the carrier cab

1. Switch off Working speed / cruise control switch.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Switch off Battery main switch switch.
ATF 220G-5 211

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger

5. Lock carrier cab.
8.5 Retracting outrigger beam
8.5.1 Preparations in carrier cab
Overview
3 6
4
5
2
1
1 Battery main switch switch 4 Ignition lock

2 Carrier operation/superstructure operation 5 Working speed / cruise control switch
key switch
3 Axle suspension locking switch 6 Starting/stopping engine pushbutton
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ The mobile crane is parked on the installation location.

212 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Procedure
2. Switch on Working speed / cruise control switch.
3. Switch on Axle suspension locking switch.
ð The carrier has been prepared for outrigging process.
8.5.2 Retracting the outrigger floats
Explanation
Requirements
Retracting the outrigger floats

1. On the control panel, select the Retracting/extending outrigger floats menu, refer to Menu
"Retracting/extending outrigger floats" [} page 190].
2. Press the Preselect all outrigger floats button.
3. Press and hold Retract outrigger float(s) button until all outrigger floats have been fully re-
tracted.
ð Mobile crane is standing on wheels.
8.5.3 Dismounting or shifting outrigger floats
Operating instruction
After driving the mobile crane on the construction site (without load), the outrigger floats must
be shifted into transport position, refer to Shifting of outrigger floats in transport position.
Dismounting outrigger floats
Safety instructions
CAUTION
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Risk of accidents due to outrigger float falling down.

Weight of an outrigger float: Approx. 46 kg. During mounting/dismounting,
the outrigger float may fall down. This may cause injuries.
1. If necessary, mount/dismount outrigger float with the help of a second
person.
ATF 220G-5 213

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Overview
A Working position 1 Outrigger floats

B Dismantling position 2 Outrigger cylinder
3 Locking pin
4 Guide frame
Dismounting outrigger floats

2. Pull outrigger float out off the retainer of the outrigger cylinder and remove it.
3. Insert the locking pin into the hole of the guide frame and secure it.
Shifting of outrigger floats in transport position
Overview
A Working position 1 Holder

B Transport position 2 Hole for transport position
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3 Locking pin
5 Guide frame
Shifting of outrigger floats in transport position

214 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
2. Push the outrigger float with the guide frame up to the stop onto the holder.
3. Insert the locking pin into the hole for the transport position and secure it.
ð Outrigger float is shifted into transport position and secured.
8.5.4 Retracting outrigger beams
Introduction
Requirements
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Outrigger beam 1 2 Outrigger beam 2
ATF 220G-5 215

2019-10_EN
8 Outrigger
Locking positions and unlocking positions
A B
1
1
A Outrigger beam locked 1 Lock pin
B Outrigger beam unlocked
Retracting outrigger beam

1. Unlock all outrigger beams.
2. On the control panel, select the Retracting/extending outrigger beams menu.
3. Press the Outrigger beam pre-selection button.
4. Press and hold the Retracting outrigger beam button until outrigger beams 1 and 2 have
been fully retracted.
5. Lock outrigger beams 1 and 2.
6. Retract and lock outrigger beams of opposite side.
Final activities
On the "Outrigger" control panel

1. Bring the carrier engine to the idling speed.
2. Switch carrier engine off.
3. Close and lock both control panels.
In the carrier cab

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Switch off Working speed / cruise control switch.

2. Switch off the ignition.
216 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
9 Removing outrigger beams *)
Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of tipping when outrigger beams are removed or installed
with the mobile crane itself.
If outrigger beams are removed or installed with the mobile crane itself, the
mobile crane will tip. This may cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Only trained and qualified specialist personnel are allowed to remove
and install the outrigger beams.
2. Remove and install outrigger beams only with an auxiliary crane.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to outrigger beams incorrectly removed or in-
stalled.
Outrigger beams incorrectly removed or installed may entail:
➢ The outrigger beams may fall out of the outrigger casing.
➢ The mobile crane may tip during crane operation.
➢ This may cause serious or fatal injuries.
➢ This may lead to damages on the mobile crane.

1. Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to remove and install
the outrigger beams.
2. Remove and install outrigger beams only as described in the operating
manual.
WARNING
Risk of crushing while removing and installing the outrigger beams.
While removing and installing the outrigger beams, body parts may get
crushed.
1. Do not reach between parts that are being moved.
2. Attach outrigger beams only at the centre of gravity (marking).
3. Do not enter the area underneath suspended outrigger beams.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Requirements for the mobile crane

▪ Mobile crane is parked on an even surface.
▪ All counterweights have been removed.
▪ "Normal operation": telescopic boom is completely retracted and deposited in boom rest.
▪ "Dolly operation": telescopic boom is deposited and secured on Dolly trailer.
ATF 220G-5 217

2019-10_EN
▪ Gearbox is in neutral position.

▪ Outrigger floats are changed into working position and secured.
Requirements for the outrigger beams

▪ A suitable storage place (e.g. an adequately dimensioned low-loader with adequate load car-
rying capacity for the weight of the outrigger beams) is present.
Requirements for the auxiliary crane

▪ Sufficient load capacity of the ground on which the auxiliary crane is set up.
▪ The auxiliary crane is sufficiently dimensioned.
▪ The auxiliary crane is correctly supported.
▪ The required settings shall be taken from the auxiliary crane’s operating manual and entered
into the crane control of the auxiliary crane.
Opening the maintenance hatches
Overview
Procedure
1. Unscrew all screws from all maintenance hatches and keep them safe.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2. Open the maintenance hatches.
218 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Removing the cover of the rear right outrigger
Overview
1 Fixing screws 2 Cover of the rear right outrigger
Procedure
1. Remove all fixing screws of the cover. and keep them safe.
2. Remove the cover.
ð The cover of the rear right outrigger has been removed.
Preparing outrigger beams for extending
Introduction
Important! To be observed prior to disconnecting the connections to the outrigger: Ex-
tend the outrigger beams slightly such that the sling (e.g. webbing) can be attached. Retract
outrigger beams again after the sling has been attached. Only afterwards, you can disconnect
the connections and proceed with the removal.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 219

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 2 3 A
4
3 4 B
1 Outrigger beam I 2 Outrigger beam II

3 Lock, outrigger beam I to outrigger casing 4 Lock, outrigger beam I to outrigger beam II
A locked B unlocked
Procedure
1. Unlock outrigger beam I from outrigger casing.
2. Unlock outrigger beam II from outrigger beam I.
Attaching sling
Overview
1 2
1 Outrigger beam 2 Sling
Procedure
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Extend outrigger beam.

2. Attach suitable sling (e.g. webbing) to outrigger beam.
3. Retract outrigger beam.
ð The sling has been attached to the outrigger beam.
220 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Preparing outrigger beams for removal
Overview
1 2 3 A
4
3 4 B
1 Outrigger beam I 2 Outrigger beam II

3 Lock, outrigger beam I to outrigger casing 4 Lock, outrigger beam I to outrigger beam II
A locked B unlocked
Procedure
1. Lock outrigger beam I to outrigger beam II.
2. Unlock outrigger beam I from outrigger casing.
ð Outrigger beams I and II have been locked to each other. Outrigger beam I has been un-
locked from outrigger casing.
Disconnecting the hydraulic and electrical connections
Overview
1
2
3
2
1 Electrical connection 2 Hydraulic connection

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3 Dust caps for hydraulic connections
Procedure
1. Disconnect hydraulic connections.
2. Detach connected dust caps for hydraulic connections from each other.
3. Screw all dust caps onto all hydraulic connections.
ATF 220G-5 221

2019-10_EN
4. Disconnect electrical connections.

5. Plug electrical connections into the dummy cover.
6. Secure hydraulic hoses and electrical cables with the lashing strap.
ð The hydraulic and electrical connections have been disconnected.
Changing position of snap hook of length sensor prior to removal
Procedure
1. Detach snap hook of the length sensor from the outrigger beam.
2. Attach snap hook of the length sensor to the outrigger casing.
ð The position of the snap hook of the length sensor has been changed.
Removing fixing pin
Introduction
The extension cylinder bracket of the outrigger is secured with a fixing pin in the outrigger cas-
ing. The fixing pin is secured with linch pins.
Prior to the removal of the outrigger beams, the fixing pin must be released and removed.
Prior to releasing and removing the fixing pin, the adjusting screw must be in contact with the
outrigger beam.
If the fixing pin cannot be removed, increase clearance between fixing pin and holder by screw-
ing in the adjusting screw.
Overview
3
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Fixing pin 2 Linch pin
222 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
3 Lock nut 4 Adjusting screw
Procedure
1. Release lock nut of the adjusting screw.
2. Screw in the adjusting screw until it is in contact with the outrigger beam.
3. Remove one of the linch pins to release the fixing pin.
4. If necessary, continue screwing in the adjusting screw until there is sufficient clearance
between fixing pin and holder.
5. Tighten the lock nut of the adjusting screw again.
6. Pull fixing pin out.
ð The fixing pin has been removed.
Final activities
1. Such that the pin does not get lost: after removing the outrigger beam, plug the fixing pin of
the extension cylinder into the holder again and secure it with the linch pin.
Pulling outrigger beams out up to the marking for the centre of gravity
Overview
2
1
3

3 Centre of gravity marking
Procedure
1. Attach slings of the outrigger beams to the auxiliary crane.
2. Lift outrigger beams until the bottom wear plates are relieved.
3. Mark the position of the bottom wear plates (adjusting screws and lock nuts).
4. Increase the clearance of the wear plates by releasing the lock nuts and adjusting screws
such that the outrigger beam can be pulled out without damaging the wear plates.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5. Pull outrigger beam carefully out of the outrigger casing until the centre of gravity marking
just becomes visible.
ð Important! The outrigger casing must still hold the entire weight of the outrigger beam;
the outrigger beam must not have reached the tipping point yet.
ATF 220G-5 223

2019-10_EN
Pulling outrigger beam out completely and setting it down
Overview
2
1
3
1 2

3 Centre of gravity marking
Weight of the outrigger beams:

Front outrigger beams: approx. 1000 kg each.
Rear outrigger beams: approx. 1300 kg each.
Procedure
1. Reposition the slings in correspondence to the centre of gravity marking on the outrigger
beam and attach them to the auxiliary crane.
2. Carefully, pull outrigger beam fully out of the outrigger casing and set down on the storage
place.
3. Note the positions of the wear plates such that all wear plates can be inserted at their cor-
rect position during installation.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
4. Remove wear plates and keep them safe.

5. Tighten lock nuts and adjusting screws such that they cannot get lost.
ð The outrigger beam has been pulled out and set down.
Final activities
1. Remove slings.
224 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
10 Installing outrigger beams *)
Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of tipping when outrigger beams are removed or installed
with the mobile crane itself.
If outrigger beams are removed or installed with the mobile crane itself, the
mobile crane will tip. This may cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Only trained and qualified specialist personnel are allowed to remove
and install the outrigger beams.
2. Remove and install outrigger beams only with an auxiliary crane.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to outrigger beams incorrectly removed or in-
stalled.
Outrigger beams incorrectly removed or installed may entail:
➢ The outrigger beams may fall out of the outrigger casing.
➢ The mobile crane may tip during crane operation.
➢ This may cause serious or fatal injuries.
➢ This may lead to damages on the mobile crane.

1. Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to remove and install
the outrigger beams.
2. Remove and install outrigger beams only as described in the operating
manual.
WARNING
Risk of crushing while removing and installing the outrigger beams.
While removing and installing the outrigger beams, body parts may get
crushed.
1. Do not reach between parts that are being moved.
2. Attach outrigger beams only at the centre of gravity (marking).
3. Do not enter the area underneath suspended outrigger beams.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Requirements for the mobile crane

▪ Mobile crane is parked on an even surface.
▪ All counterweights have been removed.
▪ "Normal operation": telescopic boom is completely retracted and deposited in boom rest.
▪ "Dolly operation": telescopic boom is deposited and secured on Dolly trailer.
ATF 220G-5 225

2019-10_EN
▪ Gearbox is in neutral position.

▪ Outrigger floats are changed into working position and secured.
Requirements for the auxiliary crane

▪ Sufficient load capacity of the ground on which the auxiliary crane is set up.
▪ The auxiliary crane is sufficiently dimensioned.
▪ The auxiliary crane is correctly supported.
▪ The required settings shall be taken from the auxiliary crane’s operating manual and entered
into the crane control of the auxiliary crane.
Requirements for the outrigger beam

▪ The outrigger beam is positioned at a suitable pick-up location (e.g. low-loader next to the
mobile crane).
▪ The outrigger beam is provided with a suitable sling (e.g. webbing).
Opening the maintenance hatches
Overview
Procedure
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Unscrew all screws from all maintenance hatches and keep them safe.
2. Open the maintenance hatches.
226 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Removing the cover of the rear right outrigger
Overview
1 Fixing screws 2 Cover of the rear right outrigger
Procedure
1. Remove all fixing screws of the cover. and keep them safe.
ð The cover of the rear right outrigger has been removed.
Inserting wear plates
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Functional problems due to incorrectly installed wear plates.
If the wear plates are not installed in their original position during installa-
tion, functional problems can arise on the outrigger. The outrigger beams
can get stuck or have too much clearance.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. The wear plates must be placed in the same position when installing
them again.
ATF 220G-5 227

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Wear plate 2 Lock nut

3 Adjusting screw
Procedure
1. Loosen lock nuts and adjusting screws.
2. Unscrew adjusting screws a few turns.
3. Inserting wear plates.
Removing fixing pin of the extension cylinder from the storage location
Overview
1
2
Procedure
1. Remove one linch pin on the fixing pin in the storage location.
2. Pull fixing pin out.
Attachment markings
Problems that arise if the outrigger beams are installed at an incor-

rect position.
Every outrigger beam has a marking. Each outrigger beam may only be in-
stalled at the position intended. Otherwise problems during installation can
result.
1. Observe the markings on the outrigger beams.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Explanation of the markings on the outer sides of the outrigger beams
228 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
∇ = front outrigger beam.
⃞ = rear outrigger beam.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Explanation of the markings on the inner sides of the outrigger beams

VL = front left outrigger beam.
VR = front right outrigger beam.
ATF 220G-5 229

2019-10_EN
HL = rear left outrigger beam.

HR = rear right outrigger beam.
Inserting outrigger beams
Overview
1 2
Weight of the outrigger beams:

Front outrigger beams: approx. 1000 kg each.
Rear outrigger beams: approx. 1300 kg each.
Procedure
1. Attach outrigger beam with suitable slings at the attachment point.
2. Insert outrigger beams into the outrigger casing up to the marking for the centre of gravity.
ð Important! The outrigger casing must hold the entire weight of the outrigger beams be-
fore repositioning the sling; the outrigger beams must not reach the tipping point.
3. Reposition the sling.
4. Insert outrigger beams into the outrigger casing until the attachment point for the extension
cylinder bracket has been reached to be secured with the fixing pin.
ð The outrigger beams have been inserted.
ð The extension cylinder bracket can be secured with the fixing pin.
Final activities
1. Remove slings.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
230 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Inserting the fixing pin of the extension cylinder bracket and positioning adjusting screw
Overview

3 Lock nut 4 Adjusting screw
Procedure
1. Screw the adjusting screw in until there is sufficient clearance in the holder to insert the fix-
ing pin into the extension cylinder bracket.
2. Insert fixing pin.
3. Secure fixing pin with the linch pins on both sides.
4. Release the lock nut of the adjusting screw. and unscrew the adjusting screw until it is at a
distance of 3 to 4 cm to the outrigger beam.
5. Tighten the lock nut of the adjusting screw.
ð The fixing pin of the extension cylinder bracket has been inserted.
Disconnecting hydraulic and electrical connections
Introduction
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
If the numbered connections are incorrectly connected, the result will be outrigger malfunctions.
Connect the hydraulic hoses 1 to 4 to the matching numbers.
ATF 220G-5 231

2019-10_EN
Overview
1
2
3 4
2
1 Electrical connection 2 Dust caps

3 Hydraulic connection 4 Marking
Procedure
1. Release lashing strap.
2. Take hydraulic hoses and electrical cables out of the holder.
3. Remove all dust caps.
4. Connect hydraulic hoses to the hydraulic connections matching the numeric markings.
5. Connect the electrical cables to the electrical connections.
6. Connect dust caps to pairs.
ð The hydraulic and electrical connections have been connected.
Changing position of snap hook of length sensor after installation
Procedure
1. Detach snap hook of the length sensor from the outrigger casing.
2. Attach snap hook of the length sensor to the outrigger beam.
ð The position of the snap hook of the length sensor has been changed.
Final activities
1. After installing the outrigger beams, screw in the adjusting screws of the wear plates (refer
to the marking made prior to removal).
2. Tighten the lock nut of the wear plates.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Check all connections and pins.

5. Perform function check of the outrigger.
6. Fit cover of the rear right outrigger.
7. Close all the maintenance hatches.
232 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11 Driving mode
11.1 General principles

The following section describes the preparation of the mobile crane for driving on public roads in
the Federal Republic of Germany.
National regulations for the area of application which differ from the above regulations must be
observed.
The traffic regulations and the total allowable weight must be observed.
The allowable axle loads must be observed. For exact specifications, refer to Technical data
[} page 495].
11.2 Before driving
11.2.1 Set down the hook block in the holder
Set down the hook block in the hook block holder on the carrier *)
Introduction
A hook block with 10.0 t load rating can be set down in the hook block holder on the carrier.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 233

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview
1 Hatch 2 10 t hook block
Weight of the hook block

Weight of the 10.0 t hook block: approx. 300 kg.
Requirements
▪ The mobile crane is correctly supported by the outriggers.
▪ Superstructure engine is running.
▪ Slings of a sufficient size are available.
Setting down the hook block

1. Opening the hatch.
2. Attach the hook block to the mobile crane.
3. Set down the hook block in the hook block holder on the carrier.
4. Detach and stow the slings.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5. Close the hatch.

6. Set down the telescopic boom.
7. Switch off the superstructure engine.
ð The hook block has been set down in the hook block holder on the carrier.
234 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.2.2 Attaching the hook block for road travel
Requirements
▪ The mobile crane is correctly supported.
▪ Superstructure engine is running.
▪ The superstructure is slewed to the front.
▪ Slewing brake is engaged.
▪ The counterweights have been removed.
▪ The jib has been removed.
▪ The telescopic boom is retracted.
Hanging the hook block in the sliding coupling
1 Wire rope 3 Rope loop

2 Hook block 4 Sliding coupling
1. Position the hook block at the level of the carrier cab by either raising or lowering the tele-
scopic boom.
2. Mount the rope loop in the sliding coupling.
3. Slowly lower the hook block until the hook of the hook block can be attached to the rope
loop.
4. Attach the hook of the hook block into the rope loop.
5. Set down the telescopic boom in the boom rest and at the same time wind in the wire rope
slowly until the slinging rope and the wire rope no longer sag.
ð The hook block has been hung in the sliding coupling.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Final activities
1. Switch off the superstructure engine.
2. Retract the carrier outrigger and change the outrigger floats to the driving position.
ATF 220G-5 235

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.2.3 Checking resources and tyres
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to operationally unreliable mobile crane.
If the mobile crane is not operationally reliable, this may lead to accidents
while driving.
1. Check mobile crane before driving.
Checking the air pressure in the tyres

1. Check the air pressure in the tyres. Correct if necessary, see Checking and adapting tyre
pressure [} page 462].
Checking the oil level of the carrier engine

1. Check the oil level of the carrier engine. Refill if necessary, see Checking the oil level of the
engine [} page 378].
Checking the oil level of the hydraulic oil tank

1. Check the oil level of the hydraulic oil tank. Refill if necessary, see Checking the hydraulic
oil level [} page 434].
Checking the coolant level

1. Check the coolant level of the carrier engine. Refill if necessary, see Checking the coolant
level [} page 387].
Checking the fuel tank fill level

1. Check the fill level of the fuel tank. Refill if necessary, see Filling up fuel or AdBlue
[} page 371].
Checking the fill level of the AdBlue tank
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to fault in the aftertreatment of exhaust gases.
If there is a fault in the aftertreatment of exhaust gases, operation will be
restricted after a certain time. This may result in accidents during driving
operation and crane operation.
1. Top up AdBlue® tank in time.
2. In case of freezing temperatures, switch on the heating *) of the Ad-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Blue® tank in time.

3. In the event of an aftertreatment of exhaust gases fault, switch off the
engine as soon as possible.
4. Make sure the engine is not restarted before the fault of the aftertreat-
ment of exhaust gases has been rectified.
236 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
1. In case of freezing temperatures, switch on the heating *) of the AdBlue tank, refer to Oper-
ating the auxiliary heater [} page 310]
2. Check the fill level of the AdBlue tank. Refill if necessary, see Filling up fuel or AdBlue
[} page 371].
Checking the filling level of the windshield washer system

1. Check the filling level of the windshield washer system. Refill if necessary, see Filling the
windshield washer system [} page 474].
Checking the windshield wipers
WARNING
Faulty windshield wipers impair visibility.
Defective windshield wipers cannot adequately remove the wetness from
the windows. The visibility may be impaired. This may result in accidents.
This may lead to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Check windshield wipers before starting work.
2. Replace defective windshield wipers.
1. Check the condition of the windshield wipers. Replace if necessary, see Replace the wind-
shield wiper blades [} page 473].
Cleaning windshields
WARNING
Impaired visibility due to soiled windows.
Soiled windows may impair visibility. This may result in accidents. This
may lead to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Clean all windshields before starting work.
2. If necessary, clean the windows during period of use, too.
3. Check the fluid level in the windshield washer system's tank. If neces-
sary, refill the tank.
1. Check that the windshields are clean. Clean if necessary.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 237

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.2.4 Requirements for driving mode
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to loose parts.
Loose equipment parts or tools may fall down form the mobile crane while
driving. This could result in death or injury.
1. All loose equipment parts such as socket pins, retaining clips, locking
pins and lock pins must be fixed to the mobile crane so that they can-
not be lost.
2. Stow additional hook blocks in the tool box. Observe the maximum
payload.
3. Stow away the tools safely.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum payload of tool box and wood storage.
Maximum payload of the tool box: 250 kg.
Maximum payload of the wood storage: 300 kg.
Keep off the loaded unit! There is a danger that the unit may deform or
tear off. This can cause injuries to persons, which could sometime be fatal.
1. Observe the maximum payload of the tool box and the wood storage.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
238 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview
1 Carrier-Superstructure key switch 9 Left handrail

2 Stepladder 10 Superstructure cab door lock
3 Hook block 11 Start superstructure engine switch
4 Anemometer 12 Outrigger control panel
5 Superstructure lock 13 Ladder
6 — 14 Outrigger beam
7 Wheel chocks *) 15 Outrigger floats
8 Engine cover 16 Fall protection
General requirements
▪ Loose objects have been removed.
▪ Accessories and attachments are secured against slipping or falling off.
Requirements on superstructure
▪ Superstructure is locked.
▪ Slewing brake has been engaged.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ The superstructure engine is switched off.

▪ The ignition key is at position 0.
▪ Superstructure cab windshield and sliding door are closed.
▪ All the flaps on the superstructure are closed and secured.
▪ All the handrails on the superstructure are closed and secured.
ATF 220G-5 239

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
▪ Anemometer and aircraft warning lamp have been dismounted and stowed away.
▪ Fall protection slide units are in transport position.
▪ All retaining rods are in the transport position.
▪ All counterweights are in the transport position.
▪ All jibs are removed.
▪ The telescopic boom is fully retracted.
▪ The telescopic boom is set down in the rest.
▪ Telescopic boom is removed *), depending on the national regulations.
Requirements on carrier
▪ Hook block is attached to the front of the bumper crossmember and secured.
▪ Wheel chocks *) are stowed away securely.
▪ Standard storage: in the wheel chock holders at the rear of the mobile crane.
▪ If there is a spare wheel holder *): in the storage box under the carrier cab.
▪ If there is a tool box *) at the rear of the mobile crane: in the wheel chock holders on the
tool box.
▪ Tools and accessories or stowed away such that they cannot get lost or in the tool box.
▪ Cover of the tool box *) is closed and locked.
▪ Safety accessories (warning triangles, First Aid boxes, warning lamps and fire extinguishers)
are stowed in a place easily accessible.
▪ All the outrigger beams are completely retracted and secured.
▪ All the outrigger floats are in the Driving mode position and are secured or have been re-
moved.
▪ All the covers of the Outrigger system control panels are closed.
▪ The Carrier operation/superstructure operation key switch in the carrier cab is set in rotation
position 1.
▪ All the swivelling ladders are deposited in their holders an secured.
▪ Stepladder is fastened in the holders on the carrier cab.
▪ Lounge bed *) is folded up and secured.
▪ All the working floodlights are switched off.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
240 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.3 Starting/stopping engine
11.3.1 Starting the engine
Overview
1 2 3
6 7 8 9 10
5
4
11
12
13
1 Parking brake warning lamp 8 Ignition lock

2 Engine temperature gauge 9 Gearbox display
3 Fuel gauge 10 Speed indicator
4 Battery main switch switch 11 On-board computer display
5 Carrier operation/superstructure operation 12 Gear pre-selection switch
key switch
6 Speedometer with trip meter 13 Parking brake
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
7 Starting/stopping engine pushbutton
Requirements
▪ Carrier operation/superstructure operation key switch is in position 1.
▪ Gear pre-selection switch is in position N.
ATF 220G-5 241

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Switching on the ignition
Wait for at least 10 seconds between switching off the ignition and switch-
ing it back on! Non-compliance may result in problems in the vehicle elec-
tronics.
Version with immobilizer
1 Ignition lock 3 Ignition key, rigid

2 Ignition key, folding
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.

ð The immobilizer is now deactivated.
ð The ignition is switched on.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
242 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Version without immobilizer *)
1 Ignition lock 2 Ignition key
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.

2. Rotate the ignition key to the right.
ð The ignition is switched on.
Self-test when ignition is switched on

The following indicator, pilot and warning lamps light up permanently until the engine starts:
▪ Service brake warning lamp (if the supply pressure is too low).
▪ Parking brake warning lamp (when engaged).
▪ CH indicator in Gearbox display.
▪ Fuel gauge shows filling level.
▪ Engine temperature gauge.
Starting the engine
NOTICE
Engine damage due to improper operation.
It is not allowed to start the engine when theMinor engine fault, Engine oil
level, and Coolant level warning lamps light up.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 243

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
NOTICE
Damages if starter is actuated for too long.
The starter can be damaged if actuated for too long.
1. Do not actuate the starter for more than 20 seconds.
2. Wait for at least 60 seconds before re-attempting to start the engine in
order to protect the batteries.
1 Starting/stopping engine pushbutton
1. Press Starting/stopping engine pushbutton.

ð Engine is running.
Indicators when engine is running

The following indicator, pilot and warning lamps are functioning when the engine is running:
▪ N indicator in Gearbox display.
▪ Parking brake warning lamp.
▪ Carrier central warning warning lamp.
▪ Speed indicator with integrated hour meter.
▪ Engine temperature gauge (depending on load).
▪ Speedometer.
▪ Fuel gauge.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
244 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.3.2 Switching off the engine
Do not switch off the engine while it is running at an increased speed.

Do not switch off the engine immediately after a heavy load, but instead let
it continue running at the idling speed for a few minutes to cool it down.
Version with immobilizer

2. Switch the Gear pre-selection switch into the N position.
4. Remove the ignition key from the ignition lock.
ð The engine is switched off, the immobilizer is activated.
Version without immobilizer *)

4. Turn ignition key to the left and pull it out of the ignition lock.
ð Engine is switched off.
Final activities
11.4 Shifting and driving
11.4.1 Starting and stopping
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to mobile crane rolling away.
If the parking brake is not engaged when parking the mobile crane, it may
roll away out of control. This can cause an accident. This could cause seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
1. Park mobile crane on frim ground.
3. Set the gearbox to neutral position.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
4. Secure the mobile crane to prevent it from rolling away, especially on

upward or downward gradients. If necessary, secure with wheel
chocks.
ATF 220G-5 245

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to deactivated accelerator pedal.
Acceleration is no longer possible when the Carrier operation/superstruc-
ture operation key switch is set to rotation position 2 while driving.
1. Switch the Carrier operation/superstructure operation key switch to ro-
tation position 1.
2. Pull out the key prior to driving.
WARNING
Danger due to lack of braking power.
If the Gear pre-selection switch is switched to neutral position while driv-
ing, the braking power of the engine will not be available. This may lead to
accidents.
1. Do not bring the Gear pre-selection switch into neutral position while
driving.
2. Do not switch the Gear pre-selection switch from D to R while driving.
NOTICE
Engine damage due to overspeed.
The mobile crane may accelerate when driving on downward gradients.
The gearbox is not shifted up automatically in the manual driving mode.
In case of overspeed, an emergency shifting up is activated to protect the
engine.
At 2650 rpm, the emergency shifting up takes place even if the service
brake and the retarder are activated.
At 3500 rpm, the emergency shifting up takes place if the retarder is activ-
ated as well as in the pure deceleration mode.
1. Shift the gearbox into a lower gear on time.
2. Decelerate the mobile crane with the service brake.
NOTICE
Gearbox damage due to improper operation.
Improper operation may lead to gearbox damages.
1. Engage the reverse gear only when the mobile crane has stopped.
2. Do not allow the mobile crane to roll in the opposite direction to the
gear engaged.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
246 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview
2 1
1 Gearbox display 2 Gearbox shifting lever
Gear selector lever
1 Gear selector lever DM Forward maneuvering

2 Gear pre-selection switch D Forward driving
A Shift up gears N Neutral position
First spring position = shift up one gear
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Stop spring position = shift up two gears

B Shift down gears R Reverse driving
First spring position = shift down one gear
Stop spring position = shift down two gears
M/A Toggle between manual/automatic driving RM Reverse maneuvering
modes
ATF 220G-5 247

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
S —
Starting/Maneuvering
Requirements
▪ Gear pre-selection switch is set in N position.
▪ Working speed / cruise control switch is switched off.
Starting
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Rotate the Gear pre-selection switch to D or R.
ð The Gearbox display shows D or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
ð The Parking brake warning lamp goes out.
4. Release the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal carefully.
ð The mobile crane is set in motion.
Forward gear 3 is programmed as the starting gear. A different forward gear can be engaged
manually.
Carry out a test braking after starting on a dry, non-skidding road.
Maneuvering
NOTICE
Clutch damage due to overload.
In the event of a clutch overload, the display shows Gearbox CL. The
clutch may be damaged due to overload.
1. In the event of a clutch overload, switch Gear pre-selection switch into
position D, N or R.
A maneuvering mode is provided for extremely slow driving.

In the maneuvering mode, the accelerator pedal reacts more sensitively.
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Switch Gear pre-selection switch into position DM or RM.
ð The Gearbox display shows DM or RM.
ð Forward gear 1 and 2 and reverse gear 1 and 2 are available for the manoeuvring mode.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Release the parking brake.

ð The Parking brake warning lamp goes out.
4. Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal carefully.
ð The mobile crane is set in motion.
248 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Stopping
NOTICE
Incorrect operation when stopping the mobile crane.
When opening the driver's door while the transmission is not in the N posi-
tion, the Gearbox fault warning lamp is flashing and the Gearbox fault
warning buzzer sounds. This does not indicate a malfunction but an incor-
rect operation.
1. Switch Gear pre-selection switch into position N.
1. Stop the mobile crane to standstill with the service brake.

ð Parking brake warning lamp is lit.
ð The Gearbox display shows N.
ð The mobile crane is standing still.
11.4.2 Activating of steering programs
Safety instructions
Gearbox shifts up only to forward gear 3.

A special steering program will be activated for as long as the Steering
program switch is switched on.
The pilot lamp in the Steering program switch is lit.
The Steering program switch pilot lamp in the on-board computer display
flashes.
The Upshift lock pilot lamp in the on-board computer display is lit.
In Germany, driving on public roads is only allowed in the on-road

mode. Observe country-specific regulations deviating from this.
Switch on steering program: Maximum driving speed is walking
speed. Warning sound if speed is too high.
Greater tyre wear when driving with special steering programs.
When the carrier engine of the mobile crane is re-started, the special
steering programs are deactivated. The special steering programs
On-road/off-road mode remain.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 249

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview of axles and wheels
1 Front wheels 2 Rear wheels
Overview of steering programs
A On-road mode steering program D Minimum turning radius special steering

program
B Crab steering special steering program E Manual steering of rear wheels special
steering program
C Rear swing-out suppression special steer-
ing program
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
On-road mode
The front wheels are steered mechanically.
The rear wheels are steered electronically dependent on the front wheels.
The steering angles of the rear wheels are reduced as a function of the speed, and the axles
are locked in straight forward position at high speed.
250 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Special steering programs

The front wheels are steered mechanically.
The rear wheels are steered electronically dependent on the front wheels.
Special steering programs are:
▪ Crab steering.
The mobile crane can be moved in parallel.
▪ Rear swing-out suppression.
The rear wheels are steered automatically when rotating the steering wheel such that the
swing-out of the rear section of the vehicle is suppressed.
▪ Minimum turning radius.
The rear wheels are steered such that the turning radius is further decreased when com-
pared with the on-road mode.
▪ Manual steering of rear wheels.
The rear wheels can be steered manually independently of the steering angle of the front
wheels.
Notices
Some special steering programs are subject to technical limitations: The maximal possible
steering angles of the wheels vary.
To prevent damages of tyres and axles, the electronic system corrects the steering angles of
the electronically steered wheels (indicated by flashing pilot lamp in the Rear steering control-
ler). A diagonal movement, e. g., might become a big arc.
The steering angle of the front wheels must be corrected in accordance to the selected steering
program; in case of steering movements of the front wheels, the rear wheels will synchronize
automatically. After correction of the steering angle (with the steering wheel), the rear wheels
will synchronize automatically. The special steering program is continued.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 251

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview of operating elements and pilot lamps

1 2 3
4 5 6
4+
LEVEL
7 11 13
9 10 12 14
21 19 18 16
20 17 15
1 Crab steering pilot lamp 12 Manual steering towards right pushbutton
2 Rear swing-out suppression pilot lamp 13 Manual steering towards right pilot lamp
3 Minimum turning radius pilot lamp 14 Error reading pushbutton
4 Steering program switch pilot lamp 15 Rear swing-out suppression pilot lamp
5 Upshift lock pilot lamp 16 Rear swing-out suppression pushbutton
6 Levelling pilot lamp 17 Crab steering pilot lamp
7 Steering program (on-road/off-road mode) 18 Crab steering pushbutton
switch
8 Rear steering control unit 19 —
9 — 20 Minimum turning radius pilot lamp
10 Manual steering towards left pushbutton 21 Minimum turning radius pushbutton
11 Manual steering towards left pilot lamp
Activating on-road mode
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Requirements
▪ Any special steering program is activated.
252 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Procedure
1. Unlock and push upwards the Steering program (on-road/off-road mode) switch.
ð The Steering program switch pilot lamp in the on-board computer display goes out.
ð The Upshift lock pilot lamp in the on-board computer display goes out.
ð The Crab steering, the Rear swing-out suppression or the Minimum turning radius pilot
lamp goes out.
ð On-road mode steering program is activated.
Synchronizing axles
1. Move the wheels into the straight forward position.
2. Move the mobile crane slowly a few meters.
ð The axles are synchronized.
Levelling mobile crane

1. After changing to on-road mode, level mobile crane, refer to Bringing mobile crane into driv-
ing level [} page 276].
Activating a special steering program (off-road mode)
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Damage of the axles and wheels when driving with special steering
program.
Operational errors while driving with special steering program may lead to
damages of the axles and wheels.
1. Switch off differential locks.
2. Remove anti-skid chains.
The upshift lock is active in the special steering program.

Gears can be shifted only in the forward gears 1 to 3 as well as both
the reverse gears.
It may not always be possible to switch from one special steering
program to the another when driving. Stop the mobile crane.
If necessary, synchronize axles.
Requirements
▪ On-road mode is activated.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Procedure
1. Unlock and press lower part of the Steering program (on-road/off-road mode) switch.
ð The Steering program switch pilot lamp in the on-board computer display flashes.
ð The Upshift lock pilot lamp in the on-board computer display is lit.
2. Select the desired special steering program by pushbutton.
ATF 220G-5 253

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
3. In the case of the Manual steering of rear wheels special steering program, press the push-
button until the desired steering angle has been adjusted.
ð The associated pilot lamp in the on-board computer display is flashing.
ð The associated pilot lamp in the Rear steering control unit is lit.
ð The selected special steering program is activated.
Crab steering
1. Press Crab steering pushbutton.

ð The Crab steering pilot lamp in the on-board computer display flashes.
ð The Crab steering pilot lamp in the Rear steering controller is lit.
Rear swing-out suppression
1. Press Rear swing-out suppression pushbutton.

ð The Rear swing-out suppression pilot lamp in the on-board computer display flashes.
ð The Rear swing-out suppression pilot lamp in the Rear steering controller is lit.
Minimum turning radius
1. Press Minimum turning radius pushbutton.

ð The Minimum turning radius pilot lamp in the on-board computer display flashes.
ð The Minimum turning radius pilot lamp in the Rear steering controller is lit.
Manual steering of rear wheels
1. Press Manual steering of rear wheels pushbutton until the desired steering angle is adjus-
ted.
ð The Manual steering of rear axles pilot lamp in the on-board computer display flashes.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð The Manual steering of rear wheels pilot lamp in the Rear steering controller is lit.
The rear wheels can be steered with the Manual steering toward left or Manual steering toward
right pushbuttons independently of the steering angle of the front wheels.
254 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Synchronizing axles
As long as the Steering program pilot lamp is lit, the wheels are not in their nominal position and
must be synchronized. This can be achieved as follows:
1. Rotate steering wheel to the right or to the left.
2. Press the pushbutton of the respective special steering program longer.
ð When synchronizing has finished, the pilot lamp of the special steering program changes
from flashing to permanent light.
Driving away from obstacles
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents when driving away from obstacles.
When driving away from obstacles, persons or objects may be crushed.
This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Utmost caution when driving with maximum steering angle.
2. Drive away from obstacles with the crab steering mode.
3. Maintain distance from obstacles.
Driving away from obstacles
In the On-road mode steering program, the rear slews out in the opposite direction of the steer-
ing direction of the front wheels.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 255

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.4.3 Engaging and switching off axle drive and differential locks
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Damages on axles due to improper operation of drives.
Axle drives and gear wheels may be damaged. The mobile crane may no
longer be in driving condition.
1. Apply drive of axle 2 *) only briefly and in difficult terrain.
NOTICE
Damages on axles due to improper operation of differential locks.
Axle drives and gear wheels may be damaged. The mobile crane may be-
come undriveable.
1. Apply differential locks only briefly and in difficult terrain.
2. Do not steer when inter-wheel differential locks are switched on.
Off-road, if required, switch on ABS off-road mode *).
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
256 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview
10x6 drive *)
6 2 3
00s
1 4
1 Axle 2 drive pilot lamp 5 Differential locks pilot lamp

2 Inter-axle differential locks Axle 4 and 5 pi- 6 Remaining period of inter-wheel differential
lot lamp locks indicator
3 Inter-wheel differential locks pilot lamp 7 Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton
4 Axle 2 pilot lamp
Requirements
▪ Mobile crane is standing still and parking brake is engaged.
▪ All wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 257

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
10x8 drive
6 2 3
00s
1 4
1 Axle 2 drive pilot lamp 5 Differential locks pilot lamp

2 Inter-axle differential locks Axle 2 to 4 pilot 6 Remaining period of inter-wheel differential
lamp locks indicator
3 Inter-wheel differential locks pilot lamp 7 Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton
4 Axle 2 pilot lamp
Engaging in case of 10x6 *) drive
Sequence of engaging
1. Inter-axle locks of Axles 4 and 5.
2. Inter-axle lock of Axles 2 to 4.
3. All inter-wheel differential locks.
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
258 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Engaging axle 4 and 5 inter-axle differential locks

1. Push Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton downward once.
ð The Drive menu appears in the on-board computer display.
ð Inter-axle differential locks Axle 4 and 5 pilot lamp is lit.
ð Axle 4 pilot lamp is lit, indicator has yellow background.
ð The Differential locks pilot lamps are lit. A cross appears in the respective circles.
ð The axle 2 drive and the inter-axle differential lock of axles 4 and 5 are engaged.
Engaging axle 2 to 4 inter-axle differential locks

1. Push down the Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton twice.
ð Inter-axle differential locks Axle 2 to 4 pilot lamp is lit.
ð The inter-axle differential lock between the axles 2 and 4 is activated.
Engaging inter-wheel differential locks

1. Push down the Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton three times.
ð The Inter-wheel differential locks pilot lamp is lit.
ð Inter-wheel differential locks are engaged for 10 seconds.
The remaining time of engaged locks is displayed in seconds.
Engaging in case of 10x8 drive
Sequence of engaging
1. Drive of axle 2 and inter-axle differential locks of axles 4 and 5.
2. Inter-axle lock of Axles 2 to 4.
3. All inter-wheel differential locks.
Requirements
Engaging axle 2 drive and inter-axle differential lock of axles 4 and 5

1. Push Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton downward once.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð Axle 2 drive pilot lamp is lit.

ð Inter-axle differential locks Axle 4 and 5 pilot lamp is lit.
ð Axle 4 pilot lamp is lit, indicator has yellow background.
ð The axle 2 drive and the inter-axle differential lock of axles 4 and 5 are engaged.
ATF 220G-5 259

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Engaging axle 2 to 4 inter-axle differential locks

1. Push down the Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton twice.
ð Inter-axle differential locks Axle 2 to 4 pilot lamp is lit.
ð The inter-axle differential lock between the axles 2 and 4 is activated.
Engaging inter-wheel differential locks

1. Push down the Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton three times.
ð The Inter-wheel differential locks pilot lamp is lit.
ð Inter-wheel differential locks are engaged for 10 seconds.
The remaining time of engaged locks is displayed in seconds.
Deactivation in case of 10x6 *) drive
Requirements
Deactivation off Inter-axle differential locks

1. Push Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton upward once.
ð The Differential locks pilot lamps are lit. The circles are empty.
ð The inter-axle differential locks are deactivated.
Switching off inter-wheel differential locks

NOTICE! The inter-wheel differential locks are deactivated automatically after 10
seconds.
Deactivation in case of 10x8 drive
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
260 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Switching off drive of the axle 2 and inter-axle differential locks

1. Push Axle drive/differential locks pushbutton upward once.
ð Axle 2 drive pilot lamp goes out.
ð The Inter-axle differential lock Axle 2 to 4 and Axle 4 to 5 pilot lamps go out.
ð Axle 2 pilot lamp is lit, the Axle 2 indicator has a black background.
ð The Differential locks pilot lamps are lit. The circles are empty.
ð Drive of the axle 2 and both inter-axle differential locks are switched off.
Switching off inter-wheel differential locks

NOTICE! The inter-wheel differential locks are deactivated automatically after 10
seconds.
11.4.4 Transfer case
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Transfer case damage due to incorrect operation.
Errors when shifting the transfer case can result in damage to the transfer
case.
1. Switch the transfer case only when the mobile crane is stationary and
with the transmission in neutral.
2. The supply pressure in the compressed air system must be at least 7
bar.
3. After switching over, either the symbol for on-road or off-road must
light up.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 261

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview
1 Off-road gear pilot lamp 3 On-road/off-road gear pushbutton

2 On-road gear pilot lamp
Switching the transfer case
Requirements
▪ Mobile crane stationary.
▪ The engine is in the idling mode.
▪ The parking brake has been engaged.
▪ Gearbox in neutral
On-road gear
Uses
▪ Normal driving conditions.
1. Push On-road/off-road gear pushbutton upward.
ð On-road gear pilot lamp lights up.
ð The transfer case is switched to On-road gear.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Off-road gear
Uses
▪ Steep gradients.
▪ Rough terrain.
▪ Manoeuvering.
262 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
▪ Heavy vehicle load.

▪ Wintry road conditions.
1. Push On-road/off-road gear pushbutton downward.
ð Off-road gear pilot lamp lights up.
ð The transfer case is switched to Off-road gear.
11.4.5 Brakes
Principle
The braking system of the mobile crane consists of the following components:
▪ Service brake as two-circuit braking system with disk brakes according to ECE R13.
▪ ABS *).
▪ Parking brake as spring loaded brake.
▪ Engine brake.
▪ Intarder as retarder.
▪ Eddy-current brake *) as retarder.
Failure of on brake circuit causes reduced braking power, the braking distance will be longer. In
this situation, the parking brake must be used as auxiliary brake to slow the mobile crane down
to standstill.
For further information, please refer to chapter Technical data, Brakes [} page 498].
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to lack of braking power.
A lack of braking power may lead to a significantly longer braking distance
and accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries to persons.
1. Do not set the mobile crane in motion without sufficient brake pres-
sure. The warning lamps must have gone out.
2. Check the function of the braking system after starting: Carry out a test
braking.
3. While driving, always observe the air pressure gauges as well as the
Service brake and Parking brake warning lamps.
4. If the Service brake or Air pressure gauge warning lamps light up while
driving, stop the mobile crane at a secure place as fast as possible and
suiting the traffic conditions. If necessary, additionally engage the park-
ing brake.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 263

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
NOTICE
Instructions regarding driving on down gradients.
1. Change into a lower gear early.
2. Activate the retarder.
3. Use the service brake only briefly as auxiliary brake.
Overview
3 3 4
2
1
R 5
9
6
1 Parking brake warning lamp 6 Eddy-current brake pilot lamp

2 Service brake warning lamp 7 Parking brake
3 Air pressure gauge 8 Brake pedal
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
4 Intarder switch 9 Right steering column switch

5 Intarder pilot lamp
264 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Service brake
Overview
1 Brake pedal
1. Gently step on the brake pedal.

ð The mobile crane is decelerated.
Parking brake
WARNING
chocks.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 265

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
WARNING
Overheating of wheel brakes when driving with engaged parking
brake.
The braking power of the service brake may be reduced. The mobile crane
may catch fire. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Before driving, release parking brake.
2. Do not drive away before the Parking brake warning lamp has gone
out.
Overview
1 Parking brake - braking position 3 Parking brake - ring

2 Parking brake - driving position
Engaging the parking brake

1. Pull parking brake lever backward into braking position. The lever must engage.
ð Parking brake is engaged.
ð Parking brake warning lamp is lit.
Releasing the parking brake

1. Pull the lever ring upward.
2. Push the lever forward up to the stop, into Driving position.
ð The parking brake is released.
ð The Parking brake warning lamp goes out when the brake-air pressure is sufficient.
Parking brake as auxiliary brake
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to failure of service brake.
The failure of the service brake may lead to accidents. This could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1. Slow the mobile crane down to standstill with the service brake suiting
the traffic conditions.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2. Before driving again, have the braking system repaired.
266 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Continuous service brake
Safety instructions
WARNING
Reduced braking power due to overheated wheel brakes.
When the service braking system is used over a prolonged period, the
wheel brakes may overheat. In this way, the braking power may be re-
duced. This may cause an accident.
1. Before driving into a slope, shift the gearbox to a lower gear.
2. Use the retarder.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to locking drive wheels when using the re-
tarder.
The retarder acts on the driving wheels. When switching on the retarder on
slippery road, the driving wheels may lock. This may cause an accident.
1. When switching the retarder manually, carefully switch the switching
stages in succession.
2. Do not activate the retarder on slippery road.
Description of function of the retarder

The retarder consists of the following components:
▪ Engine brake and intarder with Bremsomat.
▪ Engine brake and intarder (5 manually switchable switching stages).
▪ Engine brake and intarder and eddy-current brake *) (5 manually switchable switching
stages).
• The retarder only has power when a gear is engaged.

• The lower the gear the higher the power of the retarder.
• The retarder is briefly interrupted while the ABS control *) is active.
• The retarder remains switched off for as long as the cruise control is
switched on.
• The retarder function is interrupted for as long as the accelerator pedal is
pressed.
• The retarder is briefly interrupted while gears are shifted.
• If the retarder braking power is no longer sufficient to keep the speed
constant on a down gradient, use the service brake.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 267

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Switching the engine brake and Bremsomat on/off
0 Engine brake/Bremsomat switched off 1 Engine brake/Bremsomat switched on
Switching engine brake and Bremsomat on

1. Pull the steering column switch from position 0 to position 1.
ð Engine brake and Bremsomat are switched on.
ð The current driving speed of the mobile crane is saved and maintained constant on the
downward gradient. The required braking torque is adjusted infinitely and automatically. The
Intarder pilot lamp lights up when the intarder is functioning.
Switching engine brake and Bremsomat off

1. Press the steering column switch from position 1 to position 0.
ð Engine brake and Bremsomat are switched off.
Take further information about the Bremsomat functionality from the operating manual provided
by the gearbox manufacturer, refer to Intarder [} page 581].
Switching the eddy-current brake on/off *)
Switching Braking power

level
0 None
1 Engine brake
2 25 % eddy-current brake + 40 % intarder + en-
gine brake
gine brake
gine brake
gine brake
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
The eddy-current brake increases the power of the engine brake and the intarder.
The eddy-current brake is switched in four switching levels in combination with the intarder.
268 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Switching eddy-current brake on

1. Pull the steering column switch into one of the positions 2 to 5.
ð The Eddy-current brake pilot lamp is lit as long as the eddy-current brake is switched on.
Switching eddy-current brake off

1. Press the steering column switch in position 0.
ð The Eddy-current brake pilot lamp goes out.
Off-road mode ABS *)
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accident from activated off-road mode ABS.
If the off-road mode ABS is engaged, the wheels can lock during braking.
This may lead to accidents involving personal injuries or material damage.
1. Do not activate off-road mode ABS on public roads.
NOTICE! "Off-road mode ABS" is deactivated when the engine is started.
Overview
2 3
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Off-road mode ABS pushbutton 3 Trailer ABS pilot lamp

2 Mobile crane ABS pilot lamp
ATF 220G-5 269

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
In the case of the ABS off-road mode, the ABS system is switched to a higher brake slippage.
This enables the stopping distance off-road (e.g. in case of soft or extremely undulating sub-
stratum as well as on downward gradients) to be reduced.
Activating off-road mode ABS

1. Press lower part of Off-road mode ABS pushbutton.
ð Mobile crane ABS pilot lamp is flashing. If a trailer is connected, the Trailer ABS pilot
lamp is flashing additionally.
ð Off-road mode ABS is activated.
Deactivating off-road mode ABS

1. Press upper part of Off-road mode ABS pushbutton.
ð The Mobile crane ABS pilot lamp goes out. If a trailer is connected, the Trailer ABS pilot
lamp goes out additionally.
ð Off-road mode ABS is deactivated.
11.4.6 Cruise control
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents when cruise control is switched on.
If the driver does not react on time when the cruise control is switched on,
the mobile crane may start to skid or not be braked on time. This may lead
to accidents. Do not use cruise control:
1. In case of uncertain traffic conditions.
2. In case of wintry road conditions.
3. In case of slippery road.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
270 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Overview
1 Right steering column switch 3 Cruise control pilot lamp

2 Working speed / cruise control switch
The cruise control allows the adjustment of a constant speed.

It is possible that the set speed cannot be maintained in the following situations:
▪ On upward gradients.
▪ On downward gradients.
Requirement
▪ The mobile crane is driving faster than 20 km/h.
Switching cruise control on

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Cruise control on
1. Press lower part of Working speed / cruise control switch.
ATF 220G-5 271

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
2. Tap the steering column switch on the right briefly in position 1.

ð The current speed is saved.
ð Cruise control is switched on, the Cruise control pilot lamp is lit green.
Changing adjusted speed
1 Increasing the speed 2 Reducing speed
Increasing the speed

1. Tap the steering column switch briefly in position 1.
ð The adjusted speed is increased and saved in accordance with the duration of the tapping.
1. Push steering column switch into position 1 and hold it there.
ð The adjusted speed is increased and saved steadily.
Reducing speed
1. Tap the steering column switch briefly in position 2.
ð The adjusted speed is reduced and saved in accordance with the duration of the tapping.
1. Push steering column switch into position 2 and hold it there.
ð The adjusted speed is reduced and saved steadily.
Deactivating the cruise control

1. Press upper part of Working speed / cruise control switch.
ð The cruise control is switched off and deleted.
The cruise control is automatically switched off and the adjusted speed is deleted under the fol-
lowing conditions:
▪ The crane driver brakes the mobile crane.
▪ The speed drops below 20 km/h.
▪ The Working speed / cruise control control switch is switched off (upper part pressed).
The cruise control is only briefly interrupted in the following situations:
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Gear change.
▪ Accelerating the mobile crane with the accelerator pedal.
▪ The mobile crane is decelerated; at the same time the steering column switch is in posi-
tion 1, refer to Switching the engine brake and Bremsomat on/off [} page 268].
272 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
If the ignition has been switched off, the upper part and then the lower part of the "Work-
ing speed / cruise control control switch" must be pressed to switch on the cruise control
again.
11.4.7 Tilt adjustment / driving level
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents when driving not levelled mobile crane.
The mobile crane may become unstable and overturn. This could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1. Level the mobile crane before driving.
WARNING
Accidents due to errors when levelling / adjusting tilt.
Errors when levelling /adjusting tilt may lead to accidents.
Observe the following points:
1. Bring rear wheels into the straight forward position.
2. No one is allowed to stay below or above the mobile crane.
3. Instruct unauthorized persons to leave the danger zone of the mobile
crane.
4. Lower the suspension completely before starting the levelling.
5. Carry out levelling only when the mobile crane is standing still, never
while driving.
6. After levelling, the mobile crane must be in a levelled position.
7. When adjusting the tilt, incline the mobile crane from the horizontal po-
sition only as much as is absolutely required. Danger of tipping!
NOTICE
Damages on the mobile crane due to errors when levelling / adjusting
tilt.
Errors when levelling /adjusting tilt may lead to damages on the mobile
crane.
Observe the following points:
1. Carry out levelling / tilt adjustment only at engine speeds up to max.
1200 rpm.
2. While levelling, the axle suspension must not be locked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. While adjusting the tilt, the axle suspension must be locked.
ATF 220G-5 273

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
NOTICE
Damage on the suspension cylinders in case of fully lowered mobile
crane.
If the suspension cylinders are mechanically standing on the block, they
may be damaged and the axle oscillation does not function.
1. Do not drive with a fully lowered mobile crane.
Overview
LEVEL
8 9
1 2 3 1-5 10
7 6 5 4
1 Driving level pushbutton 6 Axle suspension locking switch
2 Front left-hand suspension cylinder push- 7 Change vehicle height pushbutton
button
3 Front right-hand suspension cylinder push- 8 Levelling pilot lamp
button
4 Rear right-hand suspension cylinder push- 9 Axle suspension locking pilot lamp
button
5 Rear left-hand suspension cylinder push- 10 Axles lifted pilot lamp
button
Tilt adjustment
Requirement
▪ Switch Gear pre-selection switch into position N.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ All wheels are in the straight forward position.
274 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Switching axle suspension locking on

1. Unlock and push downward the Axle suspension locking switch.
ð Axle suspension locking pilot lamp lights up.
ð The axle suspension is locked.
Changing inclination of mobile crane
Raising left-hand front corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold upper part of Front left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Left-hand front corner of the mobile crane is raised.
Lowering left-hand front corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold lower part of Front left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Left-hand front corner of the mobile crane is lowered.
Raising right-hand front corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold upper part of Front right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Right-hand front corner of the mobile crane is raised.
Lowering right-hand front corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold lower part of Front right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Right-hand front corner of the mobile crane is lowered.
Raising right-hand rear corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold upper part of Rear right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Right-hand rear corner of the mobile crane is raised.
Lowering right-hand rear corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold lower part of Rear right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Right-hand rear corner of the mobile crane is lowered.
Raising left-hand rear corner of the vehicle

1. Press and hold upper part of Rear left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Left-hand rear corner of the mobile crane is raised.
Lowering left-hand rear corner of the vehicle

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Press and hold lower part of Rear left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð Left-hand rear corner of the mobile crane is lowered.
ATF 220G-5 275

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Bringing mobile crane into driving level
Requirement
▪ Vehicle stands still on even road.
▪ Mobile crane is lowered completely.
▪ The axle suspension is not locked.
▪ All wheels are in the straight forward position.
▪ The Axle suspension locking pilot lamp must not flash.
Changing the height of the mobile crane
Lifting mobile crane

1. Push upwards and hold Front left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton, Front right-hand
suspension cylinder pushbutton, Rear left-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton, and Rear
right-hand suspension cylinder pushbutton.
ð The mobile crane is lifted.
Hold the pushbutton pressed until reaching the desired tilt/position.
Lowering the mobile crane

1. Press and hold lower part of Change vehicle height pushbutton.
ð The mobile crane is lowered.
Hold the pushbutton pressed until reaching the desired tilt/position.

1. Press and hold the Driving level pushbutton until the colour of the Levelling pilot lamp
changes from blue to yellow.
The levelling process will stop automatically.
2. Release Driving level pushbutton.
ð The mobile crane is levelled.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
276 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.4.8 Driving with trailer
Safety instructions
DANGER
Risk of accident when coupling and uncoupling the trailer
Observe the guidelines of the employers' liability insurance association
when coupling and decoupling the trailer.
WARNING
Risk of accidents when mobile crane and trailer move during prepar-
ation for coupling.
Persons preparing the decoupling can be crushed between the mobile
crane and the trailer. This may result in death or injury.
1. Engage parking brakes of mobile crane and trailer during preparation
for coupling.
2. At the time of coupling, no person is allowed to stay between the mo-
bile crane and the trailer.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to detaching trailer.
If the trailer detaches from towing vehicle while driving, this may lead to
accidents. This may result in death or injury.
1. Couple the trailer to the mobile crane correctly and as prescribed.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to mobile crane with trailer rolling away on
down gradients.
When parking the mobile crane with trailer for a prolonged period, the air
pressure in the braking system of the trailer may drop. In this way, it may
roll away out of control. This can cause an accident. This may result in
death or injury.
1. Before parking the mobile crane with trailer on a downward gradient,
check the holding force of the mobile crane's parking brake system.
2. If the mobile crane rolls away, a location with less down gradient must
be found.
3. Place wheel chocks under the wheels.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Trailer operation
Coupling the trailer

▪ The tractor vehicle and trailer are secured against rolling away.
1. Open the trailer hitch. Observe the operating manual provided by the manufacturer.
ATF 220G-5 277

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
2. Adapt the drawbar of the trailer to the height of the trailer hitch jaw.
3. Release parking brake of towing vehicle. Maneuver the towing vehicle backwards toward
the trailer until the trailer is coupled.
4. Engage parking brake of towing vehicle.
5. Establish electric and pneumatic connections.
6. Release parking brake of trailer.
7. Remove possibly existing wheel chocks.
ð Trailer is coupled to towing vehicle, connections are established.
Testing holding force of tractor vehicle's spring-loaded accumulator on up/down gradient
1 Brake lever 3 Parking position

2 Ring 4 Test position
1. Engage parking brake of towing vehicle.

2. Push ring downward and pull brake lever backward up to the stop in test position.
ð The tractor vehicle and trailer combination must come to a stop. If this is not the case, a
location with less downward gradient must be found for parking.
3. Return brake lever into braking position.
4. Place wheel chocks under the wheels of towing vehicle and trailer.
ð The holding force of the tractor vehicle's spring-loaded accumulator has been checked.
Uncoupling the trailer

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Park the combination.

2. Place wheel chocks under the wheels of trailer.
3. Engage parking brake of trailer.
4. Separate electric and pneumatic connections.
5. Open the trailer hitch.
278 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
6. Move towing vehicle away.

ð Connections are separated, trailer and towing vehicle are uncoupled.
11.4.9 Parking the mobile crane
Safety instructions
WARNING
4. In case of a coupled trailer, check the holding force of the tractor-
trailer.
chocks.
Parking the mobile crane

1. Stop the mobile crane to standstill with the service brake.
4. Switch all electrical devices off.
5. Switch engine off and remove ignition key.
6. Close all the windows of carrier cab.
9. If necessary, place wheel chocks under the wheels, refer to Wheel chocks [} page 49].
10.Lock all the storage boxes.
11.Lock all the control boxes for the outriggers.
12.Lock all the fuel tanks and all the AdBlue tanks (carrier and superstructure).
13.Lock superstructure cab.
ð The mobile crane is parked correctly.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 279

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.5 Moving the fully rigged mobile crane on the construction site
WARNING
Danger of tipping of the mobile crane due to driving on the construc-
tion site.
If the specified rigging status has not been complied with, the mobile crane
may become unstable and tip.
1. Comply with the rigging status as in the chart.
2. Comply with the specified requirements.
WARNING
Danger of tipping of mobile crane while moving.
If the mobile crane is not levelled or the axle suspension is not locked, the
mobile crane may become unstable and tip.
1. Level the mobile crane.
2. Activate the axle suspension locking.
WARNING
Danger of tipping of the mobile crane in case of uneven ground.
If the ground is too uneven for levelling or moving, the mobile crane may
become unstable and tip.
1. Check the location and level the ground if necessary before levelling
the mobile crane.
2. Check the route over the whole width (vehicle width + outriggers on
both sides) and level the ground if necessary before driving.
CAUTION
Danger of crushing when lowering the wheels.
When switching off the axle suspension locking, the wheels will descend to
the ground. This may lead to injuries.
1. Keep away from wheels.
NOTICE
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Damage on the suspension cylinders in case of fully lowered mobile

crane.
If the suspension cylinders are mechanically standing on the block, they
may be damaged and the axle oscillation does not function.
1. Do not drive with a fully lowered mobile crane.
280 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.5.2 Conditions for driving fully rigged mobile crane

Driving the fully rigged mobile crane on the construction site is only allowed under the following
conditions:
▪ The road is firm, level, and horizontal with a total inclination of 3°.
▪ Superstructure is locked.
▪ Slewing brake has been engaged.
▪ Mobile crane is levelled to driving level.
▪ The axle suspension is locked.
▪ The outrigger floats are in working position.
▪ All the outrigger beams are completely extended and locked.
▪ The specified tyre pressure is complied with.
▪ The storage box *) has been fitted.
▪ The telescopic boom is slewed over the rear of the mobile crane or the carrier cab.
▪ Observe the notes in the load rating charts.
▪ Observe overview with position of the counterweight.
▪ All outrigger cylinders are extended such that the bearing surfaces of the outrigger floats are
at a maximum distance of 10 cm from the ground.
▪ Maximum driving speed is 1.4 km/h.
▪ Engage lowest gear.
▪ Engine speed < 1000 rpm.
▪ Select smallest position of transfer case.
▪ Up to 200 kg payload are possible.
▪ The telescopic boom is fully retracted.
▪ No load is attached to the hook block.
▪ Slings have been removed.
▪ The hook block has been raised to the head of the jib or to the boom head.
▪ The rigging status is complied with, for rigging status refer to Axle loads for driving fully
rigged mobile crane on constructions sites [} page 281].
11.5.3 Axle loads for driving fully rigged mobile crane on constructions sites
Introduction
The axle loads assigned to the individual rigging statuses can be determined with the following
charts.
Key factors for the axle loads

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Position of the superstructure in relation to the carrier.

▪ Mounted counterweight.
▪ Mounted jibs.
▪ Boom angle.
ATF 220G-5 281

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
For each rigging status, there is a minimum and a maximum boom angle specified, respectively.
When adjusting the optimum boom angle for a rigging status, the axle loads are the same on all
axles.
The values on boom angle are angle ranges. The specified axle loads apply to the range
between the specified and the next higher boom angle.
Without jib
Requirements
▪ Without jib.
▪ Without 2nd hoisting winch.
▪ Telescopic boom fully retracted.
Overview of superstructure rotated to the rear
1 Telescopic boom 3 Counterweight

2 Angle of telescopic boom
Without jib
Counter- Super- Angle of Axle Axle Axle Axle Axle
weight [t] structure telescopic load, load, load, load, load,
boom [°] Axle 1 Axle 2 Axle 3 Axle 4 Axle 5
[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 0 12 12 12 12 12
the front 30 11 11 13 13 13
45 8 9 14 14 14
50 8 8 15 15 15
rotated to 78 8 8 15 15 15
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
the rear 84 9 9 14 14 14
12.0 rotated to 67 9 9 18 18 18
the rear 84 13 13 15 15 15
23.5 rotated to 55 11 11 21 21 21
the rear 60 12 12 20 20 20
84 17 17 17 17 17
282 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
35.0 rotated to 41 12 12 24 24 24
the rear 45 13 13 24 23 23
60 15 15 22 21 21
84 21 21 18 18 18
47.0 rotated to 12 13 13 27 27 27
the rear 30 15 15 26 26 26
45 17 17 25 24 25
60 19 19 23 23 23
84 25 25 19 19 19
71.0 rotated to 0 21 21 30 29 29
the rear 30 23 23 29 28 28
45 25 25 27 27 27
60 28 27 26 25 25
77 31 31 23 23 23
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 283

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
With "Heavy duty jib and end section" jib in transport position
Requirements
▪ "Heavy duty jib and end section" jib in transport position.

"Heavy duty jib and end section" jib in transport position

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 0 13 13 12 12 12
the front 30 11 11 13 13 13
45 9 9 15 14 15
52 8 8 15 15 15
rotated to 79 8 8 15 15 15
the rear 84 9 9 15 14 14
12.0 rotated to 69 9 9 18 18 18
the rear 84 13 13 16 16 16
23.5 rotated to 58 11 11 21 21 21
the rear 60 11 11 21 21 21
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
84 17 17 17 17 17
35.0 rotated to 46 12 12 24 24 24
the rear 60 15 15 22 22 22
84 21 21 18 18 18
47.0 rotated to 27 14 14 27 27 27
the rear 30 14 14 27 27 27
284 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
45 16 16 26 25 25
60 19 19 24 23 23
84 25 25 20 19 19
71.0 rotated to 0 21 20 31 30 30
the rear 30 22 22 30 29 29
45 24 24 28 28 28
60 27 27 26 26 26
77 31 31 24 23 23
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 285

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
With "Heavy duty jib and end section" jib in working position
Requirements
▪ "Heavy duty jib and end section" jib in working position.
Overview of superstructure rotated to the front

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
286 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

"Heavy duty jib and end section" jib

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 0 15 15 11 11 11
the front 30 13 13 12 12 12
45 11 11 14 14 14
56 8 8 16 16 16
rotated to 80 8 8 16 16 16
the rear 84 9 9 15 15 15
12.0 rotated to 0 10 10 18 18 18
the front 22 9 9 19 18 18
rotated to 72 10 10 19 18 18
the rear 84 13 13 16 16 16
23.5 rotated to 63 11 11 22 21 21
the rear 84 17 17 17 17 17
35.0 rotated to 53 12 12 25 24 24
the rear 60 14 14 23 23 23
84 21 21 19 18 19
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
47.0 rotated to 41 14 14 28 27 27
the rear 45 15 15 27 27 27
60 18 18 25 24 24
84 25 25 20 20 20
71.0 rotated to 32 20 20 31 31 31
the rear 45 23 23 30 29 29
ATF 220G-5 287

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
60 26 26 27 27 27
78 31 31 24 24 24
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
288 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
With "Heavy duty jib, intermediate section, and end section" jib in working position
Requirements
▪ "Heavy duty jib, intermediate section, and end section" jib in working position.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 289

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

"Heavy duty jib, intermediate section, and end section" jib in working position
[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 0 16 16 10 10 10
the front 30 14 14 12 12 12
45 11 11 13 13 13
58 8 8 16 16 16
rotated to 81 8 8 16 16 16
the rear 84 9 9 15 15 15
12.0 rotated to 0 12 12 17 17 17
the front 30 10 10 19 19 19
31 9 9 19 19 19
rotated to 73 10 10 19 19 19
the rear 84 13 13 16 16 16
23.5 rotated to 65 11 11 22 21 21
the rear 84 17 17 18 17 17
35.0 rotated to 56 12 12 25 24 24
the rear 60 13 13 24 24 24
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
84 21 21 19 19 19
47.0 rotated to 46 14 14 28 27 27
the rear 60 17 17 25 25 25
84 25 25 20 20 20
71.0 rotated to 39 20 20 31 31 31
the rear 45 22 22 31 30 30
290 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
60 26 25 28 27 28
78 31 31 24 24 24
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 291

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
With "Heavy duty jib, 2 intermediate sections, and end section" jib in working position
Requirements
▪ "Heavy duty jib, 2 intermediate sections, and end section" jib in working position.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
292 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

"Heavy duty jib, 2 intermediate sections, and end section" jib in working position
[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 0 18 18 9 9 9
the front 30 16 16 11 11 11
45 12 12 13 13 13
60 8 8 16 16 16
61 8 8 16 16 16
rotated to 82 8 8 16 16 16
the rear 84 9 9 15 15 15
12.0 rotated to 0 13 13 16 16 16
the front 30 11 11 18 18 18
37 10 10 19 19 19
rotated to 74 9 9 19 19 19
the rear 84 13 13 17 16 16
23.5 rotated to 67 11 11 22 22 22
the rear 84 17 17 18 18 18
35.0 rotated to 59 12 12 25 24 25
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
the rear 60 13 13 25 24 24
84 21 21 19 19 19
47.0 rotated to 50 14 14 28 27 28
the rear 60 17 17 26 26 26
84 25 25 20 20 20
ATF 220G-5 293

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
71.0 rotated to 46 21 21 31 31 31
the rear 60 25 25 29 28 28
79 31 31 24 24 24
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
294 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Requirements

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 295

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 23 18 18 9 9 9
the front 30 17 17 10 10 10
45 14 14 12 12 12
60 9 9 15 15 15
63 8 8 16 16 16
rotated to 82 8 8 16 16 16
the rear 84 9 9 16 15 15
12.0 rotated to 0 15 15 15 15 15
the front 30 12 12 17 17 17
43 10 10 19 19 19
rotated to 76 10 10 19 19 19
the rear 84 13 13 17 17 17
23.5 rotated to 69 11 11 22 22 22
the rear 84 17 17 18 18 18
35.0 rotated to 62 12 12 25 25 25
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
the rear 84 21 21 19 19 19
47.0 rotated to 54 14 14 28 28 28
the rear 60 16 16 27 26 26
84 25 25 21 20 20
71.0 rotated to 51 21 21 31 31 31
the rear 60 24 24 29 29 29
296 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
80 31 31 24 24 24
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 297

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
Requirements

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
298 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
0.0 rotated to 33 18 18 9 9 9
the front 45 15 15 11 11 11
60 10 10 15 15 15
65 8 8 16 16 16
rotated to 83 8 8 16 16 16
the rear 84 9 9 16 16 16
12.0 rotated to 0 17 17 14 14 14
the front 30 14 14 16 16 16
45 11 11 19 18 18
48 10 10 19 19 19
rotated to 77 10 10 19 19 19
the rear 84 13 13 17 17 17
23.5 rotated to 0 12 12 21 21 21
the rear 22 11 11 22 22 22
rotated to 71 11 11 22 22 22
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
the rear 84 17 17 18 18 18
35.0 rotated to 65 13 13 25 25 25
the rear 84 21 21 20 19 19
47.0 rotated to 58 14 14 28 28 28
the rear 60 15 15 28 27 27
84 25 25 21 21 21
ATF 220G-5 299

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode

[t] [t] [t] [t] [t]
71.0 rotated to 55 21 21 31 31 31
the rear 60 23 23 30 30 30
80 31 31 25 24 24
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
300 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
11.5.4 Overview
1 2
3 4 5
98 7 6
1 Axle suspension locking pilot lamp 6 Front right-hand suspension cylinder push-
button
2 Axle oscillation pilot lamp 7 Rear left-hand suspension cylinder push-
button
3 Driving level pushbutton 8 Axle suspension locking switch
4 Front left-hand suspension cylinder push- 9 Axle oscillation pushbutton
button
5 Front right-hand suspension cylinder push-
button
11.5.5 Driving fully rigged mobile crane, without load

2. Switch axle suspension locking off.
3. Bring mobile crane into driving level.
ð Mobile crane is in driving level.
Locking axle suspension

1. Unlock the Axle suspension locking switch by pressing the locking handle downwards and
press the switch downwards.
ð The axle suspension locking has been switched on. The Axle suspension locking pilot lamp
is lit.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Driving the mobile crane

1. Drive the mobile crane on the construction site.
NOTICE! If a wheel looses contact to the ground on uneven terrain with locked suspen-
sion, the mobile crane must be stopped, and the axle oscillation must be used.
Activating axle oscillation
ATF 220G-5 301

2019-10_EN
11 Driving mode
1. Stop the mobile crane.

2. Press and hold Axle oscillation pushbutton until all the wheels have contact to the ground.
ð The Axle oscillation indicator is lit.
3. Release Axle oscillation pushbutton.
ð The Axle oscillation indicator goes out.
ð Axles are locked.
4. Continue driving mobile crane.
5. Repeat the axle oscillation procedure with the next lifting wheel.
11.5.6 Driving with load

Not permitted. Refer to the notes regarding the lifting capacity charts.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
302 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
12 Driving mode in winter
12.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accident due to snow and ice.
Roof loads such as snow and ice can endanger the operator as well as
other persons.
Layers of snow and ice form a dangerous covering on roof surfaces, plat-
forms and ladders of the mobile crane.
1. Remove unsafe roof loads such as snow and loose chunks of ice be-
fore starting work.
2. Remove snow and ice from windshields and mirrors before starting
work.
3. Remove snow and ice from the ladders and platforms before climbing
up.
4. Remove snow and ice from telescopic boom and jibs.
CAUTION
Freezing of uncovered skin.
In case of severe frost, uncovered skin can freeze onto bare metal sur-
faces.
1. Do not touch metal surfaces with uncovered skin.
2. Wear gloves to protect hands.
12.2 Engine
12.2.1 Fuel
NOTICE
Malfunctions due to incorrect fuel.
At low ambient temperatures, the fluidity of the diesel fuel is reduced. This
may lead to malfunctions.
1. Use the corresponding cold-resistant diesel fuels at low ambient tem-
peratures.
2. Follow the enclosed operating manual of the engine manufacturer.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 303

2019-10_EN
12.2.2 Engine oil
NOTICE
Damage to the engine due to incorrect engine oil.
Engine oil with incorrect viscosity can damage the engine.
1. Choose the SAE class corresponding to the expected ambient temper-
ature during the utilization period. For approved engine oils, please
refer to the fuel specifications of the engine manufacturer.
12.2.3 Coolant and anti-freeze
NOTICE
Damage to the engine due to missing antifreezing agent.
The coolant can freeze and damage the engine.
1. Check the antifreeze property of the coolant in time and increase the
percentage of antifreezing agents if required.
12.2.4 AdBlue in winter operation
Switching on the heating of the AdBlue tank

1. For switching on the heating of the AdBlue tank, refer to Operating the auxiliary heater
[} page 310].
12.3 Hydraulic system
General
NOTICE
Damage to the hydraulic pump due to high speed at very low oil tem-
peratures!
Higher engine speeds and cold hydraulic oils can damage the hydraulic
pumps.
There is the risk of failure of hydraulic pumps.
1. Ensure that engine speeds are not high when cold hydraulic oils are
used.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2. Preheat the oil according to heating instructions.

3. Exchange the hydraulic oil.
304 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
In case of wintry ambient temperatures and cold hydraulic oil, the "Hy-
draulic oil filter contaminated" symbol may light up due to the cold hy-
draulic oil.
The warning lamp disappears when the hydraulic oil attains the operating
temperature.
If the symbol continues to glow when the hydraulic oil is warm, change the
hydraulic oil filter.
Pay attention to the minimum temperature limit of the oil.

The hydraulic oil used may still be used up to 10 °C below its minimum temperature limit.
If the ambient temperature is below this limit, use a suitable oil. Keep the recommended oils in
mind.
Heating instructions for hydraulic oils

1. Start the engine and regulate the speed at approximately 1000 rpm.
2. Actuate the hydraulic cylinder (e.g. raise and lower the mobile crane once or twice).
ð After a 10 minute warm-up period, the hydraulic oil is adequately preheated.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 305

2019-10_EN
Operating temperatures
Switching to another oil
NOTICE
Hydraulic pump damage due to choosing the wrong oil!
When the hydraulic system is operated with hydraulic oil such as Renolin
Xtreme Temp 46+, damage to the hydraulic pumps can occur in wintry am-
bient temperatures.
There is the risk of failure of hydraulic pumps.
1. Change oils and use the hydraulic oils specified for the ambient tem-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
peratures.
The oil may only be changed at a specialist workshop.
306 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
12.4 Gearbox
At temperatures above -20 °C, the gearbox can be operated and all functions are ensured.
In the temperature range from -20 °C to -30 °C, a minimum 10 minute warm-up period is re-
quired.
1. Switch Gear pre-selection switch into position N.
2. Start the engine.
3. Increase the idling speed to approximately 1500 rpm.
At temperatures below -30 °C, the instructions in the gearbox manufacturer's operating manual
must be observed.
Observe the oil recommendation in the ZF lubricants list.
12.5 Windshield washing system
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to freezing of wiper nozzles or too little glass
cleaning agent.
If the wiper nozzles freeze up, the windshields can no longer be cleaned
using the windshield washer system. The visibility may be limited. This
may lead to accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Add sufficient anti-freeze.
2. Increase the percentage of the antifreezing agent corresponding to the
ambient temperature.
12.6 Anti-skid chains
WARNING
Risk of accidents when driving with anti-skid chains.
Incorrect or incorrectly mounted anti-skid chains may damage the tyres,
wheels and other parts of the mobile crane.
Incorrect or incorrectly mounted anti-skid chains may break and be hurled
away together with parts of the vehicle.
This may result in accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Mounting of anti-skid chains only after consultation with and the ap-
proval of the TADANO Customer Service.
2. Observe the specifications by the After Sales Service of TADANO.
3. Observe the instructions of the anti-skid chains manufacturer.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 307

2019-10_EN
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
308 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
13 Special equipment
13.1 Carrier auxiliary heater
DANGER
Risk of explosion when operating the auxiliary heater.
Operating the auxiliary heater is not permitted at the following locations:
- Petrol pumps and filling stations.
- Places where combustible gases or vapours may form or be present.
- Places where potentially explosive dust may form or be present.
1. Do not operate the auxiliary heater at these locations.
2. In case of doubt, consult the local safety officer.
DANGER
Danger of suffocation when operating the auxiliary heater.
When operating the auxiliary heater in enclosed spaces, there is a risk of
asphyxiation due to exhaust gases.
1. Only operate the auxiliary heater outside of enclosed spaces.
NOTICE
Risk of overheating the auxiliary heater.
The auxiliary heater may overheat when driving.
1. Switch off the auxiliary heater when driving.
If the auxiliary heater is operated when the engine is not running, the bat-
teries of the mobile crane are discharged.
1. Charge the batteries at shorter intervals.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 309

2019-10_EN
13.1.2 Operating the auxiliary heater
Overview
1 Auxiliary heater control unit
Operating the functions is carried out via the Auxiliary heater control unit.
For exact specifications regarding the operation and maintenance of the heater, please refer to
the operating manual supplied by the heater manufacturer.
Preheating the engine

▪ AdBlue® tank heating switch *) is switched off.
▪ The pilot lamp in the switch lights up.
1. Set the power-on time of the auxiliary heater with the Auxiliary heater control unit.
NOTE The battery main switch needn't be switched on.
ð The engine is preheated.
Preheating the engine and preheating the cab

▪ AdBlue® tank heating switch *) is switched off.
▪ The pilot lamp in the switch lights up.
1. Switch on Battery main switch switch.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2. Switch the blower to stage 1.

3. Set the Temperature control switch to warm.
ð The engine is preheated and the cab is preheated.
310 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Heating the AdBlue tank *)
If outside temperatures below -11 °C are expected, the AdBlue® tank heat-
ing *) must be switched on.
1. Switch on AdBlue® tank heating switch *).

ð The pilot lamp in the switch lights up.
NOTE The thawing of the AdBlue® tank may take up to 60 minutes. When the AdBlue®
has thawed, cab and/or engine are preheated.
ð The AdBlue® tank is heated.
13.2 Spare wheel
CAUTION
Risk of accidents due to overturning spare wheel.
A non secured spare wheel may turn over. This may lead to accidents in-
volving personal injuries or material damage.
1. Secure spare wheel against tilting.
Overview
1 Fixing screws 3 Spare wheel

2 Bracket
Requirement
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ The mobile crane is parked horizontally on level ground.

▪ The mobile crane is secured against rolling away.
▪ Engine and ignition are switched off.
▪ The superstructure is slewed to the back.
ATF 220G-5 311

2019-10_EN
▪ The boom is raised.

▪ The telescopes are fully retracted.
▪ Mechanical slewing lock is engaged.
Removing the spare wheel from the spare wheel holder

1. Attach the spare wheel to the hook block.
2. Loosen both fixing screws and lay them down.
3. Remove holder.
4. Lift the spare wheel from the spare wheel holder in the direction of the arrow and place it on
the ground.
5. Loosen spare wheel from the hook block and secure it against tilting.
ð The spare wheel is removed from the spare wheel holder.
13.3 Charging socket and jump start socket
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
312 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Charging socket 3 Battery compartment

2 Jump start socket
Charging socket
NOTICE
Danger of short-circuit
Do not use the charging socket for jump starting when the charger is con-
nected. It is intended for charging the battery.
The charging socket can be found in the battery compartment.

Charge the battery only with 24 V direct current.
Switch off all electrical consumers and the battery main switch during the charging process.
Jump start socket

For instructions on the use of the jump start plugbox, see Starting the engine with help from
jump start socket *) [} page 336].
13.4 Calix coolant preheating
Tasks
The tasks of the coolant preheating are as follows:
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Permitting engine start in extremely cold weather.

▪ Shortening the cold start phase of the engine.
▪ Keeping the engine warm at low outside temperatures.
The coolant preheating must be connected to the mains supply for operation.
ATF 220G-5 313

2019-10_EN
Requirements
▪ There is a power connection for the 230 V alternating current.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
314 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Coolant preheater 2 Socket
Putting the coolant preheating into operation

1. Connect the supplied connecting cable at the mobile crane's socket and the 230 V power
connection.
ð The coolant is preheated.
The temperature switch in the coolant preheater monitors the coolant

temperature and switches the heater on or off as required.
Putting the coolant preheating out of operation

1. Disconnect the supplied connecting cable from the mobile crane's socket and the 230 V
power connection.
2. Stow the connecting cable.
ð The coolant preheating is out of operation.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 315

2019-10_EN
13.5 Acoustic warning in the event of pressure drop in the braking

system *)
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to longer braking distance.
When the supply pressure of the service brake drops, the braking distance
may get longer. This may result in an accident. This may lead to personal
injuries and material damage.
1. When the warning buzzer sounds, stop the mobile crane at a secure
place as fast as possible and suiting the traffic conditions.
2. Determine the cause of the pressure drop and have it eliminated.
The compressed air supply of brake circuits 1 and 2 of the service brake is monitored by a
warning lamp and an air pressure gauge. Additionally, a warning buzzer *) may be installed.
If the supply pressure of the service brake falls below 5.5 bar (79.8 psi), the Steering or service
brake fault, braking system pressure drop warning *), slewing gear lock-out for dolly *) warning
buzzer sounds, refer to "Steering or service brake fault, braking system pressure drop warn-
ing *), slewing gear lock-out for dolly *)" warning buzzer [} page 61].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
316 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting
14 Troubleshooting
14.1 General hints

The following table will help you in quickly finding the cause in case of a failure of or a fault in a
specific function of the device and also in rectifying the same.
A troubleshooting table does not replace an expert. If the cause of a fault cannot be identified or
rectified using the table, please contact our TADANO After-sales Service.
14.2 Engine
Engine-specific faults and their remedy are given in the operating manual of the engine manu-
facturer.
Fault Possible cause Rectification
The engine cannot be started. A gear has been engaged. Set the gear level to the neutral
(For other causes, see Electrical position "N".
system [} page 322].) No electrical connection between Switch on the battery main
the battery and the consumer. switch.
The key switch is at an incorrect Set the key switch to switch posi-
switch position. tion 1 (carrier).
Emergency stop pressed. Unlock emergency stop.
The engine is running irregularly The air cleaner is contaminated. Replace the filter insert; clean
or the power is too low (air the filter head.
cleaner indicator lights up). Air-inlet pipes are leaky. Check the air-intake system for
leak tightness. Tighten the hose
clamps.
The engine is running irregularly The fuel filter is clogged. Clean or replace the fuel filter.
or the power is too less. The injection system or the turbo Get it checked in a specialist
charger are not functioning cor- workshop.
rectly.
The radiator temperature is too Cooler fins are contaminated. Clean the fins by blowing with
high, even though the engine is compressed air or a steam-jet air
not under any load. ejector.
The fan drive is faulty. Have the fan drive repaired.
Coolant level is too low. Correct coolant level.
The coolant thermostat is faulty. Have the coolant thermostat re-
placed.
Coolant level is too low (indicator Leaky cooling water hose con- Tighten the hose clamps.
on the CMV display lights up). nections.
The pressure relief valve of the Check the functioning of the
expansion tank is defective. pressure relief valve and replace
it if required.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Porous cooling water hoses. Replace all cooling water hoses.

Correct coolant level.
The engine cannot be stopped. Electrical connections are loose Insert the cable lugs or replace
or the switch is defective. the switch.
ATF 220G-5 317

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting
14.3 Gearbox
For instructions and the error list, refer to the enclosed operating manual (gearbox and Intarder)
provided by the gearbox manufacturer.
Keep the following in mind before reading the error codes:
▪ Stop the mobile crane.
▪ Switch off the engine.
▪ Gear lever in the neutral position.
▪ Engage the parking brake.
▪ Switch on the battery main switch.
▪ Switch on the ignition.
▪ Actuate the service brake.
▪ Move the jogging lever to the left
Error codes are displayed on the gearbox display.
14.4 Differential locks, axles and drive

Differential locks cannot be activ- Pneumatic switch pressure is too Supply pressure of the com-
ated. low. pressed air system (at least 6
bar (87 PSI)).
The "differential locks" switch is Replace the "differential locks"
faulty. switch.
Electrical connections are defect- Check the electrical connections.
ive or loose.
The solenoid valve is defective. Replace the solenoid valve.
Pneumatic lines are ruptured. Have the pneumatic lines re-
paired.
Pneumatic lines are crushed. Have the pneumatic lines
checked.
The switching mechanism in the Have the switching mechanism
axle is faulty. repaired.
The time-delay relay for enga- Have the time-delay relay re-
ging the differential lock is faulty. placed.
The axle drive cannot be activ- Pneumatic switch pressure is too Supply pressure of the com-
ated. low. pressed air system (at least 6
bar (87 PSI)).
The "axle drive" switch is faulty. Have the switch replaced.
Electrical connections are defect- Check the electrical connections.
ive or loose.
The solenoid valve is defective. Replace the solenoid valve.
Pneumatic lines are ruptured. Have the pneumatic lines re-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
paired.
Pneumatic lines are crushed. Have the pneumatic lines
checked.
The switching mechanism in the Have the switching mechanism
axle is faulty. repaired.
Drive shafts are emitting a dron- Balance plates missing on the Replace the drive shafts.
ing noise. drive shafts.
318 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting

Drive shafts are worn out. Replace the drive shafts.
The mobile crane cannot be set The change-over valve of the Set the change-over valve of the
in motion. transfer box is in the neutral pos- transfer box to the on-road gear.
ition.
14.5 Chassis hydraulic system - general

Hydraulic oil filter contamination Filter cartridges are contamin- Change the filter cartridges.
indicator lights up at operating ated.
temperature.
Excessive noises of hydraulic Hydraulic pump is defective. Repair or replace the hydraulic
system. pump.
Hydraulic valve is defective. Have the hydraulic valve re-
paired or replaced.
The inlet pipe on the hydraulic oil Have the hydraulic oil tank
tank is blocked. cleaned.
Hydraulic pump is sucking air. Stop the hydraulic pump immedi-
ately. Check the leak tightness
and the oil level of the hydraulic
system and top up oil if required.
The hydraulic system functions Air in the hydraulic system. Check the oil level, bleed the hy-
jerkily or has no power. draulic cylinders.
The suction pipe is leaky. Tighten the bolted connections.
Oil in the hydraulic oil tank lath- Check the hydraulic oil level; top
ers. up oil if required.
The oil viscosity is incorrect. Fill in the prescribed oil depend-
ing on the ambient temperature.
Hydraulic oil temperature is too The oil cooler is contaminated. Clean the oil cooler.
high.
14.5.1 Suspension hydraulics

The axle suspension cannot be The rocker switch is defective or Replace the rocker tip switch;
blocked; the symbol does not the electric cable is broken. check the cable connection.
light up. The key-operated switch is at an Set the key-operated switch to
incorrect switch position. switch position 2 (superstructure
operation).
The fuse is defective. Replace the fuse.
The suspension cannot be The suspension block is defect- Have the valve block replaced.
blocked even if the pilot lamp is ive.
lit up.
The front axle lateral leveling The fuse is defective. Replace the fuse.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
does not actuate. The locking pin in the superstruc- Check the pin connection.
ture is not fully engaged.
The proximity switch is defective. Have the proximity switch re-
placed.
The solenoid valve on the front- Have the solenoid valve checked
axle lock valve is faulty. and replaced if required.
ATF 220G-5 319

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting

The mobile crane lowers. Suspension system is defective. Have the suspension system
checked.
The mobile crane suspension The axle suspension is locked. Release the axle suspension
does not function / functions lock.
poorly. Insufficient nitrogen accumulator Have the nitrogen accumulator
pressure in the hydraulic accu- pressure adjusted or topped up
mulator. at a specialist workshop.
14.5.2 Inclination adjustment and leveling

The inclination of the mobile The rocker tip switch is defective. Have the rocker tip switch re-
crane cannot be adjusted and placed.
the crane cannot be lowered. The axle suspension is not Lock the axle suspension.
locked.
14.5.3 Outrigger hydraulic system

The outrigger cannot be exten- The key switch is in the incorrect Set the key switch in the chassis
ded or retracted. switch position. to position 2.
Locking pins are still inserted. Remove the pins from the beam.
The outrigger electronic system Get the error corrected in a spe-
is defective. cialist workshop.
The fuse is defective. Replace the fuse.
The outrigger float retracts while The solenoid valve is defective. Have the solenoid valve re-
the mobile crane is supported. placed.
The shut-off valve on the outrig- Clean the shut-off valve, check it
ger cylinder is leaking or dirty. and replace if necessary.
The outrigger cylinder seal is Replace the seal; if necessary
faulty. have the outrigger cylinder re-
placed.
The outrigger float sinks down- The shut-off valve on the outrig- Clean the valve, check it and re-
wards when retracted. ger cylinder is leaking or dirty. place it if required.
The outrigger can only be slowly The engine speed is too low. Increase the engine speed.
extended or retracted.
14.6 Steering
14.6.1 Steering - mechanical part

Excessive backlash of the steer- The track rod connection is Check the track-rod connection;
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ing wheel. loose. adjust and tighten if necessary.

Ball-and-socket joints of the track Have the ball joints replaced.
or steering rod have a backlash.
Excessive tire wear, wheels Incorrect track. Set the track to ± 0.
wobble. Incorrect air pressure. Check the pressure and correct it
if required.
320 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting

The rims or tyres exhibit lateral Have them checked at a special-
or radial run-out. ist workshop and replaced if ne-
cessary.
The piston rod of the steering Have the steering cylinder or
cylinder or the track rod is bent. track rod replaced.
Wheel nuts are loosened. Check the wheel nuts for firm fit
and tighten them if required.
14.6.2 Steering - hydraulic/electrical part

A steering circuit pilot lamp lights A bolted connection in the steer- Check the bolted connections in
up. ing system of the steering hy- the steering system of the steer-
draulics is loose, fluid loss. ing hydraulics for firm seating.
Check the seals. Top up the fluid
if necessary.
Hydraulic pump is sucking air. Check the leak tightness and
screw couplings.
The suction pipe is leaky. Check the screw couplings.
The “emergency pump” pilot Flow indicator or flow limiting Have the flow indicator or flow
lamp lights up. valve faulty. limiting valve checked.
The emergency steering pump is Have the emergency steering
defective. pump replaced.
14.7 Braking system

The supply pressure is not The air compressor delivery out- Conduct the functional check in a
reached (the "Service brake" put is too low. specialist workshop.
warning lamp lights up). The The pressure governor does not Have a function check performed
reading on the CMV display is switch off or blows off continu- on the pressure regulator at a
below 5.5 bar (79.8 PSI). ously. specialist workshop.
Have the switch-off pressure ad-
The “Braking system pressure justment checked.
drop warning” warning buzzer The compressed air system is Have the compressed-air system
sounds. leaky. repaired at a specialist work-
shop.
The air tank drain valve is defect- Have the drain valve replaced.
ive.
Defect in the spring-loaded cylin- Have a function check performed
der circuit. on the spring-brake circuit at a
specialist workshop.
The "Service brake" warning The pressure switch in the BBA Have the switch replaced.
lamp lights up even when the in- (service brake circuit) I or II is
dicator on the CMV display defective.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
shows a value greater than 5.5 The brake cylinders (spring- The parking brake is not re-
bar (79.8 PSI). loaded section) are not aerated leased completely.
completely.
Defect in the spring-loaded cylin- Conduct the check in a specialist
der circuit, function of valves. workshop.
ATF 220G-5 321

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting

Poor braking effect despite the Brake linings worn out (the Get the brake linings replaced in
correct supply pressure. "Brake lining wear" symbol lights a specialist workshop.
up) or contaminated (oily).
High lining wear; brakes become No or very little air gap between Conduct the check in a specialist
hot. the brake lining and the brake workshop.
disc.
The breather of brake valves or Clean brake-valve or brake-cylin-
brake cylinders is contaminated. der bleeder valve.
The foot pedal has no or very Have the play in the pedal
little backlash. checked and adjusted.
The Wheel sensors warning Sensors, seat are not correct; Check and correct if required; re-
lamp (monitored by the ABS cable connections are not place the damaged parts.
symbol) does not go out after proper.
switching on the ignition. The Electric cables are damaged.
driving and braking behavior
changes. The electronics system is defect- Have the electronics checked at
ive. a specialist workshop.
The supply pressure for the com- The mobile crane bus system is Restart the engine; if the display
pressed-air system is not shown faulty. is still faulty, call the TADANO
in the CMV display. After-Sales Service.
14.8 Electrical system

Batteries are not or inadequately Batteries are defective. Replace the batteries.
charged. Cables are detached or defect- Have the cable tightened or re-
ive. placed.
The generator is defective. (See: Check the generator, have it re-
the "Generator" symbol on the placed if required.
CMV display lights up or flashes
when the engine is running.)
The "Generator" symbol on the The cable between the alternator Isolate or secure the cable
CMV display lights up or flashes and the regulator is loose or between the alternator and regu-
when the engine is running. there is a short-circuit to earth. lator.
The controller is defective. Have the controller replaced.
The generator is defective. Check the generator, have it re-
placed if required.
No current when the ignition is No connection between the bat- ▪ Switch on the battery main
switched on. tery and the mobile crane. switch.
▪ Replace the battery relay.
▪ Tighten the earthing strap.
14.9 Eddy-current brake*)

WFN5RUXV9L2067295

The eddy-current brake does not The hand switch or the contact is Get the switch replaced in a spe-
respond when the hand switch is defective. cialist workshop.
actuated; the warning lamp does The fuse is defective. Replace the fuse.
not light up.
Relays or diodes in the relay box Have the relay checked at a spe-
are defective. cialist workshop and faulty parts
replaced.
322 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting

Fuse in the relay box is defect- Replace the fuse.
ive.
Poor braking effect in all gear Insulation and condition of wir- Have the eddy-current brake
levels. ing, or the ground connection is checked at a specialist work-
loose. shop.
The backlash between the rotors Have the eddy-current brake
and stator is too high, the air gap checked at a specialist work-
is too large, silent blocks are shop.
worn out.
The "Eddy-current brake" symbol Incorrect control in the eddy cur- Have the eddy-current brake
lights up when the steering rent brake. checked and repaired at a spe-
column switch is not actuated. cialist workshop.
14.10 Centralized lubrication system

Centralized lubrication system in- Reservoir empty Top up reservoir
dicator is lit continuously
Lines, connections faulty ▪ Consult a specialist work-
shop
Centralized lubrication system in- ▪ Consult a specialist work-
dicator faulty shop
14.11 Auxiliary heater
Possible causes and rectification

Auxiliary heater switches off. Overheating (fault code F10). ▪ Let the heater cool down.
▪ Check the coolant level on
the expansion tank and top
up if necessary.
▪ Press the temperature lim-
iter button on the heater.
▪ Bleed the heater.
▪ Restart the heater.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 323

2019-10_EN
14 Troubleshooting
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
324 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
15 Self-help
15.1 Charging batteries
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to short-circuited battery.
A short-circuited battery may generate very high amperages. This may
cause electric shocks and fires. This may lead to accidents involving per-
sonal injuries or material damage.
1. Avoid metallic contact between the battery's positive pole and the mo-
bile crane.
2. Do not bridge the battery's poles.
3. Do not touch a short-circuited battery and leave the mobile crane.
4. If necessary, call for the fire brigade.
WARNING
Risk of chemical burns due to escaping battery acid.
Batteries contain gases and liquids which can cause significant bodily
harm when coming into contact with skin, eyes, and mucous membranes.
1. Wear safety goggles and acid-proof safety gloves.
2. In case of contact with eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with
clear water.
3. After rinsing, seek medical attention.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 325

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
15.1.2 Charging batteries with charger
Overview
1 Battery (2 ea.) 3 Battery's negative pole

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2 Battery's positive pole
Requirements
326 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help

▪ Battery main switch switch is switched off.
▪ Operating voltage of the battery charger: 24 V direct current.
Procedure
1. Open the battery compartment cover.
2. Disconnect negative pole of the battery.
3. Disconnect positive pole of the battery.
4. Connect both battery charger cables to the battery.
5. Connect battery charger to the mains supply.
6. Switch the battery charger on.
Observe the instructions in the battery charger manufacturer's operating manual.
ð The battery is charged.
Final activities
1. Switch battery charger off when the charging process has finished.
2. Disconnect battery charger from the mains supply.
3. Disconnect both battery charger cables from the battery.
4. Connect positive pole of the battery.
5. Connect negative pole of the battery.
6. Close the battery compartment cover.
ð Charging process has been completed.
15.1.3 Charging batteries through the charging socket *)
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of accidents when using charging socket for jump starting.
When using the charging socket for jump-starting, it may lead to short cir-
cuits due to high amperages. This may lead to accidents involving per-
1. Only use the charging socket to charge the batteries.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 327

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Overview

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2 Jump start socket
Requirements
328 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
▪ Battery main switch switch is switched off.

▪ Operating voltage of the battery charger: 24 V direct current.
Charging batteries
1. Open the charging socket cover.
2. Connect the battery charger cable to the charging socket.
3. Switch the battery charger on.
Observe the instructions in the battery charger manufacturer's operating manual.
ð The battery is charged.
Charging process finished

1. Switch battery charger off when the charging process has finished.
2. Disconnect the battery charger cable from the charging socket.
3. Close the charging socket cover.
15.2 Starting/stopping the engine with the start/stop pushbutton
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of injury due to rotating parts.
Body parts may be severed by rotating parts. This could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
1. Carry out maintenance work only when the engine is switched off.
2. Only remove engine cover for maintenance work or in case of emer-
gency.
3. When working in the immediate proximity of the engine, make sure
that you do not touch or get too close to rotating parts.
4. Wear close-fitting clothes, tie up long hair and protect it with a hair net.
WARNING
Risk of burns on hot engine parts.
The engine and pipes will be hot while the engine is running, as well as
some time after switching off the engine. Contact may lead to severe
burns.
1. Do not touch hot parts when operating the emergency start/stop func-
tion of the engine.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 329

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
WARNING
Risk of accidents when using the emergency start/stop function.
When starting the engine with the emergency start function and driving the
mobile crane in case of a fault, it is possible that the engine cannot be
switched off in time. This may result in an accident.
1. The emergency start/stop function may only be used to drive the mo-
bile crane out of a danger zone.
Requirements
▪ The ignition in the carrier has been switched on.
▪ Engine is switched off.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
330 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Opening cooling system sheeting
1 Panelling 2 Support
1. Unlock sheeting.
2. Open sheeting and use support.
ð The cooling system sheeting is open.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 331

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Overview of emergency start/emergency stop pushbutton
1 Engine start/engine stop pushbutton
Procedure – Starting engine

1. Press Engine start/engine stop pushbutton.
ð Engine starts and runs in idle.
2. Release Engine start/engine stop pushbutton.
3. Close maintenance hatch / panelling.
ð The engine has been started.
Procedure – Switching off engine

➢ Engine is running.
1. Press and release Engine start / engine stop pushbutton.
ð Engine is switched off.
Procedure – Starting the engine and increasing the engine speed

1. Press and hold Engine start/engine stop pushbutton.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð Engine starts and runs in idle. 3 seconds after engine start, the engine speed reaches
the maximum.
ð The engine will continue to run at the current engine speed.
332 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Procedure – Turning engine

➢ Ignition is switched on and the engine is not running.
1. Switch off triggering of the injection pump unit with STAR DIAGNOSIS (Daimler AG dia-
gnostic device).
2. Press Engine start/engine stop pushbutton.
ð The engine turns without starting.
ð The engine stops.
4. Switch on triggering of the injection pump unit with STAR DIAGNOSIS (Daimler AG dia-
gnostic device).
ð Engine has been turned.
Final activities
1. Close and lock cooling system sheeting.
15.3 Start engine with external current
15.3.1 Starting the engine with help from jump leads
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of explosion from oxyhydrogen gas.
Risk of injury from escaping acid gases.
2. Donor batteries and mobile crane batteries must have the same
voltage (24 V).
3. Avoid a short circuit using reverse polarity (positive to positive, negat-
ive to negative).
4. Comply with the order sequence for connecting the jump leads.
5. Make sure the jump lead's pole terminals are seated firmly.
NOTICE
Failure of vehicle electronics caused by errors when jump starting.
Errors when jump starting can cause the vehicle electronics to fail.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Donor batteries and mobile crane batteries must have the same
voltage (24 V).
2. Avoid a short circuit using reverse polarity (positive to positive, negat-
ive to negative).
3. Comply with the order sequence for connecting the jump leads.
4. Make sure the jump lead's pole clamps are seated firmly.
ATF 220G-5 333

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Overview
1 Battery (2 ea.) 3 Battery's negative pole

2 Battery's positive pole
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Requirements
▪ The mobile crane's engine, ignition and battery main switch are switched off.
▪ The engine, ignition and battery main switch are switched off on the vehicle containing the
donor battery.
▪ The batteries are connected to the vehicles' system as specified.
334 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
▪ The jump leads have a diameter of at least 16 mm².

▪ The cover of the battery compartment is removed.
Overview
1 Positive pole of the recipient battery 4 Negative pole of the recipient battery
2 Positive pole of the donor battery 5 Donor battery
3 Negative pole of the donor battery 6 Recipient battery
Note the order sequence for connecting the jump leads.

1. Connect the first red pole terminal of the jump lead to the positive pole of the recipient bat-
tery.
2. Connect the second red pole terminal to the positive pole of the donor battery.
3. Connect the black pole terminal of the jump lead to the negative pole of the donor battery.
4. Connect the second black pole terminal of the jump lead to the negative pole of the recipi-
ent battery.
Starting the engine

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and let run in idle.
2. Start attempt in the recipient vehicle: Switch on the battery main switch, switch on the igni-
tion, start the engine.
3. After starting the engine of the recipient vehicle, let it run for a few minutes.
Disconnecting the jump leads
CAUTION
Risk of burns on hot shunt cable.
The terminals and cables of the jump leads may have become hot during
the starting sequence. This may result in burns to the hands.
1. Wear work gloves.
2. Hold the jump leads using the handles.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Do not touch the bare parts of the cable terminals without gloves.
Note the order sequence for releasing the jump leads.

1. Disconnect the first black pole terminal of the jump lead from the negative pole of the recipi-
ent battery.
ATF 220G-5 335

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
2. Disconnect the second black pole terminal of the jump lead from the negative pole of the
donor battery.
3. Disconnect the first red pole terminal of the jump lead from the positive pole of the recipient
battery.
4. Disconnect the second red pole terminal of the jump lead from the positive pole of the donor
battery.
5. Attach the battery compartment cover.
15.3.2 Starting the engine with help from jump start socket *)
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
336 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Overview

2 Jump start socket
Requirements
▪ The engine, ignition and battery main switch are switched off on the vehicle containing the
donor battery.
▪ All batteries are connected to the vehicles' system as specified.
▪ Both vehicles are equipped with 24 V systems.
▪ Suitable connecting cable with a cross section of at least 16 mm², and appropriate connect-
ors are provided.
Inserting connecting cable between the jump start sockets

1. Open the cover of the jump start socket of the vehicle receiving the power supply.
2. Open the cover of the jump start socket of the vehicle containing the donor battery.
3. Connect both jump start sockets using the jump leads.
Starting the engine

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and let run in idle.
2. Start attempt in the recipient vehicle: Switch on the battery main switch, switch on the igni-
tion, start the engine.
3. After starting the engine of the recipient vehicle, let it run for a few minutes.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Removing connecting cable between the jump start sockets

1. Remove connecting cable from both jump start sockets.
2. Close jump start socket cap on both vehicles.
3. Stow away the jump leads.
ATF 220G-5 337

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
15.4 Bleeding the fuel system
Introduction
The following measures must be taken if dirt or air has got into the fuel system:
▪ Replace the filter element.
▪ Clean the fuel system.
▪ Bleed the fuel system.
The fuel system must be bled with the hand pump after the following events:
▪ The fuel tank was entirely emptied.
▪ The fuel filter has been replaced.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
338 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Overview
1 Bleed screw 2 Pump plunger
Requirements
▪ The fuel is topped up.
▪ The fuel filter has been replaced if necessary.
▪ A suitable container has been placed under the water separator.
Bleeding the fuel system and delivering fuel

1. Open the bleeder screw.
2. Operate the pump plunger until fuel flows out without any bubbles.
3. Catch overflowing fuel in a suitable container and pour back into the fuel tank.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw.
5. Start the engine. In case of starting problems, ask an assistant to actuate the pump plunger
until the engine runs smoothly.
15.5 Filling the tyres
Safety instructions
WARNING
Failure of service brake due to lack of compressed air.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
When driving the mobile crane with the tyre inflator hose screwed on, the
compressed air system of the mobile crane will not be supplied with com-
pressed air. The service brake may fail.
1. After having finished, unscrew and store away the tyre inflator hose.
ATF 220G-5 339

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
To prevent damages of the compressor, only the tyres installed on the mo-
bile crane may be filled with compressed air.
Description
Through a tyre inflator connector on the pressure regulator it is possible to fill the tyres with air
from the own compressed air system through a tyre inflator hose.
Overview
1 Tyre inflator connector 2 Valve cap

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Requirements
▪ Tyre inflator hose is provided.
340 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
Filling the tyres
When beginning to fill the tyres with compressed air, the compressed air
system's pressure must be lower than the switch-on pressure of the com-
pressed air system's compressor. If necessary, use compressed air e.g.
operating the brakes several times.
1. Unscrew valve cap from the tyre inflator connector.

2. Screw the tyre inflator hose onto the tyre inflator connector.
3. Remove valve cap of the tyre valve.
4. Screw tyre inflator hose onto the tyre valve.
5. Start engine and allow to run at medium speed.
6. Fill tyres up to the specified tyre air pressure.
8. Unscrew tyre inflator hose from tyre valve and tyre inflator connector, and stow it away.
9. Screw on both valve caps.
ð Tyre is filled.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 341

2019-10_EN
15 Self-help
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
342 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
16 Emergency operation
WARNING
Risk of accidents when operating the mobile crane with malfunc-
tions.
When operating the mobile crane with malfunctions, traffic safety may not
be ensured. This may result in an accident.
1. Operate the mobile crane with utmost caution.
2. Contact the competent TADANO dealer or the TADANO Customer
Service without delay for reparation.
WARNING
Risk of accidents when operating the mobile crane with emergency
controls.
It is not allowed to use emergency controls instead of the regular operating
elements. This may lead to accidents.
1. Repair damages on operating elements without delay.
WARNING
Valve failure due to damaged rubber caps.
Damage to the rubber caps of emergency controls may lead to the valve
failure. This may lead to accidents.
1. Do not operate emergency controls having rubber caps using sharp-
edged or pointed objects.
2. Replace the damaged rubber caps immediately.
16.2 Retracting/extending outriggers in case of failure of operating

elements
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents when working area is not completely visible.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
In the event of an emergency actuation, the outrigger floats and outrigger

beams on the opposite side of the mobile crane are always retracted or
extended. This working area cannot be seen. This may result in an acci-
dent.
1. Have an assistant to supervise the working area.
ATF 220G-5 343

2019-10_EN
For emergency operation of outriggers an assistant is required.
Overview
1 Outrigger emergency operation solenoid A Retract outrigger cylinders pushbutton

valves
2 Oil supply for emergency operation of out- B Retract outrigger beam pushbutton
riggers solenoid valve
C Extend outrigger cylinder pushbutton
D Extend outrigger beam pushbutton
E Oil supply for outriggers pushbutton
F Increase hydraulic pressure pushbutton
Requirements
▪ Engine is running in idle.
▪ Rear maintenance hatch of the cooling system is open.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Hydraulic pressure insufficient for resetting.

If the hydraulic pressure is insufficient for resetting, the pressure can be in-
creased. Pressure increase in three stages.
1. Press the three Increase hydraulic pressure pushbuttons in turn.
344 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Retracting the outrigger floats

NOTICE! Retraction of one outrigger float is described. The other outrigger floats are re-
tracted in an identical manner.
1. Have assistant press and hold the Oil supply for outriggers pushbutton.
2. Press and hold the Retract outrigger floats pushbutton until the selected outrigger float has
been retracted completely.
3. Release all pushbuttons.
ð The selected outrigger float is retracted.
Extending outrigger float

NOTICE! Extension of one outrigger float is described. The other outrigger floats are ex-
tended in an identical manner.
2. Press and hold the Extend outrigger float pushbutton until the selected outrigger float has
extended to the desired height.
ð The selected outrigger float is extended.
Retracting outrigger beam

NOTICE! Retraction of one outrigger beam is described. The other outrigger beams are
retracted in an identical manner.
1. Unlock outrigger beam.
3. Press and hold Retract outrigger beam pushbutton until the selected outrigger beam has
been retracted completely.
5. Lock outrigger beam.
ð The selected outrigger beam is retracted and locked.
Extending outrigger beam

NOTICE! Extension of one outrigger beam is described. The other outrigger beams are
extended in an identical manner.
1. Have assistant press and hold the Pressure reduction for extending outrigger beams push-
button.
3. Press and hold the Extend outrigger beam pushbutton until the selected outrigger beam has
extended to the desired outrigger base.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5. Lock outrigger beam.

ð The selected outrigger beam is extended and locked.
Final activities
1. Close and lock the rear maintenance hatch of the cooling system.
ATF 220G-5 345

2019-10_EN
16.3 Centring rear wheels if the electronic system fails
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to change in steering behaviour.
The mobile crane's steering behaviour changes when one or more rear
wheels are in the straight forward position and no longer steerable.
The mobile crane is only partially operational because it can only be
steered with the front wheels. This may result in an accident.
1. Adapt steering behaviour and driving behaviour.
2. Have the damage repaired without delay.
WARNING
Danger of crushing due to moving wheels.
When steering the rear wheels, persons may get crushed between the
wheels and parts of the frame. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Do not wear loose clothes.
2. When pressing the pushbuttons proceed with utmost caution.
3. Maintain safety distance to the wheels.
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
346 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
1 Emergency operation of axle 5 solenoid A Right turn pushbutton

valve
2 Emergency operation of axle 3 solenoid B Left turn pushbutton
valve
3 Emergency operation of axle 4 solenoid
valve
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 347

2019-10_EN
Overview
X51 Connection position X51 Connection position

1 5
X51 Connection position
2
Requirements
Preparations
2. Pull out the plug from socket X511 and insert it into socket X512.
3. Start the engine. Let engine run in idle.
Positioning axles straight forward

1. At the Emergency operation solenoid valve, press Right turn pushbutton.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð Axle steers to the right.

1. Press the Left turn pushbutton on the Emergency operation solenoid valve.
ð Axle steers to the left.
Final activities
1. Switch off the engine and the ignition.
348 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
2. Disconnect connector from connection position X512 and put it aside.

3. Deactivate the upshift lock: Disconnect connector from connection position X515 and put it
aside.
4. Attach the cover.
ð The mobile crane is prepared for driving in emergency operation.
Preparing the mobile crane for driving in normal mode

2. Activate the upshift lock: Insert plug X515 at socket X515.
3. Insert plug X511 at socket X511.
4. Attach the cover.
ð The mobile crane is prepared for driving in normal operation.
16.4 Switch cooling system ventilator on manually
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of injury due to rotating parts.
Body parts may be severed by rotating parts. This could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
1. Carry out maintenance work only when the engine is switched off.
2. Only remove engine cover for maintenance work or in case of emer-
gency.
3. When working in the immediate proximity of the engine, make sure
that you do not touch or get too close to rotating parts.
4. Wear close-fitting clothes, tie up long hair and protect it with a hair net.
WARNING
The engine and pipes will be hot while the engine is running, as well as
some time after switching off the engine. Contact may lead to severe
burns.
1. Do not touch any hot parts when pulling out the plug of the solenoid
valve.
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ The telescopic boom is raised.

▪ The counterweight is in the working position.
ATF 220G-5 349

2019-10_EN
Description
The fan speed for cooling the engine coolant is regulated independently of the engine speed
through a thermo valve.
In case of fault, the fan may run at reduced speed. This means the engine will not be cooled.
Opening cooling system sheeting
1 Panelling 2 Support
1. Open the rear hatch of the cooling system lining and secure with a support.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
350 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Unplug the plug of the "fan drive" solenoid valve
1 Solenoid valve 2 Connector
1. Unlock the plug and pull it off the Fan drive solenoid valve.
2. Close and lock the rear hatch of the cooling system lining.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 351

2019-10_EN
Removing the cover of the fan pump
1 Cover 2 Screws
1. Remove the cover of the fan pump. Remove all screws to do this.
Unplug the plug of the "Fan pump" solenoid valve
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Solenoid valve 2 Connector
352 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
1. Unlock the plug and pull it off the Fan pump solenoid valve.
2. Remove the panelling of the fan pump.
Result
Cooling system emergency operation is activated.
Resetting to normal operation

1. Open the rear hatch of the cooling system lining and secure with a support.
2. Insert the plug onto the Fan drive solenoid valve and lock it.
3. Close and lock the rear hatch of the cooling system lining.
4. Remove the cover of the fan pump. Remove all screws to do this.
5. Insert the plug onto the Fan pump solenoid valve and lock it.
6. Remove the panelling of the fan pump.
Result
Cooling system emergency operation is deactivated.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 353

2019-10_EN
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
354 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17 Service and maintenance
17.1 Description of maintenance chart

The maintenance tables "Daily maintenance tasks" and "Recurring maintenance tasks" list all
service and maintenance activities that must be carried out for maximum service life. The due
dates of the intervals are differentiated according to the following criteria:
▪ Operating hours [oh].
▪ Time [daily, weekly, monthly, annually etc.].
▪ Indicator.
▪ Mileage [km]
NOTICE! Maintenance must be carried out at whichever of these is reached first.
Operating hours can be read on the Hour meter indicator in the on-board computer, refer to "En-
gine information" menu [} page 115].
The mileage may be determined through the odometer.
Some vehicle components require a First Maintenance which differs from the regular intervals.
This First Maintenance is listed separately in the maintenance tables.
Intervals specified in operating hours shall be complied with at regular intervals.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to mobile crane rolling away out of control.
If the mobile crane is not secured sufficiently against rolling away, it may
start moving on its own. This may lead to serious injuries and material
damages.
1. Park the mobile crane horizontally on level ground.
4. Switch off the engine and the ignition.
5. Place wheel chocks under the wheels.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to inadequate maintenance activities.
Maintenance activities require vehicle-specific knowledge and, in case of
working incorrectly, may lead to serious injuries and material damages.
1. Only allow specially trained expert personnel to carry out maintenance
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
activities.
2. Only carry out maintenance activities at an appropriate place such as
an authorized specialist workshop.
ATF 220G-5 355

2019-10_EN
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to impermissible commissioning.
If the mobile crane is put into operation during maintenance and inspection
activities, there is the risk of accidents and material damages.
1. Secure the danger zone and keep unauthorized persons away.
2. Mark the maintenance activities clearly using suitable warning signs.
3. Do not commission the mobile crane during maintenance and inspec-
tion activities.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to lowering of mobile crane.
When the mobile crane is lowered, persons may get crushed underneath
the mobile crane. This could result in death or serious injury.
1. Secure the danger zone.
2. When lowering or raising, do not stay underneath the mobile crane.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
356 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.3 Daily maintenance tasks
Daily
Remark
Checking folding plugs and spring page 373 X
clips
Checking engine for leaks page 376 X With every oil level check and with every
oil change
Checking assemblies for leaks and page 376 X With every oil level check and with every
condition oil change
Checking gearbox for leaks page 376 X
Checking hydraulic system for leaks page 376 X
Checking the oil level of the engine page 378 X
Checking the coolant level page 387 X
Checking the compressed air sys- page 424 X

tem for leaks
Testing the ABS *) function page 426 X When setting off and during the journey.
Check the function of the pilot lamps
Performing function check of eddy- page 431 X While driving

current brake
Checking the hydraulic oil level page 434 X
Bulbs and lamps page 449 X Check that all lamps are working and
clean. Take to a specialist workshop if
there is any damage.
Checking hydraulic oil tank bleeder page 454 X With every oil change. Change when ne-
valve cessary
Checking fuel tank bleeder valve page 454 X With every oil change. Change when ne-
cessary
Checking transfer case breathers page 456 X With every oil change. Change when ne-
cessary
Checking wheels and tyres page 458 X Immediately in the event of damage (acci-
dent)
Checking the wheel nuts page 459 X
Checking and adapting tyre pres- page 462 X

sure
Checking fill level of reservoir page 485 X Refill when necessary

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 357

2019-10_EN
358

17.4 Recurring maintenance tasks
Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Engine and assemblies
Changing engine oil and replacing page 379 X b Every 2 years, Applies only to oil specification 228.5/51.
the oil filter cartridge every 40,000 Contact the manufacturer if different specific-
km ations are required
Checking hoses and hose clamps page 383 X b Cooling water hoses and charge air hoses
Checking engine brake page 385 a Every 1,800
[op. hrs.],
every
120,000 km
Checking V-ribbed belt for wear and page 386 X c Every 40,000
damage km
Checking valve clearance page 386 600 [op. hrs.], X c Every 80,000 Adjust if necessary
40,000 km km
Replacing the AdBlue filter cartridge page 386 X c Every 80,000
km
Changing coolant page 389 b Every 3 years
Cleaning the radiator/coolers page 392 b As required
Replacing the air cleaner element page 394 X b Every 2 years
Checking/cleaning the dust discharge page 396 b As required
valve
Clean air intake box page 397 b As required
Checking the air cleaner system page 399 X b Annually
2019-10_EN
ATF 220G-5
Replacing the fuel filter cartridge page 400 X b Every 120,000

km / every 2
years
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2019-10_EN WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5
Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Draining water from fuel system page 401 X b Annually Condensate must not reach the bottom edge
of the filter element
Replacing filter element of water sep- page 402 X b Annually If necessary more often, depending on the
arator fuel quality
Bleeding the fuel system page 404 X b Annually
Draining condensate from the fuel page 406 X b Annually
tank
Checking the ventilation filter of the page 407 X b Annually
fuel tank
Cleaning exhaust pipe page 408 X c Annually
Drive train
Checking gearbox oil level page 409 100 km X b
Changing the transmission oil page 411 b Every 3 years, With every oil change, the ZF fine filter shall
every 360,000 be replaced.
km
Checking the oil level of the transfer page 412 b Monthly
case

Changing the transfer case oil page 414 100 [op. hrs.] b Annually, every
10,000 km
Checking drive shafts for noises page 415 a During operation
Check that the flange screws and in- page 415 X c After 6 months
termediate shaft bearing screws are maximum.
secure Every 25,000
km.
Axles and brakes
Checking oil levels of axle drives page 416 b Monthly
359
360

Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Changing the axle drive oil page 421 100 [op. hrs.] X b Annually, every
10,000 km
Checking oil levels of wheel drives page 422 b Monthly
Changing the wheel drive oil page 424 100 [op. Hrs.] / X b Annually, every Monthly oil level check via overflow measure-
1,000 km 10,000 km ment
Changing grease filling in wheel hubs page 424 b Every 2 years
of non-driven axles
Visual inspection and switching func- page 424 b Monthly With every oil level check and every oil
tion test change
Testing function of air dryer page 424 X b
Checking brake linings page 426 X a Every 3 Check in accordance with the legal require-
months ments of the country in which the vehicle is
registered
Test the compressed air system page 427 X b Check in accordance with the legal require-
ments of the country in which the vehicle is
registered
Cleaning drain valves page 428 X b Annually
Replacing air dryer cartridge page 429 b Every 2 years Earlier if necessary
Engine brake and exhaust flaps page 429 X c Observe the engine manufacturer's require-
ments
Test the pressure regulator page 429 X b Check in accordance with the legal require-
ments of the country in which the vehicle is
registered
Inspect the protective caps, bushings page 429 X c Every 3 Visual inspection. Earlier if there is wear.
and seals months
2019-10_EN
ATF 220G-5
Inspecting the diaphragm cylinder page 429 X c Visual inspection. Check in accordance with
the legal requirements of the country in which
the vehicle is registered.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2019-10_EN WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5
Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Checking the ABS system *) page 430 X c At a specialist workshop
Check steering drive shafts for cir- page 430 X b
cumferential backlash
Checking ball joints in steering and page 430 X b
track rods for backlash
Checking the screws on axles, steer- page 430 100 [op. hrs.] X b Annually
ing levers, push rods for tightness
Cleaning the eddy-current brake page 431 a Every 6 More often if necessary
months
Check clearance between stator and page 432 X c Annually
rotors
Air gap check page 432 X c Annually
Checking drive shaft screws page 432 After 50 [op. X c Every 6
hrs.], then at months
100 [op. hrs.]
Checking eddy-current brake screws page 432 X c Annually
Checking insulating sheaths, wiring, page 432 X c Annually

connections, and contacts
Hydraulic system
Replacing filter cartridges page 435 100 [op. hrs.] X c Annually With every hydraulic oil change
Changing hydraulic oil page 435 X c Every 2 years Carry out regular oil samplings
Replacing filter element of the pres- page 435 X c Annually With every hydraulic oil change
sure filter
Checking hydraulic hoses page 436 b Annually
Replacing hydraulic hoses page 436 c Every 6 years For the first change: 6 years after manufac-
ture (year of manufacture).
361
362

Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Checking the hydraulic accumulator page 436 X c Annually During the winter months, earlier if necessary
preloading pressure
Electrical system
Checking the battery page 436 X b Every 6
months
Greasing the battery terminals page 438 X b
Checking the battery fluid level page 438 X b Every 6
months
Breathers
Checking bleeder valve of axle drives page 452 X a With every oil change. Change when neces-
sary
Checking braking system bleeder page 453 X a Earlier if necessary
valves
Checking gearbox bleeder valve page 455 X a
Checking the drive shaft intermediate page 456 X a
bearing breather
Wheels and tyres
Retightening wheel nuts (axle load page 460 50 km a Monthly After 100 km, after 200 km, after 1000 km and
up to 13 t) every 5000 km
Retightening wheel nuts (axle load page 461 50 km a Monthly After 100 km, after 200 km and every
over 13 t) 1000 km
Interchanging wheels in case of tire page 463 b Every 5,000 Depending on the wear pattern
wear km to 10,000
km
2019-10_EN
ATF 220G-5
Changing wheel module for air pres- page 465 c Have replaced if necessary
sure display *)
Checking wheel tracking page 465 c Specialist workshop
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2019-10_EN WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5
Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Checking the toe-in page 465 c Specialist workshop
Outrigger
Checking and maintaining outrigger page 467 X b Monthly
Check and adjust the wear plates of page 467 X c
the outrigger
Check and adjust the outrigger cylin- page 468 X c
der guide
Checking hoses and cables page 468 X c Every 6
months
Carrier cab
Maintaining doors page 469 X a Annually
Maintaining front cover page 471 X a Annually
Oil/lubricate joints, hinges and all page 472 X b After every wash with the high-pressure
moving parts steam cleaner
Replace the windshield wiper blades page 473 b As required
Filling the windshield washer system page 474 b As required

Air conditioning system - winter oper- page 476 a Monthly Allow to run for 10 minutes
ation
Air conditioning system inspection page 476 X c Annually
Lubricate the shaft bearings, lever page 476 X b Every 6
joints and all moving parts months
Check the condition of the heating page 476 b Monthly Tighten the hose clamps if necessary
lines
Check the electric cables and plug page 476 b Monthly
connections
363
Check the filter for dirt page 477 b Monthly Clean if only slightly dirty
364

Personnel
Minimum
mainten-
interval
Initial
ance
1200
2400
100
300
600
Remark
Changing the fuel filter of the auxili- page 477 X b Annually
ary heater
Cleaning rear view camera page 477 a As required
Changing battery of ignition key page 477 a As required
Trailer hitch *)
Maintaining trailer hitch page 480 X b Refer to the engine manufacturer's specifica-
tions for care instructions
Inspecting the compressed air coup- page 481 X c At every inspection of the brake system
ling heads
Oiling and lubricating
Oiling and lubricating page 481 X a Monthly And after each time the vehicle is washed us-
ing a high-pressure steam cleaner.
Lubricating joints, pins, hinges and all page 481 X a Every 2 weeks After every wash with the high-pressure
moving parts steam cleaner
Lubricating the steering knuckles page 481 Annually
Centralized lubrication system
Inspect the lines and screw couplings page 485 X b
for leaks and damage
Sliding coupling
Checking the sliding coupling for page 486 X b
damage
Amot-Control (engine stop) *)
Valve function check page 487 b Annually
2019-10_EN
ATF 220G-5
Suspension
Checking the bellows page 489 X b More often if necessary
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2019-10_EN WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5
a - Operating personnel, b - Maintenance personnel, c - Service personnel

365
17.5 Preparing mobile crane for maintenance activities
17.5.1 Introduction
Some maintenance activities require the raising of the mobile crane's telescopic boom. To en-
sure sufficient safety, the mobile crane must be supported when raising the telescopic boom.
Some of the maintenance activities on the carrier engine can only be carried out after removing
the engine cover.
Lifting the mobile crane on outriggers, refer to Outrigging [} page 175].
17.5.2 Raising telescopic boom
Requirements
Raising the telescopic boom

1. Start superstructure engine, refer to superstructure operating manual, chapter Putting into
operation, subchapter Starting/stopping engine.
2. If necessary, raise telescopic boom up to max. 10°, refer to superstructure operating
manual, chapter Components and operating elements, subchapter Function of the crane
control levers, topic Luffing the telescopic boom.
3. Switch off the superstructure engine and the ignition.
ð The telescopic boom is raised.
17.5.3 Opening/closing the maintenance hatches
Safety notice
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to open maintenance hatches.
If the maintenance hatches are not closed or are not properly closed, they
can open while the mobile crane is moving and collide with objects. This
may result in accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Close and lock the maintenance hatches.
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

366 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Dismounting engine cover
1 Star knobs (6 ea.)
1. Unscrew all the star knobs.

2. Remove engine cover and put it aside.
ð Engine cover is dismounted.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 367

2019-10_EN
Left maintenance hatches

Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Front maintenance hatch 3 Release

2 Rear maintenance hatch 4 Support
368 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Opening the left maintenance hatch

1. Press the maintenance hatch locks.
2. Open the maintenance hatch and secure with a support.
ð The maintenance hatch is open and secured.
Closing and locking the left maintenance hatches
1. Raise the maintenance hatch slightly.
2. Fold in and hook in the support.
3. Press the maintenance hatch closed and lock.
ð The maintenance hatch is closed and locked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 369

2019-10_EN
Right maintenance hatch
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Release 3 Support
2 Maintenance hatch
370 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Open the right maintenance hatch

1. Press the maintenance hatch locks.
2. Open the maintenance hatch and secure with a support.
ð The maintenance hatch is open and secured.
Close and lock the right maintenance hatch
1. Raise the maintenance hatch slightly.
2. Fold in and hook in the support.
3. Press the maintenance hatch closed and lock.
ð The maintenance hatch is closed and locked.
17.6 Filling up fuel or AdBlue
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of fire due to highly flammable fuel.
Fires may lead to serious injuries and material damages.
1. Omit fire, naked light and sparks when handling fuels.
CAUTION
Health hazard due to fuel and AdBlue®.
Fuel and AdBlue® irritate eyes, mucous membranes and skin.
1. After contact with the eyes, immediately rinse eyes thoroughly with
clear water and consult a physician.
2. After swallowing, immediately rinse mouth thoroughly with clear water
and consult a physician.
3. Do not inhale the fumes.
4. In case of allergic reactions, immediately consult a physician.
5. For further safety instructions, refer to the engine manufacturer's oper-
ating manual.
Damage to the engine due to incorrect fuel.

Only use the fuel that is permitted by the engine manufacturer.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 371

2019-10_EN
Destruction of aftertreatment of exhaust gases.

AdBlue® is required for the aftertreatment of exhaust gases of the engine.
The following requirements must be adhered to:
1. Do not fill up the AdBlue® tank with cleaning agent or any other operat-
ing fluid or fuel.
2. Do not add any additives.
3. Do not dilute AdBlue®.
4. For further safety instructions, refer to the engine manufacturer's oper-
ating manual.
Contaminated AdBlue®.
Faults in the SCR system (aftertreatment of exhaust gases) due to con-
taminated AdBlue®.
1. Only fill up pure AdBlue® from clean containers.
2. Remove any contamination from the AdBlue® tank.
3. Clean filler neck of the AdBlue® tank before filling up.
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 AdBlue tank 2 Fuel tank
Requirements
When filling up with fuel or AdBlue, the following requirements must be met:
372 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
▪ Engines are switched off.
Filling up
1. Open the fuel cap on the fuel or AdBlue tank.
2. Fill up the fuel tank or the AdBlue tank.
3. Close the fuel cap on the fuel or AdBlue tank.
Wipe up fuel spillages. Wash off any AdBlue spillages with water immedi-
ately – risk of corrosion.
17.7 Checking the fasteners
17.7.1 Checking folding plugs and spring clips
Introduction
Folding plugs and spring clips are reusable securing elements which must be checked at regu-
lar intervals.
The crane operator is autonomously responsible for checking all the securing elements. Before
and after operating the mobile crane it must be checked for damage of the securing elements.
Damaged or worn securing elements must be replaced.
The inspection of the securing elements includes the visual check for the following types of
damage:
▪ Deformation.
▪ Rupture.
▪ Attrition.
The following description shows the inspection of an individual securing element. All reusable
securing elements must be checked.
Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of accidents due to defective securing elements.
Components may break loose from the mobile crane due to defective se-
curing elements. This may lead to personal injuries and material damage.
1. Use all the securing elements.
2. Check all the securing elements for damage.
3. Check the functioning of all the securing elements.
4. Replace defective securing elements.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 373

2019-10_EN
Checking folding plugs
Overview
1 Shank 3 Safety notch

2 Spring clamp
Procedure
1. Pull out the folding plug.
2. Check the safety notch for damage. Replace any folding plug with a damaged safety notch.
3. Insert the shank into the hole of the component to be fastened.
4. Check whether the shank can be easily inserted.
5. Press the spring clamp into the safety notch.
6. Check the clamping force of the spring clamp. The spring clamp must not move out off the
safety notch by itself. Replace any folding plug with a spring clamp without clamping force.
ð The folding plug has been checked.
Checking spring clips
Overview
A 1 B 1
2 2
A Spring clip (plug type) 1 Shank

B Spring clip (clamp type) 2 Spring clamp
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Procedure
1. Pull out the spring clip.
2. Insert the shank into the hole of the component to be fastened.
3. Check whether the shank can be easily inserted.
374 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
4. Check the clamping force of the spring clip.

The spring clip must not move by itself out off the hole of the component to be fastened.
Replace any spring clip without clamping force.
ð The spring clip has been checked.
17.8 Checking carrier for leaks
17.8.1 Introduction
The following components must be checked for leaks before putting it into operation every day:
▪ Carrier engine.
▪ Cooling system.
▪ Gearbox.
▪ Transfer case.
▪ Hydraulic system.
▪ Braking system.
▪ Axles.
▪ Axle drives.
Definition of "leak free"

A system is considered leak free if no significant fluid losses are detected. If seals are exuding
or humid, this may be an indication of leakage.
Overview of components
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Carrier engine 4 Hydraulic system
ATF 220G-5 375

2019-10_EN
2 Cooling system 5 Transfer case

3 Gearbox 6 Axles
17.8.2 Checking engine for leaks

This is a daily inspection regarding fluid losses. It must be checked whether the engine is loos-
ing resources such as coolant or engine oil.
According to the engine manufacturer, lightly exuding seals are considered harmless.
Droplet formation or fluid accumulations underneath the vehicle are to be classified as leaks,
and their cause must be determined and eliminated before starting any operation.
Since this is a daily activity, a rough visual inspection will be sufficient.
It is also possible to detect losses checking the filling levels of the resources (e.g. falling coolant
level or oil level).
The way of checking the filling levels is described in the respective chapters.
17.8.3 Checking assemblies for leaks and condition

Check for leaks regularly. If you detect a liquid loss, e.g. oil spots on the parking surface, have
the cause remedied immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The following must be checked:
▪ Gearbox.
▪ Transfer case.
▪ Axles.
▪ Axle drives.
17.8.4 Checking gearbox for leaks

Check for leaks regularly. If you detect a liquid loss, e.g. oil spots on the parking surface, have
the cause remedied immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The following must be checked:
▪ Gearbox.
▪ Transfer case.
▪ Axles.
▪ Axle drives.
17.8.5 Checking hydraulic system for leaks
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Checking hydraulic system for leaks and condition

Leaks and damages on the hydraulic system must be eliminated without delay in a specialist
workshop.
376 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
The hydraulic system consists of various subassemblies:

▪ Suspension hydraulics
▪ Steering hydraulics
▪ Outrigger hydraulic system
▪ Hydraulic oil tank
▪ Hydraulic pumps
1. Check valves, sleeves and connections for leaks.

2. Check threaded connections for leaks.
3. Check fixing of pipes.
4. Check pipes for damage.
5. Check hydraulic hoses for leaks, cracks and damage.
ð Hydraulic system has been checked for leaks and condition.
If a screw-in connection leaks:
1. Loosen union nut on pipe or hose.
2. Tighten threaded connection.
3. Tighten union nut.
17.9 Engine and assemblies
17.9.1 Engine
Safety instructions
WARNING
Touching hot engine parts may lead to serious burns.
1. Do not touch hot objects.
2. Wear protective gloves.
Pollution due to escaping resources.

Leaking seals may lead to unforeseeable escaping of resources.
1. Replace leaking seals.
2. Eliminate spilled resources immediately in an environmentally friendly
manner.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Pollution due to used oil and oil filters.

Used oil and oil filters are harmful to the environment.
1. Collect used oil suitable containers.
2. Dispose of used oil and oil filters in an environmentally friendly man-
ner.
ATF 220G-5 377

2019-10_EN
Checking the oil level of the engine
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Engine and catalytic converter damage due to incorrect oil level.
If the oil level is outside of the permitted limits, the engine and the catalytic
converter may be damaged.
1. If the oil level is too high, suck or drain oil.
2. If the oil level is too low, refill oil.
Requirements
Overview
1 Ignition lock 2 Engine oil level warning lamp
Checking the oil level of the engine

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Wait be at least 5 minutes if the engine was running previously.
378 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
2. Switch on the ignition. When doing this, observe the Engine oil level warning lamp, refer to
Error symbols [} page 104].
ð If the Engine oil level warning lamp is not lit, the engine oil level is correct.
ð Refill quantity when Engine oil level warning lamp is lit: 7 l.
ð Refill quantity when Engine oil level warning lamp is flashing: 14 l.
ð Also refer to "Engine information" menu [} page 115].
Changing engine oil and replacing the oil filter cartridge
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of scalding due to splashing hot engine oil.
Splashing hot engine oil may scald skin and eyes.
1. Wear safety goggles.
2. Wear protective gloves and protective clothing.
NOTICE
Engine damage due to old or incorrect engine oil.
Old or incorrect engine oil may lead to engine damage.
1. Change the engine oil and replace the filter cartridge regularly as per
the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Only use new oil specified for the engine.
3. Select oil according to the temperature conditions (refer to Technical
data [} page 495]).
Requirements
▪ Engine oil is at its operating temperature.
▪ Suitable collecting container is provided.
▪ The telescopic boom is raised.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 379

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Oil drain valve

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
380 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Draining engine oil
1 Sealing cap 3 Oil drain hose

2 Oil drain valve
NOTICE! Use the respective chapter of the engine manufacturer's operating manual.
1. Clean the surroundings of the oil drain valve.
2. Place provided collecting container underneath the oil drain valve.
3. Unscrew sealing cap of the oil drain valve.
4. Screw oil drain hose onto the oil drain valve.
5. Evacuate draining oil into the collecting container.
6. When the oil has drained completely, unscrew the oil drain hose and screw the sealing cap
onto the oil drain valve.
ð Engine oil has been drained.
Replacing the oil filter cartridge
Safety notice
NOTICE
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Engine damage due to foreign objects in the oil circuit.

Foreign objects in the oil circuit may lead to damage of the engine com-
ponents.
1. Do not wipe out filter housing.
ATF 220G-5 381

2019-10_EN
Replacing the oil filter cartridge
1 Oil filter cartridge
1. Clean the surroundings of the oil filter housing.

2. Replace the oil filter cartridge.
ð Oil filter cartridge has been replaced.
Filling in engine oil
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Oil filler neck 2 Maintenance hatch
Filling in engine oil

1. Open the maintenance hatch.
382 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
2. Clean the surroundings of the oil filler neck.

3. Unscrew cap of oil filler neck.
4. Fill engine oil into the oil filler neck.
Quantity including oil filter: 39 l.
5. Screw cap of oil filler neck on.
6. Start the engine without pressing the accelerator pedal, and maintain idling speed.
7. Observe the warning lamps. The Engine oil pressure, Minor engine fault and On-board
computer central warning warning lamps must go out.
9. Check screw cap of oil filter and drain screw for leaks.
10.Check oil level after approx. 5 minutes, see Checking the oil level of the engine
[} page 378].
11.If necessary, refill engine oil.
12.Close the maintenance hatch.
ð Engine oil has been filled in.
Final activities
Checking hoses and hose clamps
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Damage of charge air hoses due to exceeded tightening torques on
hose clamps.
When exceeding the maximum permitted tightening torque, the hose
clamp no longer has any spring elasticity. The charge air hose may be
damaged.
1. Do not exceed the maximum permitted tightening torque. (Tightening
torque: 10.2 Nm.)
Requirements
▪ The mobile crane is parked horizontally.
▪ The mobile crane is supported by the outriggers as prescribed, refer to Outrigger
[} page 175].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ The telescopic boom is raised, refer to superstructure operating manual, chapter Compon-
ents and operating elements, subchapter Extending the telescopic boom.
▪ The engine cover has been removed, refer to Opening/closing the maintenance hatches
[} page 366].
ATF 220G-5 383

2019-10_EN
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Air hoses 3 Coolant hoses

2 Charge air hoses
384 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Checking hoses and hose clamps

1. Inspect the following hoses for damage and to make sure they are secure:
∙ Charge air hoses.
∙ Coolant hoses.
∙ Air hoses.
2. Replace damaged hoses, tighten loose hose clamps.
Finishing work
1. Mount engine cover.
ð Hoses and hose clamps have been checked.
Checking engine brake
Requirements
▪ Free carriageway section is available.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 385

2019-10_EN
Overview
0 Engine brake switched off 1 Engine brake switched on
Checking engine brake

Test the function and effect of the engine brake while driving.
1. Accelerate mobile crane.
2. Switch on engine brake.
3. Check speedometer for deceleration.
ð Engine brake has been checked.
Any other work must be carried out in a specialist workshop as per the engine manufacturer's
instructions.
Checking V-ribbed belt for wear and damage

Have this work done at an authorized specialist workshop.
Checking valve clearance

Replacing the AdBlue filter cartridge

17.9.2 Engine cooling system
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of injury due to hot coolant.
Hot coolant under pressure may gush out when opening the cooling sys-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
tem and scald skin or eyes.

1. Use protective gloves.
2. Only open the cooling system at coolant temperatures below 50 °C.
386 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
WARNING
Risk of injury due to toxic coolant.
Toxic glicol in the coolant may cause injuries of skin and eyes.
1. Do not bring coolant into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
2. In the event of eye contact, immediately rinse eyes thoroughly with
clear water.
3. In the event of swallowing coolant, immediately consult a physician.
NOTICE
Engine damage due to mixing different coolants.
Mixing different coolants may lead to flocculation and, thus, cause engine
damage.
1. Only use coolant in accordance with Mercedes Benz specification
325.5 (Glysantin G40).
2. Do not mix coolant in accordance with Mercedes Benz specification
325.5 with any other coolants.
3. In the event that the cooling system still contains a coolant that is not
in accordance with Mercedes Benz specification 325.5 (Glysantin
G40), the cooling system shall be flushed with prior to filling in the new
coolant.
Pollution due to coolant.

Coolant is harmful to the environment.
1. Collect coolant in a suitable container.
2. Dispose of coolant in an environmentally friendly manner.
Checking the coolant level
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Engine damage due to lack of or insufficient anti-freeze or corrosion
protection.
In case of lack of or insufficient anti-freeze protection the coolant may
freeze. This may cause engine damages.
1. Before frost season begins, check coolant for sufficient anti-freeze or
corrosion protection. If necessary, refill anti-freeze and anti-corrosive.
2. Follow the operating manual of the engine manufacturer.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Requirements
ATF 220G-5 387

2019-10_EN
▪ The coolant temperature is under 50 °C.
Overview
1 Pressure relief valve 2 Sealing cap, filler neck
Checking coolant level and coolant

1. Clean sealing cap and surroundings of the sealing cap.
2. Open sealing cap slowly and release excess pressure. When release pressure has been re-
leased, open sealing cap and lay it aside.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Check coolant level:

Coolant must reach lower edge of filler neck.
4. If necessary, refill coolant in the correct mixing ratios. For the coolant specification and the
mixing ratio refer to the engine manufacturer's operating manual.
5. Before frost season begins, check coolant for sufficient anti-freeze protection.
388 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
6. Place the sealing cap onto the filler neck and close.
ð Coolant level and coolant have been checked.
NOTICE! In the case of repeated lack of coolant, contact a specialist workshop.
Changing coolant
Requirements
▪ Coolant is lukewarm.
▪ Heating is adjusted at maximum heating power.
▪ Coolant preheating *) is switched off.
▪ Auxiliary heater is switched off.
▪ The air conditioning system is turned off.
The cooling system must be flushed under the following circumstances:

▪ If heavily soiled.
▪ In case of incompatibility of old anti-freeze agent with the new antifreeze agent. For further
information refer to engine manufacturer's operating manual.
▪ In case of uncertainty regarding the old anti-freeze agent's specification.
NOTICE! Before the coolant change, the vehicle hot-water heating system must have
been opened.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 389

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Sealing cap
2 Coolant drain screw 2 Coolant drain screw
Draining coolant
1. Clean sealing cap and surroundings of the sealing cap.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
2. Open sealing cap slowly and release excess pressure. When release pressure has been re-
leased, open sealing cap and lay it aside.
3. Place a collecting container suitable for the coolant quantity underneath.
4. Clean the surroundings of the coolant drain screws.
5. Open both coolant drain screws and drain the coolant into the collecting container.
390 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
6. Allow the coolant to drain completely.

7. Check the coolant. If it is heavily contaminated, the cooling system must be flushed.
8. Clean both coolant drain screws.
9. Apply sealing tape to the thread of both coolant drain screws.
10.Screw in both coolant drain screws.
ð Coolant has been drained.
Flushing cooling system

▪ Coolant has been drained.
1. Fill cooling system with fresh water.
2. Start the engine and let it run for about five minutes.
4. Drain water completely.
5. Repeat flushing process twice.
6. Clean the surroundings of the coolant drain screws.
7. Clean both coolant drain screws.
8. Apply sealing tape to the thread of both coolant drain screws.
9. Screw in both coolant drain screws.
ð Cooling system has been flushed.
Topping up coolant and bleeding

1. Fill coolant with the correct mixing ratio into filler neck of expansion tank, up to the bottom
edge of the filler neck. For the coolant specification refer to Technical data [} page 495].
3. Allow the engine to run approximately two minutes at idling speed.
If necessary, refill coolant up to the bottom edge of the filler neck.
4. Allow the engine to run approximately four minutes at 800 rpm.
5. Allow the engine to run approximately one minute at 1600 rpm.
6. Allow the engine to run approximately one minute at 2000 rpm.
7. Screw on the sealing cap of the coolant expansion tank.
Note Screw the cap on at a higher speed because otherwise the coolant will spill over the
filler neck.
9. Check coolant level.
CAUTION! The cooling system is pressurised. CAUTION! Do not open the cool-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ing system before the coolant temperature has fallen below 50°C.
ð The cooling system has been bled.
ð Coolant has been changed.
ATF 220G-5 391

2019-10_EN
Cleaning the radiator/coolers
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
392 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Cooler - charge air 4 Condenser - air conditioning system

2 Radiator - engine 5 Grate
3 Cooler - hydraulic oil
Cleaning the radiator/coolers

1. Loosen four nuts, turn four retaining plates through 90°.
2. Loosen both grilles and lay them down.
3. Blow out the cooling fins of the charge air cooler with compressed air or clean them with a
brush.
4. Blow out the cooling fins of the engine radiator with compressed air or clean them with a
brush.
5. Blow out the cooling fins of the hydraulic oil cooler with compressed air or clean them with a
brush.
6. Blow out the condenser of the air conditioning system with compressed air or clean it with a
brush.
7. Insert both grilles.
8. Turn back the four retaining plates through 90° and tighten the four nuts.
ð All coolers/radiators have been cleaned.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 393

2019-10_EN
17.9.3 Air cleaner
Replacing the air cleaner element
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Engine damage due to unfiltered intake air.
Unfiltered intake air may cause damages on the engine.
1. Only perform air cleaner maintenance when engine is switched off.
2. Do not start the engine if the air cleaner element has been removed.
3. No dirt must get into the air intake system while working.
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
394 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Clamp clip (5 ea.) 4 Air intake box

2 Sealing cap 5 Dust discharge valve
3 Air cleaner element
Replacing the air cleaner element

1. Open the maintenance hatch, refer to Opening/closing the maintenance hatches
[} page 366].
2. Open all the clamp clips.
3. Remove the sealing cap from the air cleaner housing.
4. Pull the air cleaner element fully out of the air cleaner housing by turning it slightly.
5. Check the air cleaner housing for damage and cracks.
6. Clean the internal surface and the sealing surfaces of the air cleaner housing and of the air
intake box with a lint-free damp cloth.
7. Introduce the new air cleaner element into the casing with the open side going in first.
8. Place the sealing cap on the air cleaner housing.
9. Close all the clamp clips.
10.Close the maintenance hatch.
ð The air cleaner element has been replaced.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 395

2019-10_EN
Checking/cleaning the dust discharge valve
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
396 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Dust discharge valve
Checking/cleaning the dust discharge valve

[} page 366].
2. Eliminate dust accumulations compressing the dust discharge valve.
3. Check the dust discharge valve for damage and whether it is unobstructed.
4. Open all the clamp clips.
5. Remove the sealing cap from the air cleaner housing.
6. Blow dust discharge valve out with compressed air or wash it out.
7. Place the sealing cap on the air cleaner housing.
8. Close all the clamp clips.
9. Close the maintenance hatch.
ð The dust discharge valve has been cleaned.
Clean air intake box
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

ATF 220G-5 397

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Air intake box

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Clean air intake box

[} page 366].
2. Blow out the air intake box with compressed air or clean with a brush.
398 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
3. Close the maintenance hatch.

ð Air intake box is cleaned.
Checking the air cleaner system
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Checking the air cleaner system

1. Check the air intake hoses for damage and to make sure that they are secure.
2. Check that the hose clamps are secure.
3. Check the air cleaner housing for damage and cleanliness.
ATF 220G-5 399

2019-10_EN
17.9.4 Fuel system
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of fire due to highly flammable fuel.
Fires may lead to serious injuries and material damages.
1. Omit fire, naked light and sparks when handling fuels.
Pollution due to used filter elements, seals and fuel residues.

When disposed of incorrectly, the used components of the fuel system will
pollute the environment.
1. Dispose of filters and seals in an environmentally friendly manner.
2. Collect fuel residues in suitable containers.
Replacing the fuel filter cartridge

Refer to the engine manufacturer's operating manual for instructions.
Water separator
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
400 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Draining water from fuel system
Safety instructions
Pollution due to used filter elements, seals and fuel residues.

When disposed of incorrectly, the used components of the fuel system will
pollute the environment.
1. Dispose of filters and seals in an environmentally friendly manner.
2. Collect fuel residues in suitable containers.
NOTICE
Frost damages on fuel filter due to freezing of condensate.
If there is water in the filter bowl, it may freeze at low temperatures. The fil-
ter bowl may burst. Fuel may enter the environment. The engine may fail.
1. Before and during the frost season drain condensate and repeat as of-
ten as necessary.
Requirements
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Drain valve 5 Filter head

2 Filter bowl 6 Bleed screw
3 Sealing ring (2 pcs.) 7 Fuel hand pump
4 Filter cartridge
ATF 220G-5 401

2019-10_EN
Draining water from fuel system

1. Open the maintenance hatch, if necessary.
2. Clean water separator.
3. Place collecting container underneath drain valve.
4. Open the drain valve.
5. Maintain drain valve open until pure fuel escapes.
6. Close the drain valve.
7. Remove the collecting container.
8. Close the maintenance hatch, if necessary.
ð The water separator is drained of water.
Replacing filter element of water separator
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Engine faults due to dirty filter element.
A dirty filter element can interfere with the engine's fuel supply. This may
result in engine faults or engine failure.
1. Replace the filter element in good time.
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
402 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview

4 Filter cartridge
Replacing filter cartridge

2. Clean water separator.
4. Unscrew filter element from filter head.
5. Unscrew filter bowl from filter element and clean it.
6. Apply a little fuel onto both sealing rings.
7. Screw filter bowl with new sealing ring onto the filter element and tighten by hand.
8. Screw filter element with new sealing ring onto the filter head and tighten by hand.
10.Close the maintenance hatch, if necessary.
ð Filter cartridge has been replaced.
Final activities
1. Perform function check: Start the engine.
2. In case engine does not start, bleed fuel system.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 403

2019-10_EN
Bleeding the fuel system
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Engine faults due to air in the fuel system.
If there is air in the fuel system, this can interfere with the engine's fuel
supply. This may result in engine faults or engine failure.
1. Bleed the fuel system.
Requirements
Overview

4 Filter cartridge
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Bleeding the fuel system

3. Open the bleeder screw.
4. Press the fuel hand pump until fuel comes out of the bleed screw without bubbles.
5. Close the bleeder screw.
404 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
6. Wipe spilled fuel away from water separator with a clean lint-free cloth.
8. Close the maintenance hatch, if necessary.
ð Water separator of the fuel system has been bled.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 405

2019-10_EN
Fuel tank
Draining condensate from the fuel tank
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
406 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Drain plug 2 Seal
Draining condensate
1. Empty the tank down to the reserve.
2. Unscrew the drain plug.
3. Allow the condensate to drain into a suitable container.
4. Clean the sealing surfaces.
5. Check seal, clean and replace if necessary.
6. Screw in and tighten the drain plug with seal.
ð Condensate has been drained.
Checking the ventilation filter of the fuel tank
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 407

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Ventilation filter
Checking the ventilation filter

1. Check ventilation filter, clean and replace if necessary.
ð Ventilation filter has been checked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
17.9.5 Exhaust system
Cleaning exhaust pipe

408 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.10 Drive train
CAUTION
Risk of burns due to hot oil and hot components.
Hot oil and touching hot parts may lead to burns.
1. Before performing inspections, allow oil to cool down to below 50°C.
2. Do not touch hot parts.
17.10.2 Gearbox
Checking gearbox oil level
Safety instructions
NOTICE
Damage due to incorrect oil level.
A too low oil level causes defective lubrication and reduces lifetime. A too
high oil level leads to overheating.
1. Check the oil level periodically.
NOTICE
Gearbox damages due to contaminated oil.
Contaminated oil introduces foreign particles into the gearbox system and
may lead to significant damages.
1. Store oil only in clean containers and transfer it from these.
2. Do not use any containers or filling devices which are used for anti-
freeze or engine coolant fluids.
Requirements
▪ Gear oil has cooled down (to approx. 30 °C).
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Suitable container is provided.
ATF 220G-5 409

2019-10_EN
Checking gearbox oil level

NOTICE! When checking the oil level, the intarder must not be activated any more dir-
ectly before parking the mobile crane. This guarantees that the correct oil quantity will be
present in the gearbox.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
410 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Oil filler plug 2 Oil check screw plug
Checking the oil level

1. Remove oil filler plug.
2. Remove the oil check screw plug.
3. Allow the escaping oil to drain into a suitable container.
4. Fill gear oil into the oil filler opening until it escapes at the oil check.
Allow the escaping gear oil to drain into a suitable container.
6. Clean the oil filler plug, provide it with a new sealing ring and screw it in.
7. Clean and screw in the oil check screw plug.
ð The oil level has been checked.
Changing the transmission oil

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 411

2019-10_EN
17.10.3 Transfer case
Checking the oil level of the transfer case
Safety instructions
WARNING
Rotating wheels can cause injury.
Rotating wheels can pull in persons and objects. This could cause serious
or fatal injuries.
1. Maintain a safe distance from rotating wheels.
2. Remove objects from the vicinity of the wheels.
3. Cordon off/secure the working area.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Gearbox damages due to contaminated oil.
Contaminated oil introduces foreign particles into the gearbox system and
may lead to significant damages.
1. Store oil only in clean containers and transfer it from these.
2. Do not use any containers or filling devices which are used for anti-
freeze or engine coolant fluids.
Requirements
[} page 175].
▪ All the wheels hang freely.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
412 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Oil filler plug/fluid check plug

Preparations
ATF 220G-5 413

2019-10_EN
The following procedure is necessary in order to ensure that the oil is correctly distributed in the
system (transfer case, oil cooler and pipes).
2. Engage 9th gear.
1. Engage the transfer case in on-road gear.
1. Allow to run for approx. one minute (engine speed approx. 1000 rpm).
2. Put gearbox into Neutral.
4. The oil temperature of the transfer case must not exceed 50°C.
1. Clean around the oil filler screws.
2. Unscrew the oil filler screw.
ð The oil level must reach the lower edge of the hole.
ð The transfer case oil level has been checked.
Correcting the oil level of the transfer case
1. If necessary, refill oil through the filler hole.
2. Clean the sealing surface on the transfer case.
3. Clean the oil filler plug / fluid check plug and screw in with a new seal and tighten.
ð The transfer case oil level has been corrected.
Other work
Inspect the following during every oil check:
1. That the housing and shafts are free of leaks.
2. Condition of the transmission suspension.
3. Tightness of the compressed air lines.
4. Electrical cables and electrical connections.
5. Tightness of the hydraulic lines to/from the oil cooler.
6. Tightness of the hydraulic lines to/from the emergency steering pump.
Changing the transfer case oil

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
414 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.10.4 Drive shafts
Checking drive shafts for noises
Checking drive shafts for noises

1. While driving listen for noticeable noises.
2. In case of noticeable noises, immediately contact a specialist workshop.
ð Drive shafts have been checked for noises.
Check that the flange screws and intermediate shaft bearing screws are secure
17.11 Axles and brakes
17.11.1 Axle drives
Safety instructions
CAUTION
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
NOTICE
ATF 220G-5 415

2019-10_EN
Checking oil levels of axle drives
Requirements
[} page 175].
10 x 8 drive
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
416 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
10 x 6 drive
Overview
10 x 8 drive
Axle 1
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Fluid check plug/oil filler plug
ATF 220G-5 417

2019-10_EN
Axle 2
1 Fluid check plug/oil filler plug 2 Oil filler plug
Axle 4

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
418 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Axle 5
1. Clean the surroundings of the oil filler plug.

2. Screw oil filler plug out.
3. Check the oil level.
The oil level must reach the lower edge of the hole.
5. Clean sealing surface on axle casing.
6. Clean oil filler plug and screw in with new seal.
7. Perform test on all axle drives.
ð Oil levels of axle drives have been checked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 419

2019-10_EN
10 x 6 drive
Axle 2
Axle 4

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
420 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Axle 5

2. Screw oil filler plug out.
The oil level must reach the lower edge of the hole.
5. Clean sealing surface on axle casing.
7. Perform test on all axle drives.
ð Oil levels of axle drives have been checked.
Changing the axle drive oil

17.11.2 Wheel drives
Safety instructions
CAUTION
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

ATF 220G-5 421

2019-10_EN
NOTICE
Checking oil levels of wheel drives
Requirements
▪ The parking brake is released.
▪ All the wheels hang freely.
[} page 175].
10 x 8 drive
2
1 1
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Axle driven 2 Axle not driven
10 x 6 drive
422 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
2
2 1
1 Axle driven 2 Axle not driven
1 Fluid check plug/oil filler plug 2 Control mark
Checking oil levels of wheel drives

1. Turn wheel such that the oil drain plug is located at the lowest point.
The control mark on the oil filler plug is positioned horizontally.
3. Remove oil filler plug.
The oil level must reach the lower edge of the check marking.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5. Clean sealing surface on wheel drive.

7. Test all wheel drives.
ð Oil levels of wheel drives have been checked.
ATF 220G-5 423

2019-10_EN
Changing the wheel drive oil

Changing grease filling in wheel hubs of non-driven axles

17.11.3 Visual inspection and switching function test
Requirements
Visual inspection
1. Inspect the axles and axle drives for leaks and damage.
Switching function test

1. Test the function of the differential lock switching; to do this, switch differential locks of the
axle on and off, refer to Engaging and switching off axle drive and differential locks
[} page 256].
17.11.4 Braking system
Checking the compressed air system for leaks

Check the compressed air system daily for leaks before setting off.
Testing function of air dryer
Requirements
▪ Compressed air system is filled up to cut-out pressure.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
424 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Compressed air tank 2 Drain valve
Draining condensate
NOTICE! If condensate escapes, the air dryer is defective. Have the air dryer repaired in a
specialist workshop without delay.
1. Take the provided collecting container.
2. Tilt the actuator pin of the drain valve by pressing from the side.
3. If condensate comes out, tilt the actuator pin until no more condensate comes out.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ð Condensate has been drained.
ATF 220G-5 425

2019-10_EN
Checking brake linings
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to worn brake linings and brake discs.
Worn brake linings and worn brake discs may lead to reduced braking
power or brake failure. This may lead to accidents involving personal injur-
ies or material damage.
1. Check brake discs and brake linings periodically.
2. Observe the wear indicator.
NOTICE! With new brake linings, no full braking nor prolonged braking must be per-
formed in the first 50 km if possible.
Description
The mobile crane is equipped with a wear indicator for the brake linings. When reaching the
wear limit, the Brake lining wear warning lamp on the carrier cab's on-board computer will light
up.
Checking brake linings

1. Check wear of the brake linings.
If the Brake lining wear warning lamp is not lit, the brake linings are in order.
If the Brake lining wear warning lamp is lit, contact a specialist workshop without delay.
NOTICE! They may only be changed by a qualified and trained person or in a specialist
workshop.
Testing the ABS *) function

When setting off and during the journey. Check the function of the pilot lamps.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
426 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.11.5 Test the compressed air system
Overview
1
2
3
4 12
5
6
7
8 10
9 11
1 Supply pressure Service brake, circuit 1 7 —
test connection
2 Supply pressure Service brake, circuit 2 8 Compressor line test connection
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
test connection
3 Supply pressure Parking brake test con- 9 Control pressure Brake cylinder Axle 3 to 5
nection test connection
4 Supply pressure Secondary users system 10 Supply pressure Gearbox test connection
test connection
5 Brake cylinder pressure Spring-loaded ac- 11 Filling connection for spring-loaded accu-
cumulator cylinder Axle 2 test connection mulator
ATF 220G-5 427

2019-10_EN
6 Brake cylinder pressure Spring-loaded ac- 12 Tyre inflator connector

cumulator cylinder Axle 4 and 5 test con-
nection
Test the compressed air system

Important pressure values
Cut-out pressure of the pressure 11.7-12.7 bar
regulator
Cut-in pressure of the pressure regu- 9.9-11.1 bar
lator
Cut-in pressure Axle 3 to 5 7.0 +0.3 bar
Pressure Brake circuit 1 and 2 9.8-10.2 bar

17.11.6 Cleaning drain valves
Requirements
▪ Compressed air system is filled up to cut-out pressure.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
428 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Air tank 2 Drain valve
Procedure
NOTICE! If condensate escapes, the air dryer is defective. Have the air dryer repaired in a
specialist workshop without delay.
1. Wipe exterior of drain valve with a moist cloth.
2. Take the provided collecting container.
3. Tilt the actuator pin of the drain valve to all four directions by pressing from the side.
4. If condensate comes out, collect it in the collecting container and tilt the actuator pin until no
more condensate comes out.
ð Drain valve has been cleaned.
17.11.7 Replacing air dryer cartridge

17.11.8 Engine brake and exhaust flaps

Check the function and setting.
17.11.9 Test the pressure regulator

17.11.10 Inspect the protective caps, bushings and seals

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
17.11.11 Inspecting the diaphragm cylinder

ATF 220G-5 429

2019-10_EN
17.11.12 Checking the ABS system *)

17.11.13 Steering
Check steering drive shafts for circumferential backlash

Checking ball joints in steering and track rods for backlash

17.11.14 Checking the screws on axles, steering levers, push rods for tightness
17.11.15 Eddy-current brake *)
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
430 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Rotor 3 Screws (4 ea.)

2 Stator 4 Screws (8 ea.)
Performing function check of eddy-current brake
WARNING
Risk of burns due to hot components of the eddy-current brake.
Touching hot components of the eddy-current brake may lead to serious
burns.
1. Do not touch any hot components.
While braking with the eddy-current brake, the rotors heat up due to their function.
To check the eddy-current brake, drive on a free route close to the inspection site.
1. Bring right steering column switch into position 2 or 3, refer to Steering column switches
[} page 68].
ð Engine brake, intarder, and eddy-current brake are switched on.
2. Accelerate mobile crane several times with the accelerator pedal and release accelerator
pedal again.
ð Mobile crane accelerates while stepping on the accelerator pedal and brakes when re-
leasing the accelerator pedal.
3. Drive up to the inspection site.
6. Carefully check if the rotors of the eddy-current brake are warm.
ð If the rotors are warm, the eddy-current brake is in order.
Cleaning the eddy-current brake
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

Cleaning the eddy-current brake

▪ Only clean when cooled down.
ATF 220G-5 431

2019-10_EN
▪ Do not use any cleaning agents or solvents.

▪ Clean with the high-pressure steam cleaner.
▪ Do not direct the steam jet directly at the electrical connections.
Check clearance between stator and rotors

Air gap check

Checking drive shaft screws

Checking eddy-current brake screws

Checking insulating sheaths, wiring, connections, and contacts

17.12 Hydraulic system
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to high oil pressures in the hydraulic system.
When the engine is running, the hydraulic system is subjected to high
pressures which may lead to serious accidents during maintenance activit-
ies.
1. Only work on the hydraulic system when the engine is switched off.
2. Depressurise the hydraulic system.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
432 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
WARNING
Risk of accidents and damages on the hydraulic system due to con-
taminated filter elements.
Dirt in the hydraulic system and the filter elements may lead to malfunc-
tions and damages of the hydraulic system. This may lead to accidents in-
volving personal injuries and material damage.
1. Only fill in new hydraulic oil from a clean container.
2. Have the filter elements replaced only in a specialist workshop.
3. Change the filter elements, do not clean them.
4. Change the filter elements with every hydraulic oil change.
5. Change the filter elements when the Hydraulic oil filter contamination
indicator lights up.
6. Change the filter elements according to the maintenance plan.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to air in the hydraulic system.
If the hydraulic system contains any air, this may lead to malfunctions.
This may lead to accidents involving personal injuries and material dam-
age.
1. Have a specialist workshop bleed the hydraulic system.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to incorrect work on hydraulic accumulators.
The hydraulic accumulators are pressurized and may lead to injuries when
handled incorrectly.
1. Have all the activities on the hydraulic accumulators only performed by
the TADANO FAUN Customer Service.
It is recommended to have an analysis performed by the supplier before a

planned hydraulic oil change or at regulars intervals whether a hydraulic oil
change is necessary. The mobile cranes are delivered with hydraulic oils
with a minimum purity according to ISO 4406 class 18/16/13. The opera-
tion of the hydraulic components is guaranteed up to a purity of 20/18/15.
Depending on the contamination degree and the thermal load of the hy-
draulic oil, possibly shorter intervals as those mentioned in the mainten-
ance plan may be required.
Pollution due to used oil and oil filters.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Used oil and oil filters are harmful to the environment.

1. Collect used oil suitable containers.
2. Dispose of used oil and oil filters in an environmentally friendly man-
ner.
ATF 220G-5 433

2019-10_EN
17.12.2 Checking the hydraulic oil level
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to too low hydraulic oil level.
A too low hydraulic oil level may cause damages on the hydraulic system.
The hydraulic system may fail. This may lead to accidents involving per-
1. Check the hydraulic oil level and refill hydraulic oil if required.
Requirements
▪ The outrigger system has been fully retracted.
▪ Wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
▪ Mobile crane is in driving level.
▪ The axle suspension locking has been released.
▪ The hydraulic oil temperature is between 15 °C and 25 °C.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
434 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Checking the hydraulic oil level

Overview
1 Filter cover 3 Hydraulic oil level setpoint value arrow

2 Inspection glass
Checking the hydraulic oil level

1. Read off hydraulic oil level on inspection glass.
Correct oil level: within a range of 10 mm above or below the Hydraulic oil level setpoint
value arrow.
Note: For every 10 °C temperature difference, the oil level changes by approx. 8 mm.
2. If necessary, refill hydraulic oil until the correct oil level is reached.
ð Hydraulic oil level has been checked.
Refilling hydraulic oil
The fluid is topped up via the opening in the filter cover.
1. Clean the surroundings of the filter cover.
2. Unscrew filter cover and refill hydraulic oil through the hole until the correct oil level is
reached.
4. Check cover seal, clean and replace if necessary.
5. Screw the filter cover, including the seal, back onto the hydraulic oil tank.
ð Hydraulic oil has been refilled.
17.12.3 Replacing filter cartridges

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
17.12.4 Changing hydraulic oil

17.12.5 Replacing filter element of the pressure filter

ATF 220G-5 435

2019-10_EN
17.12.6 Checking hydraulic hoses

Check hydraulic hoses / hoses for damage.
17.12.7 Replacing hydraulic hoses

17.12.8 Checking the hydraulic accumulator preloading pressure

17.12.9 Mixing, changing hydraulic oils
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to malfunctions of hydraulic system when mix-
ing hydraulic oils.
When mixing hydraulic oils of different qualities, flocculations or clumpings
may occur in the hydraulic oil. Malfunctions of the hydraulic system may
be the consequence. This may lead to accidents involving injuries and ma-
terial damages.
1. Do not mix hydraulic oils of different qualities or manufacturing types.
2. Before changing the hydraulic oil, contact the TADANO Customer Ser-
vice.
It is possible, to convert the hydraulic system to biodegradable hydraulic oils according to

VDMA 24568.
17.13.1 Checking the battery
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to short-circuited battery.
A short-circuited battery may generate very high amperages. This may
cause electric shocks and fires. This may lead to accidents involving per-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
sonal injuries or material damage.

1. Avoid metallic contact between the battery's positive pole and the mo-
bile crane.
2. Do not bridge the battery's poles.
3. Do not touch a short-circuited battery and leave the mobile crane.
436 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Batteries
Checking the battery

The following battery points must be checked regularly:
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Tightness of the pole terminals.

▪ Battery fluid level, see Checking the battery fluid level [} page 438].
▪ Damage to the battery.
▪ Aeration and ventilation of the battery.
ATF 220G-5 437

2019-10_EN
17.13.2 Greasing the battery terminals

Grease the battery terminals as per the maintenance plan.
17.13.3 Checking the battery fluid level
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of chemical burns due to escaping battery acid.
Batteries contain gases and liquids which can cause significant bodily
harm when coming into contact with skin, eyes, and mucous membranes.
clear water.
3. After rinsing, seek medical attention.
Overview
1
1 Sealing plugs (12 ea.)
Checking the battery fluid level

1. Unscrew all sealing plugs.
2. Check the battery fluid level.
The battery fluid level must be approx. 10 - 15 mm above the plates.
If necessary, top up with distilled or demineralised water.
3. Screw in all sealing plugs.
ð Battery fluid level has been checked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
438 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.13.4 Fuses
Carrier cab fuses
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 439

2019-10_EN
Fuse assignment
Clamp Ampere Function

F0001 10 A 24 V socket,
trailer socket S
F0002 10 A Hazard warning lights
F0003 15 A Front and rear rotary beacons
F0004 10 A Fog lights,
rear fog lights,
headlight flasher
F0005 — —
F0006 5A Air conditioning system
F0007 10 A Ignition on,
relay D+
F0008 — —
F0009 40 A Engine control (ACM) aftertreatment of exhaust gases

F0010 10 A OBD diagnostics engine
F0011 10 A Door contact switch,
carrier cab interior lights
courtesy light
F0012 15 A Rotary switch,
relay high beam light
F0013 15 A ABS system control unit *)
F0014 25 A Trailer ABS system control unit *)
F0015 10 A Steering computer II
F0016 15 A Working floodlight outriggers
F0017 10 A Gearbox
F0018 7.5 A Intarder
F0019 10 A Converter *)
F0020 10 A Engine control (CPC)
F0021 5A Speedometer
F0022 — —
F0023 — —
F0024 — —
F0025 10 A Brake lights,

air dryer
F0026 10 A Reversing lights,
reversing signal
F0027 10 A Indicator lamps and switches, instrument panel
F0028 15 A Heater blower,
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
auxiliary heater
F0029 5A Engine control (MCM)
F0030 10 A Rear working floodlight, can be switched off *)
F0031 5A OBD diagnostics engine
F0032 7.5 A Trailer socket S
440 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

F0033 5A Engine control (CPC)
F0034 10 A Mirror heater,
mirror adjustment,
seat heater
F0035 5A Alternator
F0036 10 A ABS system control unit *)
F0037 5A ABS system trailer socket *)
F0038 3A Rotary switch, light
F0039 10 A Centralized lubrication system
F0040 10 A Steering computer I, II.
Steering program pre-selection
F0041 10 A Window lifter, passenger side

F0042 — —
F0043 15 A Emergency connector for rear steering
F0044 5A Electronic tachograph MTCO,
speedometer
F0045 10 A Intarder,
eddy-current brake
F0046 10 A Engine control (ACM) aftertreatment of exhaust gases
F0047 10 A Working floodlights on external mirrors *)
F0048 5A Immobilizer *)
F0049 10 A Gearbox
F0050 7.5 A Intarder
F0051 10 A Converter *)
F0052 10 A Engine control (MCM)
F0053 7.5 A Direction indicator
F0054 10 A Windshield wipers,
windshield washer,
signal horn,
super-tone horn
F0055 10 A Window lifter, driver side
F0057 3A Outrigger actuation, left-hand and right-hand,

main display
F0058 10 A CAN distributor module I/0,
left-hand front outrigger, front right D613
left-hand rear outrigger, rear right D614
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
carrier D018
carrier D019
carrier D020
F0063 10 A Supply Superstructure control systems
F0064 10 A Central control system Carrier ESX
ATF 220G-5 441

2019-10_EN

F0067 5A Sensors for the central control system carrier ESX
F0068 5A Switches for the central control system carrier ESX,
CAN distributor module I/0
F0069 5A Main display
F0070 5A Outrigger length detector transmitter
F0071 — —
F0072 — —
F0073 10 A Supply Superstructure control systems

F0074 5A Central control system Carrier ESX
F0075 5A CAN distributor module I/0,
left-hand front outrigger, front right D613
left-hand rear outrigger, rear right D614
carrier D018
carrier D019
carrier D020
F0080 5A Main display
F0081 20 A Auxiliary heater *)

relay blower
F0082 5A Auxiliary heater *)
F0083 5A Battery main switch relay
F0084 15 A Voltage reduction device 24V/12V
F0086 5A Electronic tachograph MTCO
F0087 10 A Steering computer I,
Steering control unit
F0088 5A Tyre pressure indicator
F0089 7;5 A Side bordering lights,

rear lights,
side marker lamps,
left clearance lamps
F0090 7.5 A Side bordering lights,
rear lights,
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
side marker lamps,

right clearance lamps
F0091 7.5 A Additional side bordering lights,
side marker lamps,
left and right side lamps for France
F0092 10 A Left low beam and high beam lights
F0093 10 A Right low beam and high beam lights
442 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

F0094 — —
F0095 — —
F0096 5A Door, left-hand and right-hand
F0097 — —
F0098 — —
F0099 — —
F0100 — —
F0101 — —
F0102 — —
F0103 — —
F0104 — —
ACM = control unit for aftertreatment of exhaust gases

CAN = Controller Area Network
CMV = colour display
MCM = control unit for motor management
OBD = On-Board Diagnostics
*) = Option
Battery compartment, fuses
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 443

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Eddy-current brake *) fuse 4 Superstructure fuse

2 Charging socket *) fuse 5 Carrier cab fuse
3 Carrier fuse
Fuse assignment

F0200 25 A Carrier
F0201 25 A Superstructure
F0202 80 A Carrier cab
F0203 25 A Charging socket *)
F0204 250 A Eddy-current brake *)
Replacing fuses
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to replacing fuses incorrectly.
Replacing fuses incorrectly may trigger electric shocks and fires. This may
lead to accidents involving personal injuries or material damage.
1. Switch off ignition and battery main switch before repairing.
2. Eliminate the cause of the overload before replacing a blown fuse.
Replacing fuse
1. Switch Battery main switch switch off, refer to Battery main switch.
2. Eliminate the cause of the short circuit.
3. Remove blown fuse and replace with fuse which has same ampere rating.
4. Switch Battery main switch switch on, refer to Battery main switch.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
5. Test function of affected consumer.

ð Fuse has been replaced.
444 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.13.5 Relay
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to incorrect changing of relays.
Incorrect changing of relays may trigger electric shocks and fires. This
may lead to accidents involving personal injuries or material damage.
1. Switch off the battery main switch and the ignition.
2. Eliminate the cause of the damage before replacing a blown relay.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 445

2019-10_EN
Overview
A- Relay installation location

E
Relay assignment
Installation location A
Function Relay (K)/diode (V)
ABS system*) deactivation K101
Speed regulation " + " K045
Rear working floodlight*) K069
Speed regulation " - " K044
Working floodlights on external mirrors*) K068
Brake light off when accelerator actuation on K079
Automatic connection of blower*) K065
Centralized lubrication system display K051
"+" supply K036
Carrier ignition on K001
— —
— —
— —
— —
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
— —
— —
*) = Option
446 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Installation location B
"+" supply K035
Engine stop (MCM) K022
Parking brake K028
Engine stop K021
Carrier central warning K061
Engine stop K020
Retracting the outrigger K617
Working speed K030
Radio K050
"+" supply V016
Rear left rotary beacon, K058
Rear right rotary beacon
Signal horn K012
Front left rotary beacon, K018
Front right rotary beacon
Switching on the ignition V011
Direction indicators K010
Hazard warning light
Installation location C
Buzzer V003
Brake light K042
High beam light / headlight flasher K007
Service brake K047
Rear fog light K008
Intarder brake light K019
Fog light *) K006
Time-delay relay 10 s delay, AdBlue tank heater on *) K801
Battery main switch K013
AdBlue tank heater on *) K078
Alternator D+ K004
"+" supply V004
Wiping interval K002
"+" supply V017
— —
— —
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
*) = Option
Installation location D
Steering V502
Steering V501
ATF 220G-5 447

2019-10_EN

Steering V503
3rd and 4th axles faultless K533
Hazard warning lights K029
5th axle faultless K532
Hazard warning lights K009
Hazard warning lights V006
Self-retaining steering circuit II K530
Right outrigger working floodlights K067
Self-retaining steering circuit I K529
Left outrigger working floodlights K066
Buzzer steering K521
Door contact switch K041
Upshift lock K511
— —
Installation location E
Engine brake K316
— —
Eddy-current brake (accelerator pedal deactivation) K027
Voltage supply for radio of superstructure K043
Eddy-current brake *) K026
Reversing light K312
Rotary switch, light V007
Driver's door K011
Passenger door K031
Eddy-current brake (speed on) K015
Air conditioning system K037
— —
— —
*) = Option
Changing relay
1. Switch off ignition and Battery main switch switch.
2. Eliminate the cause of the damage.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
3. Remove blown relay and replace with relay which has same connected load.
4. Switch on Battery main switch switch and ignition.
5. Test function of affected consumer.
448 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.13.6 Bulbs and lamps
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to defective lamps.
Defective may lead to impaired vision. This may lead to accidents in-
volving injuries and material damages.
1. Check lighting equipment periodically.
2. Replace defective lamps without delay.
Description
The following must be observed for trouble-free operation of the mobile crane:
▪ Keep all the display devices, headlights and lamps clean.
▪ When changing lamps, comply with design, operating voltage and power.
Installation site and overview

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Lamps list
Position Function Type Power
1 Rotary beacon H1 70 W
ATF 220G-5 449

2019-10_EN
Position Function Type Power

2 Clearance lamp superstructure, rear P25-1 5W
3 Side marker lamp (*) (*)
4 Reverse light P21W 21 W
5 Rear fog light P21W 21 W
6 Rear light R5W 5W
6 Rear light (Canada) *) P25-2 5W
7 License plate light R10W 10 W
8 Reflector - -
9 Brake light P21W 21 W
10 Flashing light, rear P21W 21 W
11 Clearance lamp, rear R10W 10 W
12 Clearance lamp, side (*) (*)
13 Clearance lamp, roof of the carrier cab R19/10 10 W
14 Flashing light, side P25-1 21 W
15 —
16 Flashing light, front PY21W 21 W
16 Flashing light, front (Canada) *) — —
17 Low beam light / daytime running light
18 Fog light
19 High-beam light
20 Clearance lamp, boom W10/5 5W
21 Roof lights (Canada) *) (*) (*)
Ceiling lamp, carrier cab R19/10 10 W
Instrument panel - switch lights
Instrument panel – indicator lamps W5/1.2 1.2 W
Working floodlights on the outrigger H3 70 W
(in acc. with DIN 72601)

Lamps marked with (*) cannot be replaced individually.
17.14 Breathers
17.14.1 Introduction
The following components have a breathing function via a breather or venting holes:
▪ Engine (refer to the engine manufacturer's operating manual).
▪ Gearbox (refer to the gearbox manufacturer's operating manual).
▪ Axles.
▪ Fuel tank.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
▪ Hydraulic oil tank.

▪ Braking system
▪ Bleeder valve on the compressed air valves.
▪ Venting holes on the brake cylinders.
▪ Drive shaft intermediate bearing.
450 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
▪ Eddy-current brake *).

▪ Transfer case.
Defective or dirty breathers and venting holes can cause malfunctions or failures:
▪ Assemblies can be leaky.
▪ Brake valves can vent poorly.
▪ Wheel brakes can become hot.
▪ The engine can run irregularly or fail.
▪ The hydraulic system can work irregularly or fail.
▪ The eddy-current brake *) can become too hot or fail.
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to defective breather.
Defective breathers can cause components to fail or malfunction. This may
result in accidents. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.
1. Check breathers periodically.
2. Replace defective breathers.
NOTICE
Damages due to painted-over breather.
A painted-over breather might not work. The component with the breather
function may be damaged.
1. Before carrying out painting work, make sure that breathers are well
covered.
2. Remove the cover once work is complete.
3. Check functionality of the breathers; replace if necessary.
Have the breathers cleaned by a specialist workshop in accordance with

the maintenance plan.
Have the breathers replaced only by specialist workshop.
17.14.3 Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 451

2019-10_EN
17.14.4 Installation location
17.14.5 Checking bleeder valve of axle drives
Overview
1 Bleeder valve axles

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Checking breather
1. Remove external dirt from dirty breathers.
NOTICE! Do not use high-pressure cleaners.
2. Check the breather cap:
- It must be possible to turn the breather cap easily.
- The breather cap must not be damaged.
452 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
3. Check that the breather is securely in place. Tighten if necessary.

4. Have damaged breathers replaced by a specialist workshop.
ð Breather has been checked.
17.14.6 Checking braking system bleeder valves
Overview
1 Breather on the brake valve
Checking breather
Checking venting holes

1. Clean the area around the venting holes.
NOTICE! Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
2. Check venting holes for dirt.
3. Clean soiled venting holes by blowing them out.
ð Venting holes have been checked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 453

2019-10_EN
17.14.7 Checking hydraulic oil tank bleeder valve
Overview
1 Breather hydraulic oil tank
Checking breather
3. Check the breather for damage.
4. Have damaged or very dirty breathers replaced by a specialist workshop.
17.14.8 Checking fuel tank bleeder valve
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
454 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Cover 3 Fuel tank

2 Breathers
Checking breather
17.14.9 Checking gearbox bleeder valve

The instructions regarding the bleeder valve are located in the provided gearbox manufacturer's
documentation.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 455

2019-10_EN
17.14.10 Checking transfer case breathers
Overview
1 Breather on transfer case
Checking breather
17.14.11 Checking the drive shaft intermediate bearing breather
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Drive shaft intermediate bearing breather, on drive 10 x 8
456 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Checking breather
3. Check the breather for damage.
4. Have damaged or very dirty breathers replaced by a specialist workshop.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 457

2019-10_EN
17.15 Wheels and tyres
17.15.1 Service life of wheel rims

A service life of the wheel rim of the mobile crane of approx. 80000 – 100000 km can be as-
sumed with normal use.
Large, spasmodic stresses or driving with excessive axle loads, more than the constructional
guidelines, can lead to a reduction in the specified service life. The wheel rims should therefore
be inspected regularly, depending on the conditions of use of the vehicle, and checks for cracks
carried out on the critical areas e.g. welding seam between disc and rim.
Cracks which may be present may not be repaired by welding.
The vehicle operator may only use wheel rims which are approved by the
mobile crane manufacturer.
17.15.2 Checking wheels and tyres
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to damaged wheels and tyres.
Damaged wheels or tyres may become partially or completely detached
from the mobile crane. This may lead to accidents involving personal injur-
ies or material damage.
1. Check wheels and tyres according to the maintenance plan.
2. Shorten the maintenance intervals in case of severe operating condi-
tions.
3. Observe the following notes.
Check wheels and tyres for:

1. Tyre wear and damages.
2. Tyre pressure.
3. Corrosion.
4. Damaged wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
5. Damaged wheel rims.
6. Wheel nuts secure.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
458 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.15.3 Checking the wheel nuts
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to loosened wheel nuts or ripped off wheel
bolts.
If wheel nuts are loosened or wheel bolts are ripped off, the wheel may be
detached. This may lead to accidents involving personal injuries or mater-
ial damage.
1. Check the wheel nut indicators periodically.
2. Check that the wheel nuts are secure and tighten them in accordance
3. When driving with axle loads in excess of 13 t, retighten the wheel nuts
in accordance with the maintenance plan.
Wheel nut indicators

The wheel nuts are provided with wheel nut indicators. The arrow tips must point to each other
(permitted position). If this is not the case (not permitted position), the wheel nuts must be re-
tightened.
1 Permitted position 2 Not permitted position
Check that the wheel nuts are secure

1. Check the positions of wheel nut indicators.
2. If the wheel nut indicators are in an not permitted position, re-tighten wheel nuts. See
Retightening wheel nuts [} page 460].
3. Replace damaged or lost wheel nut indicators.
ð Tightness of the wheel nuts has been checked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
NOTICE! When driving with axle loads in excess of 13 t (irrespective of the position of the
wheel nut indicators), the wheel nuts must always be re-tightened in accordance with the
maintenance plan.
ATF 220G-5 459

2019-10_EN
17.15.4 Retightening wheel nuts (axle load up to 13 t)
Safety instructions
WARNING
bolts.
ial damage.
Re-tightening wheel nuts
Always tighten wheel nuts in a crosswise pattern.

Use a torque wrench.
Do not damage the wheel bolt threads.
1 Wheel nut indicator 2 Wheel nut
1. Pull all the wheel nut indicators off.

2. Re-tighten all wheel nuts with a torque wrench.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Tightening torque: 680 +/- 30 Nm

3. Put wheel all the nut indicators on the wheel nuts so that the 2 arrows point to each other.
ð Wheel nuts have been re-tightened.
460 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.15.5 Retightening wheel nuts (axle load over 13 t)
Safety instructions
WARNING
bolts.
ial damage.
Re-tightening wheel nuts
Always tighten wheel nuts in a crosswise pattern.

Use a torque wrench.
Do not damage the wheel bolt threads.
1 Wheel nut indicator 2 Wheel nut
1. Pull all the wheel nut indicators off.

2. Re-tighten all wheel nuts with a torque wrench.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Tightening torque: 680 +/- 30 Nm

WARNING! Replace wheel bolt if it is possible to re-tighten it more than 2 times.
3. Put wheel all the nut indicators on the wheel nuts so that the 2 arrows point to each other.
ð Wheel nuts have been re-tightened.
ATF 220G-5 461

2019-10_EN
17.15.6 Checking and adapting tyre pressure
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to burst tyres.
A too low tyre pressure may lead to overheating and to bursting of tyres.
This may lead to accidents involving personal injuries and material dam-
age.
1. Check tyre pressure before starting to drive.
2. Check and change the tyre pressure only on "cold" tyres.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to bursting tyres.
Tyres may burst during while inflating. Pieces of the tyre may come loose
and be ejected. This could result in death or serious injury.
1. Place the tyres in a approved cage while inflating.
2. If there is no cage available, keep a safety distance of at least 3 m in
direction of the running surface while inflating.
When checking the tyre pressure, the temperature of the tyres must be the same as the ambi-
ent temperature. In case of reducing tyre pressure on warm tyres, it would be too low after cool-
ing. The load-bearing capacity of the tyres would no longer be ensured.
NOTICE! For every 10 °C temperature difference the tyre pressure changes approx. 0.5
bar.
Requirements
Checking and adapting tyre pressure

Tyre pressures table
Tyres Tyre pressure [bar]
385/95 R25 170E 10.0
385/95 R25 170F 9.0
445/95 R25 174F 9.0
525/80 R25 176F 7.0
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
525/80 R25 179E 7.0
462 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Checking and adapting tyre pressure
Overview
A Without tyre pressure monitoring system 1 Refill valve

B With tyre pressure monitoring system 2 Tyre valve
3 Wheel rim
4 Wheel module
Correcting the tyre pressure

1. Correct the tyre pressure at the refill valve, refer to Checking and adapting tyre pressure
[} page 462].
2. Connect the tyre inflator hose with pressure gauge to the tyre inflator connector of the
vehicle's compressed air system, refer to Test the compressed air system [} page 427], or
to a provided compressor.
3. Remove the valve cap.
4. Connect the tyre inflator hose to the refill valve.
5. Read tyre pressure on pressure gauge.
6. Adapt the tyre pressure:
- If tyre pressure is too low, increase air pressure.
- If tyre pressure is too high, reduce air pressure.
7. Remove tyre inflator hose.
8. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
ð The tyre pressure of one wheel has been checked and adjusted.
9. Check the tyre pressure of the other wheels as described above, and adjust if necessary.
ð The tyre pressure of all wheels has been checked and adapted.
17.15.7 Interchanging wheels in case of tire wear

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
To achieve an even wear pattern on all tyres on the mobile crane, it is advisable to interchange
the wheels. The wheels should be interchanged as soon as an uneven wear pattern is noticed.
ATF 220G-5 463

2019-10_EN
Overview
Change of wheels
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Change wheels as shown in the image.

ð The driving comfort and the tyres' mileage are influenced positively.
464 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Wheel modules for air pressure display *)

When changing the wheels, the wheel modules remain on their original wheel hub and are not
changed with the wheels.
17.15.8 Changing wheel module for air pressure display *)

The wheel module for measuring the tyre pressure does not require any maintenance.
Overview
1 Refill valve 3 Wheel rim

2 Tyre valve 4 Wheel module
Changing wheel module with empty battery

The service life of the battery in the wheel module is approx. 5 years. If the battery is empty, the
tyre pressure is no longer detected.
We recommend to replace all wheel modules if the battery of one wheel module is empty.
Fault in data transmission

In the proximity of transmitter masts or other interfering sources, and at
outside temperatures below -20 °C, the transmission of the tyre pressure
may be interrupted. At a greater distance to the interfering source and at a
higher outside temperature, the tyre pressure will be indicated correctly
again.
1. Have the wheel module with an empty battery replaced in an authorised specialist work-
shop.
17.15.9 Checking wheel tracking

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
17.15.10 Checking the toe-in

ATF 220G-5 465

2019-10_EN
17.16 Outrigger
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to defective outrigger parts.
Damaged outrigger parts may break off or fall off while driving. This may
lead to accidents involving personal injuries or material damage
1. Visual inspection before driving.
2. Replace damaged parts immediately.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
466 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.16.3 Overview
1 Outrigger
17.16.4 Checking and maintaining outrigger
Checking outrigger for damage

1. Check hoses and cables for damages, kinks or chafing.
2. Check outrigger floats, guide frames and holders for damages and tightness.
3. Check hydraulic cylinders for damages and oil leaks.
4. Check outrigger beams and outrigger casings for cracks and deformation.
5. Check all locking pins and pin holders for cracks and deformation.
6. Replace defective locking pins.
7. In case of damage on the outrigger structural elements, consult specialist workshop.
ð Visual inspection has been performed.
Cleaning and lubricating outrigger

1. Clean the sliding surfaces of the outrigger beams and holders of the outrigger floats in the
outrigger cylinders.
2. Spread multi-purpose grease on the sliding surfaces of the outrigger beams and holders of
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
the outrigger floats.

ð Outrigger has been cleaned and lubricated.
17.16.5 Check and adjust the wear plates of the outrigger

ATF 220G-5 467

2019-10_EN
17.16.6 Check and adjust the outrigger cylinder guide

17.16.7 Checking hoses and cables

17.17 Carrier cab
17.17.1 General information
Requirements
The following chapter lists working instructions for care and maintenance of important assem-
blies. These must be carried out in accordance with the time intervals in the maintenance
schedule.
This applies for the following assemblies:
▪ Doors and flaps of carrier cab [} page 469]
▪ Windshield washer system [} page 473]
▪ Air conditioning system [} page 476]
▪ Rear area monitoring *) [} page 477]
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
468 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.17.2 Doors and flaps of carrier cab
Maintaining doors
Maintaining door locks

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1. Open driver door.

2. Apply a product containing graphite on the door lock before frost season begins.
3. Check door for good movability.
ATF 220G-5 469

2019-10_EN
4. Repeat procedure for passenger door.
Treating door seals
1. Treat door seals and rubber parts with acid-free grease or talcum before frost season be-
gins.
2. Close both doors.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
470 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Maintaining front cover
Maintaining lock of front cover
1. Open front cover.

2. Apply a product containing graphite on the lock of the front cover before frost season be-
gins.
3. Check lock of front cover for locking function.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 471

2019-10_EN
Maintaining hinges of front cover
1. Apply a product containing graphite on the hinges of the front cover before frost season be-
gins.
2. Check front cover for good movability.
3. Close front cover.
17.17.3 Oil/lubricate joints, hinges and all moving parts

▪ Care for parts as per the maintenance plan.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
472 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.17.4 Windshield washer system
Replace the windshield wiper blades
Three windshield wiper blades are located on the carrier windshield.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 473

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Wiper arm 3 Windshield wiper blade

2 Plastic adapter
Replace the windshield wiper blades

1. Lift the wiper arm off the pane.
2. Press the plastic adapters together and pull out of the guide.
NOTICE! Pay attention to the installation direction for re-installation!
3. Pull windshield wiper blade out off the guide.
4. Introduce new windshield wiper blade into the guide led by the plastic adapter. The plastic
adapter must engage audibly.
5. If necessary, replace further windshield wiper blades.
ð The windshield wiper blade has been replaced.
Filling the windshield washer system
Safety instructions
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to windscreen washer concentrate.
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable and corrosive. This
may lead to accidents involving personal injuries or material damage.
1. No open flame, no naked light, no smoking when handling windscreen
washer concentrate.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

clear water. If necessary, seek medical attention.
474 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Filler neck, washing water tank
ATF 220G-5 475

2019-10_EN
Filling the windshield washer system

1. Opening the front cover and secure it against dropping down.
2. Open the cap of the filler neck.
3. Put screen wash into the washing water tank, up to the upper edge of the filler neck.
Observe the correct mixing ratio (follow the instructions of the screen wash manufacturer).
WARNING! Use antifreeze in winter. Adjust the mixing ration to suit the outside
temperature. (follow the instructions of the antifreeze manufacturer)
4. Close the cap of the filler neck.
5. Close and lock the front cover.
ð Windshield washer system has been filled.
17.17.5 Air conditioning system
Safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of injury due to coolant.
Coolant is toxic. This may lead to accidents involving personal injuries.
clear water. If necessary, seek medical attention.
2. Filling and repair activities on air conditioning systems may only be
carried out by an authorized specialist workshop.
Air conditioning system - winter operation
Even during the winter months, the air conditioning system must run
approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This prevents seals
and bearings from drying out.
Air conditioning system inspection

Have a regular inspection carried out at a specialist workshop.
17.17.6 Heating
Lubricate the shaft bearings, lever joints and all moving parts
Check the condition of the heating lines

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Check the electric cables and plug connections

476 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Check the filter for dirt

Changing the fuel filter of the auxiliary heater

17.17.7 Rear area monitoring *)
Cleaning rear view camera
The rear view camera is located at the rear of the vehicle, on the right in the direction of travel.
Cleaning rear view camera

The video camera is maintenance-free. Dry wiping should be avoided in order to protect the
glass from scratches. The video camera is resistant against cleaning with high-pressure or
steam cleaners.
1. Depending on the dirt, clean video camera sheet with soft damp cloth.
17.17.8 Changing battery of ignition key
Introduction
The battery is only changed in ignition keys with radio communication. Type CR2032 3.0 V lith-
ium coin batteries are used in the ignition key.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 477

2019-10_EN
Open battery cover
Overview
1 Battery cover
Procedure
1. Unfold ignition key.
2. Pull battery cover up for opening.
ð Battery cover is open.
Removing dead battery
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Procedure
1. Introduce thin object into the removal opening.
2. Push dead battery carefully upwards with the thin object and take it out.
478 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
3. Dispose of dead battery as prescribed.

ð Dead battery has been removed.
Inserting new battery and closing battery cover
Overview
1 New battery 2 Battery cover
Explanation
The battery is inserted with the + pole pointing up.
Procedure
1. Insert new battery at the front of the battery box.
2. Press new battery down until it engages in the battery box.
3. Close battery cover.
ð Battery of the ignition key has been changed.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 479

2019-10_EN
17.18 Trailer hitch *)
17.18.1 Maintaining trailer hitch
The trailer hitch is installed centrally on the rear of the vehicle.
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Trailer hitch
Maintaining trailer hitch

For information about the care and maintenance, refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
480 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.18.2 Inspecting the compressed air coupling heads

17.19 Oiling and lubricating
17.19.1 Oiling and lubricating
Description
Moving components must be maintained periodically in order to preserve their movability. The
following points must be observed regarding care of the carrier cab:
1. Oil joints, pins and hinges.
Measure out lubricating oil such that a sufficient lubricating effect is obtained. Lubricating oil
should not run out on the components.
2. All the exposed piston rods, e.g. outrigger cylinders, must be cleaned regularly and sprayed
with "Lube Protection Spray".
17.19.2 Lubricating joints, pins, hinges and all moving parts

Lubricate joints, pins, hinges and all moving parts.
17.19.3 Lubricating the steering knuckles
In case of the special equipment "Steering knuckles lubrication ex-

tension of centralized lubrication system", all steering knuckles are
lubricated by the centralized lubrication system.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 481

2019-10_EN
Overview
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
1 Lubricating point top steering knuckle (2 2 Lubricating point bottom steering knuckle
places per axle) (2 places per axle)
Lubricating the steering knuckles

1. Clean all lubricating nipples of the steering knuckle bearings.
482 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
2. Lubricate all lubricating nipples of the steering knuckle bearings periodically in accordance
ð All steering knuckle bearings are lubricated.

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 483

2019-10_EN
17.20.2 Overview of lubrication points
Standard centralized lubrication system
1 Centralized lubrication system 4 Lubricating point, steering arm, front

2 Top suspension cylinder lubrication point 5 Lubricating point, steering arm, rear
(10 lubrication points)
3 Bottom suspension cylinder lubrication
point (10 lubrication points)
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
484 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Steering knuckles lubrication extension of centralized lubrication system *)
1 Centralized lubrication system 3 Bottom steering knuckle lubrication point

(10 lubrication points)
2 Top steering knuckle lubrication point (10
lubrication points)
17.20.3 Checking fill level of reservoir

1. Checking the fill level of the reservoir
For refilling the reservoir, see Centralized lubrication system [} page 621].
ð Fill level has been checked.
17.20.4 Inspect the lines and screw couplings for leaks and damage
1. Inspect the lines and screw couplings for leaks and damage.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 485

2019-10_EN
17.21 Sliding coupling
17.21.1 Checking the sliding coupling for damage
Installation site and overview
1 Sliding coupling
1. Check the sliding coupling for damage. WFN5RUXV9L2067295
486 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.22 Amot-Control (engine stop) *)
17.22.1 Valve function check
1 Maintenance hatch 2 Air shut-off valve

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 487

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Reset lever, open position 2 Reset lever, closed position
Valve function check

1. Close and open the valve again by hand using the reset lever.
The reset lever must move easily.
ð The function of the valve has been checked.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
488 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
17.23 Suspension
17.23.1 Checking the bellows
Requirements
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 489

2019-10_EN
Overview
1 Suspension cylinder 2 Bellows
Checking the air bellows on the hydraulic suspension cylinders

1. Check that air bellows fit correctly.
2. Check air bellows for damages.
Have damaged air bellows replaced at a specialist workshop.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
490 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
18 Crane testing instructions
18.1 Periodic tests of cranes

Every TADANO crane is checked before the delivery in accordance with the DIN standards and
DGUV 52 compliant accident prevention regulations prevailing in the Federal Republic of Ger-
many.
Accident prevention regulations applicable in the Federal Republic prescribe periodic annual
tests, whereas the corresponding national regulations are applicable in other countries.
If national regulations do not exist in a particular country, we recommend conducting these peri-
odic tests in accordance with the DGUV 52 accident prevention regulations applicable in Ger-
many.
Periodic annual tests for cranes can be conducted by crane experts and/or specialists. This test
is primarily a visual inspection for assessing the condition of the entire crane and its compon-
ents.
In addition, according to DGUV 52 accident prevention regulations (§ 26), a test must be con-
ducted by an expert every 4 years. After the 13th year of operation, an annual test needs to be
conducted by an expert.
The defects identified must be documented in the crane inspection log; the operating company
is under obligation to rectify these defects. A subsequent test may be required.
During the periodic tests, the entire hydraulic and electrical control and safety devices must be
checked as well.
The expert or the specialist is solely responsible for determining the complete scope of periodic
tests.
A few important points to be considered during periodic tests are listed below.
However, we would like to emphasize that not all points in the scope of test are represented
here.
18.2 Checking the load-bearing steel structures
WARNING
Risk of accidents due to damage on the load-bearing parts of the mo-
bile crane.
Damaged parts may fail under load. It may result in an accident involving
personal injuries or even death.
1. Check the parts subjected to loads regularly. Ask a specialist company
to repair the damaged parts immediately.
All load-bearing steel structures, such as carrier frame, outrigger casings and outrigger beams,
telescopic boom, superstructure frame, shall be checked periodically depending on the operat-
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ing conditions, but at least once a year. Likewise, welding seams must be checked thoroughly
even if they are subjected to lower loads.
If the crane is subjected to an impermissible load when operating (e.g. a high impact load due to
a load falling on the rope or similar), the load-bearing parts of the mobile crane must be
checked.
ATF 220G-5 491

2019-10_EN
According to DIN 15018 T3, different stress tolerance coefficients are determined for different
high-strength fine-grain construction steels. The mobile cranes from TADANO have been de-
signed as per this standard for the load spectrum "S1 light" as well as a stress tolerance coeffi-
cient of 25,000 load cycles. A suitable service life of a mobile crane is determined based on this
and the operating conditions. The service life does not depend solely on the specified stress tol-
erance coefficient, but depends on the loads exerted on the mobile crane during the operation
period.
The following drawing shows the load-bearing steel structure and given the tester a few indica-
tions regarding the points to be checked. Points marked with arrows are highly stressed zones
and must be checked when testing and depending on the operating conditions.
We would however like to explicitly emphasize that the drawing does not claim to be complete.
If damage (e.g. cracks, deformations) is detected during these tests, please contact an expert.
Consult TADANO after investigating the fault.
The repair method should then be decided on in consultation between TADANO and the expert.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
492 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
19 Removal from operation
19.1 Maintenance activities in the event of temporarily

decommissioned mobile crane
Damage due to long standstill periods
The mobile crane should only be temporarily decommissioned in excep-
tional cases. Long standstill periods promote corrosion of sensitive com-
ponents, ageing and contamination of operating materials.
If the mobile crane is decommissioned for a period up to three months, the following measures
are required to prevent any problems when recommissioning it.
A cool, dry, and dust-free place is recommended for the duration of the decommissioning.
To prevent the fuel from silting up, we recommend to empty the fuel tank and fill it up with diesel
fuel without biodiesel proportion, and to allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes to flush
all fuel-carrying parts.
19.1.1 Preparing mobile crane for temporary decommissioning

1. Fill fuel tank up, refer to Filling up fuel or AdBlue [} page 371].
In case of cold weather, fill up winter diesel.
2. Empty half of the AdBlue® tank.
3. Support the mobile crane.
4. Drain water from fuel system, refer to Draining water from fuel system [} page 401].
5. Check the oil level of the engine, refer to Checking the oil level of the engine [} page 378].
6. Check coolant level, refer to Checking the coolant level [} page 387].
7. Fully charge the batteries, refer to Charging batteries [} page 325].
8. Disconnect batteries.
ð The mobile crane has been prepared for temporary decommissioning.
19.1.2 Monthly maintenance activities on temporarily decommissioned mobile

crane
1. Connect batteries.
2. Switch on Battery main switch switch, start engine.
3. Switch air conditioning system on, refer to Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system
[} page 166].
4. Switch heating on, refer to Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system [} page 164].
5. Switch auxiliary heater on, refer to Carrier auxiliary heater [} page 309].
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
6. Allow engine to run at 900 rpm max. for 10 minutes and, while doing so, watch oil pressure,
oil and coolant temperatures.
7. Switch off air conditioning system, heating, and auxiliary heater.
8. Stop engine, switch off Battery main switch switch.
ATF 220G-5 493

2019-10_EN
9. Disconnect batteries.
ð Maintenance has been performed on mobile crane.
19.1.3 Putting mobile crane into operation after temporary decommissioning

1. Connect batteries.
2. Check the air pressure in the tyres.
3. Fill AdBlue® tank up.
4. Switch on Battery main switch switch, start engine.
5. Switch air conditioning system on, refer to Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system
[} page 166].
6. Switch heating on, refer to Heater, ventilation, air conditioning system [} page 164].
7. Switch auxiliary heater on, refer to Carrier auxiliary heater [} page 309].
8. Allow engine to run at 900 rpm max. for 10 minutes and, while doing so, watch oil pressure,
oil and coolant temperatures.
9. Switch off air conditioning system, heating, and auxiliary heater.
10.Retract all outrigger beams.
11.Check service brake repeatedly on empty level road.
12.Stop engine, switch off Battery main switch switch.
ð Mobile crane is ready for operation.
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
494 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
20 Technical data
20 Technical data
20.1 Filling levels

Engine
Filling quantity 39 l
Oil specification See the engine manufacturer's operating manual
First filling SAE 10W-40
Gearbox
Filling quantity The oil quantity is noted on the model plate.
Oil specification Refer to ZF List of lubricants TE-ML 02 or the gearbox manu-
facturer's operating manual in the Annex
First filling ECOFLUID M75W-80
Transfer case
Quantity 5,5 l
Quantity with supply lines and oil cool- 9,5 l
ers
Oil specification MIL-L- 2105 B, API-GL 5
First filling SAE 90-GL5 HYP
Cooling system
Filling quantity 94 l
Coolant/antifreezing agent Refer to Mercedes-Benz fuel specifications at http://bevo.mer-
cedes-benz.com, specification 325.5, or operating manual of
the engine manufacturer.
First filling Glysantin G40
Fuel tank
Quantity 600 l
Fuel specification Diesel in accordance with EN 590 (10 ppm sulphur) or
ASTM D975 (15 ppm sulphur)
AdBlue tank
Quantity 40 l
Specification AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241 or DIN 70070
Windshield washer water tank

Quantity 8,7 l
WFN5RUXV9L2067295

Refrigerant oil filling level 0,035 l
Refrigerant oil specification ND-Oil 8
Coolant filling level 1,5 kg
ATF 220G-5 495

2019-10_EN
20 Technical data

Coolant specification R134a
Hydraulic oil tank

Quantity 870 l
Oil specification Mineral oil HVLP: DIN 51524-2
Mineral oil HV: ISO 6743-4
Biodegradable oils On request
First filling Fuchs Renolin XtremeTemp 46+
Key ring colour Hydraulic oil type at first filling

Black Standard oil
Green Bio-oil
Blue Low temperature oil
Oil recommenda- Temperature Designation

tion for hydraulic range
oil tank
Oil recommendation -25 °C to 25 °C Fuchs Renolin XtremTemp 32+
at ambient temper- -15 °C to 40 °C Fuchs Renolin XtremTemp 46+
ature
-40 °C to 25 °C Shell Tellus S4 VX 32
Filling volume, Drive Axle casing Each side of Total

axles the wheel
Axle 1 10 x 6 — — —
10 x 8 20 l 1.4 l 22.8 l
Axle 2 10 x 6, 10 x 8 21 l 1.4 l 23.8 l
Axle 3 10 x 6, 10 x 8 — — —
Axle 4 10 x 6, 10 x 8 21 l 1.4 l 23.8 l
Axle 5 10 x 6, 10 x 8 18.5 l 1.4 l 21.3 l
Axles oil type

Oil type Hypoid transmission oil
Oil specification MIL-L- 2105 B, …C, …D
API-GL 5
First filling SAE 90
Oil recommenda- Temperature Designation

tion for axles range
Oil recommendation Below -10 °C SAE 75 W-90 or SAE 75 W-85
-10 °C to 30 °C SAE 90 or multigrade oil
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Over 30 °C SAE 140 or multigrade oil
496 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
20 Technical data
20.2 Dimensions and weight
Vehicle dimensions
A 15.93 m (up to rear edge of counterweight/hoisting winch 2)

B 13.48 m (carrier)
C 3.00 m (tyres 385/95 R25 170F)
3.10 m (tyres 525/80 R25 176F)
D 3.94 m (tyres 385/95 R25 170F)
3.99 m (tyres 525/80 R25 176F)
Mass
Axle load Total Counter- Jib Hook blocks

weight weight
5 x 12.0 t 60.0 t — — —
The table is based on the following fittings of the mobile crane:

▪ Tyres 445/95 R 25.
▪ Steering mode 10 x 8.
▪ 80 t hook block is hooked into bumper crossmember (12 t axle load).
▪ Wheel chocks.
▪ Storage box at the rear of the carrier.
▪ Emergency operation on the superstructure.
▪ Additional oil cooler in the superstructure.
▪ Storage box on the superstructure.
▪ Transport holders on the boom.
▪ Full fuel tanks.
▪ Driver with 80 kg (176 lbs).
The specified axle loads are applicable only in the described equipment conditions. Changes of
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
equipment may, in some circumstances, lead to different axle loads.

In accordance with EU regulations, axle loads of over 12 t are not permitted when driving on
public roads in the countries of the European Union. Deviating from the aforementioned, valid
regulations of individual countries allow axle loads exceeding 12 t. In the case of axle loads ex-
ceeding 12 t, the maximum permissible speed is reduced dependent on the existing axle load,
refer to Tyres capacities as a function of the travel speed [} page 43].
ATF 220G-5 497

2019-10_EN
20 Technical data
Adaptations to national registration regulations and technical regulations may require a change
of the technical data and the standard scope of delivery.
Turning radius
On-road mode [m]

Inner edge of carrier 6.3
Outer edge of carrier 11.9
Telescopic boom 12.5
Turning circle 10.5
20.3 Engine
Engine
Manufacturer Daimler AG / MTU GmbH
Engine type OM471LA / 6R 1300
Number of cylinders 6
Displacement 12.800 cm³
Power / Nominal rotation speed 390 kW (530 PS) / 1700 min-1
Measurement standard for engine ECE R 120
power
Torque / Nominal rotation speed 2460 Nm / 1300 min-1
Aftertreatment of exhaust gases SCR system
Certification EU Stage IV
20.4 Gearbox
Main gear
Type ZF-AS-Tronic 12 AS 2531
Gear shift Automated transmission with Tip-Tronic
Brake Integrated intarder
Number of gears 12 forward, 2 reverse gears
Transfer case
Designation VG 3750
Type 2-gear transfer case with on-road and off-road gear
Differential Lockable inter-axle lock
Distinctive feature Neutral position for towing operation
20.5 Brakes
Brake
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
Principle Dual circuit brake in accordance with ECE R13

Medium Compressed air
Type Disk brakes
Brake circuit 1 Axles 3,4,5
Brake circuit 2 Axles 1,2
Parking brake (auxiliary brake) Spring loaded brake on axles 2,4,5
498 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
20 Technical data
Brake
Retarder Engine brake, Intarder, eddy-current brake *)
Important pressure values

Cut-out pressure of the pressure 11.7-12.7 bar
regulator
Cut-in pressure of the pressure regu- 9.9-11.1 bar
lator
Cut-in pressure Axle 3 to 5 7.0 +0.3 bar

20.6 Wheels and tyres

Tyres Tyre pressure [bar]
385/95 R25 170E 10.0
385/95 R25 170F 9.0
445/95 R25 174F 9.0
525/80 R25 176F 7.0
525/80 R25 179E 7.0
20.7 Outrigger
Hydraulic 4-point double telescopic outriggers with unlockable check valves on the outrigger cyl-
inders.
Possibilities of operation on both sides of the carrier, as well as from the superstructure cab.
Outrigger
Outrigger base, longitudinal 9,01 m
Outrigger base, transversal 8,3 m / 7,0 m / 5,6 m / 4,6 m
Stroke of the outrigger cylinders, front 445 mm
Stroke of the outrigger cylinders, read 560 mm
Size of the outrigger floats 600 mm x 600 mm
Weight of the outrigger floats Approx. 46 kg

Electrical system
Batteries 2 x 12 V, 170 Ah
Alternator Three-phase alternator, 100 A
On-board voltage Direct current 24 V
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
20.9 Lubricants
Maintenance point Lubricant
Grease reservoir of the central lubrica- Lithium soap lubricating grease, in accordance with DIN
tion system 51825-KP2K-20
ATF 220G-5 499

2019-10_EN
20 Technical data
Maintenance point Lubricant

Wheel bearings of the non-driven axles
Sliding surfaces of the outrigger Lubricating paste, containing MoS2, Cu or Al
Outrigger floats Makraflon HSII
Batteries Battery grease
Door locks Graphite powder
Exposed piston rods Lube Protection Spray
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
500 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
21 Annex
21 Annex
21.1 Gearbox
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 501

2019-10_EN
Operating Instructions
Special Vehicles
ZF-AS Tronic, ZF AS-Tronic mid
Rotary Switch + Shift Lever
Copyright © ZF Friedrichshafen AG
This document is protected by copyright. Complete or partial reproduction

or dissemination of this document is prohibited without the consent of
ZF Friedrichshafen AG. Infringements lead to civil and criminal prosecution.
This document is a translation of the German original.
Preface
Please read these operating instructions carefully before Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission from
driving the vehicle for the first time. the ZF-AS Tronic model range.
The more familiar you are with your ZF-AS Tronic transmission,
Note the special instructions provided in the vehicle the more economically you will be able to drive with it. These
manufacturer’s operating instructions. operating instructions provide you with the information required
so that you can make full use of the technical advantages of
For the operation and maintenance of the ZF-Intarder you the ZF-AS Tronic.
also need the ZF-Intarder’s operating instructions, order
number 6085 758 102. In order to ensure safe and reliable operation, please note the
specifications governing maintenance.
The ZF Customer Service specialists are available to assist you
in maintenance work or to help if any other problems arise. You
can obtain their addresses from ZF in Friedrichshafen.
Motoring pleasure with ZF transmission is brought to you by
ZF Friedrichshafen AG
Special Driveline Technology
D-88038 Friedrichshafen
Phone +49 (0) 7541 77-0
Subject to technical changes. Fax +49 (0) 7541 77-908000
First edition: 2008 Internet: www.zf.com
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 3

Safety Instructions
The following safety instructions are used in the present

operating instructions: THREATS FOR THE ENVIRONMENT!
Lubricants, consumables, and cleaning agents must
not be allowed to enter the soil, ground water, or
NOTE sewage system.
Reference is made to special procedures, methods, • Ask your localenvironmental protection agency for
information, etc. safety information on the relevant
products and adhere to their requirements.
• Collect used oil in a sufficiently largecontainer.
CAUTION • Dispose of used oil, dirty filters, and cleaning agents
This is used when deviating and unprofessional operation in accordance with environmental protection
can damage the product. regulations.
• When working with lubricants and cleaning agents
always refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
DANGER!
This is used when a lack of care can lead to personal
injury or material damage.
4
Table of Contents
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.7.1 Gear change in automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.7.2 Gear change in manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1 Description of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.8 Change in direction of travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.9 Engine brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2 Speed range selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.10 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3 ZF display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.11 Switching off engine / Stopping vehicle . . . . . . . . 25
1.4 Accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.12 Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5 Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.13 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.6 Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.14 Clutch protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.7 ZF auxiliary power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.15 Engine overspeed protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.15.1 Operating mode: Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.15.2 Operating mode: Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.1 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.16 Operation with clutch-dependent PTO . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2 Setting off, forward driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.16.1 Stationary / Mobile operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2.1 Starting gear correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.16.2 Stationary operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2.2 Hill start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.17 Roller test bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3 Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.18 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.4 Maneuvering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.19 System failures (error messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.5 Moving off downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.20 Starting up the vehicle at
2.6 Changing operating mode: Manual / Automatic . . 21 low temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.20.1 Parking the vehicle at low temperatures . . . . . . . . 41
2.7 Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4232 758 002 - 2012-02 5

Table of Contents
3 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic / ZF-Intarder . . . . . . 42 4 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic mid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3.1 Visual inspection of wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.1 Visual inspection of wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.2 Compressed-air system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.2 Compressed-air system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.3 Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4.3 Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.3.1 Type plate ZF-AS Tronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.4 Bleeding the transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.3.2 Type plate ZF-Intarder (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.5 Oil change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.4 Bleeding the transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.6 Oil grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5 Oil change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.7 Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.6 Oil grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.8 Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.7 Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.8.1 Oil fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.8 Oil change (ZF-AS Tronic without ZF-Intarder) . . . 46
4.9 Oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.8.1 Oil fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.9 Oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.10 Oil change ZF-AS Tronic with ZF-Intarder* . . . . . 48
3.10.1 Oil filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.10.2 Oil fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.11 Oil level check ZF-AS Tronic with ZF-Intarder* . . 53
3.12 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.13 Transmission maintenance for versions with
external heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 6

ZF-AS Tronic mid / ZF-AS Tronic
026809
Fig. 1 ZF-AS Tronic mid
027529
Fig. 2 ZF-AS Tronic without ZF-Intarder
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 7

Technical Data
Technical Data
ZF-ASTronic
Transmission type Overdrive 12 AS 2530 SO 12 AS 3040 SO 16 AS 1630 SO

12 AS 2531 SO 12 AS 3041 SO 16 AS 2631 SO
12 AS 2535 SO 12 AS 3045 SO 16 AS 2635 SO
12 AS 2536 SO 12 AS 3046 SO 16 AS 2636 SO
Input torque max. Nm 1) 2500 3000 2600
Ratios Forward gears 12.33 - 0.78 12.29 - 0.78 14.12 - 0.83
Reverse gears 11.41 - 8.88 11.38 - 8.88 13.07 - 10.81
Speedometer electronic Solo version z = 8 / Intarder version z = 8.14
Installation with integrated bell housing
Shift system 3 or 4 gear part and reverse gear are constant mesh; R/C and splitter group synchronized
Shifting operation Automatic mode The transmission system takes over the clutch actuation system and the gear selection process
Manual mode The driver is in charge of gear selection, the transmission system takes over the clutch
actuation system
Weight 4) approx. kg 250 262 262

with ZF-Intarder approx. kg 320 332 332
Oil quantity 3) for standard
installation 2) approx. dm3 12 13 13
with ZF-Intarder approx. dm3 21 23 23
Oil grade according to applicable ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
1) Reference value (depends on vehicle type and vehicle data as well as the 3) For transmissions with a ZF-Intarder refer to operating instructions
prevailing operating conditions) 6085 758 102
2) Transmission inclination 0 to 3° 4) without oil fill, PTO, and clutch
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 8
Technical Data
ZF-ASTronic mid
Transmission type Overdrive 12 AS 1210 SO, 12 AS 1215 SO 12 AS 1620 SO, 12 AS 1625 SO

Input torque max. Nm 1) 1200 1600
Ratios Forward gears 10.37 - 0.81
Reverse gears 10.56 - 8.58
Speedometer electronic z=8
Install a t i o n horizontal on the left with integrated bell housing
Shift system 3 gear part and reverse gear are constant mesh
R/C and splitter group synchronized
Shifting operation Automatic mode The transmission system takes over the clutch actuation system and the gear selection process.
Manual mode The driver is in charge of gear selection, the transmission system takes over the clutch
actuation system
Weight 3) approx. kg 193 211
Oil quantity for standard
installation 2) approx. dm3 7.8 9.3
with heat exchanger approx. dm3 7.5 9.0
Oil grade ZF Ecofluid M or according to applicable ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02
1) Reference value (depends on vehicle type and vehicle data as well as the prevailing operating conditions)
2) Transmission inclination 0 to 3°
3) Without oil fill, PTO, and clutch
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 9

Description
1 Description of the System
The automatic ZF-AS Tronic transmission is adapted to the A display on the dashboard shows the driver all the system
engine by means of a standard dry clutch. The clutch is information required (e.g., gear step, failure, etc.).
actuated by the ZF-AS Tronic transmission system, which
means that the clutch pedal can be dispensed with. The transmission actuator and clutch actuator are the most
important components for the complete automation of the
The ZF-AS Tronic consists of a basic transmission and an transmission.
integrated splitter and planetary group.
The transmission actuator consists of transmission electronics,
The basic transmission has a constant mesh design; the shift valves, shift cylinders, and sensors.
splitter and planetary groups are synchronized.
The clutch actuator is an electro-pneumatic actuator with travel
The transmission system changes gears automatically. sensors that takes over the entire clutch actuation.
The ZF-Intarder* is a non-wearing, hydrodynamic auxiliary

brake integrated into the transmission.
*Option
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 10

Description
1.1 Overview
1
4
S
Legend M
A
1a 1b
1 ZF speed range selector
1a Rotary switch 6
1b Shift lever
2* ZF display 10
3* Extension module
4 Transmission actuator with
integrated electronic
control unit
3
5 Clutch actuator
6 Transmission
5
7 Accelerator pedal
8 Brake pedal 9b
2
9a* ZF-Intarder
9b* Electronic ZF-Intarder
control unit (only for 8 7
vehicles equipped with ZF
FRIE
DRIC
HSH
AFEN
AG
ZF-Intarder) ®
10* Connection point for PTO*
* optional
9a
029730
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 11
Description
1.2 Speed range selector
The speed range selector consists of a rotary switch and a With the shift lever, you can change gears and activate or
shift lever. deactivate automatic mode.
Rotary switch Shift lever M/A Changeover manual mode to automatic mode (and
vice versa)
N
D R
DM RM + Shift up 2 gears (spring point end stop)
+ Shift up 1 gear (first spring point)
– Shifting down 1 gear (first spring point)
– Shifting down 2 gears (spring point end stop)
029892 023868
S Search function*
The shift lever springs back again after selection of positions

You can select the following areas with the rotary switch: « + », «+», « – », « – », «S»* and «M/A».
DM = Drive maneuvering (forward) You can perform manual upshifts and downshifts of more than
D = Drive (forward, automatic, or manual) 2 gear steps by repeatedly tipping the shift lever.
N = Neutral
R = Reverse
RM = Reverse maneuvering
* If position “S” (search function) is selected during manual operation
and the engine brake is not applied, the transmission selects the
If the rotary switch is in position «N», the shift lever is without ECO gear (low engine speed).
function. If position “S” (search function) is selected and the engine brake is
applied, the transmission selects the POWER gear (high engine
speed).
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 12

Description
1.3 ZF display Manual mode
Only descriptions of the displays for transmission functions are No bars or arrows are shown when manual mode is active.
provided in these operating instructions. Refer to vehicle Exception: Gear change recommended
manufacturer’s operating instructions for other displays.
The display shows the number of the gear selected, neutral, as Example:
well as the operating mode and failures. Manual mode,
4th gear is engaged.
Automatic mode 024374
The display shows 2 arrows and 4 bars when automatic mode Gear change recommended
is active. Upshifts: Arrow pointing up
Downshifts: Arrow pointing down
Example: Number of gears: one gear per bar
Automatic mode, 4th gear is
engaged. Example:
The 8th gear is engaged in
029885
the transmission; the system
recommends shifting down 2
gears.
029886
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 13

Description
1.4 Accelerator pedal 1.5 Automatic mode
The accelerator pedal position does not need to be changed Rotary switch is in position «D». The gearchange system
during the shift process. selects the optimal starting gear.
If you press the accelerator pedal, the clutch closes auto-
During gear shifts, the engine is influenced by the electronic matically and the vehicle starts to move.
transmission control unit. The gearchange system performs upshifts and downshifts
automatically during travel.
The clutch is actuated by the electronic transmission control
unit depending on accelerator pedal actuation. Gear changes which would result in overreving or stalling of
the engine are prevented by the gearchange system when
driving in the automatic mode.
The driver can manually intervene at any time with the

shift lever, for example in difficult driving situations, without
releasing the accelerator. In the process, the driving mode
changes from automatic to manual.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 14

Description
1.6 Manual mode 1.7 ZF auxiliary power units
Rotary switch is in position «D». If the switch lever is actuated, Depending on the vehicle version, the ZF-AS Tronic
the transmission system changes over to manual mode. The transmission can be fitted with the following auxiliaries:
driver can also use the shift lever to select a starting gear other
than the suggested one. • ZF-Intarder
• ZF PTO (clutch-dependent)
If you press the accelerator pedal, the clutch closes auto- • ZF emergency steering pump
matically and the vehicle starts to move.
The driver uses the shift lever to engage the requested gears. Operating instructions 6085 758 102 are available for servicing
and maintaining the ZF-Intarder.
High-speed driving is not economical and should be avoided
by the driver.
If the accelerator pedal is pressed when in too high a gear, the

engine may stall.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 15

Operation
2 Operation 2.1 Starting the engine
Depending on the manufacturer and vehicle type, you may • Engage parking brake D
N
R
have controls and operating processes other than those DM RM
described in this manual such as vehicle control from the crane • Turn rotary switch to «N»
cabin. (transmission in neutral)
029892
Therefore, also observe the operating instructions provided by • Switch on ignition
the vehicle manufacturer.
• Gearchange system self check
(display shows «CH»)
DANGER!
• Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running • Start the engine 024367
and a gear is engaged.

• Gears cannot be selected if the engine is not • Self check is completed.
functioning (e.g., no fuel); the transmission shifts to «N» appears on the display,
“Neutral”. Engine brake and steering assistance will transmission is in neutral
fail during travel. 024369
NOTE
Gears cannot be selected during engine standstill.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 16

Operation
2.2 Setting off, forward driving 2.2.1 Starting gear correction
• Start engine (see Ch. 2.1). The driver can correct the starting gear suggested by the
N
D R system.
DM RM
• Turn rotary switch from «N» to «D».
Correct the gear:
• Automatic mode is activated.
029893
• Push shift lever in the « – » or « + » direction.
• The display shows the engaged
starting gear. • The display shows the starting gear selected.
(The system selects the starting
gear itself;the clutch remains
separated.)
024376 Shift lever
• Depress the accelerator pedal and at the same time release
the parking brake.
DANGER!
The vehicle may roll away if the accelerator pedal is
not pressed.
029888
• Vehicle sets off (clutch closes automatically).
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 17

Operation
2.2.2 Hill start
Observe information provided by the vehicle manufacturer.
DANGER!
Engage gear, release parking brake only once
accelerator pedal has been depressed; otherwise, the
vehicle will roll backwards.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 18

Operation
2.3 Reversing
The transmission is equipped with two reverse gears: Engage reverse gear:
• «RL» = Low reverse gear
• Vehicle must be stationary.
• «RH» = High reverse gear
N
D
• Turn rotary switch to «R».

R
DM RM
• «RL» appears on the display

(clutch remains separated).
DANGER!
029894
If the vehicle is rolling, no gear change into reverse • Depress accelerator pedal and at
occurs! the same time release the brake
Immediately bring the vehicle to a standstill. (the clutch closes automatically).
• Vehicle moves backwards. 024444
• Depending on the vehicle

configuration, the transmission
can shift from «RL» to «RH» and
from «RH» to «RL», respectively. 024445
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 19

Operation
2.4 Maneuvering
Maneuvering mode is provided for extremely slow travel. The system recognizes the maneuvering mode from the rotary
switch position. The 1st forward gear and the 1st reverse gear
In the maneuvering mode, the vehicle (accelerator pedal) is are made available for maneuvering.
more sensitive and clutch actuation differs compared with the
ordinary mode. The full accelerator pedal travel can be used for maneuvering
mode. To quit this mode, the rotary switch needs to be turned
Forward and reverse maneuvering in accordance with the to position «D», «N» or «R».
rotary switch position:
• To maneuver forwards, select « DM ».

DM
D
N
R
RM
Time of maneuvering unlimited
• To maneuver backwards, select « RM ».
If the clutch is overloaded, «CL» is
DM
D
N
R
RM
displayed. Clutch wear might appear.
CAUTION
If the driver does not respond to the
«CL» display, the clutch might be
damaged due to overload.
029898
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 20

Operation
2.5 Moving off downhill 2.6 Changing operating mode: Manual / Automatic
Requirement: Engine is running Possible at any time, also during travel.
If the parking brake is released when a gear is selected and the M/A Changing operating mode from manual to
vehicle rolls off, the clutch automatically closes without the automatic
driver having to press the accelerator pedal.
• Press shift lever to the left and select «M/A».
Changing operating mode from automatic to

DANGER!
manual
When the vehicle rolls off without a gear engaged –
rotary switch is on «N» – the engine brake has no • Press shift lever to the left and select «M/A» or
effect! press shift lever in direction « +/+ » or « –/– ».
Do not let the vehicle roll against the direction of
travel of the engaged gear.
If the vehicle rolls forwards – transmission in neutral – once the

brake has been released and the driver changes from «N» to
«D», the system selects a gear appropriate for the driving M/A
speed. The driveline is thus closed.
029889
N
D R
DM RM
Depending on the vehicle, the transmission may return
independently to automatic mode after a certain time.
029893 024376
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 21

Operation
2.7 Gear change
2.7.1 Gear change in automatic mode 2.7.2 Gear change in manual mode
All upshifts and downshifts are carried out automatically. • Press the control lever (tip function) in « +/+ » or « -/– »
direction.
The gear changes depend on: ‒ « +/– » Change by one gear step
‒ Road resistance ‒ « +/– » Change by two gear steps
‒ Vehicle weight
‒ Position of accelerator pedal
‒ Speed
‒ Engine speed
029890
029887
The display shows the number of the gear engaged. The gearchange system exits automatic mode when a manual
gear change is performed.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 22

Operation
NOTES 2.8 Change in direction of travel

• You can shift from any gear to neutral at any time using the
rotary switch. This gear change takes priority. Requirement: Vehicle at a standstill
• The accelerator pedal position does not need to be
changed during the shift process as the engine is controlled Reverse travel «R» to forwards travel «D» and vice versa.
electronically.
• A shift command is not performed if the gear change would • Turn rotary switch from «R» or «RM» to «D» or «DM».
result in the max. engine speed being exceeded.
DANGER!
N N
D R D R
Shifting to “Neutral” is also possible during travel. If a DM RM DM RM
shift to “Neutral” is made, the driveline is interrupted.

The engine brake then no longer has any effect.
029895
DANGER!
Changes in direction of travel by moving the rotary
switch from «R» or «RM» to «D» or «DM» and vice
versa may only take place when the vehicle is
stationary, otherwise the transmission shifts to
neutral.
The display is definitive for the direction of travel
selected in the transmission.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 23

Operation
2.9 Engine brake 2.10 Stopping
• With the accelerator pedal untouched, slow down the

DANGER!
vehicle using the service brake until it reaches a standstill.
The engine brake function is interrupted during the
gear change. The vehicle may accelerate when • The clutch opens automatically before the vehicle reaches
traveling downhill. a standstill so that “stalling” the engine is avoided.
• For extended stops, we recommend selecting the
transmission’s neutral position.
Manual mode
The system deactivates the engine brake during gear • Always engage the service or parking brake when the
changes. Once the gear change is complete, the engine brake vehicle is stationary.
is automatically reactivated.
Automatic mode DANGER!

By activating the engine brake, the system shifts into a lower - When the vehicle is stationary with the engine
gear until the maximum braking torque is reached. running and a gear selected, you simply need to
press the accelerator pedal in order to move the
vehicle!
- Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running,
the transmission must be shifted into neutral and
the parking brake must be engaged.
- Activating the parking brake during travel on a
smooth surface may bring the engine to a standstill.
Steering assistance is then NOT available anymore!
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 24

Operation
2.11 Switching off engine / Stopping vehicle 2.13 Towing
NOTE The manufacturer’s towing instructions must also be observed!

If the transmission is not shifted to neutral before the engine is
switched off, this is done automatically when the ignition is The vehicle may be towed with flange-mounted propshafts or
switched off. floating axles. The following conditions must be met for this:
• It must be ensured that the high range change group is

DANGER!
engaged. The following boundary conditions must be met
Parking the vehicle with a gear engaged is not
for this.
possible since the transmission automatically shifts to
1. Secure power and air supply
neutral. The vehicle might roll away if no brake is
2. Switch on ignition (wait for check phase)
engaged. Therefore, apply the parking brake.
3. No error message results. This ensures that the high
range group is engaged.
• Bring the vehicle to a complete standstill
• No gear is engaged in the main transmission.
• Engage parking brake. D
N
R
DM RM
• Max. towing distance 100 km
• Set rotary switch to «N» (neutral)
• The maximum permissible towing speed depends on the
• Switch off engine via ignition key rear-axle ratio and the tire size and can be read off from the
• Place chocks under wheels (e.g., on 029892 diagram in Fig. 2.1. In addition, the maximum allowed
slopes) towing speeds determined by local legislation must also be
observed.
2.12 Tow starting
Tow starting the engine is not possible.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 25

Operation
NOTES
Towing with flange-mounted propshaft or installed axle shafts [i Axle]
10.0
is prohibited under the following conditions:
1. Only one of the previously listed conditions in not fulfilled. 9.0
Rdyn 0.7m
2. There is an error message (140) or it cannot be ensured that 8.0
the high range change group and the main transmission are Rdyn 0.6m e.g. F24
7.0
set to “Neutral” (e.g., undefined breakdown, failure of Rdyn 0.5m e.g. 275/80 R22
power and/or air supply). 6.0
3. Suspicion of transmission damage. 5.0
4.0
CAUTION Rdyn 0.4m e.g. 245/70 R19.5
3.0
Towing while a low range change group is engaged or with
an engaged gear in the main transmission leads to significant 2.0
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
transmission or engine damage within a very short period of
v[km/h]
time. Example: iaxle = 6, Rdyn = 0.5 m
Towing speed from diagram:
Vmax. = 25 km/h
029023
Fig. 2.1 Towing speed
The operator is responsible for ensuring that the required

boundary conditions are met for towing with flange-mounted
propshafts or floating axles.
If the vehicle is towed with disconnected floating axles,

environmental damage due to possible oil loss must be
avoided.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 26

Operation
2.14 Clutch protection
If there is the risk of clutch overload due to several starting • To preserve the mechanical parts of the clutch release
procedures in quick succession or excessively long mechanism, you should shift the transmission to neutral
maneuvering in too high a starting gear, the display message during longer stops (more than approx. 1 to 2 min., e.g.,
«CL» appears. in congestion, at a traffic light, etc.). This closes the clutch
and takes the strain off the clutch release mechanism.
NOTE
Select an operating mode in which there is no clutch overload, Despite the clutch being automated, the driver still has
for example: considerable influence on the clutch’s service life.
• Accelerate the vehicle (to close the clutch) To keep clutch wear levels as low as possible, we recommend
• Stop always selecting the lowest gear possible when starting off.
• Set off or maneuver in a lower gear
DANGER!
If the driver ignores the warning, the clutch will close
when the accelerator pedal is pressed. Further clutch
overload is thus avoided.
This may cause engine stalling and possibly a rolling
backwards of the vehicle on a gradient. The clutch
opens again when you take your foot off the
accelerator.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 27

Operation
2.15 Engine overspeed protection 2.15.2 Operating mode: Automatic
To protect the entire driveline from excessive speeds, the Observe information provided by the vehicle manufacturer.
ZF-AS Tronic only allows gear changes which are within the
speed range defined by the vehicle manufacturer.
DANGER!
The vehicle may accelerate when driving downhill.
2.15.1 Operating mode: Manual In order to protect the engine from damage in the
overspeed range (red range), the system performs an
• Ensure that the engine does not exceed the permissible upshift.
speed range.
• If the vehicle speeds up when traveling downhill, there is
no automatic shift into a higher gear.
CAUTION
The engine may be damaged if the vehicle speeds up when
traveling downhill and the engine enters the overspeed
range.
4232 758 002 - 2012-02 28

Operation
2.16 Operation with clutch-dependent PTO
Once a PTO has been activated, a « P » also appears on the • The following, for instance, appears on the display:
display.
Example: « PN » means that the PTO is activated and the
transmission is in neutral.
For additional displays and explanations, see Ch. 2.18.
024406
i.e., PTO 1 is activated, starting gear 3 is engaged.

2.16.1 Stationary / Mobile operation
• With a stationary/mobile PTO, only the following starting

2.16.2 Stationary operation
gears and maneuvering mode can be selected:
‒ ZF-AS Tronic Direct drive: Starting gears 1, 3 With stationary operation of the PTO, no gear can be selected.
Overdrive: Starting gears 2, 4 The transmission remains in neutral.
‒ ZF-AS Tronic mid All starting gears
• The following, for instance, appears on the display:
• The gear changes are only carried out when the vehicle is
stationary. A gear change during travel is impossible.
• Engage PTO and select starting gear.
024370_1
i.e., PTO 2 is activated, the transmission is in neutral.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 29

Operation
2.17 Roller test bench
DANGER!
The vehicle may leave the rollers even if the
accelerator pedal is not depressed.
N
D R
DM RM
Once you have driven onto a roller test bench

(brake test bench), shift the transmission into
“Neutral”.
029892
• When the rollers are running, the system recognizes the

“driving vehicle” function. If you select a gear, the clutch
closes.
• When the rollers are running, reverse gear cannot be
selected.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 30

Operation
2.18 Display messages
The display provides information on the transmission status.
Operating displays:
Display Description
• System self-check
- Message is displayed when the ignition is switched on.
024367
• Maneuvering, forwards
(Drive maneuvering)
024368
• Transmission in Neutral
- No gear is engaged in the transmission.
024369
• Power take-off (PTO*)

- Arrow pointing upwards means that PTO 1 is activated.
- «PN» means the PTO (P) is activated and the transmission is in neutral (N).
024370
*PTO = Power Take-Off
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 31

Operation
Display Description
• Power take-off (PTO*) and forward maneuvering mode are activated

- Arrow pointing upwards means PTO 1 is activated.
029941
• Power take-off (PTO*) and reverse maneuvering mode are activated

- Arrow pointing upwards means PTO 1 is activated.
029942
• PTO (two PTOs* are activated)

- Arrow pointing upwards and downwards means that PTO 1 and 2 are activated.
- «P1» means that the PTO is activated and the 1st gear in the transmission is engaged.
024371
• Reverse gear “High”

- High reverse gear is engaged.
024445
• Reverse gear “Low”

- Low reverse gear is engaged.
024444
*PTO = Power Take-Off
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 32

Operation
Display Description
• Reverse maneuvering
024373
• Manual driving mode

- «4» means that the 4th gear is engaged.
024374
• Shift recommendation in manual mode

- 2 bars and an arrow pointing downwards mean that it is possible to shift down by up to 2 gears.
- «5» means that the 5th gear is engaged.
024375
• Automatic mode
- Is indicated in the display by 4 bars with 2 arrows.
- «3» means that the 3rd gear is engaged.
024376
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 33

Operation
Warning notices:
Display Description
• «AL» = Air pressure insufficient (airless)

- Alternates with normal display.
- The compressed-air system of the transmission system does not have sufficient pressure.
024377
NOTE
Only set off when sufficient air pressure has been reached. If the clutch does not open when stopping as
a result of insufficient air pressure, the engine is “stalled”.
DANGER!
• If you change gears at too low an air pressure, the transmission may stay in neutral,so the
direct drive and engine braking effect are lost.
• The clutch cannot open if the air pressure is too low!
• «CC» = Clutch Check

- Clutch position cannot be taught in.
024378
• «CL» = Clutch Load

- Clutch overload, alternates with normal display.
- Select lower gear or stop.
024379
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 34

Operation
Display Description
• «CW» = Clutch Wear

- Clutch has reached wear limit.
- Visit specialist workshop soon to have clutch replaced.
024380
• «EE» = Electronic Error

- Is displayed when communication of the display with transmission electronics malfunctions.
- A system failure is involved. Continuation of travel is not possible!
024381
• «EX» = External signal active

- Gear engagement is prevented by an external signal.
- Starting is prevented by an external signal.
027960
• «FP » = Accelerator pedal

- Take foot off accelerator pedal.
- If the display message does not disappear, there is a system failure. Continuation of travel is not
024383
possible!
• «FS» = Speed range selector position

- Speed range selector position not plausible
- Remedy: Actuate speed range selector again
028668
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 35

Operation
Display Description
• «HT» = High Temperature

- Allow transmission system to cool down.
024384
• «NS» = Neutral Shift

- Select neutral «N» with the speed range selector or rotary switch.
NOTE:
024385 Depending on the vehicle type, the transmission may automatically shift to neutral after a specific period
to protect the mechanical components of the clutch release.
• «TC» = Transmission Check

- Transmission positions cannot be taught in.
024386
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 36

Operation
System failures:
Display Description
• «Wrench» = System failure

- Is displayed when only limited vehicle operation is possible.
- Visit specialist workshop as soon as possible.
024387
NOTE
With certain system failures, the automatic mode is deactivated and the transmission system remains in
manual mode.
• «STOP» + «Wrench» = Serious system failure

S
T - Stop the vehicle. Continuation of travel is not permitted. Workshop visit required.
O
P
024388 DANGER!
If possible, do not stop the vehicle in danger zones.
See also Chapter 2.19 (System failures)
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 37

Operation
2.19 System failures (error messages) Shift lever
• If a « wrench symbol » appears on the display, there is a

system failure. Vehicle operation might potentially only be
possible with restrictions.
If « STOP » plus a wrench symbol appear in the display, a
serious system failure is involved. Stop the vehicle.
Continuation of travel is not permitted.
• It is possible to delete the error message and the resulting 029891
error response when the vehicle is stationary by means of

« Ignition OFF »; wait until display message disappears. If Depending on the version, a two or three digit error number
the display message does not disappear after « Ignition will appear on the display. This number corresponds to the
OFF », switch system off by means of battery master currently active error.
switch. Turn ignition on again. If the error message is still
displayed, a service center stop is required. If 4 bars are displayed in addition to the number shown, this
When contacting the service center, please provide means: error no. + 100 (only in the case of two-digit display)
information on the error number(s).
Retrieving active error numbers:

• Switch on ignition (do not start engine)
• Turn rotary switch to « N »
• Hold shift lever in the « + » position 024404 024405
e.g.: error no. 74 error no. 174
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 38

Operation
If 4 bars and 2 arrows are displayed in addition to the number Calling up inactive error numbers from the error memory:
shown, this means: error no. + 200 (only in the case of two-
digit display message) • Switch on ignition (do not start engine)
• Turn rotary switch to «N» and press the foot brake at the
same time
024391
• Hold shift lever in the « + » position
e.g.: error no. 227 All saved errors are displayed one after another on the display.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 39

Operation
2.20 Starting up the vehicle at low temperatures
Outside temperature Down to –20 °C –20 °C to –30 °C –30 °C to –40 °C

Oil grade according to ZF List of according to ZF List of according to ZF List of
Lubricants TE-ML 02 Lubricants TE-ML 02 Lubricants TE-ML 02
Engine start permitted permitted Transmission must be prehea-
ted before the engine is started
To be noted – Warm-up phase of at least 10 Preheating e.g. with hot air,
for start minutes, with increased idling which, however, must not
speed of approx. 1500 rpm exceed 130 °C on the trans-
Transmission in neutral mission.
position CAUTION
Do not heat on transmission
and clutch actuator.
Limitations None At transmission temperatures At transmission temperatures
above –20 °C the transmission above –20 °C the transmission
is operable and all functions is operable and all functions
are provided. Longer shifting are provided. Longer shifting
times should be expected. times should be expected.
NOTE
Air leakage on the transmission system will significantly increase at temperatures below –20 °C. It is not sure that the clutch can
be opened for the engine to start in this temperature range.
In such a case, the engine-based starter must be able to overcome the drag torque of the transmission in addition to that of the
engine.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 40

Operation
2.20.1 Parking vehicle at low temperatures
The vehicle may be parked or the transmission stored for long

periods down to an outside temperature of – 40 °C.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 41

Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic / ZF-Intarder
3 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic / ZF-Intarder 3.1 Visual inspection of wiring
• Please also pay attention to the details provided by the • Check wiring for damage in the course of a vehicle
vehicle manufacturer. inspection.
• Regular maintenance increases the transmission’s • Check that connectors are seated correctly; connectors
operational reliability. must be fitted with strain relief.
• Visual inspection for oil leaks in the course of a vehicle

inspection.
3.2 Compressed-air system maintenance
• All transmission maintenance work may only be carried
out when the vehicle is standing on level ground and the • The vehicle manufacturer’s maintenance instructions must
engine is switched off. be observed.
• With all drain, fill, or screw plugs make sure that the • The compressed-air tank should be drained of water
sealing ring has been renewed prior to assembly. weekly, in winter every day.
• Do not point pressurized water jet directly at the breather NOTE

valve. (Ingress of water in transmission: risk of corrosion). When draining the compressed-air tank, the compressed-air
cleaner and water separator should also be drained if this is not
• For transmissions with ZF-Intarder, the ZF-Intarder done automatically.
operating instructions 6085 758 102 are also required.
• On vehicles equipped with an air drier, always comply with
the specified interval for replacement of the cartridge.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 42

ZF-AS Tronic / ZF-Intarder Maintenance
3.3 Type plates
3.3.1 ZF-AS Tronic type plate 3.3.2 ZF-Intarder type plate (option)
The type plate contains the most important data. The type plate contains the most important Intarder data.
The type plate is located on the left of the transmission when The type plate is located on the side of the Intarder housing.
viewed from the output.
The following information must always be given when making
The following information must always be given when making inquiries, placing orders, or carrying out repairs:
inquiries, placing orders, or carrying out repairs: 1 Intarder parts list number
1 Transmission type (model) 2 Intarder serial number
2 Transmission parts list number
3 Transmission serial no.
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
MADE IN GERMANY MADE IN GERMANY
ZF-AS Tronic 12 AS 2530 SO 1 INTARDER AS Tronic

MODEL PARTS LIST NO. MODEL SERIAL NO.
PARTS LIST NO. SERIAL NO.
2 4231 030 011 00200100 3 1 6085 020 028 XXX XXX 2
CUSTOMER CUSTOMER
x SPEC. NO.
SPEC. NO SPEEDO
TOTAL SPEEDO TOTAL
x x RATIO
RATIO
RATIO RATIO xn
xn P.T.O. N n=
P.T.O. N x n= x ENGINE
ENGINE OIL CAPACIT OIL GRADE SEE
OIL CAPACIT OIL GRADE SEE 02 IN LITERS LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
IN LITERS
12 LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
029367
023906
Example: Transmission type plate Example: Type plate ZF-Intarder
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 43

Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic / ZF-Intarder
3.4 Bleeding the transmission 3.5 Oil change intervals
The transmission oil heats up during travel. This results in the

To ensure the transmission’s required level of operational safety
formation of excess pressure which is continuously discharged
and reliability, the oil-change intervals must be observed as
via a bleeder valve (hose breather)
specified in the ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02!
Ensure that the breather valve and hose breather function
For the latest List of Lubricants, visit: http://www.zf.com
properly at all times.
As part of the vehicle inspections, check the following points
with regard to hose breathers:
• The hose must not exhibit any signs of damage, kinks, or 3.6 Oil grade
chafing.
For approved lubricants, refer to ZF List of Lubricants
• The hose must always be at an incline without creating a TE-ML 02.
siphon. “We recommend that you use ZF-Ecofluid M.”
• Do not exceed the max. permitted hose temperature
(e.g., near the exhaust pipes or exhaust turbocharger). The ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 can be obtained from all
ZF Service Centers or from the Internet: http://www.zf.com.
• The end of the hose must be in a dry compartment and
should be approx. 150 mm lower.
3.7 Oil quantity
The oil quantity is noted on the type plate.

Correctly filling the oil in the transmission is crucial for ensuring
a precise oil quantity (see Chapter 3.8.1).
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 44

ZF-AS Tronic Maintenance
4 3 2 1
Example: ZF-AS Tronic 12 AS 2530 SO
1 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm 4 Type plate

2 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm 5 Connection for hose breather or breather valve
3 Tighten oil filler plug to 60 Nm
029921
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 45

Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic
3.8 Oil change (ZF-AS Tronic without ZF-Intarder)
Oil changes must always be carried out with the vehicle

standing on level ground and with the engine switched off.
Always change the oil after a long journey while the

transmission oil is still at operating temperature and of low
viscosity.
DANGER!
Touching hot parts and transmission oil may cause
burns. 3 2 1
1 Oil drain plug
2 Oil drain plug
• Remove oil drain and oil filler plugs (1, 2, and 3) from 3 Oil filler plug, oil filling point
transmission and collect transmission oil in a suitable
029921_1
container and dispose of it in accordance with
environmental regulations.
3.8.1 Oil fill
• Clean solenoid at oil drain plug (2).
• Fill in oil through oil filling point (3).
• Replace sealing ring on oil drain and oil filler plugs.
• The oil level is correct when the oil reaches the lower edge
• Screw in oil drain plugs (1 and 2) and tighten to 60 Nm.
of the oil filling point or when oil escapes at the oil filling
point.
• Tighten oil filler plug (3) to 60 Nm.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 46

3.9 Oil level check
DANGER!
Insufficient oil in the transmission will result in
transmission damage. Risk of accident!
• Check oil level when vehicle is on level ground.

• Do not check the oil level right after traveling (incorrect
measurement). Only check once the transmission oil has
cooled down (<40 °C).
• Remove oil filler plug (3).
• If the oil level is below the oil filling point, you must top up
the oil (see Chapter 3.8.1).
• If the oil level is OK, screw in the oil filler plug (3) with a
new sealing ring.
Tightening torque: 60 Nm
NOTE
Whenever checking the oil level, also inspect the transmission
for possible leaks.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 47

Maintenance ZF-Intarder
3.10 Oil change ZF-AS Tronic with ZF-Intarder* • Remove screw plugs (1 and 2) on the transmission and the
Intarder and collect the transmission oil in a suitable
CAUTION container. Dispose of the transmission oil in accordance
The ZF-Intarder must NOT be actuated shortly before parking with environmental regulations.
the vehicle to change the oil!
• Clean the solenoid on the screw plugs and replace the sea-
This ensures that the correct oil level is reached in the
ling rings.
transmission.
• Screw in screw plugs (1 and 2) and tighten to 60 Nm.
NOTES
CAUTION
• When changing the oil, collect it in a suitable container and
Observe the specified tightening torque for screw plugs;
dispose of it according to local environmental protection
otherwise transmission damage may occur!
regulations.
• Always change the oil after a longer journey while the • Replace oil filter.
viscosity.
• Only change the oil when vehicle is on level ground.
DANGER!
burns.
• Switch off engine.
*Option
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 48

ZF-Intarder Maintenance
5
9 11
1 10
4 3 2
1 Oil drain location, Intarder 9 Oil filling point after repair

2 Oil drain location, transmission 10 Tighten screw to 23 Nm
3 Oil filling or oil draining point 11 Filter cover
4 Type Plate
5 Transmission bleeding Tighten screw plugs (1, 2, 3, and 9) to 60 Nm.
019368
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 49

3.10.1 Oil filter change
NOTE
Use a new oil filter for each oil change.
11
DANGER!
With hot transmission oil: Risk of burns!
10
• Remove bolt (10) from filter cover (11). 000529
• Remove filter cover (11) with mounted filter. Remove oil filter from filter
cover.
CAUTION
There is residual oil left in the oiI filter housing!
• Check the O-ring (8) on the filter cover (11) for damage, replace and grease,
if necessary.
000552
• Safely secure solenoid (12) to the new filter.
• Grease O-ring (7).
• Fit filter cover (11) onto new filter(6). Insert the complete unit in the filter
housing until it hits the limit stop.
• Tighten screw (10) to 23 Nm.
11 8 7 6 12
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 50

3.10.2 Oil fill 9
CAUTION
With transmissions with a ZF-Intarder, there is a difference
between an oil fill in the case of an oil change and an oil fill
after a transmission repair.
Oil fill in the case of an oil change
NOTE
The oil fill must always be carried out with the vehicle standing
on level ground and with the engine switched off. Oil grade 3
according to TE-ML 02.
019368
• Remove screw plug (3).
• Fill oil into the transmission until it overflows. End of test run: Vehicle stationary.
Do NOT engage Intarder!
• Screw in screw plug (3) with new sealing ring and tighten
to 60 Nm.
Take a test drive of 2 to 5 km
CAUTION
During test drive, press the footbrake to disengage the Intarder.
Check oil level again and if necessary, top up with oil until it
Do NOT engage the Intarder during the test drive.
overflows.
to 60 Nm.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 51

Oil fill after a transmission repair

9
NOTE
The oil fill must always be carried out with the vehicle standing
on level ground and with the engine switched off. Oil grade
according to TE-ML 02.
• Remove screw plugs (3 and 9).

• Fill with oil at pos. 9 until oil flows over at pos. 3.
• Screw in screw plugs (3 and 9) with a new sealing ring and
tighten to 60 Nm.
3
Take a test drive of 2 to 5 km
During the test drive, press the footbrake to disengage the
019368
Intarder.
Test drive: Activate the Intarder (step 6) QUICKLY ONCE at the
beginning.
CAUTION
Check oil level again and if necessary, top up with oil until it
End of test run: Vehicle stationary. Do NOT actuate the
overflows.
Intarder!
• Tighten screw plug (3) to 60 Nm.

4232 758 102 - 2012-02 52

3.11 Oil level check ZF-AS Tronic with ZF-Intarder* • Pay particular attention to possible leakages on:
- The transmission,
- The Intarder,
DANGER!
- The oil/water heat exchanger,
- Corresponding coolant pipes.
transmission damage.
Risk of accident!
CHECK
• Stop and park the vehicle without actuating the Intarder.
CAUTION
• When checking the oil, remove the screw plug at the filling
For an oil check, the Intarder must no longer be activated
point (3).
immediately prior to parking the vehicle.
This ensures that the correct oil quantity is reached in the • If the oil level has dropped below the edge of the oil filling
transmission. point, the oil must be topped up until it overflows at the
filling point.
NOTES
• In order to obtain a correct measurement result, the oil level
to 60 Nm.
check must occur with
- Vehicle parked on horizontal ground
- Engine turned off
- Transmission oil cooled down (<40 °C).
Visual check
• Check the oil level within the framework of the vehicle
inspection. If the accumulator charge valve is seriously leaking, then
replace the entire accumulator.
*Option
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 53

3.12 Engine coolant Change interval of the engine coolant:

• Max. 2 years
CAUTION with aluminium heat exchanger (fill premixed)
After refilling the engine coolant, please pay strict attention • Max. 4 years
to the instructions given by the vehicle manufacturer! with stainless steel heat exchanger (fill premixed)
Otherwise, damage may occur to the oil/water heat • Deviating information (shorter change intervals) given by
exchanger! the vehicle or engine manufacturer must be observed.
• Engine coolant NOTE

(mixture of fresh water and antifreeze/anti-corrosion fluid) The entire cooling system must always be rinsed with water
- Recommended amount of antifreeze/anti-corrosion fluid: prior to new fills.
40 ‒ 50 vol. %, to be tested with coolant tester. The coolant must also be replaced immediately if sludge forms
or if the coolant’s concentration falls suddenly.
• Antifreeze/anti-corrosion fluid
Base liquid: Ethylene glycol with corrosion protection
inhibitors
• Fresh water
pH-value 6.5 ‒ 8.0; overall hardness <20 °dH
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 54

3.13 Transmission maintenance for versions with • Check:

external heat exchanger - Let engine run at idle speed for approx. 3 minutes.
– Shift transmission to neutral position.
NOTE
The maintenance work is to be done according to standard – Switch off the engine.
transmission design.
– Perform an oil level check; for ZF-AS Tronic see
Chapter 3.9.
Additionally, the following points are to be noted:
• Draining the oil: Diagram: Transmission with heat exchanger

– Unscrew oil drain plug on heat exchanger (if present)
• Oil fill:
– After the oil fill (see Chapter 3.8.1), screw in the oil filler
plug.
– Shift transmission to the neutral position.
– Let the engine run for approx. 2 ‒ 3 minutes at around
1,200 rpm. This is necessary so that the heat exchanger
and the connecting lines can completely fill up with oil.
– Switch off the engine.
000508
– Refill with oil again until it overflows.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 55

Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic mid
4 Maintenance ZF-AS Tronic mid 4.1 Visual inspection of wiring
• Please also note the details provided by the vehicle • Check wiring for damage in the course of a vehicle
manufacturer. inspection.
• Regular maintenance increases the transmission’s • Check that connectors are seated correctly; connectors must
operational reliability. be fitted with strain relief.
• Visual inspection for oil leakage within the scope of the

vehicle inspection.
4.2 Compressed-air system maintenance
• All transmission maintenance work may only be carried out
with the vehicle standing on level ground and with the • The vehicle manufacturer’s maintenance instructions must
engine switched off. be observed.
• With all drain, fill, or screw plugs make sure that the sealing • The compressed-air tank should be drained of water weekly,
ring has been replaced prior to assembly. in winter every day.
• Do not point pressurized water jet directly at the breather NOTE

valve. (Ingress of water in transmission: risk of corrosion). When draining the compressed-air tank, the compressed-air
cleaner and water separator should also be drained if this is
not done automatically.
• On vehicles equipped with an air drier, always comply with

the specified interval for replacement of the cartridge.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 56

ZF-AS Tronic mid Maintenance
4.3 Type plate 4.4 Bleeding the transmission
The type plate contains the most important data. The transmission oil heats up during driving. This causes excess
The type plate is located on the right side of the transmission pressure to build up, which needs to be relieved continuously
when viewed from the output. through a breather valve (hose breather).
Ensure that the breather valve or hose breather function
The following information must always be given when making properly at all times.
inquiries, placing orders, or carrying out repairs:
1 Transmission type (model) As part of the vehicle inspections, check the following points
2 Transmission parts list number with regard to hose breathers:
3 Transmission serial no.
• The hose must not exhibit any signs of damage, kinks, or
chafing.
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG • The hose must always be at an incline without creating a
MADE IN FRANCE
siphon.
ASTronic mid 12 AS 1620 SO 1
MODEL • Never exceed the max. permitted hose temperature
PARTS LIST NO. SERIAL NO.
2 3 (e.g. near the exhaust pipes, exhaust turbocharger).
4247 037 004 00 247 443
• The end of the hose must be in a dry compartment and
CUSTOMER xxxxxx
SPEC. NO. should be approx. 150 mm lower.
TOTAL 10.37 - 0.81 SPEEDO xxx
RATIO
RATIO
xn
P.T.O. N xxxxx n= xxxxx
ENGINE
OIL CAPACIT 9.3 OIL GRADE SEE 02
IN LITERS LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
026814
Example: Transmission type plate
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 57

4.5 Oil change intervals 4.7 Oil quantity
To ensure that the transmission achieves the required level of Correctly filling the oil in the transmission is crucial for ensuring
operational safety and reliability, the oil change intervals a precise oil quantity (see Chapter 4.8.1).
indicated in the ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 must be
observed!
4.6 Oil grade
For permissible lubricants, see ZF List of Lubricants

TE-ML 02.“We recommend that you use ZF-Ecofluid M.”
The ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02 can be obtained from all

ZF Service Centers or from the Internet: http://www.zf.com.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 58

1 2 3
Example: ZF-AS Tronic mid
1 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm 4 Type plate

2 Tighten oil drain plug to 60 Nm 5 Connection for hose breather / breather valve
3 Heat exchanger (option)
029919 / 029920
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 59

4.8 Oil change
Oil changes must always be carried out with the vehicle

standing on level ground and with the engine switched off.
Always change the oil after a longer journey while the

viscosity.
DANGER!
burns.
1 Oil drain plug 1 2

• Remove oil drain and oil filler plugs (1 and 2) from 2 Oil filler plug
transmission and collect transmission oil in a suitable 034648_1
container and dispose of it in accordance with
environmental regulations. 4.8.1 Oil fill
• Clean the oil drain plug (1) and replace the sealing ring. • Fill in oil through oil filling point (2).
• Screw in oil drain plug (1) and tighten to 60 Nm. • The oil level is correct when the oil reaches the lower edge
of the oil filling point or when oil escapes at the oil filler
point.
• Tighten oil filler plug (2) to 60 Nm.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 60

4.9 Oil level check
DANGER!
transmission damage.
Risk of accident!
• Check oil level when vehicle is on level ground.
• Do not check the oil level right after traveling (incorrect

measurement). Only check once the transmission oil has
cooled down (<40 °C).
• Remove oil filler plug (2).
• If the oil level has dropped below the oil filling point, the oil
must be topped up (see Chapter 4.8.1).
• If the oil level is OK, screw in the oil filler plug (2) with a
new sealing ring.
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 61

Notes
4232 758 102 - 2012-02 62

63
88038 Friedrichshafen
Deutschland · Germany
Telefon/Phone +49 7541 77-0
Telefax/Fax +49 7541 77-90 8000
www.zf.com
EN 4232 758 102a - 2012-02

Commercial Vehicle Technology
Manual and automated ZF transmissions

for trucks, buses, light commercial vehicles and special
vehicles with "TE-ML 02" label on the type plate List of lubricants TE-ML 02
Table of contents Page
1. Approved lubricant classes ................................................................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 Trucks and special applications ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Buses ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Light commercial vehicles ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.4 Product groups/Models/Versions from the past, not individually listed ............................................................................................5
2. Oil and filter change intervals (filter replacement affects only transmission with Intarder or WSK [torque converter clutch])............6
3. Low temperatures limits ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
4. Explanation of footnotes and comments ............................................................................................................................................ 7
5. Lubricant classes and approved trade products ................................................................................................................................ 8
1. Approved lubricant classes
1.1 Trucks and special applications
Product groups Lubricant classes

trucks
Note: Instead of the “0“ as the last figure, there may also
be a: 2;3;4;5. First fill (5) Service fill (6)
(Example: 12AS1935, 16S2223)
Ecolite ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
S5-42, S6-36, S6-36/2, S5-420 02B(1) / 02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02L
ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
S5-580
02B(1) / 02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02L
6S500
02B / 02E 02B / 02E
Ecolite / AS Tronic lite ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
6S850, 6AS850 02B(1) / 02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02H(1) / 02L
6S1200, 6S1200 02B(1) / 02E / 02H(1) 02B(1) / 02E / 02H(1) / 02L
Ecolite / AS Tronic lite ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
6S700, 6AS700, 6S800, 6AS800, 6S1000, 6AS1000 02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02L
AS Tronic lite
02K 02K
Hydraulic actuators
The list of lubricants TE-ML 02, edition 01.04.2018 replaces all ZF Friedrichshafen AG
previous editions. The current list can be requested from any ZF D-88038 Friedrichshafen
after-salesservice center or accessed on the Internet under www.zf.com/contact
www.zf.com/lubricants.
Page 1 of 15
Continued ZF Friedrichshafen AG / List of lubricants TE-ML 02, edition 01.04.2018

trucks (continuation)
(Example: 12AS1935, 16S2223)
Ecomid without Intarder ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
9S75, 8S109, 9S109, 16S109 02B / 02E / 02H 02B / 02E / 02H /02L
Ecomid with Intarder ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
8S109IT, 9S109IT, 16S109IT 02E / 02H 02E / 02H / 02L
Ecomid without Intarder / Ecotronic mid
8S1110, 9S910, 9S1110, 9S1310, 9S1510,
02B / 02E 02B / 02E / 02L
9AS910, 9AS1110, 9AS1310, 9AS1510
8S1111, 9S1111, 9S1311 02E 02E / 02L
AS Tronic mid ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
12AS1010, 12AS1210, 12AS1220, 12AS1420, 12AS1620 02E 02B / 02E / 02L
Ecosplit without Intarder
8S151, 16S151, 8S181, 16S181, 16S221, 16S251
8S1620, 16S1620, 8S1820, 16S1820, 8S1920, 16S1920,
02B / 02E / 02H 02B / 02E / 02H / 02L
16S2020, 8S2220, 16S2220, 16S2520, 16S2720
16S1580, 16S1680, 16S2180, 16S2280
Ecosplit with Intarder
8S151IT, 16S151IT, 8S181IT, 16S181IT, 16S221IT,
16S251IT ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
8S1621, 16S1621, 8S1821, 16S1821, 8S1921, 16S1921, 02E / 02H 02E / 02H / 02L
16S2021, 8S2221, 16S2221, 16S2521, 16S2721
16S1581, 16S1681, 16S2181, 16S2281
Ecosplit without Intarder ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
16S2320, 16S2330 02E 02B / 02E / 02L
12S2130, 12S2330, 12S2830
02E 02B / 02E / 02L
8S1630, 16S1630, 8S1830, 16S1830, 8S1930, 16S1930, ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
16S2030, 8S2230, 16S2230, 16S2530, 16S2733 02E 02B / 02E / 02H / 02L
Ecosplit with Intarder ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
16S2321, 16S2331 02E 02E / 02L
12S2131, 12S2331, 12S2831
02E 02E / 02L
16S1631, 8S1831, 16S1831, 8S1931, 16S1931, ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
16S2031, 8S2231, 16S2231, 16S2531, 16S2731 02E 02E / 02H / 02L
Classic Line
8S1350, 16S1455TD, 16S1650, 16S1670, 16S1850,
16S1950, 9S1820,
02B / 02E / 02H 02B / 02E / 02H / 02L
16S1650HD
S6-1550, S6-820, S5-680, S6-680, S5-820
AS Tronic without Intarder
12AS1630, 12AS1930, 12AS2130, 12AS2140, 12AS2300,
12AS2301, 12AS2330, 12AS2340, 12AS2501, 12AS2530,
02E / 02V 02B / 02E / 02L / 02V
12AS2540, 12AS2740, 12AS2940, 12AS3001, 12AS3002,
12AS3140, 16AS2230, 16AS2600, 16AS2601, 16AS2630
AS Tronic with Intarder
12AS1631, 12AS1931, 12AS2131, 12AS2141,
12AS2300IT, 12AS2301IT, 12AS2331, 12AS2341, ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
12AS2501IT, 12AS2531, 12AS2541, 12AS2741, 02E / 02V 02E / 02L / 02V
12AS2941, 12AS3001IT, 12AS3002IT, 12AS3141,
16AS2231, 16AS2600IT, 16AS2601IT, 16AS2631
Page 2 of 15

trucks (continuation)
(Example: 12AS1935, 16S2223)
TraXon without Intarder
12TX1410, 12TX1610, 12TX1810, 12TX2010, 12TX2210,
12TX2410, 12TX 2610,
12TX2420, 12TX2620, 12TX2820, 12TX3020, 12TX3220,
02E / 02V 02E / 02L / 02V
12TX3420
16TX1640, 16TX1840, 16TX2040, 16TX2240, 16TX2440,
16TX2640, 16XT2840,16TX3040, 16TX3240, 16TX3440
TraXon with Intarder
12TX1411, 12TX1611, 12TX1811, 12TX2011, 12TX2211,
12TX2411, 12TX 2611,
12TX2421, 12TX2621, 12TX2821, 12TX3021, 12TX3221,
02E / 02V 02E / 02L / 02V
12TX3421
16TX1641, 16TX1841, 16TX2041, 16TX2241, 16TX2441,
16TX2641, 16XT2841,16TX3041, 16TX3241, 16TX3441
Transmatic
(Joint oil circuit of basic transmission and converter lock-
02H(2) 02H(2)
up clutches)
16S151WSK, 16S221WSK, 16S251WSK
TC Tronic
(Separate oil circuit of basic transmission and converter
lock-up clutches)
02E 02B / 02E / 02L
Basic transmission:
12TC2540, 12TC2740
Torque converter lock-up clutches: 02H(2) / ATF in accordance with 02H(2) / ATF in accordance with
TC 2 TE-ML 14(7) TE-ML 14(7)
TC Tronic HD (Heavy Duty)
(Separate oil circuit of basic transmission and converter
lock-up clutches)
02E 02E / 02L
Basic transmission:
12AS3040TCIT
Torque converter lock-up clutches: ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
TCHD 02E 02E
NMV 1600L1, 2000L1, 2003L1, 1075K1 ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
(engine-dependent PTO“ with independent oil circuit) 02E 02E / 02L
Page 3 of 15
1.2 Buses

buses First fill (5) Service fill (6)
S5-42, S6-36, S6-36/2, 5S600BO 02B(1) / 02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02L
6S890, 6S700BO 02B(1) / 02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02H / 02L
Ecolite without Intarder
S6-85, 6S1000BO, 6S1000BD, 6S1200BO, 6S1200BD, ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
6S1350BO, 6S1600BD, 6S1650BO, 6S1700BO, 02B(1) / 02E / 02H 02B(1) / 02E / 02H / 02L
6S1900BO
Ecolite with Intarder
6S1351BO, 6S1601BD, 6S1651BO, 6S1901BO,
02E / 02H 02E / 02H / 02L
6S1701BO
Ecolite / AS Tronic lite
6S710BO, 6AS710BO, 6S1010BO, 6AS1010BO,
02E 02B(1) / 02E / 02L
6S1110BO, 6AS1110BO
AS Tronic lite
02K 02K
Hydraulic actuators
Ecomid without Intarder ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
8S180, 8S2100BO, 8S2100BD 02B / 02E / 02H 02B / 02E / 02H / 02L
8S180IT, 8S2101BO, 8S2101BD 02E / 02H 02E / 02H / 02L
Classic Line ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
S6-1550, S6-820, S5-680, S6-680, S5-820, 6S1380BD 02B / 02E / 02H 02B / 02E / 02H / 02L
AS Tronic without Intarder
10AS2300BO, 10AS2310B, 10AS2700BO,
02E 02B / 02E / 02L
12AS2000BO, 12AS2300BO, 12AS2301, 12AS2700BO
AS Tronic with Intarder
10AS2010BIT, 10AS2301IT, 10AS2310BIT, ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
12AS1601BO, 12AS2000BIT, 12AS2001BO, 02E 02E / 02L
12AS2300BIT, 12AS2301IT, 12AS2301BO, 12AS2701BO
TraXon with Intarder
12TX1611BO, 12TX2011BO, 12TX2411BO,
02E 02E / 02L
12TX2811BO
Ecoshift without Intarder
6S1310BD, 6S1310BO,
02E 02E / 02L
6S1610BD, 6S1610BO, 6S1910BO
Ecoshift with Intarder
6S1311BD, 6S1311BO, ZF-Ecofluid M ZF-Ecofluid M
6S1611BD, 6S1611BO, 02E 02E / 02L
6S1911BO, 6S2111BO
Page 4 of 15
1.3 Light commercial vehicles
Product groups Lubricants / Lubricant classes

Light commercial vehicles First fill (5) Service fill (6)
5S200VO, 5S270VO, 6S300VD, 6S320VD, 6S350VD,
6S380VO,
02E 02B / 02E / 02L
6S420VO
eTronic Petronas Gear Oil T.E. LD SAE
ZF-Ecofluid M
6AS300VD, 6AS320VD, 6AS380VO, 75W-80
02B / 02E / 02L
6AS400VO , 6AS420VO Total Tranself LD SAE 75W80
6S650, 6S720, 6S750
02E 02B / 02E / 02L
6S450, 6S480 ZF-Ecofluid M (9) ZF-Ecofluid M
VW Amarok, VW Crafter, MAN TGE VW spare part no. G 055 538 A2 VW spare part no. G 055 538 A2
6S480 ZF-Ecofluid M (9) ZF-Ecofluid M
IVECO Daily 02E 02E
ZF-Ecofluid M
02E
6S450, 6S480 ZF-Ecofluid M Exxon Mobil Gear Oil MB 317
Mercedes-Benz Sprinter 02E Mercedes-Benz MB 235.10 --
Manual Transmission Oil A 001
989 26 03
Fuchs Titan EG MP 80 ZF-Ecofluid M
5S400
Petronas TUTELA OTZ (80W-90) 02B / 02E
1.4 Product groups/Models/Versions from the past, not individually listed
Product groups/Models/Versions Lubricant classes

Torque converter lock-up clutches (WSK)
02H(2) / ATF in accordance with TE-ML 14(7)
with separate oil circuit
Transmissions without ZF-Intarder
AS Tronic 1 (12AS1800, 16AS2200) ZF-Ecofluid M
Constant-mesh and synchronised transmissions for commercial 02B / 02E / 02H / 02L
vehicles
Transmissions with ZF-Intarder
AS Tronic 1 (12AS1800IT, 16AS2200IT) ZF-Ecofluid M
Constant-mesh and synchronised transmissions for commercial 02E / 02H / 02L
vehicles
Page 5 of 15
2. Oil and filter change intervals (filter replacement affects only transmission with Intarder or WSK
[torque converter clutch])
Caution: Please refer to the previous pages, Section 1, tables, for information on the lubricant classes released for the
individual product groups.
ZF-Ecofluid M was specially designed for applications with manual transmissions and automatic transmissions in commercial
vehicles. The combination of a hydrocrack base oil with a specially balanced additive package ensures excellent oxidation stability
and is thus excellently suited for very long oil change intervals. It warrants high-quality transmission component protection, in
particular of the synchronizers and the gearings. As a result of the flat viscosity characteristic curve, the oil is suited for applications
in all climate zones, particularly in hot and cold regions. Moreover, in comparison with mineral transmission fluids, ZF-Ecofluid M
helps to reduce fuel consumption by 0.5 up to 1.0%.
Truck, bus and special applications according to sections 1.1, 1.2 and 1.4
02B, ZF-Ecofluid M 02K

Lubricant class 02L, 02V
02H, ATF 02E
Application Oil and filter change intervals (3)
- Off-road operation e.g. mining application
1.000 h 5.000 h 10.000 h
- Average speed up to 20 km/h
20.000 km 100.000 km 200.000 km ---
- Stationary drives
1 year 1 year 2 years (4)
- NMV
- Hot country use (8)
- Long-distance transport > 44 t
- Short-distance transport 120.000 km 240.000 km 360.000 km
---
- Tough operating conditions 1 year 2 years 3 years (4)
- Scheduled routes (buses)
- Average speed from 20 to 60 km/h
- Long-distance transport (trucks)
180.000 km 360.000 km 540.000 km
- Long-distance coach journeys (buses) ---
1 year 2 years 3 years (4)
- Average speed as of 60 km/h
- Hydraulic actuators no oil change
--- --- ---
needed
Light commercial vehicles according to section 1.3
Lubricants / Lubricant classes Oil change intervals

02B
Fuchs Titan EG MP 80 60.000 km
Petronas TUTELA OTZ (80W-90)
02L
Total Tranself LD 75W-80 240.000 km
Petronas Gear Oil T.E. LD SAE 75W-80
ZF-Ecofluid M / 02E
Exxon Mobil Gear Oil MB 317
no oil change needed
Mercedes-Benz MB 235.10 -- Manual Transmission Oil A 001
989 26 03
Page 6 of 15
3. Low temperatures limits
Initial vehicle start-up at oil sump

Lubricant classes Oil type / SAE viscosity grade
temperatures
ZF-Ecofluid M
75W / 75W-80 / 75W-85 / 75W-90 / ATF - 40°C
02B / 02E / 02K / 02L / ATF
02B / 02H / 02V 80W / 80W-85 / 80W-90 - 20°C
40, 85W-90, 90 0°C
30 - 15°C
02B / 02H 20W (Torque converter lock-up clutches TC 2
- 40°C
only)
20W (Transmatic only) - 40°C - 5°C
4. Explanation of footnotes and comments
Footnotes
(1) In moderate climate zones, shift quality of non-automated transmissions is impaired when using the lubrication classes 02B /
02H.
(2) Lubricants marked (*) on the following pages must not be used.
(3) Oil and filter change required, depending on what occurs first. Only use genuine ZF filter inserts:
- Intarder 2: 6085 298 026
- Intarder 3: 0501 215 163
- WSK: 0501 202 378
(4) These intervals only apply to a hose breather in a dry area. If there is no hose breather in the dry area, the oil change
intervals specified for lubricant class 02L apply. This restriction does not apply to TraXon and bus applications.
In the case of transmissions filled ex-works with lubricant class 02E / 02V, no oil change must be effected during the first two
years as of initial registration. In case of retrofitting or repair in this period, oil refills with lubricant class 02E / 02V are
permitted. Exception: The limits of application in accordance with the TE-ML 02 (operating hours, mileage [km]) are already
met prior to the expiration of the first two years.
(5) First filling: Only the lubricant classes listed are permitted for initial fillings of transmissions. ZF recommends the oil grades
listed in Tables 1.1 -1.4.
(6) Service filling: The lubricant classes listed are compulsory for service oil changes according to the oil-change intervals
mentioned under Section 2. In case of oil changes at transmission mileage of up to 7500 km, only oils for initial fillings must
be used. In the case of transmissions filled ex-works with lubricant class 02E / 02V, due attention must always be paid to
footer 4.
(7) All lubricants of TE-ML 14 may be used. Oil change intervals and temperature limits of TE-ML 02 do apply.
(8) The denomination „hot country use“ is derived from the area where the vehicle is used, rather than from a country in the
sense of a state.
Regarding ZF units, we say "Hot country use" when:
1. the monthly average temperature exceeds 25°C in more than 2 months within a year
2. or if temperatures rise above 40°C on more than 7 days in a year.
(9) No oil changes are required during transmission operation.
Comments
1. Instructions for transmission ventilation in accordance with Installation Guidelines 1203 765 110 and 1328 765 101 must be
followed.
2. A lithium saponified multipurpose grease of NLGI class 2 which is mixable with mineral oil is to be used at greasing points
(grease code KP2K-30 in acc. with DIN 51825 or ISO-L-XCCHB2 in accordance with ISO 6743-9).
3. Additives of any kind added later to the oil change the oil in a manner that is unpredictable, and they are therefore not
permitted. No liability of any kind will be accepted by ZF for any damage resulting from the use of such additives.
4. ZF will not assume liability for damage caused by non-observance of our maintenance instructions.
Page 7 of 15
5. Lubricant classes and approved trade products
Lubricant class 02A
Note:
Oils formerly approved according to lubricant class 02A are now found in lubricant class 02B.
Page 8 of 15
Lubricant class 02B
Note:
In moderate climate zones, shift quality is impaired if viscosity grades higher than SAE 80W are used.
Manufacturer (02B) Trade name (02B) ZF approval number

ADDINOL LUBE OIL GMBH, LEUNA/DE ADDINOL GETRIEBEÖL GX 80W-90 ML ZF000672
ADDINOL LUBE OIL GMBH, LEUNA/DE ADDINOL GETRIEBEÖL GH 75 W 90 SL ZF002260
ARAL AG, BOCHUM/DE ARAL GETRIEBEÖL SNA-E 75W-90 ZF000142
ARAL AG, BOCHUM/DE ARAL GETRIEBEÖL EP PLUS 80W-90 ZF000460
ARAL AG, BOCHUM/DE ARAL GETRIEBEÖL EP 80W-90 ZF001715
BAHRAIN PETROLEUM COMPANY, AWALI/BH SPAREX HP 90 GL-4 ZF001694
BASF SE, LUDWIGSHAFEN/DE EMGARD UAF 7105 ZF001876
BAYWA AG MÜNCHEN, MÜNCHEN/DE TECTROL MULTIGEAR PLUS 8090 ZF001160
BP PLC., LONDON/GB BP ENERGEAR HT 80W-90 ZF000200
BP PLC., LONDON/GB BP ENERGEAR SHX-M 75W-90 ZF000208
BP PLC., LONDON/GB BP ENERGEAR EP 80W-90 ZF001216
BUCHER AG LANGENTHAL, LANGENTHAL/CH UNISYNT ZX SAE 75W90 ZF000354
BUCHER AG LANGENTHAL, LANGENTHAL/CH GEAR ZX TP SAE 80W/90 ZF001721
BUCHER AG LANGENTHAL, LANGENTHAL/CH PENTA TL SAE 75W/90 ZF003411
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL SYNTRAX UNIVERSAL 80W-90 ZF000227
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL MANUAL EP 80W-90 ZF001096
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB SYNTRAX UNIVERSAL PLUS 75W-90 ZF001471
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX MANUAL EP 80W-90 ZF002133
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX UNIVERSAL LL 80W-90 ZF002143
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX UNIVERSAL LL 75W-90 ZF002144
CEPSA COMERCIAL PETRÓLEO S.A.U., MADRID/ES CEPSA TRANSMISIONES EP FE+LD 75W-90 ZF000086
CEPSA COMERCIAL PETRÓLEO S.A.U., MADRID/ES MAN SUPER AXLE 3343 75W-90 ZF000965
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US TRANSLUBE LD SAE 80W ZF000800
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US TRANSLUBE LD SAE 90 ZF000801
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US MULTIGEAR 80W-90 ZF000812
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US MULTIGEAR S 75W-90 ZF000815
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US DELO GEAR TDL 80W-90 ZF002273
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US DELO SYN-TDL 75W-90 ZF003353
CONDAT LUBRIFIANTS, CHASSE SUR RHONE/FR GEAR TXS 75W90 ZF000829
CONDAT LUBRIFIANTS, CHASSE SUR RHONE/FR GEAR TDM 80W ZF001039
DAF TRUCKS NV, EINDHOVEN/NL DAF SUPER 80W-90 ZF002125
DE OLIEBRON BV, ZWIJNDRECHT/NL TOR UNI GEAR LD 75W90 ZF000964
ENI S.P.A., ROME/IT ENI ROTRA LSX 75W-90 ZF000860
ENI S.P.A., ROME/IT ENI ROTRA MP 75W-90 ZF003364
EXXONMOBIL CORPORATION, HOUSTON, TX/US MOBILUBE 1 SHC 75W-90 ZF000041
EXXONMOBIL CORPORATION, HOUSTON, TX/US MOBILUBE S 80W-90 ZF000776
FABRIKA MAZIVA FAM AD, KRUŠEVAC/RS MULTIHIPO 75W-90 SINT ZF000653
FABRIKA MAZIVA FAM AD, KRUŠEVAC/RS MULTIHIPO 80W-90 F PLUS ZF001456
FINKE MINERALÖLWERK GMBH, 27374 VISSELHÖVEDE/DE AVIATICON FINKOGEAR PREMIUM 75W-90 ZF002249
FINKE MINERALÖLWERK GMBH, 27374 VISSELHÖVEDE/DE AVIATICON FINKOGEAR SUPER 80W-90 ZF002299
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN SUPERGEAR MC SAE 80W-90 ZF000722
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE GEARWAY S5 75W-90 ZF001030
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN TITAN GEAR ZF SAE 80 ZF002313
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN CYTRAC TD SAE 75W-90 ZF003341
GAZPROMNEFT-LUBRICANTS, MOSCOW/RU G-TRUCK GL-4/GL-5 80W-90 ZF000554
GAZPROMNEFT-LUBRICANTS, MOSCOW/RU G-BOX GL-4/GL-5 75W-90 ZF000962
GAZPROMNEFT-LUBRICANTS, MOSCOW/RU GAZPROMNEFT GL-4/GL-5 75W-90 ZF002302
GAZPROMNEFT-LUBRICANTS, MOSCOW/RU KAMAZ G-PROFI SERVICE LINE GL-4/GL-5 75W-90 ZF003388
GEORG OEST MINERALÖLWERK GMBH & CO.KG, FREUDENSTADT/DE OEST SYNTH GETRIEBEÖL SAE 75W-90 ZF000491
GEORG OEST MINERALÖLWERK GMBH & CO.KG, FREUDENSTADT/DE OEST GETRIEBEÖL FE SAE 80W-90 GL4/5 ZF000565
GRUPA LOTOS S.A., GDANSK/PL TITANIS SUPER GL-5 75W/90 ZF000356
GRUPA LOTOS S.A., GDANSK/PL TITANIS SUPER GL-5 80W-90 ZF001098
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR XP DURA MAX 80W-90 ZF000684
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR TDL 80W-90 ZF000780
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF SYNGEAR 75W-90 ZF000863
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR MZ 80W ZF000873
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR MZ 90 ZF000874
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR MZ 85W-90 ZF000875
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR MZ 80W-90 ZF001034
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF GEAR ZX 80W ZF001849
HUILES BERLIET S.A., SAINT-PRIEST/FR RTO LONGEVIA TCX ECO 75W-90 ZF001566
IGOL FRANCE, AMIENS/FR SYNTHEGEAR 75W-90 ZF001087
INA MAZIVA LTD., ZAGREB/HR INA HIPENOL TDL 80W-90 ZF000432
INA MAZIVA LTD., ZAGREB/HR INA HIPENOL SHD 75W-90 ZF000977
IPIRANGA PRODUTOS DE PETRÓLEO SA, RIO DE JANEIRO/BR IPIRANGA ULTRAGEAR MB 80W ZF001765
KUWAIT PETROLEUM INTERNATIONAL LUBRICANT, ANTWERP/NL Q8 TRANS XGS 75W-90 ZF000179
KUWAIT PETROLEUM INTERNATIONAL LUBRICANT, ANTWERP/NL Q8 GEAR OIL XG SAE 80W-90 ZF002103
LIEBHERR HYDRAULIKBAGGER GMBH, KIRCHDORF/DE LIEBHERR SYNTOGEAR PLUS 75W-90 ZF001972
LIQUI MOLY GMBH, ULM/DE LIQUI MOLY HYPOID GETRIEBEÖL TDL SAE 80W-90 ZF001323
LIQUI MOLY GMBH, ULM/DE LIQUI MOLY VOLLSYN. HYPOID GETR.ÖL TRUCK (75W-90) ZF001347
MEGUIN GMBH & CO. KG, SAARLOUIS/DE MEGOL HYPOID-GETRIEBEOEL TDL 80W-90 ZF001183
MEGUIN GMBH & CO. KG, SAARLOUIS/DE MEGOL GETRIEBEOEL TRUCK-SYNTH SAE 75W-90 ZF001291
MOL-LUB KFT, ALMASFUZITO/HU MOL HYKOMOL TDL 75W90 ZF003365
MOTUL SA, AUBERVILLIERS/FR MOTUL GEAR SYNTH TDL 75W-90 ZF000825
NIS AD, NOVI SAD/RS NISOTEC HIPO LD ZF SAE 80W-90 ZF001362
NIS AD, NOVI SAD/RS NISOTEC HIPO SINT TDL SAE 75W-90 ZF002038
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION TM-4/5 75W-90 ZF001013
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION TM-4 SAE 80W ZF001431
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION TM-4 80W-90 ZF001524
Page 9 of 15
Manufacturer (02B) Trade name (02B) ZF approval number

OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION UNI 80W-90 ZF001768
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION UNI S 75W-90 ZF001769
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION MN TM-4/5 75W-90 ZF001945
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION UNI 80W-90 ZF002259
ORLEN OIL SP. Z O.O., KRAKOW/PL PLATINUM GEAR LL 80W-90 ZF000311
OY TEBOIL AB, HELSINKI/FI TEBOIL HYPOID SAE 75W-90 ZF001969
OY TEBOIL AB, HELSINKI/FI TEBOIL HYPOID SAE 80W-90 ZF001970
PAKELO MOTOR OIL, SAN BONIFACIO (VR)/IT GLOBAL MULTIGEAR TS SAE 75W/90 ZF001224
PANOLIN AG, MADETSWIL/CH PANOLIN TOPGEAR 80W/90 ZF000423
PANOLIN AG, MADETSWIL/CH PANOLIN SUPER DUTY SYNTH 75W/90 ZF000462
PETROBRAS DISTRIBUIDORA S.A., DUQUE DE CAXIAS/BR LUBRAX TRM 4 SAE 80W ZF001476
PETROBRAS DISTRIBUIDORA S.A., DUQUE DE CAXIAS/BR LUBRAX TRM 4 SAE 90 ZF001477
PETROGAL S.A., LISBOA/PT GALP TRANSVEX TDL 75W90 ZF000980
PETROL OFISI A.S., ISTANBUL/TR MAXIGEAR D 75W-90 ZF001591
PETROMIN CORPORATION, JEDDAH/SA PETROMIN GEAR BOX Z12 SAE 80W90 ZF001966
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS INTERNATIONAL SDN BH, KUALA LUMPUR/MY TUTELA TRANSMISSION STARGEAR AX-ED (SAE 75W-90) ZF001017
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS INTERNATIONAL SDN BH, KUALA LUMPUR/MY TUTELA TRANSMISSION STARGEAR HD (SAE 80W) ZF001028
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS INTERNATIONAL SDN BH, KUALA LUMPUR/MY TUTELA TRANSMISSION STARGEAR AX-ED (SAE 75W-90) ZF001738
PHI OIL GMBH, ST. GEORGEN/AT UNIGEAR GOLD 75W90 ZF001203
REPSOL LUBRICANTES Y ESPECIALIDADES, S.A, MADRID/ES REPSOL CARTAGO FE LD 75W90 ZF000451
RN-LUBRICANTS, LLC, MOSCOW/RU TNK TRANS 80W-90 ZF001752
SASOL OIL, RANDBURG/ZA SYN GEAR DIFFERENTIAL OIL 75W-90 ZF000702
SHELL INTERNATIONAL PETROLEUM COMP. LTD, LONDON/GB SHELL SPIRAX S3 AM 80W-90 ZF001292
SHELL INTERNATIONAL PETROLEUM COMP. LTD, LONDON/GB SHELL SPIRAX S3 G 80W-90 ZF001298
SHELL INTERNATIONAL PETROLEUM COMP. LTD, LONDON/GB SHELL SPIRAX S3 G 80W ZF001299
SHELL INTERNATIONAL PETROLEUM COMP. LTD, LONDON/GB SHELL SPIRAX S6 ADME 75W- 90 ZF003334
SINOPEC LUBRICANT CO., LTD., BEIJING/CN SINOPEC GREATWALL MTF C-I 80W ZF001727
SINOPEC LUBRICANT CO., LTD., BEIJING/CN SINOPEC GREATWALL MTF C-I 80W-90 ZF001933
SINOPEC LUBRICANT CO., LTD., BEIJING/CN SINOPEC GREATWALL MTF C-I 85W-90 ZF001936
SINOPEC LUBRICANT CO., LTD., BEIJING/CN SINOPEC MULTIPURPOSE-II GEAR OIL 80W-90 ZF003332
SK LUBRICANTS, SEOUL/KR TATADW G EP 80W-90 ZF002132
SRS SCHMIERSTOFF VERTRIEB GMBH, SALZBERGEN/DE SRS GETRIEBEFLUID SML 80W-90 ZF000447
SRS SCHMIERSTOFF VERTRIEB GMBH, SALZBERGEN/DE SRS WIOLIN RSG 80 ZF000452
SRS SCHMIERSTOFF VERTRIEB GMBH, SALZBERGEN/DE SRS GETRIEBEFLUID SXL 75W-90 ZF001655
SRS SCHMIERSTOFF VERTRIEB GMBH, SALZBERGEN/DE SRS WIOLIN ML 4 PLUS SAE 80W ZF001914
SRS SCHMIERSTOFF VERTRIEB GMBH, SALZBERGEN/DE SRS WIOLIN ML 4 PLUS SAE 80W-90 ZF001915
SRS SCHMIERSTOFF VERTRIEB GMBH, SALZBERGEN/DE SRS WIOLIN ML 4 PLUS SAE 90 ZF001916
TOTAL LUBRIFIANTS S.A., NANTERRE/FR ELF TRANSELF SYNTHESE FE 75W-90 ZF001555
TOTAL LUBRIFIANTS S.A., NANTERRE/FR TOTAL TRANSMISSION DUAL 9 FE 75W-90 ZF001771
VALVOLINE CUMMINS PVT LIMITED, GURGAON/IN VALVOLINE GEAR GARD PLUS 80W90 ZF000985
VALVOLINE EUROPE, DORDRECHT/NL VALVOLINE HEAVY DUTY AXLE OIL PRO 80W-90 ZF001869
VEEDOL INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, GLASGOW/GB VEEDOL TRANSMISSION SYNTHETIC LD 75W-90 ZF001629
VIAL OIL LTD., FRYAZINO/RU CONSOL TRANS LUX 80W-90 ZF000587
YACCO SAS, ST PIERRE LES ELBEUF/FR BVX 1000 75W-90 ZF001612
YORK LUBRICANTS - GINOUVES SAS, LA GARDE/FR YORK 896 75W90 ZF000550
YPF S.A., BUENOS AIRES/AR HIPOIDAL SUPER S 75W-90 ZF003384
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG, FRIEDRICHSHAFEN/DE ZF-ECOFLUID X SAE 80W-90 ZF001266
Page 10 of 15
Lubricant class 02E
Manufacturer (02E) Trade name (02E) ZF approval number

ARAL AG, BOCHUM/DE ARAL GETRIEBEÖL SNS-M 75W-80 ZF000130
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL SYNTRANS Z LONG LIFE 75W-80 ZF000609
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX MANUAL Z LONG LIFE 75W-80 ZF002157
CEPSA COMERCIAL PETRÓLEO S.A.U., MADRID/ES CEPSA TRANSMISIONES Z5 FE+LD 75W80 ZF002240
DAF TRUCKS NV, EINDHOVEN/NL DAF XTREME 75W-80 ZF002124
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN CYTRAC ULTRA SYNTH SAE 75W-80 ZF001457
HUILES BERLIET S.A., SAINT-PRIEST/FR RTO LONGEVIA BZV ECO 75W-80 ZF001260
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS INTERNATIONAL SDN BH, KUALA LUMPUR/MY TUTELA TRANSMISSION XT-D 540 (SAE 75W-80) ZF000532
TOTAL LUBRIFIANTS S.A., NANTERRE/FR TOTAL TRANSMISSION GEAR 9 FE 75W-80 ZF001773
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG, FRIEDRICHSHAFEN/DE ZF-ECOFLUID M SAE 75W-80 ZF002155
Page 11 of 15
Lubricant class 02H
Note:
1. In moderate climate zones, shift quality is impaired if viscosity grades higher than SAE 80W or SAE 30 are
used.
2. Product group Transmatic/Torque converter lock-up clutches TC 2: With oil sump temperatures below -15°C,
engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 20W (API CD/CE/CF-4/CF/CG-4/CH-4/CI-4/SF/SG/SH/SJ/SL specifications
or ACEA categories A/B/E) must be used. If possible, any one of the below-mentioned commercial products
in the viscosity class SAE 20W is to be used.
3. Product group Transmatic/Torque converter lock-up clutches TC 2: The lubricants marked thus (*) may not
be used.
Manufacturer (02H) Trade name (02H) ZF approval number

ADDINOL LUBE OIL GMBH, LEUNA/DE ADDINOL TURBO DIESEL MD 305 SAE 30 ZF000624
ADDINOL LUBE OIL GMBH, LEUNA/DE ADDINOL TURBO DIESEL MD 405 SAE 40 (*) ZF000625
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US URSA TRANS SAE 40 (*) ZF000821
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN UNIVERSAL HD SAE 30 ZF ZF000719
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF SUPER DUTY LE 30 ZF001147
IPIRANGA PRODUTOS DE PETRÓLEO SA, RIO DE JANEIRO/BR IPIRANGA ULTRAGEAR 40 (*) ZF001340
IPIRANGA PRODUTOS DE PETRÓLEO SA, RIO DE JANEIRO/BR IPIRANGA ULTRAGEAR ZF 40 (*) ZF002264
PANOLIN AG, MADETSWIL/CH PANOLIN EXTRA DIESEL 30 ZF000393
PETROBRAS DISTRIBUIDORA S.A., DUQUE DE CAXIAS/BR LUBRAX TRM 5 HD SAE 30 ZF001174
PETROBRAS DISTRIBUIDORA S.A., DUQUE DE CAXIAS/BR LUBRAX TRM 5 HD SAE 40 (*) ZF001175
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS INTERNATIONAL SDN BH, KUALA LUMPUR/MY TUTELA TRANSMISSION ZCS 160 (SAE 80W-90) ZF000026
Page 12 of 15
Lubricant class 02K
Manufacturer (02K) Trade name (02K) ZF approval number

FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE PENTOSIN CHF 11S ZF000832
Page 13 of 15
Lubricant class 02L
Manufacturer (02L) Trade name (02L) ZF approval number

ADDINOL LUBE OIL GMBH, LEUNA/DE ADDINOL GETRIEBEÖL GS 75W-80 SL ZF000974
BARDAHL ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD, SINGAPORE/SG SYNMAXTRAN 4000 SAE 75W-80 ZF003331
BAYWA AG MÜNCHEN, MÜNCHEN/DE TECTROL SYNTOGEAR MA 7580 ZF001935
BUCHER AG LANGENTHAL, LANGENTHAL/CH MOTOREX PRISMA TF SAE 75W/80 ZF001660
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL SYNTRANS Z 75W-80 ZF000219
CASTROL LTD, LONDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX MANUAL Z 75W-80 ZF002214
CEPSA COMERCIAL PETRÓLEO S.A.U., MADRID/ES CEPSA TRANSMISIONES FE+LD 75W-80 ZF000472
CEPSA COMERCIAL PETRÓLEO S.A.U., MADRID/ES MAN SUPER GEAR 75W-80 ZF000862
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US MULTIGEAR MTF 75W-80 ZF000813
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US MULTIGEAR MTF 75W-80 ZF001220
CHEVRON LUBRICANTS, SAN RAMON, CA/US DELO SYN-MTF XZ 75W-80 ZF002275
CONDAT LUBRIFIANTS, CHASSE SUR RHONE/FR GEAR TDS 75W80 ZF001040
DAF TRUCKS NV, EINDHOVEN/NL DAF PREMIUM 75W-80 ZF002123
DE OLIEBRON BV, ZWIJNDRECHT/NL TOR MT/LD GEAR OIL 75W80 ZF000634
DONGFENG COMMERCIAL VEHICLE CO. LTD, HUBEI/CN DFCV-HDT 31 ZF001809
ENI S.P.A., ROME/IT ENI ROTRA MULTIGEAR 75W-80 ZF000861
EUROPART TRADING GMBH, HAGEN/DE EUROPART SYNTHOGEAR INT. 75W80 ZF001875
EXXONMOBIL CORPORATION, HOUSTON, TX/US MOBIL DELVAC XHP TRANSMISSION OIL 75W-80 ZF000089
EXXONMOBIL CORPORATION, HOUSTON, TX/US MOBIL DELVAC 1 TRANSMISSION FLUID 75W-80 ZF001683
FINKE MINERALÖLWERK GMBH, 27374 VISSELHÖVEDE/DE AVIATICON GOLD MTF 75W-90 ZF002294
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN CYTRAC MAN SYNTH SAE 75W-80 ZF001140
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE PENTOSIN TLD 75W-80 ZF001423
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE GEARWAY S4 LT 75W-80 ZF001708
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE GEARWAY S4 75W-80 ZF001710
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN CYTRAC MAT SAE 75W-80 ZF003373
FUCHS PETROLUB SE, MANNHEIM/DE FUCHS TITAN CYTRAC MAT SAE 75W-80 ZF003374
GULF OIL INTERNATIONAL, MUMBAI/IN GULF SYNGEAR FE 75W-80 ZF000683
HAFA FRANCE, YVETOT/FR GEARTARDER SAE 75W-80 ZF000384
IGOL FRANCE, AMIENS/FR TRANS GEAR ZF PLUS 75W80 ZF000960
INA MAZIVA LTD., ZAGREB/HR INA TRANSMOL HD SAE 75W-80 ZF003344
KUWAIT PETROLEUM INTERNATIONAL LUBRICANT, ANTWERP/NL Q8 T 60 NTECH SAE 75W-80 ZF000324
LIQUI MOLY GMBH, ULM/DE LIQUI MOLY TRUCK GETRIEBEÖL HC GL4 SAE 75W-80 ZF000693
MEGUIN GMBH & CO. KG, SAARLOUIS/DE MEGOL PREMIUM GETRIEBEOEL HC GL 4 75W80 ZF000394
MOL-LUB KFT, ALMASFUZITO/HU MOL HYKOMOL SYNTRANS 75W80 ZF001064
MOTUL SA, AUBERVILLIERS/FR MOTUL GEAR SYNTH XD 75W-80 ZF001987
OLIPES S.L., CAMPO REAL - MADRID/ES MAXIGEAR TS 7400 - SAE 75W-80 ZF001439
OOO "LLK-INTERNATIONAL", MOSCOW/RU LUKOIL TRANSMISSION LDI 75W-80 ZF001767
OY TEBOIL AB, HELSINKI/FI TEBOIL GEAR MTF-V ZF003339
PAKELO MOTOR OIL, SAN BONIFACIO (VR)/IT GOLDENGEAR LD PLUS SAE 75W/80 ZF000488
PAZ LUBRICANTS & CHEMICALS, HAIFA/IL PAZ TRANS ULTRA 75W-80 ZF003387
PETROBRAS DISTRIBUIDORA S.A., DUQUE DE CAXIAS/BR LUBRAX GOLD XP SAE 75W-80 ZF001337
PETROGAL S.A., LISBOA/PT GALP TRANSVEX TDL ULTRA 75W80 ZF001275
PETROL OFISI A.S., ISTANBUL/TR MAXIGEAR S 75W-80 ZF001590
PETROMIN CORPORATION, JEDDAH/SA PETROMIN GEAR BOX Z2 SAE 75W80 ZF001967
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS INTERNATIONAL SDN BH, KUALA LUMPUR/MY TUTELA TRANSMISSION FE-GEAR (SAE 75W-80) ZF000530
PHI OIL GMBH, ST. GEORGEN/AT GEAR OIL MDV SILVER 75W80 ZF001386
RALOY LUBRICANTES, S.A. DE C.V., SANTIAGO TIANGUISTEN/MX KRÖNEN TRANSMISSION SYNTHETIC OIL 341 ZF000596
RAVENSBERGER SCHMIERSTOFFVERTRIEB GMBH, WERTHER/DE RAVENOL SSG SPEC SYNT LKW GETRIEBEÖL 75W-80 ZF001111
REPSOL LUBRICANTES Y ESPECIALIDADES, S.A, MADRID/ES REPSOL CARTAGO CAJAS FE LD 75W80 ZF001673
S-OIL CORPORATION, SEOUL/KR S-OIL 7 GEAR EP LL ZF001263
SASOL OIL, RANDBURG/ZA SYN GEARBOX OIL 75W-80 ZF001472
SHELL INTERNATIONAL PETROLEUM COMP. LTD, LONDON/GB SHELL SPIRAX S6 GXME 75W- 80 ZF001481
SINOPEC LUBRICANT CO., LTD., BEIJING/CN SINOPEC GREATWALL MTF 02L 75W-80 ZF002047
SINOPEC LUBRICANT CO., LTD., BEIJING/CN SINOPEC GREATWALL MTF 02L 75W-80 ZF003393
SK LUBRICANTS, SEOUL/KR SK GEAR EP 75W-80 ZF ZF000779
TAMOIL ITALIA SPA, MILANO/IT TAMOIL TAMGEAR PLUS SAE 75W-80 ZF001338
TOTAL LUBRIFIANTS S.A., NANTERRE/FR TOTAL TRANSMISSION GEAR 8 FE 75W-80 ZF001779
UNIL OPAL, SAUMUR/FR GERION LD 75W80 ZF000367
VALVOLINE EUROPE, DORDRECHT/NL VALVOLINE HEAVY DUTY GEAR OIL PRO 75W-80 LD ZF001830
VEEDOL INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, GLASGOW/GB VEEDOL GEAR OIL LD 75W-80 ZF002025
YACCO SAS, ST PIERRE LES ELBEUF/FR BVX Z 1000 75W-80 ZF001042
YORK LUBRICANTS - GINOUVES SAS, LA GARDE/FR YORK 994 ZF000735
ZELLER+GMELIN GMBH&CO.KG , EISLINGEN/DE DIVINOL SYNTHOGEAR INT. 75W80 ZF001679
Page 14 of 15
Lubricant class 02V
Note:
The lubricant class 02V has been specially developed for use in demanding situations at high temperatures. If the
reference "OIL GRADE 02V" is stated on the type plate, in principle only this type of oil may be used on the product
concerned. This also applies for servicing (oil changes, refilling after repair, refill).
Manufacturer (02V) Trade name (02V) ZF approval number

ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG, FRIEDRICHSHAFEN/DE ZF-ECOFLUID HV SAE 80W-90 ZF003444
Page 15 of 15
21 Annex
21.2 Intarder
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 581

2019-10_EN
Operating Manual
The integrated retarder for

trucks and buses with
ZF transmissions
ECU 42 control unit
6085 758 102a
Subject to alterations in design
Copyright by ZF
The present documentation is protected by copyright. Any

kind of reproduction or dissemination in whatever form
that does not exclusively correspond to documentation
objectives will be prosecuted if no prior approval by ZF
Friedrichshafen AG was granted.
Printed in Germany
ZF Friedrichshafen AG, MC-C / 2004-03
Edition: 2004-03
TRUCK:
Ecosplit New Ecosplit

16 S 151 IT 16 S 1621 TD
16 S 1821 TO
16 S 181 IT 16 S 1921 TD
16 S 2221 TO
16 S 221 IT 16 S 2221 TD
16 S 2521 TO
16 S 251 IT 16 S 2721 TO
Ecomid
9 S 109 IT
16 S 109 IT
AS Tronic
12 AS 2301 IT 12 AS 1631 TD
12 AS 1931 TD
12 AS 1931 TO
12 AS 2131 TO
12 AS 2331 TO
16 AS 2601 IT 16 AS 2231 TD
16 AS 2631 TO
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 3

BUS:
8 S 180 IT 8 S 2101 BD
8 S 2101 BO
6 S 1600 IT 6 S 1601 BD
horizontal on the right 6 S 1701 BO
and heat exchanger at 6 S 1901 BO
bottom
6 S 1600 IT 6 S 1601 BD
vertical 6 S 1701 BO
heat exchanger on the 6 S 1901 BO
right
6 S 1600 IT 6 S 1601 BD
horizontal on the right 6 S 1701 BO
and heat exchanger on 6 S 1901 BO
the right
10 AS 2010 B IT 10 AS 2001 BD
10 AS 2310 B IT 10 AS 2001 BO
10 AS 2301 BD
10 AS 2301 BO
10 AS 2701 BO
12 AS 2000 B IT 12 AS 2001 BO
12 AS 2300 B IT 12 AS 2301 BO
12 AS 2701 BO
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 4

Preface
Before first starting up the ZF Intarder, we would ask Specialists from the Customer Service department are
drivers to: available to you for maintenance work and if any
problems arise on the transmission and ZF-Intarder. You
· carefully read through these operating instructions so can find the individual addresses in the “ZF directory of
that the Intarder can be used correctly and effectively. companies” (order no. 0000 762 703) which we would be
more than happy to send out to you on request.
· observe the maintenance instructions to ensure that
the Intarder is operated correctly. NOTE
This operating manual deals with the standard version.
· note the special information provided by the Customer-specific modifications are possible.
vehicle manufacturer. The details in this are
binding in all cases.
We wish you a pleasant journey with your ZF-Intarder
Commercial Vehicle Driveline Technology Division
D-88038 Friedrichshafen
Telephone: +49 75 41 77-0
Telefax: +49 75 41 77-908000
Internet: www.zf.com
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 5

Safety Notice
The following safety instructions appear in this operating

! THREATS TO THE ENVIRONMENT!
manual:
Lubricants and cleaning agents must not be allowed
to enter the soil, ground water or sewage system.
NOTE • Ask your local environment agency for
Refers to special processes, techniques, data, etc. safety information on the relevant products
and adhere to their requirements.
• Collect used oil in a suitably large container.
CAUTION • Dispose of used oil, dirty filters, lubricants
This is used when incorrect, unprofessional working and cleaning agents in accordance with
practices could damage the product. environmental protection guidelines.
• When working with lubricants and cleaning agents,
always refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
! DANGER !
This is used when lack of care could lead to personal
injury or death.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 6

Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.1 Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1 Intarder Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 4.2 Instruction Plate on Oil Overflow Plug . . . . . . . . . 28
4.2.1Instruction Plate on Oil Drain Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 4.3 Type Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.4 Draining Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4.5 Truck Oil Drain, Oil Overflow and
Oil Fill Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 Initial Start-Up at Low Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4.6 Bus Oil Drain, Oil Fill and Oil
3.2 Intarder Master Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Overflow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.3 Intarder Monitoring Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 4.7 Oil Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.4 “Constant” Brake Step Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.8 Oil Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.5 Bremsomat Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 4.9 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.5.1 ZF Brake Step Lever (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4.10 Bleeding the Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.6 Bremsomatic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Truck Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.6.1 ZF Brake Step Lever (Bremsomatic) . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Bus Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.7 Flash Code Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.8 Flash Code Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 7

Intarder Savety Notice
1 General Intarder Safety Notice Using the Intarder does not affect how your transmis-
sion functions.
– When the clutch is separated (to change gear), the
! DANGER ! Intarder’s braking force remains in place (and is not
Use the Intarder very cautiously in the event of: reduced).
black ice, wet road surfaces, unladen vehicle, just
tractor operations. If your vehicle has an engine brake, this can be
engaged in addition to the Intarder.
RISK OF ACCIDENT!
CAUTION
Your vehicle may skid. Before and while travelling downhill, ensure that your
engine speed does not fall to below n = 1600 rpm. Only
Vehicles without ABS equipment have a greater risk of briefly depress the clutch to change gear. Do not travel down-
skidding as a result of unintentional Intarder operating hill in idling mode or with the clutch depressed otherwise
errors. To prevent this from happening, switch off the sufficient cooling of the engine coolant is not ensured.
Intarder’s master switch.
– If necessary, downshift by one gear to increase the engine
speed and therefore the water pump and fan output.
If your vehicle is fitted with an ABS or EBS braking If the max. coolant temperature is nevertheless reached, the
system, then Intarder brake actions are interrupted Intarder electronics automatically govern the Intarder back
while the ABS/EBS system is active. to the maximum permissible level of brake torque
The last Intarder operating mode activated is subse- (Intarder governing).
quently reactivated.
– The driver must take this reduced braking power into
account and change his/her driving style (gear
changes, engine brake or service brake) accordingly.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 9

Description
2 Description
3
The ZF-Intarder is an additional brake integrated in the
transmission which functions hydro-
dynamically and with no wear.
It reduces wear of the wheel brakes

• when braking from high roadspeeds
• when travelling on downhill stretches
The ZF-Intarder is conducive to more consistent and more

cost-effective driving styles.
The advantages of the ZF-Intarder are:

• high braking power
001 537
• short response times
• shares oil supply with the transmission
21 22 23
and therefore one common oil change
Fig. 1
• low weight
Structure of the ZF-Intarder taking the example of a ZF-
• low constant transmission operating Ecosplit transmission: 3 = Transmission output flange
temperatures due to integrated, constant cooling 21 = Spur gear stage
22 = Stator
23 = Rotor
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 11

Operation
3 Operation • At outside temperatures of below –20 °C,

a warm-up phase is needed for the
3.1 Initial Vehicle Start-Up at Low Temperatures transmission once the engine has been start-
ed.
The transmission and Intarder must be filled with an oil The engine must be run at low speed in the
listed in the ZF List of Lubricants TE-ML 02. It can then be partial load range until the transmission oil
used down to an outside temperature of below - 40 °C (also has warmed up.
refer to 3.1.1).
The following points should be noted: • At outside temperatures of below –30 °C,
warm air should be used to warm up the
transmission to a temperature of at least
! DANGER –30 °C before the engine is started. Ensure
When leaving the vehicle with the engine running, that a temperature of 150 °C is not
close the parking brake. This prevents the vehicle exceeded on the transmission.
from accidently starting to roll.
NOTE
It is essential that the vehicle manufacturer’s instructions
are observed.
3.1.1 Vehicle Applications at Persistent Low Tempera-

tures of Between 0 °C and –60 °C
The relevant oil grades should be used at

persistent low temperatures.
Refer to TE-ML 02 for low temperatures.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 13

Operation
3.2 Intarder Master Switch 3.3 Intarder monitoring display
The master switch (98) is used to switch the Intarder on or The Intarder monitoring display lights up during
off. This can even be done during travel. The master Bremsomat operations if the Intarder is active and when
switch is fitted on the dash panel. in constant brake steps.
NOTE
Fig 2 Fittings (example) Check whether the Intarder functions match the light
displays described below.
When the ignition has been switched on and when the

Intarder master switch is in the “ON” position, the In-
tarder system automatically checks that the monitoring
display is functioning.
Monitoring display lights up for 3 sec.

013 622
If there is a defect in the electric system, the

95 = Intarder monitoring display monitoring display flashes when the Intarder is
91 = Brake step lever switched on.
98 = Intarder master switch
Take your vehicle to the nearest specialist ZF workshop.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 14

Operation
For error code output via flash code, refer to 3.7
In addition to its normal function, the Intarder

monitoring display is used to output the flash code (error
number), refer to section 3.7, Flash Code Output.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 15

Constant Brake Step Mode
3.4 Constant Brake Step Mode
The Intarder’s braking efficiency increases constantly

between the first and last brake stage according to the
0
lever position.
B
The “constant brake steps” function produces intentional 1 B = Bremsomat
vehicle braking (relieves the service brake system). 2 1-5 = Constant brake step mode
3
• Activating “constant” brake step mode 012 899
4
Move the brake step lever to a position between 1 and 5m
ax.
max.
The vehicle is constantly braked in accordance with the
position selected.
in Position 1 = slight braking to

in Position max. = high-level braking
0
B
1 B = Bremsomatic
2 1-4 = Constant brake step mode
3
4m
021 624 ax.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 16

Constant Brake Step Mode
• Deactivating “constant” brake step mode

Move the brake step lever either
into position 0 or
0
into position B = BREMSOMAT function and/or
BREMSOMATIC function B
Applications depends on the vehicle 1 B = Bremsomat
manufacturer). 2 1-5 = Constant brake step mode
3
NOTES 012 899
4
If the braking power needed is greater than the maxi- 5m
ax.
mum braking power of the Intarder, the engine or ser-
vice brake should also be activated.
See section 1 General Intarder Safety Notice
0
B
1 B = Bremsomatic
2 1-4 = Constant brake step mode
3
021 624
4m
ax.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 17

Bremsomat Function
3.5 BREMSOMAT Function

(The way in which the Bremsomat functions
depends on the vehicle)
You can use this function to keep your vehicle’s roadspeed

constant when travelling downhill. You set the value at
which you want to keep the speed.
The Intarder electronics automatically set the braking
torque needed for this.
The Bremsomat function is automatically interrupted
when the accelerator is depressed and the current road-
speed is set once the accelerator is released again.
NOTES
If when travelling downhill the braking power needed
is greater than the maximum braking power of the
Intarder, the engine or service brake should also be
activated.
If the current roadspeed is less than the speed set, the
Intarder remains off. Once the roadspeed returns to the
value saved, the Intarder is again activated.
CAUTION
When programming the Bremsomat and cruise control
functions at the same time, ensure that the roadspeed set
for cruise control is lower than that selected for
Bremsomat operations.
If this is not done, the functions will be working against

one another.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 18
Bremsomat Operation
3.5.1 ZF Brake step lever (standard) NOTE

If the brake step lever is returned to position B once con-
stant brake step mode has been
activated, then automatic speed control takes effect using
0
the current roadspeed.
B
1 B = Bremsomat • Cancelling the Bremsomat function:
2 1-5 = Constant brake step Move brake step lever either
mode into position 0 or
3
into position 1 - 5 (= constant brake step mode).
012 899
4 into position B and depress accelerator
5 (as soon as the accelerator is no longer depressed, the
Bremsomat function is reactivated with the new cur-
BREMSOMAT = roadspeed constant on downhill slopes rent roadspeed).
• Setting and maintaining a roadspeed:
Select step B = activate Bremsomat → Monitoring display OFF:
in position 0
The current roadspeed is now saved in the always when Intarder is not active
electronics and maintained during downhill travel.
When in Bremsomat mode, the braking torque gradually
and automatically adjusts to that required.
Monitoring display: lights up continuously when

Intarder is active
The Bremsomat function only operates in step B.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 19

Bremsomatic Function
3.6 Bremsomatic Function

(The way in which the Bremsomat functions
depends on the vehicle)
Function same as Bremsomat in position B, but the cur-

rent roadspeed is set once the accelerator, brake pedal or
engine brake is released.
Advantages of the Bremsomatic:
• Cruise control and Bremsomatic cannot work against

one another.
• The brake step lever remains in position B.
Constant manual interventions on the brake step lever
are not needed.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 20

Bremsomatic Operation
3.6.1 ZF-Brake Step Lever (Bremsomatic) NOTE

If the brake step lever is returned to position B once con-
stant brake step mode has been
0 activated, then automatic speed control takes effect using
B the current roadspeed.
1 B = Bremsomatic
1-4 = Constant brake step mode • Cancelling the Bremsomat function:
2 Move brake step lever either
3
into position 0 or
4
021 624
into position 1-4 (= constant brake step mode)
• Changing roadspeed and saving new value:

BREMSOMATIC = roadspeed constant in downhill Change the roadspeed by depressing the
stretches
• Setting and maintaining a roadspeed: accelerator or
Select step B = activate Bremsomatic brake pedal or
engine brake
The current roadspeed is now saved in the
electronics and maintained during downhill travel. and the new roadspeed is automatically saved.
In Bremsomatic mode, the braking torque
gradually and automatically adjusts to that required.
The Bremsomatic function only operates in step B.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 21

Flash Code Output
3.7 Flash Code Output and Deleting Error Memory
Flash code (error number) output and deletion of the error 4. Move the brake step lever to two steps below the
memory can triggered using the brake step lever. The flash max. brake step (in this case position 3) and then
code is output via the Intarder monitoring display. move it back to the position one step below the max.
brake step (in this case position 4) within the next
Triggering flash code output 5 seconds.
Example using 5-step brake step lever. 5. Wait for the flash code output (refer to: “Functions of
the Intarder monitoring display”.
1. Switch off ignition.
2. Move brake step lever to one step below the max. In addition to its normal function, the Intarder monitoring
brake step, in this case position 4. display is also used to output the flash code (error
3. Switch ignition on and wait for the Intarder numbers).
monitoring display to light up continuously If flash code output is triggered via the brake step lever,
(3 seconds) or flash (5 seconds). the error numbers saved in the error memory are output in
order once the lamp test has been completed and/or once
(if an error is present).
Example taking error number 23
lamp test Double-figure point Single-figure point
ON
OFF
3 5 1 1 1 3 12 ... 12 5 t s
019 638
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 22

Delete the Error Memory
Deleting the Error Memory
1. Switch ignition off.

2. Move brake step lever to position 4
(max. position -1).
3. Switch ignition on and wait for Intarder
monitoring display to light up permanently
(3 seconds) or flash (5 seconds).
4. Within the next 5 seconds, move the brake step lever
into position 3 (max. position -2), back to position 4
(max. position -1) and then to position 0.
5. All errors to be displayed via flash code output are
deleted for flash code output.
Only those errors from the control unit which impair

function can be called up using the flash code output.
Errors which have no impact whatsoever on control unit
functions can only be called up using an external
diagnosis unit.
Deleting the error memory with the aid of the brake step
lever makes the errors entered in the error memory
invisible for flash code output. All errors can still be seen
when using an external diagnosis device and remain
visible until deleted using the diagnosis device.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 23

Flash Code Error List
3.8 Flash Code Error List
NOTE
This error list is a “reduced summary” of all the error memory of the ZF control unit (ECU) for
possible individual errors. Types of errors, such as optimum diagnosis. Please contact your nearest ZF
open circuit and/or short circuit can be called up in Service Center for more details.
Error code Meaning

11 El. defect - accumulator charge valve
12 El. defect - engine brake activation
13 El. defect - Intarder monitoring display activation
14 El. defect - “Reduced power” warning light activation
15 El. defect - brake lights activation
16 El. defect - fault lamp activation
17 El. defect - cruise control deactivation during constant brake step operation
18 El. defect - brake step lever supply
19 El. defect - proportional solenoid (AIP) activation
21 El. defect - prop. solenoid return (ADM1)
23 Proportional solenoid error (control unit / ECU internal)
24 LED lamp activation (brake step lever defect)
25 El. defect - Bremsomat activation, disengagement when Bremsomat is active
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 24

Error code Meaning

26 Flash code lights activation defective
31 El. defect - speed sensor
32 El. defect - temperature sensor
33 Brake step lever inputs not verifiable
34 El. defect - engine speed sensor
41 CAN message, EEC2 defective
42 CAN message, TSC1 defective
43 Send error, CAN messages
44 CAN BUS off
45 CAN message, EBC1 defective
46 Communication error, CAN messages
47 CAN message, EEC1 defective
48 CAN message, TCO1
49 CAN message, CCVS defective
51 Engine brake, CAN message, ERC1 defective
52 CAN message, ETC1 defective
53 CAN message, ETP defective
54 On-board computer, CAN message, ERC1 defective
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 25

Error code Meaning

55 On-board computer, CAN message, TSC1 defective
56 CAN message, TIME/DATE defective
57 CAN message, HRVD
58 CAN message, ABS defective (IES-ID 512)
59 CAN message, FMR1 defective (IES-ID 592)
61 CAN message, FMR2 defective (IES-ID 593)
62 CAN message, EPS1 defective (IES-ID 556)
63 CAN message, BC_DR
64 ExtensionBox, CAN message, TSC1
65 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), CAN message, TSC1
66 Transmission 2, CAN message, ETC1 defective
67 CAN message, EPS2 defective (IES-ID 557)
71 Open circuit, term. 30
72 Undervoltage / overvoltage, term. 15
81 Parameter setting defective
82 Loss of operating hours counter
83 Loss of error memory
84 Error, Intarder control unit (ECU)
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 26

Maintenance
4 Maintenance NOTES
In order to prevent incorrect measurements, the oil
CAUTION level on transmissions fitted with a ZF-Intarder must be
This maintenance section SUPERSEDES the correspon- checked with
ding sections of the maintenance instructions for your – the vehicle horizontal
transmission. – the engine off
– cooled transmission oil (< 40 °C).
Regularly check the oil level.
4.1 Oil Level Check During the check, look out for leaks on the:
– transmission,
– Intarder,
! DANGER ! – oil/water heat exchanger,
Too little oil in the transmission will cause trans- – associated coolant pipes.
mission damage:
Risk of accident! CHECK:
• Stop and park the vehicle without activating the
Intarder.
CAUTION • The oil overflow plug, item 4 should be opened during
To check the oil level, the Intarder must not be activated the oil level check.
just before the vehicle is stopped. • If the oil level is below the edge of the oil
This ensures that the transmission has the correct oil overflow aperture, oil must be topped up at the oil
volume. overflow aperture until it overflows.
Screw oil overflow plug (4) back in with new seal (for
tightening torque, refer to pages 41 and 42).
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 27

Maintenance
4.2 Instruction Plate on Oil Overflow Plug 4.2.1 Instruction Plate on Oil Drain Plug
(only with synthetic oil fill)
There is an instruction plate for oil changes on the oil
overflow plug. There is an instruction plate on the oil drain plug bearing
the inscription: Warning synthetic oil fill - oil change
This plate must not be removed from the oil interval has changed.
overflow plug.
This plate may only be removed from the oil drain plug if
synthetic oils are no longer being used.
Warning: Other oil change intervals then apply depending
on the lubricant classes for transmissions fitted with a ZF-
Intarder in accordance with List of Lubricants TE-ML 02.
OIL CHANGE
List of Lubricants
TE-ML 02
1.
FILL UP TO
OVERFLOW
2.
TEST RUN WITHOUT
ACTUATING THE
RETARDER
3.
FILL AGAIN UP TO
OVERFLOW
ATTENTION
019496 en
FILLED
WITH
SYNTHETIC
OIL
DIFFERENT
OIL CHANGE
INTERVALS
019354 en
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 28

Maintenance
4.3 Type Plate
The type plate contains important Intarder data. It can be

found to the side of the Intarder housing.
The following items MUST be specified when making

enquires, placing orders or undertaking repair work:
1. Type of transmission
2. Intarder parts list no.
3. Serial no. of Intarder
4. Oil volume
5. List of lubricants
ZF FRIEDRICHSHAFEN AG
MADE IN GERMANY
1
MODEL
PARTS LIST NO. SERIAL - NO.
2 3
CUSTOMER
SPEC. NO
TOTAL SPEEDO
RATIO RATIO
xn
P.T.O. N n= ENGINE
OIL CAPACITY OIL GRADE SEE
IN LTS. LUBRIC. LIST TE-ML
4 5
Example of type plate
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 29

Maintenance
4.4 Draining Oil ! DANGER !

Hot transmission oil:
CAUTION
RISK OF BURNING
The Intarder must NOT be activated just before stopping
the vehicle for an oil change.
This ensures that the correct oil change volume is used.
• Once the oil has been drained, the drain screws
(solenoids) must be cleaned and the seals replaced.
NOTE
When changing the oil, the oil must be drained into a
• Insert new filter.
suitable container and disposed of in accordance with
environmental legislation.
• Then screw the drain plugs back in.
Always: Undertake oil change after a long journey
while the transmission oil is still warm and thin.
CAUTION
Observe the specified tightening torques on the table on
• Stop vehicle in horizontal position and switch off
pages 41 and 42 (TA) for the drain plugs; otherwise trans-
engine.
mission damage is possible.
• To drain the oil, the drain plug on the transmission
(item 1) and the drain plug on the oil filter housing
(item 2) should be unscrewed.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 30

Truck Maintenance: Oil Drain, Oil Fill and Oil Overflow Plugs
4.5 Truck - Oil Drain, Oil Fill and Oil Overflow Plugs Alternatively, the heat exchanger in truck transmissions
may be fitted horizontally at the bottom. Oil maintenance
Fig. 1 2 3 points depend on the transmission type.
e.g.
Ecosplit
transmission
and New-Ecosplit
1
009 552
004 702
1 = Transmission oil drain point
9
2 = Intarder housing oil drain point
3 = Intarder housing oil filter cover
4 = Oil overflow plug and oil filling after oil change
9 = Oil fill plug after repairs
004 703
For tightening torques, refer to table on page 41

4
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 31
Fig. 2 e.g. Alternatively, the heat exchanger in truck transmissions

Ecomid transmissions 9/16 S 109 with ZF-Intarder may be fitted horizontally at the bottom.
(viewed from below) Oil maintenance points depend on the transmission type.
019 457 3
019 456

9
4
2
019 484
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 32

Fig. 3 Alternatively, the heat exchanger in truck transmissions

AS Tronic transmission – e.g. may be fitted horizontally at the bottom.
12 AS 2301/ 16 AS 2601 Oil maintenance points depend on the transmission type.
(with ZF-Intarder)
Viewed from below

3 2
1 004 512
009 552
9

004 511 9 = Oil fill plug after repairs
4
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 33

Bus Maintenance: Oil Drain, Oil Fill and Oil Overflow Plugs
4.6 Bus - Oil Drain, Oil Fill and Oil Overflow Plugs
Fig 4
Transmission 8 S 2101 BD/BO with ZF-INTARDER
004 714
4
004 705
9

1 3 = Intarder housing oil filter cover
2 4 = Oil overflow plug and oil filling after oil change

3 9 = Oil fill plug after repairs
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 34

Fig. 5
Transmission 6 S 1600 IT
Heat exchanger at bottom
6 S 1601 BD, 6 S 1701 BO, 6 S 1901 BO
9
4
3
150
013907
009 413
1 1 = Transmission oil drain point
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 35

Fig. 6
Transmission 6 S 1600 IT
9
Heat exchanger on the right
6 S 1601 BD, 6 S 1701 BO, 6 S 1901 BO
019 432

019 459
1 2 3
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 36

Fig 7
Transmission 10 AS 2301 BO, 10 AS 2310 B IT
9
4
1 2 013 609
013 610

3 9 = Oil fill plug after repairs

013 742
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 37

Maintenance
4.7 Oil Filter Change

NOTE: Use new oil filter for each oil change (for order no., refer to table on pages 41 and 42).
! DANGER: Hot transmission oil: risk of burning.

ZF-Ecosplit / ZF-AS Tronic ZF-Ecomid / ZF-6 S 1600
Unscrew plug (10) from oil filter housing cover (3).
Remove cover (3) with filter Remove cover (3) and pull
attached. filter out of filer housing.
Take oil filter off filter cover.
10
3 000 529 (CAUTION: there will some 10 3 019 485
residual oil in the oil filter housing)

Check O-ring (8) on filter cover for damage
and replace and grease.
Securely attach solenoid (5) to the new filter.
When using new filter, grease the O-ring (7).
Attach oil filter housing cover Insert new filter (6) in filter
000 552 004 707
(3) to the new filter (6). housing. 6 8
Insert complete unit until
firmly home in the filter
housing.
Use screws (10) to fit cover (3). For tightening torques,
3 8 7 6 5 refer to table on pages 41 and 42.
7 6 5 004 467
004 467
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 38

Maintenance
4.8 Oil Filling

after oil change after repairs
NOTE
Only fill transmission and Intarder when vehicle is stationary and horizontal
and engine is switched off. Drain off oil. For oil grade and volume, refer to table on pages 41 and 42.
Open oil overflow plug (4). Open oil fill plug (9).
Fill transmission until oil overflows. Fill with oil at pos. 9.
Screw in oil overflow plug (4) with new seal. Screw in oil fill plug (9) with new seal.
For tightening torque, refer to table on pages 41 - 42.

Undertake test run: distance 2-5 km
Test run: Test run:

Do NOT activate Intarder. Activate Intarder BRIEFLY ONCE at the start (max. stage)
and return to position 0.
End of test run:

Vehicle stationary. Do not activate Intarder. Open oil overflow plug (4).
Do not remove instruction plate.
CAUTION
Check oil level again and if necessary, top up oil until it overflows.
Use new seal to close oil overflow plug (4) again.
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 39

Maintenance
4.9 Engine Coolant 4.10 Bleeding the Transmission
CAUTION Differences in pressure are rectified by a bleed valve.

When topping up the engine coolant, instructions provid-
ed by the vehicle manufacturer MUST be observed. Oth- NOTE
erwise, the oil/water heat exchanger may be damaged. Ensure that valve is functioning correctly. The breather
must be clean and not feature a plastic
• Engine coolant cover. Do not spray directly with compressed water (water
(mixture of fresh water and antifreeze-corrosion pro- in transmission – risk of corrosion).
tection agent)
– The recommended volume of antifreeze-corrosion
protection agent:
35 - 50 vol. %, should be checked using a coolant
tester
Antifreeze-corrosion protection agent

Basic fluid: ethylene glycol with corrosion
protection inhibitors
Fresh water
pH value of 6.5 -8.0; total hardness 3-10° dH
• Interval for changing oil coolant:
max. 2 years (mix liquids before filling)
NOTE
If sludge starts to form or if the concentration suddenly
falls, the coolant must be replaced immediately. 004 711
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 40

Truck Maintenance
Oil volume after Tightening torque [Nm]

Product- oil change repairs for position Oil Oil change
family Transm. type approx. approx.* 1 2 4 9 10 Filter no. grade interval
Ecosplit 16 S 151 IT
New Ecosplit 16 S 1621 TD 11.0 dm3 18.5 dm3 M 38
16 S 1821 TO 120
16 S 181 IT 16 S1921 TD or 60 60 60 23
M 24
16 S 2221 TO
12.0 dm3 21.5 dm3 60
16 S 221 IT 16 S 2221 TD In accordance
6085 298 026

16 S 2521 TO with List of
16 S 251 IT 16 S 2721 TO 12.5 dm3 22.0 dm3 In accor- Lubricants
dance with TE-ML 02
Ecomid List of
12.0 dm3 21.0 dm3 120 60 60 60 46
9 S 109 IT Lubricants corresponding
16 S 109 IT 12.5 dm3 22.0 dm3 TE-ML 02 to trans-
mission type
AS Tronic with
12 AS 2301 IT 12 AS 1631 TD ZF-Intarder
12 AS 1931 TD 12.0 dm3 21.0 dm3
12 AS 1931 TO 60 60 60 60 23
12 AS 2131 TO
12 AS 2331 TD
16 AS 2601 IT 16 AS 2231 TD 13.0 dm3 23.0 dm3
16 AS 2631 TO
1 = Transmission oil drain point; 2 = Intarder housing oil drain point; 4 = Oil overflow plug and oil filling after oil change;
9 = Oil fill plug after repairs; 10 = Screws for oil filter cover, Intarder
*If the heat exchanger is fitted horizontally, the oil volume increases by 1 dm3
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 41
Bus Maintenance
Oil volume after Tightening torque for [Nm]

Product- oil change repairs for position Filter Oil Oil change
family Transm. type approx. approx. 1 2 4 9 10 no. grade intervals
8 S 180 IT 8 S 2101 BD 12.0 dm3 21.0 dm3 120 60 60 60 46

8 S 2101 BO
6 S 1600 IT 6 S 1601 BD
horizontal, right 6 S 1701 BO
heat exchanger 6 S 1901 BO 13.5 dm3 21.5 dm3 120 - 60 60 46 In accordance
at bottom with List of
In accor- Lubricants
6 S 1600 IT 6 S 1601 BD
6085 298 026

dance with TE-ML 02
horizontal, right 6 S 1701 BO List of
19.0 dm3 25.0 dm3 120 60 60 60 46
heat exch, right 6 S 1901 BO Lubricants corresponding
10 AS 2010 B IT 10 AS 2001 BD TE-ML 02 to trans-
10 AS 2310 B IT 10 AS 2001 BO mission type
10 AS 2301 BD with
10 AS 2301 BO ZF-Intarder
10 AS 2701 BO
12 AS 2000 B IT 12 AS 2001 BO 12.0 dm3 21.0 dm3 60 60 60 60 23
12 AS 2300 B IT 12 AS 2301 BO
12 AS 2701 BO
1 = Transmission oil drain point; 2 = Intarder housing oil drain point: 4 = Oil overflow plug and oil filling after oil change;
9 = Oil fill plug after repairs; 10 = Screws for oil filter cover, Intarder
6085 758 102 - 2004-03 42

21 Annex

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 621

2019-10_EN
Integrated electronic controller
Type BEKA-troniX1
Contents: Page Electronic pump EP-1 with integrated controller BEKA-troniX1:

General information:
1. Functional features and installation dimensions 1
2. Function sequence 2
3. Method of operation 3
4. Adjusting the parameters 4
Supplementary functions: 5
5. Excess pressure valve with micro switch 6
6. Grease level controller 7
Summaries:
7. Signal indicators 8
8. Terminal diagram 9
9. Ordering key for pump 10
10. Retrofitting 11
11. Ordering key for integrated controller 12
1. General information:
The BEKA-troniX1 controller generation is a new design of

units in an integrated mould for the EP family of pumps.
The controlling device is fitted with a database, that saves Installation dimensions:
the following values:
The electrical pump EP-1 with integrated controller BEKA-
– Controlling type troniX1 can be equipped with various reservoir versions.
– Controller version For the installation dimensions of the reservoir versions,
– Serial Number see the description EP-1.
– Manufacturing date
– Method of operation (controlling according to
time or revolutions)
– Set values (adjusting ranges)
The following modes can be selected for the controller by

© BEKA 2012 All rights reserved!
means of the diagnostic software BEKA-DiSys:

176
A) Time controlling
B) Revolution controlling
172 140
239
322
Subject to alterations!
MU2175001112EN
1
BEKA-troniX1
2. Function sequence
Whatever program is being used, once the ignition has BEKA-troniX1 integrated electronic controller:
been switched on the green and the red LED or the green
and the red signal lamp (optional) lights up on the control
panel for 1.5 sec. and shows that the controller is
operational (activation control).
Every time the controller is activated for the first time, a

lubrication process begins. The green LED in the control
half shell is lit during the entire lubrication procedure.
The BEKA-troniX1 integrated electronic controlling device

has memory at its disposal. This also serves to keep a Button for
record of time elapsed. Should the ignition be switched off activating
during lubrication or operational pauses occur, then the interim
time is stopped and recorded. Once the ignition is switched lubrication
on again the remaining lubrication or pause time is read
from the memory and the sequence will be resumed where
it was interrupted.
Red LED showing faults
At any time when the ignition is on, an interim lubrication Green LED showing function
occurs when the button on the side of the pump motor
housing or the illuminated button on the control panel is Technical data for the controller:
activated, this serves as a check of functionality. The pump Operating voltage: 10 to 60 V DC
then immediately starts its lubrication cycle, the lubrication Maximum current load: I = 6,0 A
or cycle duration recorded up to that point is reset and starts Fuse (not included in device): F 6,3 A (5x20) medium
from the beginning. slow-blow fuse
Signal lamp outlet: I = 0,4 A
An interim lubrication can also be triggered via an external Temperature range: -35°C to +75°C
button, and the indication of the red and green LEDs can Degree of protection: IP 65
also be displayed by a red and green signal lamp in the
driver´s cab. Before the electrical connection:
Observe the voltage of the pump motor.
An error can be reset by pressing the interim lubrication
button and the pump starts the lubrication process anew.
The lamp on the illuminated button (green) shows the

functionality of the controller and the current lubrication
sequence.
2
BEKA-troniX1
3. Method of operation
A) Time controller:
When the central lubrication processor is time controlled, Diagram of cycle sequence:
the cycle duration and the lubrication time can be adjusted.
Cycle duration means the period from the beginning of one
lubrication process to the beginning of another lubrication
Lubrication time
process.
Cycle duration
B) Revolution controller:
In the case of revolution fluctuations at lower temperatures If no signal is received from the pump motor for longer than
or high torque, the lubrication duration for the BEKA- the adjustable monitoring time (standard 30 sec.) after the
troniX1 integrated electronic controller is determined by the lubricating process has begun, the controller will indicate a
number of pump motor revolutions. fault.
The pump motor is connected to the controller via sliding The red LED in the pump´s lower motor casing or an
contacts. With every engine revolution a signal is sent to the externally attached signal lamp (optional) start to flash.
controller, which counts the incoming signals.
3
BEKA-troniX1
4. Adjusting the parameters
The cycle time or lubrication time and the number of BEKA-troniX1 integrated electronic controller:
revolutions can be adjusted by means of rotary code
switches in the controller´s sight glass.
To adjust the time setting, remove the red frame on the

pump´s motor housing using a flat screwdriver, loosen the
four Phillips screws and remove the transparent protective
cover.
The cycle duration or lubrication time can be adjusted by
using a flat screwdriver.
System analysis
If the cover plate is not replaced properly, water may enter
port
the controller and damage it. In this case, the guarantee is
no longer valid.
The modes and the adjusting ranges can be changed over

by means of the diagnostic software BEKA-DiSys, even on
site if the controller has already been operated before.
Rotary code switch for setting the cycle duration

All adjusting ranges for the lubrication period and all cycle Rotary code switch for setting the lubricating duration
time ranges can be combined at random.
Adjusting the parameters:
Lubrication times: Cycle duration:

1 to 16 min. (16 notches every 1 min.) 0.5 to 8 h (16 notches every 0.5 h)
2 to 32 min. (16 notches every 2 min.) 2 to 32 min. (16 notches every 2 min.)
2 to 32 sec. (16 notches every 2 sec.) 2 to 32 h (16 notches every 2 h)
Revolutions of pump:
1 to 16 revolutions (16 notches every 1 revolution)
10 to 160 revolutions (16 notches every 10 revolutions)
170 to 320 revolutions (16 notches every 10 revolutions)
When changing the activation modes and the adjusting

ranges, the label in the controller window must be
replaced.
To this effect, a label kit consisting of 18 different label

version is available; these can also be ordered individually
afterwards.
Ref.-no. for label kit: 0490000342 German
Ref.-no. for label kit: 0490030343 English
4
BEKA-troniX1
Additional equipment
The integrated electronic controller BEKA-troniX1 can be Excess pressure valve with micro switch on the pump
supplied with two additional functions: element and grease level controller, built into electronic
pump EP-1:
- System excess pressure monitoring
- Grease level monitoring
The additional equipment can be attached to the BEKA-

troniX1 controller with any selected program.
In case of a version with additional functions, besides the

bayonet connector, two additional four-pole plug-and-
socket connectors are located in the lower part of the motor
casing.
These additional functions cannot be enabled

subsequently in case controllers have been supplied
without the as the plug-and-socket connectors at the lower
part of the motor casing are missing.
The additional plug-and-socket connectors and the cables

of the corresponding switches are marked by colors. Plug-and-socket
The plug-and-socket connector with the green ring serves connectors for
to connect the system pressure monitoring system. The additional functions
plug-and-socket connector with the red ring serves to
connect the grease level monitoring system. View of the integrated electronic controller BEKA-troniX1
Plug-and-socket connectors which are not connected must from below:
be closed using a cover.
The additional functions to the controller can be specified in

the order.
Cover to close an unused plug-and-socket connector for green

the supplementary functions of the integrated electronic marking ring
controller BEKA-troniX1:
Order-no.: 1000913004 red marking ring

5
BEKA-troniX1
5. System excess pressure monitoring
With the BEKA-troniX1 integrated electronic controller, the Excess pressure valve with micro switch on the pump
maximum operating pressure of progressive lubrication element, built into electronic pump EP-1:
system can be monitored.
Micro switch
For this puropose a micro switch has been attached to the
excess pressure valve of pump element.
Should a fault occur in the system, e.g. a blockage at the
point of lubrication, a pressure of more than 250 bar builds
up. A micro switch in the excess pressure valve is activated
and sends a signal to the controller. This switches the pump
off and the fault is indicated by the flashing red LED and
permanent illumination of the green LED or the externally
attached signal lamps.
Technical data for the micro switch:
Operating voltage: 10 to 60 V DC
Maximum current load: I = 1,7A
Contact type: 1 changer Connection to the controller:
Temperature range: -25°C to +85°C
Degree of protection: IP 67
Connection: Cable, length 0.5 m, heat-sealed
with 4-pole right-angle plug
Specify in the order whether the micro-switch is to be

delivered connected to the controller.
If the micro-switch is to be connected to another control
unit, e. g. PLC, an additional cable can be ordered in differnt
lengths (see description EP-1). It can be connected to the
cable heat-sealed to the micro-switch.
The pressure monitoring system can be attached to the green
BEKA-troniX1 controller with any selected program. marking
Pressure relief valves with micro switches can be retrofitted ring
and connected to the controller if it has been ordered with
additional features. Connection to the controller is effected via the four-pole

plug-and-socket connector marked with a green ring, to the
Excess pressure valves with micro-switches required for pump motor´s lower casing; to this effect, the contact plug
replacement can be ordered individually: cover must be removed.
Pressure relief valve with microswitch for PE-120: Pressure relief valve with microswitch for PE-120 V:
Order no: 2152 99115 Order no: 2152 99116:
approx. 99,8
approx. 99,8
M14x1,5
approx. 34,7
G1/4”
BEKA-troniX1
6. Grease level controller
The integrated electronic controller BEKA-troniX1 Grease level controller built in to the 2,5 kg reservoir of an
facilitates monitoring of the grease level in the storage tank. EP-1 central greasing pump:
For purpose a capacitive proximity switch has been built in
to the pump´s reservoir.
As long as there is enough grease available in the reservoir,
the proximity switch sends a signal to the controller. If the
grease level sinks below minimum the proximity switch
turns the signal off.
If the signal remain off for more than 10 sec. then the
controller switches the pump off, so that no air is pumped
into the system.
The red LED on the controller display, situated on the
pump´s motor housing or a built-in red signal lamp, if
available, starts to illuminate.
Once the grease has been refilled, the controller restarts
itself.
The grease level controller can be ordered connected to the

controller; in this case, a connecting cable, length 0,6 mm,
with a right-angle plug M12x1 for connection to the plug- Connection to the controller:
and-socket connector and a right-angle plug M12x1 for
Connection cable
connection to the controller is included in the scope of
length 0.6 m
supplies. The grease level monitoring system is activated.
EDP no.:
1000912998
If the grease level control is to be connected to an external
control unit, e. g. PLC, a cable with a socket M12x1 for
connection to the contact plug of the grease level controller
must be ordered separately (see description EP-1).
The grease level monitoring system can be retrofitted. It

can be connected to the control unit if the pump has been
ordered with additional functions. red
The grease level controller can also be retrofitted. In this marking
case, the function must be activated by means of the ring
software BEKA-DiSys. The function must not be activated if
no grease level controller in connected, as this would

produce a permanent error. The grease level controller can be attached to the BEKA-
The cable must also be ordered separately if the grease troniX1 controller with any selected program.
level controller is to be retrofitted (see drawing on the right).
Connection to the controller is effected via the four-pole Technical data for the capacitive proximity switch:
plug-and-socket connector marked with a red ring, to the Operating voltage: 10 to 60 V DC
pump motor´s lower casing; to this effect, the contact plug Switching type: PNP-turnkey
cover must be removed. Maximal current load: 250 mA
Degree of protection: IP 67
Ambient temperature range: -25°C to +70°C
Connection: 4-pole, M12x1 pluggable
7
BEKA-troniX1
7. Summary of Signal Indicators
The pump´s functions are indicated via two control LEDs BEKA-troniX1 integrated electronic controller:
(green/red) in the display on the pump´s motor casing,
where the red LED always indicates an error in the program
sequence.
These control LED functions may be indicated in the

driver´s cap of the vehicle via built-in signal lamps. These
must be ordered additionally. Red LED error indicator
Green LED function indicator
Standby indicator:
Standby: 1.5 sec.
ON
LED red
OFF
a) Standby ON
LED green
OFF
Lubrication sequence:
ON
LED red
OFF
During whole lubrication
b) Lubrication activated
ON
LED green
OFF
Grease level too low:

Until reservoir is filled
ON
LED red
c) Grease level error OFF
ON
LED green
OFF
Excess pressure in main system:

1 sec.
ON
LED red
OFF
d) Excess pressure error 1 sec.
ON
LED green
OFF
Revolution error in pump engine:

1 sec.
ON
LED red
OFF
e) Revolution and engine driver error ON 1 sec.
LED green
OFF
Memory error:
0.5 sec.
ON
LED red
OFF
f) Memory error 0,5 sec.
ON
LED green
OFF
e) Test lubrication (constant lubrication) Test lubrication:
ON
LED red
In order to adjust the time controlling to continual lubrication OFF
1 sec.
for servicing purposes, the lubrication time must be set to a
higher value than the cycle duration. ON
LED green
OFF 1 sec.
8
Fill level switch for
grease level controller
BEKA-troniX1
8. Terminal diagram of all connections
green (no. 1)
Signal lamp green
red (no. 2)
Signal lamp red
External signal lamps
orange (no. 4)
Push button for
intermediate lubrication
black (no. 3)
Ignition, terminal 15
Ground, terminal 31
brown (ye/gr)
9
BEKA-troniX1
9. Ordering key for EP-1 with integrated controller
Construction type 2175 . 3 . 1 .E . 0 . 1 . 2 . 1 . 000

Motor voltage
with bayonet connector
12V 24V
3 4
Outlet Pump element without PE-60 PE-120 PE-120 V PE-170

Pos. 1 without micro switch 0 7 1 2 G
with micro switch 0 A D N H
Pos. 2 without micro switch 0 8 3 4 J
with micro switch 0 B E P K
Pos. 3 without micro switch 0 9 5 6 L
with micro switch 0 C F A M
Special variants ZZZ
Only one micro switch can be connected to the BEKA-troniX1 controller!
Transparent reservoirs Steel reservoirs
Size of reservoir (kg) 1,9 4 2,5 8 16 2 4 8
without grease level monitoring 1 2 4 8 9 6 7 5
with LM min. plug connection M12x1 in reservoir cover B A C
Additional equipment
without connectors for additional equipment 0
Grease level monitoring 1
System excess pressure monitoring 2
Grease level controller and
system excess pressure monitoring 3
without connection to the controller

4
(only connectors, not connected, not activated)
Parameter Cycle duration

Lubrication time 0.5 to 8 h 2 to 32 min. 2 to 32 h
I 1 to 16 min. 1 A J
II 2 to 32 min. 2 B K
III 2 to 32 sec. 3 C L
Pump revolutions
I 1 to 16 7 G O
II 10 to 160 8 H Q
III 170 to 320 9 I R
Special models 000

The operating modes and setting ranges, respectively, can Additional functions can be activated or deactivated at any time
be subsequently set in the PC by means of the diagnostic if the controller was ordered with additional functions, i.e. if the
software BEKA-DiSys. additional plugs are available on the bottom motor housing!
Positions of outlets:
3
1
10
2
BEKA-troniX1
10. Retrofitting
The integrated controller BEKA-troniX1 can be retrofitted to Connection cable, 5 wires, with bayonet connector:
the electric pump EP-1, i. e. to pumps which have been
delivered without controller and to replace existing
controllers.
However, retrofitting to pumps without controller is only
possible after the year of construction 2004.
Controllers delivered for retrofitting or replacement are not

provided with connection cable, as this is normally
available. If the controller is to be installed in a pump which
has not been equipped with a controller so far, or to be Order-no.: FAZ02499-19
replaced by a controller with another connector, the
connecting cable must be ordered separately.
The connecting cables for any supplementary features

available must also be ordered separately.
To connect the micro-switch for pressure monitoring, see
the description EP-1.
To connect the grease level controller, see description EP-
1.
Plug-and-socket connectors which are not used must be

closed by using a cover.
Cover to close an unused plug-and-socket connector for
the supplementary functions of the integrated electronic
controller BEKA-troniX1:
Order-no.: 1000913004
11
BEKA-troniX1
11. Ordering key for integrated controller BEKA-tronix 1
Construction type 2175 . 90 . 10 . 0 . A . 000
Connector version
with bayonet connector 10
additional equipment
without connectors for additional equipment 0
with grease level monitoring 1
with system excess pressure monitoring 2
with grease level monitoring and
3
system excess pressure monitoring
with contact plugs (not activated) 4
Parameter Cycle duration

Lubrication time 0.5 to 8 h 2 to 32 min. 2 to 32 h
I 1 to 16 min. 1 A J
II 2 to 32 min. 2 B K
III 2 to 32 sec. 3 C L
Pump revolutions
I 1 to 16 7 G P
II 10 to 160 8 H Q
III 170 to 320 9 I R
Special models 000
The operating modes and setting ranges, respectively, can be subsequently set in the PC by means of the
diagnostic software BEKA-DiSys!
Additional functions can be activated or deactivated at any time if the controller was ordered with additional
functions, i.e. if the additional plugs are available on the bottom motor housing.
12
21 Annex
21.4 Heating, ventilation, air-conditioning of chassis cab
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
634 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN
Technical Information no. page
Safety instructions 912-180-0002 1/8
Content
0 Universal advises

1.1 Mechanical dangers
1.2 Electrical dangers
1.3 Thermal dangers
2 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance- / repair work

2.1 General instructions
2.2 Transport and lifting
2.3 Air suction
2.4 Processing of glue and sealing material
2.5 Installation of compressors
2.6 Laying of electrical lines
3 Safety instructions for work on the refrigeration circuit and exposure to

refrigerant
3.1 Universal advises
3.2 Safety instruction for filling
4 Safety measures for electronic control units in vehicles:
5 Safety instructions for units with PTC-heating systems
6 Safety instructions for starting
Author: 10.12.03 KH checked: 07.01.04 MM released: 19.12.03 W.Le
date/name date/name date/name
10.12.03
The following advises and the advises contained in the safety instructions in the units tech-
nical information's have to be followed at installation and operation. The Installer and the op-
erator have to read this advises and instructions before installation and starting.
0 Universal advises:
10.12.03

1.1 Mechanical dangers:
1.2 Electrical dangers:
1.3 Thermal dangers:

Attention! Danger of burning!
10.12.03
2 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance- / repair work

2.1 General instructions:
2.2 Transport and lifting
only
2.3 Air suction
2.4 Processing of glue and sealing material
10.12.03
2.5 Installation of compressors
2.6 Laying of electrical lines
10.12.03
3 Safety instructions for work on the refrigeration circuit and exposure to

refrigerant
3.1 Universal advises

any work
specialist personnel
safety data sheet
refrigerant
refrigerant skin
Safety glasses refrigerants
CAUTION! Risk of explosion!

soldering or welding work
Refrigerant bottles
CAUTION! Risk of contamination!
R134a
3.2 Safety instruction for filling
10.12.03
4 Safety measures for electronic control units in vehicles
10.12.03
5 Safety instructions for units with electrical PTC-radiator

Caution! Danger of life
risk of
fire.
6 Safety instructions for starting
10.12.03
No. Page
Technical Information
912-100-0509 1/7
Heater unit, 24V

Part no.: 151-FN2-0002
1 Safety provisions
2 Use
3 Description of the device
4 Function description
5 Installation, setting, commissioning
6 Changing the heater unit over into an air conditioning device (optional)
7 Operation
8 Maintenance
9 Spare parts
10 Optional accessories
11 Error diagnosis
Encl.: Circuit diagram 912-200-0079
AURORA
Konrad G. Schulz GmbH & Co.KG
Südring 4
D-69427 Mudau
Phone: 0 62 84 / 92 02-0
Fax: 0 62 84 / 92 02 99
info@aurora-eos.com
www.aurora-eos.com
Subject to technical modifications
Created: 29.01.08 KH Checked: 20.02.08 EB Approved: 25.02.08 W.Le
Date/Name Date/Name Date/Name

a) 13573 20.02.08 KH b c d
No. Page
912-100-0509 2/7
1 Safety Instructions 2 Use
For your own safety, please comply with The device has been developed as a heater
the following provisions. unit to heat a cabin.
 Make sure that maintenance and repair

The integrated outside / recirculating air flap
work is exclusively performed by specialized
enables operation with outside/recirculating air.
staff.
 Please do not reach in the device and do The retrofit kit "Evaporator" enables the heater
not put any objects in it. unit to be modified into an air conditioning sys-
 Maintenance work may only be performed tem.
when the engine is not running. To avoid in-
jury, disconnect the fan from the power Note:
supply. The heating unit may only be used within its
 Caution ! Risk of burn injuries! Please, do intended field of application and not in an in-
not touch the heat exchanger and its con- admissible environment.
nectors. Refrigerant lines and hoses may be Anybody performing modifications acts at
hot and pressurized. his/her own risk.
Please do not touch the resistor on the fan To this effect, please comply with the Tech-
when work has to be performed on the open nical Amendments regarding Warranty.
device and when the component has not
cooled down completely. 3 Description of the device
 Remove damaged parts immediately and
have any defects eliminated without delay.
The heater unit consist of a steel sheet hous-
 Caution ! Sharp fins are located on the heat ing with cover and a blower box.
exchanger. The heater unit contains:
 Wear the required personal protection  a three-stage double radial fan DRG 1100,
equipment during maintenance and repair 24V with resistor
work (PPE).
 a heat exchanger, designed as circular-tube
heat exchanger
In case of retrofitting the heater unit with an
 an HCC to control the water valve
evaporator, please comply with the safety pro-
 an HCC to control air distribution
visions acc. to the Technical Information 912-
(Information about the HCC - Heating and
100-0508.
Cooling Controller - is available in the Tech-
nical Information 912-100-0305)
Instruction for assembly and maintenance
work:  a motor-actuated outside/recirculating air
Comply with the relevant accident prevention flap
provisions and the other generally acknowl-  an air grid with filter G4
edged rules regarding safety and occupational
medicine. The air blower box accommodates the
 5-pole servomotor to actuate the air
distribution flap, and
 4 fittings Ø80 mm upwards and 2 lat-
eral fittings Ø80 mm and an opening
360x105 mm.
The heater unit is delivered together with a

control element CBE, an insertable rack and a
water valve with servomotor and hose elbows,
as well as hose clamps, as heater unit set.
No. Page
912-100-0509 3/7
Information regarding connection of the

heat exchanger:
4. Function description: For heating, the energy of the warmed-up
coolant of the vehicle's engine is used.
The fan sucks in recirculating air or outside
air/recirculating air via the heat exchanger,  Connect the warm water hoses to the heat
depending on the flap position. exchanger using suitable worm drive
The outside air flap is actuated electrically. clamps which are tightened at the specified
The air is warmed up at the heat exchanger in torque (4.5  0.5 Nm).
accordance with the temperature in the water  The connection to the coolant in the vehicle
supply line. must be established in accordance with the
information of the vehicle manufacturer. As
The fan is designed in three stages. The speed a rule, connectors are provided at the en-
is set by a vehicle-mounted fan switch on the gine. If you cannot find certain individual in-
control element. formation in the vehicle manufacturer's op-
The fan is protected against overload by a mi- erating manual, obtain information from the
cro-thermo fuse installed on the resistor. engine manufacturer directly.
 Integration into the coolant circuit: The
5. Installation, setting, commission- heater unit is integrated in the coolant circuit
ing using Tee pieces which are available from
AURORA as accessories.
 The diameters of the coolant lines must be
The following interfaces must be connected: selected depending on the connector diam-
 Connection of the water valve eter on the heat exchanger of the heater
 Connection of the warm water hoses on the unit. Different connection diameters can be
heat exchanger connector in acc. with the adapted by reducers. Please note that each
marking on the device (red arrow = water additional connector increases the risk of
supply line) leakage.
To this effect, comply with the instructions  It is recommended to use hot water hoses
regarding connection of the heat exchanger. with an EPDM liner when water is used as
 Assembly of the CBE control element coolant for the heater unit.
 the electrical connection in acc. with circuit  The hose lines must be laid so as to protect
diagram 912-200-0078. persons against injury by the hot lines.
 the interfacing to the air supply  Avoid chafing and deformation.
 When tightening the screw couplings, block
Information regarding lifting and transport the movement of the hoses.
of the heater unit:
Lifting and transport are only admissible by
picking up the device housing. The hose lines must be fixed in the vehicle
The device must not be lifted by picking up the using suitable securing clamps in order to
cable kits or the heat exchanger tubes. avoid chafing or inadmissible mechanical load
Never pull cable kits, as otherwise the con- of the connectors.
nectors might break off.
During transport and intermediate storage, the
device must be protected against humidity and
mechanical damage.
Only use suitable and technically correct hoist-
ing equipment and load carrying devices.
No. Page
912-100-0509 4/7
6 Changing the heater unit over into an air conditioning device (optional)
Use the retrofit kit "Evaporator" with the part number 188-FN9-0001.
The retrofit kit consists of a water tank with evaporator, two water outlets and a condenser unit.
Remove the hoses from the heat exchanger and disconnect the water valve with hose clamp and
hose elbows.
The water tank contained in the heater unit can be removed after the 6 hex. bolts have been turned
out. After removing the 2 screws, remove the heat exchanger from the water tank, put it in the retrofit
water tank with evaporator and fasten it. Subsequently, install the water tank with evaporator and heat
exchanger in the heater unit and re-tighten the water valve with clamp and the hose elbows. Then
secure the 2 water outlets in the underside of the tank.
Further interfaces:
 Electrical connector of thermostat (please comply with circuit diagram 912-200-0077)
 Connection of the coolant hoses to the expansion valve
 Connection of the hot water hoses to the heat exchanger
The retrofitted device forms the air conditioner together with the condenser and a compressor to be
provided by the customer (not included in scope of supplies).
Regarding the condenser unit 175-FN2-0001, please comply with the Technical Information 912-100-
0510 (Encl.).
Regarding the retrofitted device, the instructions regarding the heater / air conditioning unit in
the Technical Information 912-100-0508 (Encl.) is applicable. The information regarding in-
stallation, safety, maintenance, repair and spare parts must be complied with.
7 Operation
Operation is effected by a control element on the vehicle.

A control element CBE can be used.
The CBE features a 3-stage switch, rotary control for air distribution, rotary control for the water valve
to adjust the heating output and an AL/UL (outside/recirculating air) switch for the outside/recirculating
air flap. For retrofitting, the A/C switch can be used to switch the system ON and OFF.
Fan Air distribution Water valve ON/OFF Outside/recirculating air
The CBE is installed with an insertable rack, part no. 433-290-0187 (integral part of the kit of the air
conditioning system).
Hole pattern for insertable rack:
No. Page
912-100-0509 5/7
8 Maintenance Condition of heating lines

- Check the hoses and screw couplings for
ATTENTION proper fastening, leakage and correct installa-
tion. Re-tighten the hose clamps, if necessary.
Make sure to comply with the safety provi-
sions during all maintenance work (Chapter
Electrical equipment
1)!
- Check electrical connection cables and plug-
The device may only be serviced by expert and-socket connectors for perfect condition
staff. and tight fit.
Instructions regarding maintenance work: Electrical equipment

Comply with the relevant accident preven- Check electrical connection cables and plug-
tion provisions and the other generally and-socket connectors for perfect condition
acknowledged rules regarding safety and and tight fit.
occupational medicine.
Condition of filter
Check the filter for contamination.
In case of minor contamination, clean filter mat
Heating circulation
by rinsing in warm water
On replenishing coolant, make sure that the
(max. -40°C) using a fat solvent as additive.
water has the correct quality. (Refer to
In case of serious contamination, clean the
AURORA TI 971-190-0003 corrosion-
filter.
protective / anti-freeze agents for coolant cir-
To identify the air flow direction, the filter mat
cuits).
has a white and a blue side.
Failure of an AURORA water valve due to con-
Clean air side = white
tamination of the water circuit rules out all war-
Dirty air side = blue
ranty claims.
In case of retrofitting of an evaporator, the
The following maintenance intervals are rec-
maintenance intervals acc. to the Technical
ommended:
Information 912-100-0508 also apply.
Maintenance intervals
Monthly visual inspections - company
operating the machine:
Every month, the operating company should
perform the following visual inspections:
No. Page
912-100-0509 6/7
9. Spare parts 10. Optional accessories
See spare parts list 051-FN2-0002 Optional accessories available on request

In case of retrofitting of the heater unit to the See also www.aurora-eos.com
air conditioning system, the spare parts list of
the air conditioning system 071-FN2-0002 also
applies.
11. Error diagnosis
Malfunction Cause Remedy

Fan does not work Fuse faulty or loose Check fuse for tight fit; if necessary,
insert it correctly. Replace faulty fuse. If
a new fault occurs within a short time,
this signals a short-circuit or a blockage.
Check fan for blockage or other fault
and eliminate the cause.
Line break Check lines for loose contact or break
Fan motor faulty Replace fan
Fan switch on CBE faulty Check switch
if necessary, replace CBE
Fan cannot be Short-circuit in the cable or in Eliminate short-circuit; if necessary,
switched off the fan switch mount new cable and/or switch.
Fan works at reduced Contacts clogged Clean connector contacts. Proceed
power carefully to avoid short-circuits.
Electrical cables undersized Lay cables with the recommended cross
section
Heat exchanger seriously clog- Clean carefully and avoid damage re-
ged sulting in leakage.
Attention! Comply with safety instruc-
tions
Fan does not run at all Micro-thermo fuse (MTS) has Replace resistor and check fan motor for
stages tripped cause of malfunction
Fan switch faulty Replace switch by original spare part of
manufacturer.
Connector loosened Check plug-and-socket connector for
tight fit and mount correctly.
Check connector on fan switch.
Resistor faulty Mount new resistor.
No. Page
912-100-0509 7/7

No or insufficient heat- Water supply line temperature Wait for vehicle engine to warm up
ing capacity too low
Heat exchanger fins contamina- Check and, if necessary, clean heat
ted exchanger
Water valve closed Open valve
Water lines bent or squeezed Eliminate cause of fault or install hoses
again
Filter clogged Clean or replace the filter
Water pump pressure insuffi- Coolant does not flow through heat ex-
cient changer. Mount additional or more pow-
erful pumps.
Water escapes from Hose connector loosened Check hose lines for tight fit and re-
the device tighten hose clamps.
Water hose damaged Lay and connect new hose
Heat exchanger damaged Install original spare part and connect it
(Attention! Comply with safety instruc-
tions)
Outside air flap can no Flap deformed Check and, if necessary, straighten flap
longer be adjusted
Flap bearing faulty Check and, if necessary, replace flap
bearing
Motor faulty Replace servomotor
Actuator faulty Replace actuator
No. Page
Technical Information 912-100-0510 1/7
Condenser unit, cpl. 24 V, 2-stage
Part no.: 175-FN2-0001
1 Safety Instructions
2 Design of condenser unit

2.1 Condenser
2.2 Condenser fan
2.3 Collector drier
2.4 Pressure switch
3 Installation instructions
4 Maintenance
5 Spare parts
6 Error diagnosis
AURORA
Südring 4
D-69427 Mudau
Phone: 0 62 84 / 92 02-0
Fax: 0 62 84 / 92 02 99
info@aurora-eos.com
www.aurora-eos.com

a d g j
b e h k
c f i l
No. Page
1 Safety Instructions Maintenance work on the refrigerating cir-

cuit
For your own safety, please comply with the
following provisions.  Prior to any maintenance work on the refrig-
erating circuit, the system must be drained
The following applies in general: previously. This may only be done by speci-
 Make sure that maintenance and repair alist staff.
work is exclusively performed by specialized  Only the refrigerant R134a in acc. with DIN
staff. 8960 or the
 Maintenance work may only be performed EC safety data sheet in acc. with
when the fan motor is not running. To avoid 91/155/EEC for R134a may be used.
injury, disconnect the fan from the power  No fluorescent additives may be mixed to
supply. the refrigerant.
CAUTION !  Refrigerant must not be discharged or set
 Risk of burn injuries! Please do not touch free into the open air.
the condenser and its supply lines. Refrige-  Liquid refrigerant must not get in contact
rant lines and hoses may be hot and pressu- with the skin.
rized.  Protective glasses are required for handling
Please do not touch the resistor on the fan refrigerants.
when the component has not completely  Before filling the system, it must be evacu-
cooled down. ated carefully. When filling the system,
 Repair work on the refrigerating circuit may comply with the Technical Information 912-
only be performed once the air conditioning 100-0148, page 5. (Please request if requi-
system has been drained. red)
 Remove damaged parts immediately and  The system must never be rinsed with com-
have any defects eliminated without delay. pressed air.
 Wear the required personal protection
equipment during maintenance and repair CAUTION ! Risk of explosion !
work.  Do not perform soldering or welding
work directly on the parts within the
Instruction for assembly and maintenance closed refrigerating circuit or in its close en-
work: vironment. The pressure in the plant rises
Comply with the relevant accident prevention due to the considerable heat produced,
provisions and the other generally acknowl- which might result in explosion.
edged rules regarding safety and occupational  Refrigerant cylinders must not be thrown
medicine. and not be exposed to the sun or other
sources of heat when filled. The max. ad-
The condenser unit uses exclusively the refrig- missible temperature of a filled refrigerant
erant R134a. cylinder must not exceed 45°C.
The condenser unit may only be used within its CAUTION ! Impurities!
intended field of application and not in an in-  It is essential to keep the refrigerating sys-
admissible environment. Anybody performing tem free from chlorine, chlorine-containing
modifications acts at his/her own risk. substances, oil, grease and moisture. Evac-
uating and filling systems should be used
exclusively for R134a.
No. Page
2. Design of condenser unit
The condenser unit consists of a steel sheet housing, a circular tube-type condenser, an axial fan, a
cable kit, a resistor and a collector drier with pressure switch.
The collector drier with pressure switch is fastened to the condenser housing by means of an angular
support.
Collector drier
Pressure switch
Filling capscrew
Cable kit
Resistor
Axial fan
No. Page
2.1 Condenser replaced after each intervention in the refrig-

eration circuit, at the latest every 2 years.
The condenser condensates the compressed
refrigerant, i.e. the refrigerant is supplied to the If the system has to be opened several times in
condenser in gaseous form and leaves the the scope of repair, the collector drier is re-
condenser as a liquid. placed only once.
The condenser's capacity is essentially influ-
enced by the air flow and the air temperature. ATTENTION
The direct outside air has the most favourable Never leave the collector drier open, as other-
air temperature. The ribbed circular-tube sys- wise the drier would be saturated already by
tem consists of the aluminium ribs, copper the air humidity.
tubes, and collector and connection tubes
made of copper. The fins are connected firmly 2.4 Pressure switch:
to the tubes to ensure a good heat transmis-
sion. A pressure switch is located in the collector
drier as safety device to protect the condenser.
2.2 Condenser fan When the operating values specified below for
a condenser pressure are exceeded or under-
The ambient air is sucked through the conden- cut, the pressure switch switches the conden-
ser by means of the axial fan. Thus, the air ser OFF via the electromagnetic coupling and
absorbs the heat of the refrigerant. thus protects the air conditioner against conse-
At the same time, the gaseous refrigerant is quential damage.
cooled down. When the refrigerant is cooled
down to a certain pressure-related tempera- The pressure switch has the following operat-
ture, the refrigerant is condensed and liquefied. ing values at atmospheric excess pressure:
A series resistor for the blower is provided on
the fan. ON OFF
The cable kit is of two-stage design. Coup- Low 2.4 bar max 1.2  0.3 bar
ling pres-
sure
2.3 Collector drier High 19  2 bar 25.0  1.5 bar
pres-
The collector drier serves as expansion tank sure
and supply tank for the refrigerant. Fan 18  1.5 bar 14  1 bar
The drier can bond a small quantity of water
chemically, thus removing it from the circula-
tion.
If the inspection glass shows traces of corro-
sion or tarnish, the collector drier must be re-
placed. Important: The collector drier must be
No. Page
Connection to refrigerating circuit:

3 Installation instructions
Connector for supply line: 3/4“-16UNF
Attention: For assembly, comply with the safety (from compressor)
provisions in Chapter 1.
Connector for return line: 5/8“-18UNF
(to air conditioning device)
Fastening the condenser unit:
During installation, remove the plugscrews only
just before assembly, so that no moisture can get
Note: Assembly may only be performed by quali-
into the system. Moisture within the system de-
fied specilized staff.
creases the refrigerating capacity and the con-
4 H brackets are located on the housing. denser may be damaged.
The condenser unit may only be lifted and trans- Note: Block the movement of the connecting
ported when picked up by the housing. It must hoses when tightening them.
never be lifted by picking up the cable kits, as the
connectors might break away. Please note that the condenser is filled with "pro-
Only use suitable and technically correct hoisting tective gas". After removal of the protective caps
equipment and load carrying devices. on the condenser, the protective gas must es-
During transport and intermediate storage, the cape audibly.
device must be protected against humidity and
mechanical damage. Please check the protective gas filling on installa-
tion.
Connection to power supply: Should no protective gas filling be available, the
device must be handled carefully and checked
Please comply with the circuit diagram 912-200- for leakage. There might be a leakage in a com-
0078 (Encl.) ponent.
Note: The electrical connections may only be On principle, the refrigerating circuit must be
mounted in de-energized condition. checked for leakage while the system is checked
with refrigerant.
Connection of control system at the customer's:
Note:
We recommend to provide a label "Attention! Air
conditioning system is pressurized! Refrigerant
R134a“ in a visible location of the vehicle in order
Connection to utilities at the customer's: to ensure safety during maintenance work on the
refrigerating circuit.
No. Page
4 Maintenance Condition of refrigerant lines

Check the hoses and screw couplings for proper
ATTENTION fastening, leakage and correct installation. If
Make sure to comply with the safety provi- necessary, re-tighten the hose clamps.
sions during all maintenance work! Check all screw couplings and lines of the air
conditioner for leakage using a leakage detector
The system may only be serviced by expert
for R134a.
staff.
When working on the opened sys- Electrical equipment
tem, please comply with the acci- Check electrical connection cables for perfect
dent prevention provisions. condition and tight fit.
Residual pressure Condition of the condenser

Even if the system is evacuated, a residual pres- A contaminated condenser has a reduced con-
sure may be present which must be eliminated, densation capacity. To clean, blow it out or use a
proceeding initially with extreme caution when water jet (no high-pressure cleaning unit).
the screw couplings are released. Subsequently,
the screw coupling can be released completely. Condition of collector drier
If the inspection glass shows traces of corrosion
In damp weather or in rain, the refrigerating cir- or tarnish, the collector drier must be replaced.
cuit must not be opened in the open air. Repair
on the refrigerating circuit may only be performed Monthly visual inspections - company operat-
when the system is evacuated. ing the machine:
Every month, the operating company should per-
The following maintenance intervals are rec- form the following visual inspections:
ommended:
Condition of refrigerant lines
every 2 years - specialist workshop: Check the hoses and screw couplings for proper
Every 2 years or simultaneously with each inter- fastening, leakage and correct installation. Re-
vention in the refrigerating circuit, the collector tighten the hose clamps if necessary.
drier must be replaced.
Condition of the condenser:
every 6 months - specialist workshop: Check condenser for contamination due to dust,
The complete system must be checked twice per vermin or plant particles.
year by specialist staff in an authorized specialist A contaminated condenser has a poor conden-
workshop: sation capacity. To clean, blow it out or use a
water jet (no high-pressure cleaning unit).
Refrigerant Fins deformed by external influence can be
Checking the refrigerating circuit for refrigerant straightened.
level (renewal of contaminated refrigerant and
oil). Note:
Diligence and tidiness are extremely important
requirements for intervention in the refrigerating
circuit. Evacuated refrigerant must not be re-
used. The components of the refrigerating circu-
lation must not be stored in exposed condition.
No. Page
5 Spare parts  When installing spare parts, make sure that

all connectors are clean and in correct condi-
As spare parts are available: the condenser, the tion.
axial fan, the resistor, the collector drier, the
pressure switch, a refrigerant hose DN8 and the  Make sure that new seals are always used.
2-stage cable kit.  To avoid damage to the sealing surfaces and
the seals, wet the sealing rings with refrigera-
See spare parts list: 075-FN2-0001 tor oil before assembly.
Installation of spare parts  When tightening the screw couplings, lock

 During installation of spare parts, remove the the movement of the components concerned
plugscrews only just before assembly, so that using a screw-driver, in order not to damage
no moisture can get into the system. Moisture the solder points.
within the system decreases the refrigerating Note: The condenser is filled with protective gas.
capacity and the condenser may be dam- Upon removing the protective caps from the
aged. condenser, the protective gas must escape audi-
bly.
6 Error diagnosis
Finding Possible cause Remedy

Insufficient air supply to Contamination of cooler Clean cooler fins using a water jet.
the condenser fins of condenser Note: Do not use high-pressure cleaning units.
Suction surface conta- Clean suction surface

minated
Low refrigerating capacity Collector drier clogged Replace collector drier.

or saturated
Axial fan does not operate Connector loose Check plug-and-socket connector for tight fit
and mount correctly.
Connection cable dam- Replace cable
aged or torn
Axial fan runs only at the Resistor faulty. Replace resistor
lowest level MTS has tripped
Loss of refrigerant Refrigerant line broken Check all lines for breakage by external influ-
ence or chafing
Leakage in system Evacuate, fill, check for leakage and repair
No. Page
912-100-0508 1/12
Heating and air conditioning device, 24 V

Part no.: 171-FN2-0002
1 Safety provisions
2 Use
3 Description of the device
4 Function description
5 Installation, setting, commissioning
6 Operation
7 Technical data
8 Maintenance
9 Repair
10 Spare parts
11 Optional accessories
12 Error diagnosis
AURORA
Südring 4
D-69427 Mudau
Phone: 0 62 84 / 92 02-0
Fax: 0 62 84 / 92 02 99
info@aurora-eos.com
www.aurora-eos.com

a b c d
No. Page
912-100-0508 2/12
1 Safety Instructions Maintenance work on the refrigerating cir-

cuit
For your own safety, please comply with
the following provisions.  Prior to any maintenance work on the re-
frigerating circuit, the system must be
 Make sure that maintenance and repair drained previously. This may only be done
work is exclusively performed by specialized by specialist staff.
staff.  Only the refrigerant R134a in acc. with DIN
 Please do not reach in the device and do 8960 or the
not put any objects in it. EC safety data sheet in acc. with
 Maintenance work may only be performed 91/155/EEC for R134a may be used.
when the engine is not running. To avoid in-  No fluorescent additives may be mixed to
jury, disconnect the fan from the power the refrigerant.
supply.  Do not drain refrigerant in theopen air.
 Caution ! Risk of burn injuries! Please, do  Liquid refrigerant must not get on the skin.
not touch the heat exchanger and its con-  Protective glasses are required for han-
nectors. Coolant and refrigerant lines and dling refrigerants.
hoses may be hot and pressurized.  Before filling the system, it must be evacu-
Please do not touch the resistor on the fan ated carefully. When filling the system,
when work has to be performed on the open comply with the Technical Information 912-
device and when the component has not 100-0148, page 5. (Please request if re-
cooled down completely. quired)
 Remove damaged parts immediately and  The system must never be rinsed with
have any defects eliminated without delay. compressed air.
 Caution ! Sharp fins are located on the
evaporator and the heat exchanger. CAUTION ! Risk of explosion !
 Wear the required personal protection  Do not perform soldering or welding
equipment during maintenance and repair work directly on the parts within the closed
work (PPE). refrigerating circuit or in its close environ-
 Remove capscrews of the refrigerant con- ment. The pressure in the plant rises due to
nectors carefully. the considerable heat produced, which
 If necessary, switch air conditioning off. might result in explosion.
 Refrigerant cylinders must not be thrown
CAUTION ! and not be exposed to the sun or other
The condensed water produced must never be sources of heat when filled. The max. ad-
used as drinking water. missible temperature of a filled refrigerant
cylinder must not exceed 45°C.
Instruction for assembly and maintenance
work: CAUTION ! Impurities!
Comply with the relevant accident prevention  It is essential to keep the refrigerating sys-
provisions and the other generally acknowl- tem free from chlorine, chlorine-containing
edged rules regarding safety and occupational substances, oil, grease and moisture.
medicine. Evacuating and filling systems should be
used exclusively for R134a.
No. Page
912-100-0508 3/12
2 Use tures two water outlets, consisting of water

diaphragms and tube elements.
The device was developed as a heating / air
conditioning unit for air conditioning, ventilation The air blower box accommodates the
and heating.  5-pole servomotor to actuate the air
The system is operated using the Refrigerant distribution flap, and
R134a.  4 fittings Ø80 mm upwards and 2 lat-
eral fittings Ø80 mm and an opening
360x105 mm.
The integrated outside / recirculating air flap
enables operation with outside/recirculating air. The air conditioning unit is delivered together
Especially for operation of the air conditioning, with a condenser unit, the control element
recirculating air mode is more appropriate to CBE, an insertable rack and a water valve with
dehumidify the air in the driver's cab. In cold servomotor and hose elbows, as well as hose
areas, the cab interior can be warmed up fast- clamps, as air conditioning unit set.
er in recirculating air mode. Moreover, a higher
end temperature can be reached. 4. Function description:
In any case, a sufficient outside air supply
must be ensured. The fan sucks in recirculating air or outside
air/recirculating air via the heat exchanger and
Note: the evaporator, depending on the flap position.
The air conditioning unit may only be used The outside air flap is actuated electrically.
within its intended field of application and not The air is warmed up at the heat exchanger in
in an inadmissible environment. accordance with the temperature in the water
Anybody performing modifications acts at supply line.
his/her own risk.
To this effect, please comply with the Tech- Air conditioning function: The refrigerant is
nical Amendments regarding Warranty. expanded on the expansion valve and is in-
jected into the evaporator, where it evaporates
finally. The evaporation heat required to this
3 Description of the device effect is taken from the air entering the air
conditioning unit. The humidity contained in the
The heater/air conditioning unit consist of a air is condensed on the evaporator, which re-
steel sheet housing with cover and a blower sults in a reduction of the air humidity.
box.
The heater/air conditioning unit contains: The fan is designed in three stages. The speed
 a three-stage double radial fan DRG 1100, is set by a vehicle-mounted fan switch on the
24V with resistor control element.
 a circular-tube evaporator with expansion The fan is protected against overload by a mi-
valve cro-thermo fuse installed on the resistor.
 a thermostat with fixed setting to protect
against icing The thermostat switches the evaporator's re-
 a heat exchanger, designed as circular-tube frigerant supply off and on again, if required,
heat exchanger thus preventing icing of the evaporator fins due
 an HCC to control the water valve to freezing condensed water.
 an HCC to control air distribution The operating points of the thermostat with
(Information about the HCC - Heating and fixed setting are:
Cooling Controller - is available in the Tech- OFF: -1.0°C0.6°C
nical Information 912-100-0305) ON: +2.2°C0.6°C
 a motor-actuated outside/recirculating air The probe of the thermostat is inserted be-
flap tween the evaporator fins.
 an air grid with filter G4 .
The device bottom features two ports for
drainage of water. The air conditioning kit fea-
No. Page
912-100-0508 4/12
5. Installation, setting, commission-  Integration into the coolant circuit: The

ing heater unit is integrated in the coolant circuit
using Tee pieces which are available from
AURORA as accessories.
The following interfaces must be connected:  The diameters of the coolant lines must be
 Connection of the water valve selected depending on the connector diam-
 Connection of the warm water hoses on the eter on the heat exchanger of the heater
heat exchanger connector in acc. with the unit. Different connection diameters can be
marking on the device (red arrow = water adapted by reducers. Please note that each
supply line) additional connector increases the risk of
To this effect, comply with the instructions leakage.
regarding connection of the heat exchanger.  It is recommended to use hot water hoses
 Assembly of the CBE control element with an EPDM liner when water is used as
 the electrical connection in acc. with circuit coolant for the heater unit.
diagram 912-200-0077.  The hose lines must be laid so as to protect
 Insert 2 water outlets. The groove on the persons against injury by the hot lines.
circumference of the water diaphragms  Avoid chafing and deformation.
must click safely in the borehole of the  When tightening the screw couplings, block
sheet metal housing. the movement of the hoses.
 the interfacing to the air supply
 Connection of refrigerant lines Assembly of the refrigerant hose lines to the
expansion valve:
Information regarding lifting and transport
of the heater/air conditioning unit: Note: The evaporator is filled with a protective
Lifting and transport are only admissible by gas, which must escape audibly once the seal
picking up the device housing. from the expansion valve has been removed.
The device must not be lifted by picking up the - Remove the back-up disc and the seal from
cable kits or the heat exchanger tubes. the expansion valve
Never pull cable kits, as otherwise the con- - Introduce the refrigerant hose fittings into the
nectors might break off. expansion valve
During transport and intermediate storage, the - Position and mount the flange plate with
device must be protected against humidity and screws M6 x 16.
mechanical damage.
Only use suitable and technically correct hoist-
ing equipment and load carrying devices. Please check the protective gas filling on in-
stallation.
Information regarding connection of the Should no protective gas filling be available,
heat exchanger: the device must be handled carefully and
For heating, the energy of the warmed-up checked for leakage. There might be a leakage
coolant of the vehicle's engine is used. in a component.
On principle, the refrigerating circuit must be

 Connect the warm water hoses to the heat
checked for leakage while the system is filled
exchanger using suitable worm drive
with refrigerant.
clamps which are tightened at the specified
torque (4.5  0.5 Nm).
 The connection to the coolant in the vehicle
must be established in accordance with the
information of the vehicle manufacturer. As
a rule, connectors are provided on the en-
gine. If you cannot find certain individual in-
formation in the vehicle manufacturer's op-
erating manual, obtain information from the
engine manufacturer directly.
No. Page
912-100-0508 5/12
Diligence and tidiness are extremely important

requirements for intervention in the refrigerat- Subsequently, the system must be evacuated
ing circuit. Evacuated refrigerant must not be for at least 45 minutes, in order to reduce ex-
reused. The components of the refrigerating ternal gas to less than 1.5 Vol.%. During evac-
circulation must not be stored in exposed con- uation, the pressure measured in the system
dition. should be < 20 mbar.
It must be ensured that there is no risk of con-
Note: tamination of the refrigerating system by oil
We recommend to provide a label "Attention! from the vacuum pump.
Air conditioning system is pressurized! Refrig-
erant R134a“ in a visible location of the vehicle Fill the system as described in the operating
in order to ensure safety during maintenance manual of the manufacturer of the filling sta-
work on the refrigerating circuit. tion.
ATTENTION
The hose lines must be fixed in the vehicle Never fill the system to overflow. Overfilling
using suitable securing clamps in order to reduces the refrigerating capacity and
avoid chafing or inadmissible mechanical load damage may occur on the system.
of the connectors.
Subsequently, check the system for leakage.
Moreover, check the fan for correct functioning
by setting the 3 fan stages.
FILLING AND COMMISSIONING THE

SYSTEM:
ATTENTION
The air conditioning may only be filled by
an authorized workshop where expert staff
are available.
Please comply with the Technical Information
912-100-0148, page 5 (Please request as re-
quired). Only refrigerant R134a may be used.
No fluorescent additives may be mixed to the
refrigerant.
The system must be flushed with dried nitro-

gen and be checked for leakage. Flushing
serves to dehumidify the system.
The system must never be rinsed with com-
pressed air.
No. Page
912-100-0508 6/12
6 Operation
Operation is effected by a control element on the vehicle.
A control element CBE can be used.
The CBE features a 3-stage switch, rotary control for air distribution, rotary control for the water valve
to adjust the heating output and an A/C switch to turn the system ON and OFF, as well as an AL/UL
(outside/recirculating air) switch for the outside/recirculating air flap.
Fan Air distribution Water valve ON/OFF Outside/recirculating air
The CBE is installed with an insertable rack, part no. 433-290-0187 (integral part of the kit of the air
conditioning system).
Hole pattern for insertable rack:
No. Page
912-100-0508 7/12
7 Technical Details
Rated voltage: 24 Volt

Test voltage: 26 Volt
   
V Water = 1200l/h V Air Q 80 LP Q0 *
Fan stage Pel [dB(A)]  0.5
[m3/h] [kW] [W] Intake side Exhaust side [kW]
3 571 10.4 259 66.0 73.0 7.41
Intake Outside air 2 391 8.2 155 58.0 65.5
Exhaust Defrost 1 203 4.9 72 45.5 52.0
3 620 11.1 274 68.0 73.0
Intake Outside air 2 419 8.6 160 60.0 64.0
Exhaust Foot 1 217 5.2 73 47.0 51.0
compartm. man
3 571 10.4 263 71.0 73.0
Intake Ambient air 2 396 8.0 154 63.5 65.0
Exhaust Defrost 1 204 4.9 72 52.0 51.5
3 620 11.0 280 72.5 73.0
Intake Ambient air 2 423 8.4 158 65.0 64.5
Exhaust Foot 1 218 5.2 72 51.0 50.5
compartm. man
* Air inlet condition: tL1 = 30.1°C

 = 61% r.H.
State of coolant: tc = 44.9°C
t0 = 0.2°C
8 Maintenance Residual pressure

Even if the system is evacuated, a residual
ATTENTION pressure may be present which must be elimi-
nated, proceeding initially with extreme caution
Make sure to comply with the safety provi-
when the screw couplings are released. Sub-
sions during all maintenance work (Chapter
sequently, the screw coupling can be released
1)!
completely.
The device may only be serviced by expert
staff. Refrigerating cycle
Repair work may only be performed once  During interventions in the refrigerating
the air conditioning system has been circuit, all openings must be closed airtight,
drained. so as to prevent humidity from penetrating
To fill and commission the system, please the system.
comply with the instructions in Chapter 5.  In damp weather or in rain, the refrigerating
circuit must not be opened in the open air.
Instructions regarding maintenance work:  To fill and commission the system, please
Comply with the relevant accident preven- comply with the instructions in Chapter 5.
tion provisions and the other generally
acknowledged rules regarding safety and
occupational medicine.
No. Page
912-100-0508 8/12
Heating circulation Monthly visual inspections - company

On replenishing coolant, make sure that the operating the machine:
water has the correct quality. (Refer to Every month, the operating company should
AURORA TI 971-190-0003 corrosion- perform the following visual inspections:
protective / anti-freeze agents for coolant cir-
cuits). Condition of refrigerant and heating lines
Failure of a AURORA water valve due to con- - Check the hoses and screw couplings for
tamination of the water circuit rules out all war- proper fastening, leakage and correct installa-
ranty claims. tion. Re-tighten the hose clamps if necessary.
The following maintenance intervals are rec- Electrical equipment
ommended: - Check electrical connection cables and plug-
Maintenance intervals and-socket connectors for perfect condition
every 6 months - specialist workshop: and tight fit.
The complete system must be checked twice
per year by specialist staff in an authorized Condition of evaporator
specialist workshop: Clean contaminated evaporator. To clean,
blow it out or use a water jet (no high-pressure
Check the refrigerant circuit for the refrig- cleaning unit).
erant level Fins deformed by external influence can be
Replace contaminated refrigerant and oil. straightened.
Condition of refrigerant and heating lines Electrical equipment

Check the hoses and screw couplings for Check electrical connection cables and plug-
proper fastening, leakage and correct installa- and-socket connectors for perfect condition
tion. If necessary, re-tighten the hose clamps. and tight fit.
Condition of evaporator Condensed water outlet:

Clean contaminated evaporator. To clean, Check the water diaphragms for tight fit and
blow it out or use a water jet (no high-pressure safe drainage of the condensed water.
cleaning unit).
Check the outlets of the condensed water. Condition of filter
Fins deformed by external influence can be Check the filter for contamination.
straightened. In case of minor contamination, clean filter mat
by rinsing in warm water
Electrical equipment (max. -40°C) using a fat solvent as additive.
Check electrical connection cables and plug- In case of serious contamination, clean the
and-socket connectors for perfect condition filter.
and tight fit. To identify the air flow direction, the filter mat
has a white and a blue side.
Condensed water outlet: Clean air side = white
Check the water diaphragms for tight fit and Dirty air side = blue
safe drainage of the condensed water.
No. Page
912-100-0508 9/12
ATTENTION ! 10. Spare parts

The visual inspections should also be per-
formed when the air conditioning is not See spare parts list 071-FN2-0002
used.
Moreover, switch the air conditioning sys- Installation of spare parts
tem ON once per month for 10 to 15  During installation of spare parts, remove
minutes to prevent the shaft packing in the the plugscrews only just before assembly,
compressor from drying and becoming brit- so that no moisture can get into the sys-
tle. Otherwise, there is a risk of refrigerant tem. Moisture within the system decreases
the refrigerating capacity and the conden-
escaping. Moreover, the compressor com-
ser may be damaged.
ponents are thus greased at regular inter-
vals.  When installing spare parts, make sure that
all connectors are clean and in correct
Diligence and tidiness are extremely important condition.
requirements for intervention in the refrigerat-  Make sure that new seals are always used.
ing circuit. Evacuated refrigerant must not be
reused. The components of the refrigerating  To avoid damage to the sealing surfaces
circulation must not be stored in exposed con- and the seals, wet the sealing rings with re-
dition. frigerator oil before assembly.
 When tightening the screw couplings, lock
9 Repair the movement of the components con-
cerned using a screw-driver, in order not to
ATTENTION damage the solder points.
Make sure to comply with the safety provi-  When replacing the evaporator or the
sions during all repair work! expansion valve after assembly of the re-
Repair work on the refrigerating circuit may frigerant hose, isolate the expansion valve
only be performed once the air conditioning using isolating tape 889-000-0006!
system has been drained.
REPAIR WORK MAY ONLY BE
PERFORMED BY TRAINED AND ATTENTION
AUTHORIZED EXPERT STAFF. Closed spare parts may be filled with a protec-
tive fluid. Remove plugscrews carefully.
Checklist Repair:
Please check the protective gas filling on in-
Residual pressure
stallation.
Even if the system is evacuated, a residual
Should no protective gas filling be available,
pressure may be present, which must be elimi-
the device must be handled carefully and
nated, proceeding initially with extreme caution
checked for leakage. There might be a leakage
when the screw couplings are released. Sub-
in a component.
sequently, the screw coupling can be released
completely.
On principle, the refrigerating circuit must be
Refrigerating cycle
checked for leakage while the system is filled
 During interventions in the refrigerating
with refrigerant.
circuit, all openings must be closed airtight,
so as to prevent humidity from penetrating
the system. 11. Optional accessories
 In damp weather or in rain, the refrigerating Optional accessories available on request

circuit must not be opened in the open air. See also www.aurora-eos.com
No. Page
912-100-0508 10/12
12. Error diagnosis

Fan does not work Fuse faulty or loose Check fuse for tight fit; if necessary,
insert it correctly. Replace faulty fuse. If
a new fault occurs within a short time,
this signals a short-circuit or a blockage.
Check fan for blockage or other fault
and eliminate the cause.
Line break Check lines for loose contact or break
Fan switch on CBE faulty Check switch
if necessary, replace CBE
Fan cannot be Short-circuit in the cable or in Eliminate short-circuit; if necessary,
switched off the fan switch mount new cable and/or switch.
Fan works at reduced Contacts clogged Clean connector contacts. Proceed
power carefully to avoid short-circuits.
Electrical cables undersized Lay cables with the recommended cross
section
Heat exchanger seriously clog- Clean carefully and avoid damage re-
ged sulting in leakage.
Attention! Comply with safety instruc-
tions
Fan does not run at all Micro-thermo fuse (MTS) has Replace resistor and check fan motor for
stages tripped cause of malfunction
Fan switch faulty Replace switch by original spare part of
manufacturer.
Connector loosened Check plug-and-socket connector for
tight fit and mount correctly.
Check connector on fan switch.
Resistor faulty Mount new resistor.
No. Page
912-100-0508 11/12

No or insufficient heat- Water supply line temperature Wait for vehicle engine to warm up
ing capacity too low
Heat exchanger fins contamina- Check and, if necessary, clean heat
ted exchanger
Water valve closed Open valve
Water lines bent or squeezed Eliminate cause of fault or install hoses
again
Filter clogged Clean or replace the filter
Water pump pressure insuffi- Coolant does not flow through heat ex-
cient changer. Mount additional or more pow-
erful pumps.
Water escapes from Hose connector loosened Check hose lines for tight fit and re-
the device tighten hose clamps.
Water hose damaged Lay and connect new hose
Heat exchanger damaged Install original spare part and connect it
(Attention! Comply with safety instruc-
tions)
Outside air flap can no Flap deformed Check and, if necessary, straighten flap
longer be adjusted
Flap bearing faulty Check and, if necessary, replace flap
bearing
Motor faulty Replace servomotor
Actuator faulty Replace actuator
No. Page
912-100-0508 12/12
Refrigerating capacity:

Compressor does not Break in solenoid of compressor Check current supply to coupling
operate
Vee belt loosened or torn Adjust Vee belt tension, replace Vee
belt
Vee belt pulley does not turn Check, if necessary, renew compressor
although magnetic coupling is
engaged
Compressor coupling slips Replace coupling or renew compressor
Control system faulty Check and, if necessary, replace control

system
Evaporator flooded Expansion valve stuck or Replace expansion valve
blocked in open position
Evaporator iced Thermostat sensor in wrong Reposition sensor
position
Expansion valve or thermostat Replace expansion valve or thermostat
faulty
Evaporator clogged Cooler fins contaminated Clean evaporator
Loss of refrigerant Refrigerant line broken Check all lines for breakage by external
influence or chafing
Leakage in system Evacuate, fill, check for leakage and
repair
Refrigerating capaci- Fan air flow obstructed Check air ducts for obstacles. Eliminate
ty insufficient malfunction
Refrigerant level too low Top up refrigerant (service fitter)
Humidity in system Empty air conditioning system; replace,

evacuate and fill collector drier (service
fitter)
System cooling in- Line broken, ground connection Check, repair or replace lines
termittently faulty or loose contacts in com-
pressor solenoid
System very noisy Vee belt loosened or excessive- Retighten or replace Vee belt
ly worn
Coupling noisy Repair coupling
Support of compressor loos- Repair support, replace compressor
ened or internal compressor
components deformed
Excessive wear of fan motor Replace fan
System overflowing Extract refrigerant until high-pressure
indication is in normal range
System contains insufficient Perform leakage test; replenish system
refrigerant
21 Annex
21.5 Modular tachograph

WFN5RUXV9L2067295
ATF 220G-5 669

2019-10_EN
www.vdo.com
Modularer Tachograph
MTCO 1324
Betriebsanleitung Instruções de serviço

Operating Instructions Istruzioni per l’uso
Instructions de service Bedieningshandleiding
Instrucciones de servicio Betjeningsvejledning
I
3
1
2
a 4
6
b
2
II
a
b
1. 2.
Driver 2
chart
3. 4.
e Driver 1
chart
5. 6.
f
a
7. b 8.
Driver 1 Driver 2 Driver 1 Driver 2

9. 10.
3 MTCO 1324
Betriebsanleitung
Modularer Tachograph MTCO 1324 5 ... 22
Operating instructions
Modular Tachograph MTCO 1324 23 ... 40
Instructions de service
Tachygraphe modulaire MTCO 1324 41 ... 58
Instrucciones de servicio
Tacógrafo modular MTCO 1324 59 ... 76
Instruções de serviço
Tacógrafo modular MTCO 1324 77 ... 94
Istruzioni per l’uso

Tachigrafo modulare MTCO 1324 95 ... 112
Bedieningshandleiding
Modulaire tachograaf MTCO 1324 113 ... 130
Betjeningsvejledning
Modulopbygget takograf MTCO 1324 131 ... 148
4 MTCO 1324
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Systemübersicht ............................................................................................................ 6
Allgemeine Hinweise ..................................................................................................... 7
Bedienelemente .............................................................................................................. 8
Betriebsbereitschaft herstellen .................................................................................... 9
Schublade öffnen ....................................................................................................... 9
Fahrer-2 Schaublatt einlegen ..................................................................................... 9
Fahrer-1 Schaublatt einlegen ..................................................................................... 9
Zeitgruppen einstellen .............................................................................................. 10
Schaublatt entnehmen ................................................................................................. 11
Fahrerwechsel .............................................................................................................. 12
Uhrzeit verstellen ......................................................................................................... 13
Meldungen .................................................................................................................... 14
Eine Meldung erscheint ............................................................................................ 14
Fehlerspeicher anzeigen .......................................................................................... 14
Fehlercode - Übersicht ............................................................................................. 15
Fehler beheben ..........................................................................................................16
Schaublattaufnahme nachführen ...............................................................................16
Anzeigeinstrument ....................................................................................................... 17
Tageskilometer auf Null stellen ................................................................................ 17
Schaublatt-Beschreibung ............................................................................................ 18
Das richtige Schaublatt zum Gerät ........................................................................... 18
Aufzeichnungen auf der Schaublatt-Vorderseite ...................................................... 19
Eintragungen im Innenfeld ....................................................................................... 19
Die Rückseite des Schaublattes ............................................................................... 20
Aufschrieb von Störungen .......................................................................................... 21
Anhang .......................................................................................................................... 21
Prüfpflicht für Tachographen .................................................................................... 21
Wartung und Reinigung ............................................................................................ 21
Technische Daten .................................................................................................... 22
Definitionen in dieser Anleitung
Fahrer-1 = Die Person, die das Fahrzeug augenblicklich lenkt

oder lenken wird.
Fahrer-2 = Die Person, die das Fahrzeug nicht lenkt.
© Continental Automotive GmbH 5

Systemübersicht
Anzeigeinstrument
(z. B. E-Tacho 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
Schaublätter
Der Tachograph MTCO 1324 setzt durch Im unmittelbaren Blickfeld des Fahrers
seinen modularen Aufbau mit getrennter befindet sich ein zugelassenes Anzeigein-
Anzeige und Registrierung neue Maßstäbe strument, beispielsweise der E-Tacho 1323,
in Leistung, Technik und Design. Im DIN- mit analoger Geschwindigkeitsanzeige, digi-
Radioformat bildet der MTCO 1324 eine talem Wegstreckenzähler, Uhrzeit und
innovative Systemkomponente. Tageskilometerzähler. Die Funktionskon-
trolle weist auf Meldungen des MTCO
Fahrer-1 und Fahrer-2 wählen komfortabel 1324 hin.
über Bedientasten die jeweiligen Arbeits-
zeitgruppen an. Zusammen mit dem intelligenten Tacho-
graphen-Sensor, KITAS, bildet das System
Im Display erscheinen übersichtlich neben eine zuverlässige Einheit. Der Sensor liefert
Datum, Uhrzeit und Wegstrecke, die einge- Echtzeitimpulse und verschlüsselte Daten
stellten Arbeitszeitgruppen und Symbole zur Erfassung der Wegstrecke und
der eingelegten Schaublätter. Störungen Geschwindigkeit.
am Gerät oder einer Systemkomponente
werden automatisch angezeigt.
Wie bisher werden auf dem Schaublatt die Wir wünschen Ihnen allzeit gute Fahrt.
Geschwindigkeit und die Wegstrecke sowie
die fahrerbezogenen Lenk-, Arbeits- und Ihre Continental Automotive
Ruhezeiten registriert.
6 MTCO 1324
Allgemeine Hinweise
Die Symbole in dieser Anleitung haben fol- • Der MTCO 1324 wird von autorisierten
gende Bedeutung: Personen installiert und verplombt.
Nehmen Sie bitte keine Eingriffe am
Gerät und an den Zuleitungen vor.
ACHTUNG!
Der Text neben diesem Symbol
enthält wichtige Informationen, die ❒ Hinweise zur Behandlung der
beachtet werden müssen, um eine Schaublätter
Beschädigung am Gerät zu ver- • Beim EC-Tachographen ist das
meiden. Schaublatt personenbezogen, folglich
nicht übertragbar!
HINWEISE • Verwenden Sie Schaublätter vom Her-
oder zusätzliche Informationen, die steller (Original Diagrammscheiben).
bei Nichtbeachten zu Störungen Dabei auf Übereinstimmung von
führen können, sind mit diesem Messbereichsendwert und Prüfzeichen
Symbol gekennzeichnet. achten, ➥ siehe Seite 18.
• Nur einwandfreie Schaublätter einlegen,
sie dürfen nicht geknickt, nicht am
Umfang und/oder am Aufnahmeloch ein-
Beachten Sie bitte die aufge- gerissen, nicht wellig oder sonstwie
führten Hinweise! beschädigt sein!
• Die beschriebenen Schaublätter sind
❒ Hinweise zum Betrieb des gegen Beschädigung geschützt aufzube-
MTCO 1324 wahren, siehe auch Artikel 15 der VO
• Öffnen Sie die Schublade nur zum Ein- (EWG) Nr. 3821/85.
legen oder Entnehmen der Schaublätter.
Ansonsten halten Sie sie stets
geschlossen, um Beschädigungen zu ❒ Hinweis auf gesetzliche
vermeiden und um Verschmutzungen Bestimmungen
vorzubeugen. • Wer Veränderungen am Kontrollgerät
• Benutzen Sie die Schublade nicht als oder an der Signalzuführung, die den
Auflage, beispielsweise zum Aufschrieb des Kontrollgerätes beein-
Beschreiben der Schaublätter. flussen, insbesondere in Täuschungsab-
sicht vornimmt, kann staatliche Straf-
• Verwenden Sie zum Reinigen des
bzw. Ordnungsvorschriften verletzen!
Gerätes keine scheuernden Reinigungs-
mittel, auch keine Lösungsmittel wie Ver-
dünnung oder Benzin.

Bedienelemente (Seite 2, Abbildung I)
a) "Arretierte Schublade" 3) Display

• Permanent erscheint die Grundan-
b) "Klappbare Schublade" zeige.
• Meldungen / Hinweise erscheinen
Anmerkung
automatisch, ➥ siehe Seite 14.
Die Bedienung der beiden Geräteausfüh-
rungen ist prinzipiell identisch. Abwei-
Datum + Uhrzeit
chende Bedienschritte sind speziell
aufgeführt.
Schaublatt- + Zeit-
gruppen-Symbol,
Fahrer-2
1) Tastenfeld links Fehlersymbol
Taste zum Entriegeln der Gesamtkilometerstand
Schublade. Schaublatt- + Zeit-
gruppen-Symbol,
Taste zum Einstellen der Zeit- Fahrer-1
gruppe für den Fahrer-1.
2) Tastenfeld rechts 4) Trennplatte

Taste zum Einstellen der Zeit- zwischen Fahrer-1 und Fahrer-2 Schau-
gruppe für den Fahrer-2. blatt.
Taste zum Anwählen der Funk- 5) Kontrollmarkierung
tionen: damit kann die zeitrichtige Position der
• "Uhrzeit verstellen", Schaublattaufnahme überprüft werden.
➥ siehe Seite 13.
• "Fehlerspeicher anzeigen", 6) Eiförmige Schaublattaufnahme
➥ siehe Seite 14. 7) Typenschild
Tasten zum Einstellen der Uhrzeit Hersteller, Gerätetyp, Prüfzeichen und
und zum Anzeigen von aktuellen Serien-Nummer sind ersichtlich.
Fehlermeldungen.
8 MTCO 1324
Betriebsbereitschaft herstellen (Seite 3, Abbildung II)
Schublade öffnen Fahrer-2 Schaublatt einlegen

Die Schublade lässt sich nur öffnen, Vor Antritt einer Fahrt das Innenfeld
wenn ... des Schaublatts ordnungsgemäß
• das Fahrzeug steht und
beschriften, ➥ siehe Seite 19.
• die Zündung eingeschaltet ist.
4. Der Fahrer-2 legt das beschriftete
1. Taste drücken. Schaublatt mit der Vorderseite nach
oben in die eiförmige Schaublattauf-
nahme ein.
Achten Sie darauf, dass sich das
Schaublatt unter dem Federelement
(c) befindet.
5. Trennplatte wieder nach unten klappen.
¾ Im Display erscheint das Symbol

"Auswurf aktiv". Zusätzlich zeigt ein
Fahrer-1 Schaublatt einlegen
Laufbalken an, dass dieser Vorgang
etwas dauern kann. 6. Der Fahrer-1 legt das beschriftete
¾ Warten Sie, bis die Schublade ent- Schaublatt mit der Vorderseite nach
riegelt wird. oben auf die Trennplatte in die Schau-
blattaufnahme ein.
2. a) Arretierte Schublade bis zum
Anschlag herausziehen. Achten Sie darauf, dass sich das
Schaublatt unter dem Niederhalter (d)
Versuchen Sie nicht diese Schub- und unter den Rastnasen (e) der eiför-
ladenausführung nach unten zu migen Schaublattaufnahme befindet.
klappen!
Anmerkung 1-Fahrer-Betrieb
b) Klappbare Schublade bis zum Im 1-Fahrer-Betrieb ist nur das Schaublatt
Anschlag herausziehen und nach unten für den Fahrer-1 auf die Trennplatte einzu-
klappen. legen.
Gegebenenfalls Fahrer-1 Schaublatt
7. Überprüfen Sie die zeitrichtige Position
von der Trennplatte entnehmen.
der Schaublattaufnahme. Die Zeitskala
3. Trennplatte ganz nach oben klappen. des Schaublattes muss an der Mar-
Gegebenenfalls Fahrer-2 Schaublatt kierung (f) mit der aktuellen Uhrzeit im
entnehmen. Display übereinstimmen.
¾ Ist dies nicht der Fall, bitte Nach-
führung der Schaublattaufnahme
auslösen, ➥ siehe Seite 16.

8. a) Arretierte Schublade bis zum Ein- Zeitgruppen einstellen
rasten einschieben.
2-Fahrer-Betrieb
b) Klappbare Schublade in waag- 10. Der Fahrer-1 betätigt die Taste .
rechte Position bringen und bis zum ¾ Taste so oft drücken, bis die ge-
Einrasten einschieben. wünschte Zeitgruppe im Display
9. Es erscheint die Grundanzeige: erscheint.
¾ mit Datum, Uhrzeit und Gesamtkilo- Der Fahrer-2 betätigt die Taste .
meterstand, ¾ Taste so oft drücken, bis die ge-
¾ außerdem die Symbole für eingelegte wünschte Zeitgruppe im Display
Schaublätter und die aktuelle erscheint.
Stellung der Zeitgruppen, links für
Sobald das Fahrzeug fährt erscheint auto-
den Fahrer-1 und rechts für den matisch in der Grundanzeige:
Fahrer-2. • für den Fahrer-1 " " und
Anmerkungen zur Grundanzeige • für den Fahrer-2 " ".
• Die Uhrzeit des MTCO 1324 ist auf die 1-Fahrer-Betrieb
gesetzliche Zeit des Landes eingestellt,
• Im 1-Fahrer-Betrieb nur das Schaublatt
in dem das Fahrzeug registriert ist.
für den Fahrer-1 auf die Trennplatte ein-
Beginn und Ende der Sommerzeit sind
legen.
im Gerät hinterlegt und werden automa-
tisch aktualisiert. ➥ Siehe auch Seite 15 • Die Zeitgruppe für den Fahrer-2 unbe-
"Fehlercode-Übersicht". dingt auf Ruhezeit " " einstellen, da
sonst eine Fehlermeldung erscheint.
• Erscheint neben dem Gesamtkilometer-
stand ein Ausrufezeichen, so liegt eine Zeitgruppenaufteilung
Störung vor. ➥ Siehe auch Seite 15
"Fehlercode-Übersicht". = Lenkzeiten
= Alle sonstigen Arbeitszeiten
• Option: digitale v-Anzeige
Je nach Ausstattung kann in der 1. Zeile = Bereitschaftszeiten
die Geschwindigkeitsanzeige (Wartezeiten, Beifahrerzeit, Schlaf-
erscheinen. Alle Funktionen sind kabinenzeit während der Fahrt für
ansonsten analog zur Grundanzeige. Fahrer-2)
= Pausen und Ruhezeiten
10 MTCO 1324
Schaublatt entnehmen
Entnehmen Sie Ihr Schaublatt aus dem 4. Schublade wieder bis zum Einrasten
MTCO 1324 einschieben, Klappbare zuvor in waag-
• bei einem Fahrer- oder Fahrzeugwechsel, rechte Position bringen.
• bei Arbeitsende
Anmerkung
• oder spätestens nach 24 Stunden. Falls Sie - während des Auswurfvorgangs -
dennoch die Zündung ausgeschaltet haben,
Die Schublade lässt sich nur öffnen,
wenn ... kann es vorkommen, dass anschließend die
• das Fahrzeug steht und Schublade nach dem Schließen nicht mehr
korrekt verriegelt. In diesem Fall gehen Sie
• die Zündung eingeschaltet ist.
bitte wie folgt vor:
1. Taste drücken. 1. Zündung einschalten.

¾ Warten Sie, bis der Auswurfvorgang
beendet ist.
2. Danach die Schublade bis zum Ein-

rasten einschieben.
3. Zündung wieder ausschalten.
Automatisches Abschalten der Zeit-

gruppen- und Wegstreckenregistrierung
¾ Im Display erscheint das Symbol
Bleibt die Schublade länger als 25 Stunden
"Auswurf aktiv". Ein Laufbalken zeigt
mit eingelegten Schaublättern geschlossen,
an, dass der MTCO 1324 die Auf-
so registriert der MTCO 1324 automatisch
zeichnungen auf den Schaublättern
für Fahrer-1 und -2 die Zeitgruppe " ".
fertigstellt.
Der MTCO 1324 schont somit die Fahrzeug-
¾ Warten Sie, bis die Schublade ent-
batterie.
riegelt wird.
Hinweis bei Fahrzeugstillstand
Während das Symbol "Auswurf aktiv"
im Display erscheint, bitte die
Falls das Fahrzeug längere Zeit
Zündung nicht ausschalten!
nicht benutzt wird, achten Sie bitte
darauf, dass sich kein Schaublatt im
2. Arretierte Schublade bis zum Anschlag MTCO 1324 befindet. Beispiels-
herausziehen, bzw. klappbare weise bei Wartungs- / Reparaturar-
Schublade zusätzlich nach unten beiten oder Stillegung des
klappen. Fahrzeugs.
3. Schaublätter entnehmen und die
Beschriftung im Innenfeld vervollstän-
digen, ➥ siehe Seite 19.

Fahrerwechsel
2. Gewünschte Zeitgruppen einstellen.

¾ Der neue Fahrer-1 betätigt die Taste
, der Fahrer-2 die Taste .
Fall 2:
Fahrer-1 oder Fahrer-2 verlässt das
Fahrzeug:
1. Der Betreffende nimmt sein Schaublatt
Schaublatt
Fahrer-1 mit.
Schaublatt
Fahrer-2
2. Der neue Fahrer-2 legt sein Schaublatt
unter die Trennplatte.
Oder:
Der neue Fahrer-1 legt sein Schaublatt
auf die Trennplatte.
Anmerkung
Kommt kein neuer Fahrer-2, so ist dessen
Zeitgruppe auf Ruhezeit " " zu schalten,
da sonst eine Fehlermeldung erscheint.
Aufschrieb als
Fahrer-2 Fall 3:
Fahrerwechsel Aufschrieb als Der Fahrer-1 und der Fahrer-2 verlassen
Fahrer-1 das Fahrzeug:
1. Beide nehmen ihr Schaublatt aus dem
Gerät.
Wechselt der Fahrer innerhalb seiner täg-
2. Die neue Fahrzeugbesatzung legt das
lichen Arbeitszeit das Fahrzeug, so muss er
Schaublatt, je nach Funktion (Fahrer-1
das Schaublatt mitnehmen und den Fahr-
oder Fahrer-2), in das Gerät ein.
zeugwechsel auf der Rückseite des Schau-
blattes vermerken.
Fall 1:
Die Besatzung wechselt unter sich, der
Fahrer-2 wird zum Fahrer-1:
1. Schaublätter austauschen.
¾ Der Fahrer-1 (jetzt Fahrer-2) legt sein
Schaublatt unter die Trennplatte und
der Fahrer-2 (jetzt Fahrer-1) auf die
Trennplatte.
12 MTCO 1324
Uhrzeit verstellen
• Das Aufrufen der Funktion UHRZEIT

VERSTELLEN ist nur bei stehendem
Fahrzeug möglich.
• Damit sich die Schaublattaufnahme auto-
matisch mit der Uhrzeit synchronisiert,
muss die Zündung eingeschaltet sein
und es darf sich kein Schaublatt im
MTCO 1324 befinden. = Taste kurz drücken
= Taste lang drücken
1. Menü UHRZEIT VERSTELLEN mit

anwählen.
2. Mit oder den Minutenzähler akti-

vieren, die Minuten blinken.
3. Taste oder gedrückt halten, bis der

gewünschte Wert erscheint.
4. Mit Stundenzähler aktivieren, die Stunden

blinken.
5. Taste oder gedrückt halten, bis der

gewünschte Wert erscheint.
¾ Bei Über- oder Unterschreiten von Null-Uhr
wird automatisch das Datum verändert.
6. Uhrzeitverstellung bestätigen, indem Sie die

Taste länger als 2 Sekunden drücken. Es
erscheint wieder die Grundanzeige.
Anmerkung
Falls Sie die Uhrzeit mit eingelegtem Schaublatt
verstellen, erscheint anschließend im Display das
Fehlersymbol und die Uhrzeit blinkt. Der
MTCO 1324 weist Sie darauf hin, die Schaublatt-
aufnahme nachzuführen; ➥ siehe Seite 16.

Meldungen
Der MTCO 1324 überwacht die Funktion Fehlerspeicher anzeigen

des Systems und meldet automatisch, wenn
Die Ursache der Störungsmeldung ersehen
ein Fehler in einer Komponente, im Gerät
Sie aus dem Menü FEHLERSPEICHER.
oder in der Bedienung vorliegt. Meldungen
und Hinweise können sofort nach dem
Schließen der Schublade oder bei jedem Das Aufrufen der Funktion FEHLER-
Auftreten im Display erscheinen. SPEICHER anzeigen ist nur bei ste-
hendem Fahrzeug möglich!
Eine Meldung erscheint
1 2 = Taste kurz drücken

= Taste lang drücken
• Die Funktionskontrolle (1) am Anzei-

geinstrument bzw. E-Tacho leuchtet,
1. Menü FEHLERSPEICHER anwählen,
• im Display des MTCO 1324 erscheint indem Sie die Taste zweimal kurz
neben dem Gesamtkilometerstand das drücken.
Fehlersymbol (2) und ...
2. Mit oder können weitere aktive
• je nach Fehlerart blinkt die komplette
Fehler angezeigt werden.
Uhrzeit (3) bzw. blinkt der Doppelpunkt
in der Uhrzeit nicht mehr.
• Zusätzlich wird der Fehler in einem elek-
tronischen Speicher registriert, ➥ siehe
"Fehlerspeicher anzeigen".
Fehlerbeginn
• Einige Störungen dokumentiert der Symbol mit Fehlercode
MTCO 1324 auch auf dem Schaublatt,
weitere Fehlermeldungen vorhanden
➥ siehe Seite 21.
3. Grundanzeige wieder aufrufen,

– Taste länger als 2 Sekunden
drücken
– oder 20 Sekunden lang keine Taste
drücken.
14 MTCO 1324
Fehlercode - Übersicht
Meldungen im Display Code Bedeutung / Maßnahme
 = • Der MTCO 1324 hat automatisch auf Beginn

oder Ende der Sommerzeit umgeschaltet,
• oder die Uhrzeit wurde verstellt mit eingelegtem
(Uhrzeit blinkt)
Schaublatt.
Hinweis: Schaublattaufnahme nachführen,
oder ➥ siehe Seite 16.
 = Fehler bei der Nachführung der Schaublattauf-

nahme
Schaublattaufnahme nochmals nachführen,
➥ siehe Seite 16.
 = Fehler im Antrieb der Schaublattaufnahme

Kontrollieren Sie, ob die Schaublätter korrekt
(Doppelpunkt blinkt nicht) eingelegt sind.
 = Fahrt ohne Schaublatt Fahrer-1

(Fehlercode ist im Fehlerspeicher nicht ersichtlich.)
Fahrer-1 Schaublatt einlegen.
 = Schaublatt Fahrer-1 fehlt

 = Schaublatt Fahrer-2 fehlt
(Diese Meldung erscheint, sobald bei fehlendem
Schaublatt von " " auf beispielsweise " "
geschaltet wird.)
Schaublatt(er) einlegen.
 = Fehler bei CAN-Übertragung


 = Interner Gerätefehler
 = Tastaturfehler, Taste zu lange gedrückt oder blockiert
 = LCD-Fehler (Display)
 = Fehler an der Schublade

Auswurfvorgang auslösen, anschließend
Schublade wieder schließen.
➥ Fortsetzung siehe nächste Seite

Meldungen im Display Code Bedeutung / Maßnahme
 = Fehler im Schreibsystem

 (Diese Störungen dokumentiert der MTCO 1324

auf dem Schaublatt, ➥ siehe Seite 21.)
 = Fehler am Impulsausgang "B7"
 = Unterbrechung zum Anzeigeinstrument
 = Fehler bei Geberkommunikation

 = Fehler im Geberkey / Seriennummer / Signal
(Diese Störungen dokumentiert der MTCO 1324
auf dem Schaublatt, ➥ siehe Seite 21.)
 = Spannungsunterbrechung
(Fehlercode ist im Fehlerspeicher nicht ersichtlich.
Eine Spannungsunterbrechung dokumentiert der
MTCO 1324 auf dem Schaublatt, ➥ siehe Seite 21.)
Fehler beheben Schaublattaufnahme nachführen

Erst nach Beheben der Ursache, beispiels- 1. Schublade öffnen und beide Schau-
weise bei einem Bedienfehler, erlischt auto- blätter entnehmen.
matisch die Meldung.
2. Schublade wieder schließen.
¾ Automatisch aktualisiert der
Sollte sich eine Meldung ständig MTCO 1324 die Uhrzeit der Schau-
wiederholen, suchen Sie bitte blattaufnahme, anschließend erlischt
umgehend eine VDO-Fachwerkstatt das Fehlersymbol und das Blinken
auf! der Uhrzeit.
3. Schublade öffnen und gegebenenfalls

neue Schaublätter einlegen. Der
MTCO 1324 ist wieder betriebsbereit.
16 MTCO 1324
Anzeigeinstrument (Seite 150, Abbildung III)
Anmerkung Tageskilometer auf Null stellen

Design und Funktionen können von diesem Im LC-Display erscheint in der zweiten Zeile
Anzeigeinstrument (E-Tacho 1323) die zuletzt eingestellte Option: Uhrzeit oder
abweichen, detaillierte Informationen ent- der Tageskilometerstand.
nehmen Sie bitte der jeweiligen Betriebsan-
leitung. 1. Anzeige auf "Tageskilometerstand" ein-
stellen, gegebenenfalls Reset-Taste
1) Geschwindigkeitsanzeige kurz drücken.
2) Funktionskontrolle 2. Anschließend die Reset-Taste länger
Wenn die LED leuchtet, liegt eine als zwei Sekunden drücken.
Störung oder ein Ereignis vor, beispiels- ¾ Der Tageszähler wird auf "0" zurück-
weise ein Schaublatt fehlt oder eine gestellt.
Komponente des Systems funktioniert
nicht ordnungsgemäß. Anmerkung
Den Tageskilometerzähler können Sie auch
3) LC-Display
während der Fahrt zurückstellen.
(Anzeige bei Zündung Ein)
• 7-stellige Anzeige der gesamt zurück-
gelegten Wegstrecke, die letzte Stelle
zeigt 100-m-Strecken an.
• In der unteren Zeile erscheint wahl-
weise die Uhrzeit oder der Tageskilo-
meterzähler.
4) Reset-Taste
Taste zum Umschalten von Uhrzeit auf
Tageskilometerzähler.

Schaublatt-Beschreibung
Das richtige Schaublatt zum Gerät Außerhalb der EU gelten die entspre-
(Seite 150, Abbildung IV) chenden nationalen Prüfzeichen und
Bestimmungen.
Bitte achten Sie bei der Verwendung
(Bestellung) von Schaublättern Je nach Meßbereichsendwert und Geräte-
darauf, dass der Messbereich- ausführung dürfen Sie im MTCO 1324
sendwert (1) und das Prüfzeichen nachfolgende Schaublätter verwenden:
(2) des MTCO 1324 mit den
Angaben (3) bzw. (4) auf dem
Schaublatt übereinstimmen.
Kombischeibe Schaublatt für elektronische Prüfzeichen

Auswertung
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
EC = Schaublätter für den EC-Tachographen

= Schaublatt für die Geräteausführung mit Drehfrequenz-Regi-
strierung (Option), z.B. Typ: 1324.50111...
18 MTCO 1324
Aufzeichnungen auf der Schaublatt- Anmerkung
Vorderseite (Seite 150, Abbildung V) Bei einem Messbereichsendwert von
180 km/h befindet sich der Zusatzauf-
1) Zeitskala schrieb an Pos. (8a).
2) Öffnungsmarkierung Auswertung von Schaublättern
Jedes Öffnen der Schublade wird doku-
Außer dem direkten Ablesen der Aufzeich-
mentiert.
nungen besteht auch die Möglichkeit einer
3) Geschwindigkeitsverlauf in km/h exakten Auswertung der aufgezeichneten
Daten. Nähere Informationen hierzu gibt
4) Zeitgruppen-Aufschrieb Ihnen gerne eine VDO-Vertriebsstelle.
5) Innenfeld
6) Eiförmiges Aufnahmeloch Eintragungen im Innenfeld

Gewährleistet die zeitrichtige Positio- (Seite 151, Abbildung VI)
nierung des Schaublattes. Anmerkung
7) Gefahrene Wegstrecke Die Eintragungen von Name und Vorname
sowie Angaben über Beginn und Ende der
Eine Aufwärts- bzw. Benutzung sind gesetzlich vorgeschrieben
Abwärtsbewegung ent- und bilden die Grundlage für eine spätere
spricht 5 km. Auswertung des Schaublattes.
= 5 km
Anmerkung a) ... vor der Fahrt
Der Wegstreckenauf- Name und Vorname des Fahrers

schrieb wird unter- Abfahrtsort
brochen, wenn ...
Einlegedatum (obere Zeile)
• die Zeitgruppenschalter bei beiden Amtliches Kennzeichen des Fahr-
Fahrern auf Ruhezeit " " gestellt zeugs
sind, Kilometerstand bei Arbeitsbeginn
• die Zündung ausgeschaltet ist und
• der Zusatzaufschrieb (Option) nicht b) ... nach der Fahrt
aktiv ist.
Ankunftsort
Nach dem Einschalten der Zündung
wird die Aufzeichnung der zurückge- Entnahmedatum (untere Zeile)
legten Wegstrecke zeitrichtig fortge- Kilometerstand bei Fahrtende
setzt.
Gefahrene Kilometer
(können eingetragen werden)
8) Zusatzaufschrieb (Option)
Erfassen von zusätzlichen Arbeits-
gruppen, z.B.: Einsatz von Blaulicht,
Martinshorn etc.

Die Rückseite des Schaublattes 3) Prüfzeichenfeld
(Seite 151, Abbildung VII) Dieser Teil der Rückseite enthält
Angaben über die Prüfzeichen des
Für den EC-Tachographen gibt es grund-
Schaublatts und der Geräte, für die das
sätzlich zwei Schaublatt-Typen:
c) ohne Drehfrequenz-Aufzeichnung Schaublatt zugelassen ist.
d) mit Drehfrequenz-Aufzeichnung 4) Drehfrequenz-Aufzeichnung (Option)

Die uhrzeitrichtige Aufzeichnung
1) Schreibfeld für Zeitgruppen (in min-1) erfolgt auf der Rückseite des
Dieses Schreibfeld dient für die hand- Schaublattes für den Fahrer-1.
schriftliche Eintragung der Zeitgruppen.
Anmerkung
Eintragungen sind dann vorzunehmen,
wenn z.B. das Fahrpersonal Arbeiten Die Markierungen (4a) erscheinen bei
nicht in unmittelbarer Nähe des Fahr- Zündung ein / aus.
zeugs ausführt und das Gerät nicht
bedient werden kann oder bei einem
eventuellen Ausfall der Zeitgruppenregi-
strierung.
2) Innenfeld
Im Innenfeld können bis zu drei Fahr-
zeugwechsel handschriftlich vermerkt
werden. Es sind einzutragen:
Uhrzeit des Fahrzeugwechsels
Amtliches Kennzeichen des
neuen Fahrzeugs
Kilometerstand bei Arbeitsbeginn
Kilometerstand bei Fahrtende
Gefahrene km
(können eingetragen werden)
20 MTCO 1324
Aufschrieb von Störungen (Seite 151, Abbildung VIII)
Spannungsunterbrechung • Die Markierung (3) erscheint sofort nach

Ist wieder Spannung vorhanden, zeichnet Auftreten der Störung und bleibt
das Gerät kurz nach dem Anfahren einen bestehen, bis die Ursache behoben ist.
Strich (1) auf das Schaublatt.
Gerätestörungen
Geberunterbrechung Störungen im Registriersystem können fol-
Störung der Übertragungsstrecke Impuls- gende Fehlaufschriebe verursachen:
geber Ù MTCO 1324: • Markierung (4), Defekt im v-Schreiber-
• Sobald das Fahrzeug steht, erscheint die system.
Markierung (2), bei Fahrt erfolgt wieder • Markierung (5) und (6), Defekt im
der v-Aufschrieb. Schreibsystem für den Zeitgruppen- und
oder Wegaufschrieb.
Anhang
Prüfpflicht für Tachographen Wartung und Reinigung

Dem Fahrzeughalter obliegt die Pflicht, den Der MTCO 1324 ist mit moderner, wartungs-
eingebauten MTCO 1324 regelmäßig über- freier Technik ausgestattet. Vorbeugende
prüfen zu lassen. Wartungsarbeiten sind deshalb nicht erfor-
derlich.
Mindestens alle zwei Jahre ist die ordnungs-
gemäße Arbeitsweise zu überprüfen, z.B. Bei Verschmutzung können Sie das
im Rahmen der technischen Überwachung Gehäuse, das Display sowie die Funktions-
Ihres Kraftfahrzeugs. tasten mit einem leicht angefeuchteten Tuch
reinigen. Sollte das nicht ausreichen, dürfen
Sorgen Sie dafür, dass das Einbauschild bei auch spezielle Kunststoffreinigungs- oder
jeder Nachprüfung erneuert wird und die Pflegemittel verwendet werden.
vorgeschriebenen Angaben enthält.

Technische Daten
MTCO 1324 (Standard) E-Tacho 1323 (Standard)

Messbereichsendwert: 125 km/h 125 km/h
Display: 2 Zeilen mit je 16 Zeichen, 1. Zeile 7-stellig
beleuchtet über Zündung 2. Zeile 4-stellig
Temperatur: Betrieb: -25 bis 70 °C Betrieb: -25 bis 70 °C
Lager: -40 bis 85 °C Lager: -40 bis 85 °C
Spannung: 24 oder 12 Volt 24 oder 12 Volt
Stromaufnahme: Standby typisch: Standby typisch 6 mA bei 12 Volt
50 mA (12 V) (ohne Funktionskontroll-LED)
30 mA (24 V)
Pufferbatterie: Lithiumzelle
EMV: RL 95 54 EG ISO 7637 RL 95 54 EG ISO 7637
Masse: 1350 g 470 g
Sonderausstattung: • Drehfrequenz-Auf- • Messbereichsendwert:
zeichnung 3300 min-1 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Zusatzaufschrieb
• GGVS
• Messbereichsendwert:
100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• digitale Geschwindigkeits-
anzeige
© 10.09 by Continental Automotive GmbH
Zuständig für den Inhalt: Änderungen von technischen Details gegenüber den
Continental Automotive GmbH Beschreibungen, Angaben und Abbildungen dieser
Betriebsanleitung sind vorbehalten. Nachdruck,
Postfach 1640
Übersetzungen und Vervielfältigungen sind ohne
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen schriftliche Genehmigung nicht erlaubt.
22 MTCO 1324
Contents
System overview .......................................................................................................... 24

General information ..................................................................................................... 25
Operating controls ....................................................................................................... 26
Enable the device ......................................................................................................... 27
Opening the drawer .................................................................................................. 27
Inserting the driver 2 chart ........................................................................................ 27
Inserting the driver 1 chart ........................................................................................ 27
Setting the time groups ............................................................................................ 28
Removing the charts .................................................................................................... 29
Driver change ............................................................................................................... 30
Adjusting the time ........................................................................................................ 31
Messages ...................................................................................................................... 32
A message is being displayed .................................................................................. 32
Displaying the error memory .................................................................................... 32
Error code - overview ............................................................................................... 33
Trouble shooting ....................................................................................................... 34
Updating the chart carrier ......................................................................................... 34
Indicating instrument ................................................................................................... 35
Reset trip odometer to zero ...................................................................................... 35
Description of the chart ............................................................................................... 36
The appropriate chart for the device ........................................................................ 36
Recordings on the front of the chart ......................................................................... 37
Entries in the centre field .......................................................................................... 37
The rear side of the chart ......................................................................................... 38
Recording of failures ................................................................................................... 39
Appendix ....................................................................................................................... 39
Compulsory inspection of tachographs .................................................................... 39
Maintenance and cleaning ....................................................................................... 39
Technical data .......................................................................................................... 40
Definitions contained in these operating instructions
Driver 1 = The person who is driving the vehicle at the moment or who will
be driving the vehicle.
Driver 2 = The person who is not driving the vehicle.

System overview
Indicating Instrument
(e.g. E-Tacho 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
Charts
The Tachograph MTCO 1324 sets new Within the immediate field of view of the
standards in performance, technology, and driver, there is an approved indicating
design due to its modular design with sep- instrument, like for example, the E-Tacho
arate display and recording. The MTCO 1323, with analogous vehicle speed pointer,
1324, which is in DIN radio compartment digital distance counter, time and trip
format, is an innovative system component. odometer. The function monitor refers to
messages of the MTCO 1324.
Driver 1 and driver 2 conveniently select the
respective working time groups via the Together with the intelligent tachograph
control keys. sensor KITAS, the system forms a reliable
unit. The sensor provides real-time pulses
Besides the date, time and distance trav- and encoded data for recording the distance
elled, the selected working time groups and travelled and the vehicle speed.
the symbols of the inserted charts are
clearly shown in the display. Failures at the
device or of a system component will be sig-
nalled automatically. May all your journeys be pleasant!
Like before, the vehicle speed and the dis- Yours, Continental Automotive
tance travelled as well as the driver specific
driving, working and break times are
recorded on the tachograph chart.
24 MTCO 1324
General information
The symbols in these operating instructions • The MTCO 1324 will be installed and
have the following meanings: sealed by authorised persons.
Please do not intervene at the device
or at the supply lines.
ATTENTION!
The text next to this symbol contains
important information, which has to ❒ Notes for the handling of the charts
be observed to prevent the device • The chart is driver-specific and may
from being damaged. thus not be transferred to other
persons !
NOTES • Use charts provided by the manufacturer
or additional information, which, if (original tachograph charts). Make sure
not observed, may lead to failures, that the full-scale value and the approval
are marked by this symbol. mark correspond to those on the tacho-
graph, ➥ see page 36.
• Only insert perfect charts, they may
neither be folded, nor be torn at the
Please observe the notes listed perimeter and / or at the opening, nor be
below! wavy or damaged in any other way!
• The recorded charts must be safely
❒ Notes for the operation of the stored and protected against damage,
MTCO 1324 see also Section 15 of the CR (EEC) No.
• Only open the drawer for inserting or 3821/85.
removing the charts. Otherwise, keep it
shut at all times to avoid damages and to
prevent it from being contaminated. ❒ Reference to legal provisions
• Do not use the drawer as a kind of • Those who modify the settings of the
support, like for example, for writing on controlling device or at the signal feed
the charts. line, which influence the record issued
by the controlling device, especially
• Do not use any abrasive detergents for
when intending to deceive, may violate
cleaning the device, nor any solvents like
official penal provisions or administrative
diluent or naphtha.
regulations!

Operating controls (Page 2, figure I)
a) "Blocked drawer" 3) Display

• The basic display is shown perma-
b) "Hinged drawer" nently.
• Messages / notes are displayed auto-
Note matically, ➥ see page 32.
The operation of both device designs is, in
principle, identical. Operating steps which
Date + time
deviate from the normal procedure are listed
separately.
Chart + time group
symbol, driver 2
Error symbol
1) Left-hand keypad
Total kilometre reading
Key for unlocking the drawer.
Chart + time group
Key for adjusting the time group for symbol, driver 1
driver 1.
2) Right-hand keypad
Key for adjusting the time group 4) Separating plate
for driver 2. between driver 1 and driver 2 chart.
Key for selecting the following 5) Checkpoint marking

functions: for checking the temporally correct
• "Time Adjustment", position of the chart carrier.
➥ see page 31.
• Display "Error Memory", 6) "Pear-shaped" chart carrier
➥ see page 32.
7) Nameplate
Keys for adjusting the time and for The manufacturer, device type,
displaying the current error mes- inspection mark and serial number are
sages. indicated here.
26 MTCO 1324
Enable the device (Page 3, figure II)
Opening the drawer Inserting the driver 2 chart

The drawer may only be opened, if ... Before starting to drive, the centre
• the vehicle is at a standstill and field of the chart has to be duly
• the ignition is switched on. recorded, ➥ see page 37.
1. Press the key. 4. The driver 2 inserts the recorded chart

with the front side facing up in the
"pear-shaped" chart carrier.
Make sure that the chart is located
below the spring element (c).
5. Tilt separating plate downwards.
¾ In the display, the "Ejection active" Inserting the driver 1 chart

symbol is shown. Additionally, a
process indicator shows that this 6. The driver 1 inserts the recorded chart
process may take some time. with the front side facing up to the sepa-
¾ Wait until the drawer has been rating plate in the chart carrier.
unlocked. Make sure that the tachograph chart
is located under the holding-down
2. a) Pull out the blocked drawer to the
device (d) and the latches (e) of the
limit stop.
pear-shaped chart carrier.
Do not try to tip down this drawer
design! Comment on 1 driver operation
In the 1 driver operation, only the chart for
b) Pull out the hinged drawer to the limit driver 1 is to be inserted on the separating
stop and tip it down. plate.
Remove driver 1 chart if necessary.
7. Make sure that the position of the chart
3. Tilt separating plate entirely upwards. carrier is temporally correct. The time
Remove driver 2 chart if necessary. scale of the chart has to be adjusted to
the current time of the display at the
respective marker (f).
¾ If this is not the case please start the
chart carrier settings update,
➥ see page 34.

8. a) Push the blocked drawer in until it Setting the time groups
latches.
2 driver operation
b) Bring the hinged drawer into a hori-
10. Driver 1 presses the key.
zontal position and push it in until it
¾ Press the key several times, until
latches.
the desired time group is shown in
9. The basic display is shown: the display.
¾ including date, time, and the total Driver 2 presses the key.
number of kilometres, ¾ Press the key several times, until
¾ additionally, the symbols for the the desired time group is shown in
inserted charts, and current position the display.
of the time groups, on the left for
driver 1 and on the right for driver 2 As soon as the vehicle starts to drive, there
are displayed. will be an automatic display of the basic
display
Notes on the basic display • for the driver 1 " " and
• The time of the MTCO 1324 is adjusted • for the driver 2 " ".
to the legal time of the country where the
vehicle has been registered. The start 1 driver operation
and the end of the daylight saving time • Only insert the chart for driver 1 on the
are deposited within the device and will separating plate during 1 driver oper-
be updated automatically. ➥ See also ation.
page 33 "Error code - overview". • Set the time group for driver 2 in any
• In case an exclamation mark appears case to break time " " otherwise there
next to the total kilometre reading, there will be an error message.
has been a failure. ➥ See also page 33
"Error code - overview". Time group distribution
• Option: digital v-display = driving times

Depending on the design, the vehicle = remaining working times
speed display may be shown in the
= availability
1st line. Otherwise all functions are anal-
(waiting times, co-driver times, times
ogous to the basic display.
in sleeping cabin during ride)
= break times and restoring periods
28 MTCO 1324
Removing the charts
Remove your chart from the MTCO 1324 Comment

• in case of a change of driver or vehicle, In case you have, however, switched off the
• at the end of the working time ignition, it is possible that the drawer does
not properly lock after closing. In this case,
• or after 24 hours at the latest.
please proceed as follows:
The drawer may only be opened, if ...
1. Switch on the ignition.
• the vehicle is at a standstill and
¾ Wait until the ejection procedure has
• the ignition is switched on. been finished.
1. Press key. 2. Then push in the drawer until it locks

into place.
3. Switch off the ignition again.
Automatic switching off of the time

group and the distance recording
In case the drawer remains closed with the
charts inserted for more than 25 hours, the
MTCO 1324 automatically records the time
group " " for driver 1 and 2. The MTCO
¾ The "Ejection active" symbol is shown
1324 thus goes easy on the vehicle battery.
in the display. A process indicator
signals that the records on the charts
Notes on a standstill of the vehicle
are being completed by the
MTCO 1324.
If the vehicle has not been used for
¾ Wait until the drawer has been a long time, please make sure that
unlocked. there is no chart in the MTCO 1324;
e.g. in case of maintenance or
Please do not switch off the repair work or immobilisation of the
ignition while the "Ejection active" vehicle.
symbol is shown on the display!
2. Pull out the blocked drawer to limit

stop, or, in addition, tip down the
hinged drawer.
3. Remove the charts and complete the
inscription in the centre field,
➥ see page 37.
4. Push in drawer until it locks into place.
Bring the hinged drawer into a hori-
zontal position beforehand.

Driver change
2. Select the desired time groups.

¾ The new driver 1 presses the key
, the driver 2 the key .
Case 2:
Driver 1 or driver 2 leaves the vehicle:
1. The respective driver takes his chart
with him.
Chart
driver 1 Chart 2. The new driver 2 places his chart below
driver 2
the separating plate.
or:
The new driver 1 places his chart on the
separating plate.
Comment
In case there is no new driver 2, the time
group has to be switched to break time " ",
otherwise an error message will be dis-
played.
Record as
driver 2 Case 3:
Driver change Record as Driver 1 and driver 2 both leave the
driver 1
vehicle:
1. Both drivers remove their charts from
the device.
In case the driver changes the vehicle
during his daily working time, he has to take 2. The new crew inserts the chart
the chart with him and note the vehicle according to their respective functions
change on the rear of the chart. (driver 1 or driver 2) in the device.
Case 1:
The crew changes among themselves,
driver 2 becomes driver 1:
1. Exchange the charts.
¾ Driver 1 (now driver 2) places his
chart below the separating plate and
driver 2 (now driver 1) on the sepa-
rating plate.
30 MTCO 1324
Adjusting the time
• The function TIME ADJUSTMENT may

only be selected if the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
• For an automatic synchronisation of the
chart carrier and the time, the ignition
has to be switched on and there must
not be any chart inserted in the
MTCO 1324. = Depress key shortly
= Depress key for a longer interval
1. Select the TIME ADJUSTMENT via .
2. Activate the minutes counter via or ,

the minutes start to flash.
3. Depress or key until the desired

value is being displayed.
4. Activate the hours counter via , the hours

start to flash.
5. Depress or key until the desired

value is being displayed.
¾ When exceeding or undershooting 12 p.m.,
the date will be adjusted automatically.
6. Acknowledge the time adjustment by

depressing the key for more than 2
seconds. The basic display will then be shown
again.
Comment
If you adjust the time while a chart is inserted, the
error symbol will be shown in the display and the
time will be flashing. The MTCO 1324 will remind
you to update the chart carrier settings;
➥ see page 34.

Messages
The MTCO 1324 monitors the functioning of Displaying the error memory
the system and automatically signals any
To find out the reason for the error message
failure occurring in one of the components,
please refer to the ERROR MEMORY
the device or the handling. Messages and
menu.
notes may be shown in the display immedi-
ately after having closed the drawer or when
the failure occurs. The display ERROR MEMORY
function may only be selected if the
vehicle is at a standstill!
A message is being displayed
1 2
= Depress key shortly
= Depress key for a longer interval
• The function monitor (1) at the indi-
cating instrument or E-Tacho is lit up,
• an exclamation mark (2) will appear next 1. Select the ERROR MEMORY menu by
to the total kilometre reading in the shortly depressing the key twice.
MTCO 1324 display and ...
2. Via or , other active errors may
• depending on the error type either the
be displayed.
complete time display (3) is flashing or
the colon between the digits will stop to
flash.
• Additionally, the error is recorded in an
electronical memory, ➥ see "Displaying
Error start
the error memory".
Symbol with error code
• Some failures are also documented by
Other error messages available
the MTCO 1324 on the chart, ➥ see
page 39.
3. Call up the basic display again,
– Depress key for more than
2 seconds
– or do not depress any key for
20 seconds.
32 MTCO 1324
Error code - Overview
Displayed message Code Meaning / measure
 = • The MTCO 1324 has automatically changed

over to the beginning or the end of the daylight
saving time,
(Time is flashing)
• or the time has been adjusted with the chart
inserted.
or Note: Update the chart carrier settings,
➥ see page 34.
 = Error during chart carrier settings update

Update the chart carrier settings once again,
➥ see page 34.
 = Error in the driving mechanism of the chart carrier

Check whether the charts have been correctly
(Colon is not flashing) inserted.
 = Trip without driver 1 chart

(Error code cannot be found in the error memory.)
Insert driver 1 chart.
 = Driver 1 chart is missing

 = Driver 2 chart is missing
(This message will appear when switching from " "
to " ", for example, while the chart is missing.)
Insert chart(s).
 = Error during CAN transmission


 = Internal error
 = Keypad error, key pressed too long or blocked
 = LCD error (display)
 = Error at the drawer

Start the ejection procedure and close the
drawer again afterwards.
➥ To be continued on the next page

Displayed messages Code Meaning / measure
 = Error in recording system

 (The MTCO 1324 will record these errors on the

chart, ➥ see page 39.)
 = Error at "B7" v-pulse output
 = Disconnection towards indicating instrument
 = Error during pulse generator communication

 = Error in pulse generator key / serial number /
signal
(The MTCO 1324 will record these errors on the
 = Power loss

(Error code cannot be found in the error memory.
The MTCO 1324 will record a power loss on the
Trouble shooting Updating the chart carrier

Only after having remedied the error cause, 1. Open the drawer and remove both
e.g. in case of an operating error, will the charts.
message automatically be deleted.
2. Close the drawer again.
¾ The MTCO 1324 will automatically
In case one of the messages is update the time of the chart carrier,
shown repeatedly, immediately and the error symbol and the time will
consult a VDO service partner! then stop to flash.
3. Open the drawer and insert new charts

if necessary. The MTCO 1324 will be
ready for use again.
34 MTCO 1324
Indicating instrument (Page 150, figure III)
Comment Reset trip odometer to zero

Design and functions may deviate from this In the second line of the LC display, the
indicating instrument (E-Tacho 1323), for most recently selected option is displayed:
detailed information, please refer to the Time or the trip odometer reading.
respective operating instructions.
1. Set the display to "Trip odometer
1) Vehicle speed display reading" and press the reset key for a
short time, if appropriate.
2) Function monitor
If the LED is lit up, there is a failure or 2. Then depress the reset key for more
an event, e.g. a chart is missing or one of than 2 seconds.
the system's components does not work ¾ The trip odometer will be reset to "0".
properly.
Comment
3) LC-Display You may also reset the trip odometer during
(Display for Ignition On) ride.
• 7 digit display of the total distance
travelled, with the last digit indicating
the 100-metre-distances.
• In the bottom line, either the time or
the trip odometer is displayed.
4) Reset key
Key for switching over from time to trip
odometer.

Description of the chart
The appropriate chart for the device Outside the EU, the respective national
(Page 150, figure IV) approval marks and provisions are valid.
When using (ordering) charts, always Depending on the full-scale value and the
ensure that the full-scale value (1) device design, you may use the following
and the approval mark (2) of the charts within the MTCO 1324:
MTCO 1324 correspond to the details
(3) or (4) on the chart respectively.
Standard chart Chart for electronical evaluation Approval mark
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
EC = Chart for the EEC tachograph

= Chart for the device design with rpm recording (option),
e.g. Type: 1324.50111...
36 MTCO 1324
Recordings on the front part of the 8) Additional recording (option)
chart (Page 150, figure V) Recording of additional working groups,
e.g.: use of blue light, a police siren, etc.
1) Time scale
Note
2) Opening marker
For a full scale value of 180 kph, the
Each opening of the drawer is being
additional record is to be found at ref.
recorded.
(8a).
3) Speed development in kph
Evaluation of charts
4) Time group recording Besides the direct reading of the records,
there is also the possibility of a precise eval-
5) Centre field uation of the recorded data. Further details
will be readily provided by a VDO distrib-
6) "Pear-shaped opening" uting centre.
Ensures the temporally exact positioning
of the chart.
7) Distance travelled Entries in the centre field

(Page 151, figure VI)
An up- or downward
movement corresponds to Comment
5 km. The entering of the name and first name as
= 5 km well as statements on the beginning and the
end of the use is required by law and forms
Note the basis of a later evaluation of the chart.
The distance recording will
be interrupted if ... a) ... before trip
name and first name of the driver
• the time group switches have been place of departure

set to break time " " for both date of insertion (upper line)
drivers,
vehicle registration number
• the ignition has been switched off and
beginning odometer reading
• the additional record (option) is not
active.
b) ... after trip
After switching on the ignition the
recording of the distance covered will be place of arrival
continued correctly in terms of time and date of chart retrieval (bottom line)
position.
ending odometer reading
distance travelled (may be
entered)

The rear side of the chart 3) Approval mark field
(Page 151, figure VII) This part of the rear side contains infor-
mation on the approval numbers of the
The EEC tachograph has two basic chart
chart and the devices for which the chart
types:
is approved.
c) without rpm recording
d) with rpm recording 4) RPM recording (option)
The temporally exact recording (in rpm)
1) Entry field for the time groups is carried out on the rear side of the chart
This entry field is used for manual for driver 1.
entries of the time groups. Manual
entries are required if, for example, the Note
crew members work away from the The markers (4a) will be displayed for
vehicle and therefore are not able to ignition on / off.
operate the tachograph or else in case of
a failure of the time group recording
mechanism.
2) Centre field
In the centre field, up to three vehicle
changes may be entered manually.
The following data is required:
time of vehicle change
the registration number of the new
vehicle
odometer reading at start of
journey
odometer reading at end of journey
distance travelled
(may be entered)
38 MTCO 1324
Recording of failures (Page 151, figure VIII)
Power loss • The marker (3) is displayed immediately

In case there is power available again, the after the failure and remains there, until
tachograph will draw a line (1) on the chart the cause of the failure has been rem-
shortly after the vehicle has started to move. edied.
Pulse generator disconnection Device failures

Failure of the transmission link between Failures in the recording mechanism may
pulse generator Ù MTCO 1324: cause the following recording errors:
• As soon as the vehicle stands still, the • Marker (4), defect within the v-recording
marker (2) is shown; during ride, mechanism.
v-recording continues. • Marker (5) and (6), defect within the
or recording mechanism for the time group
and distance record.
Appendix
Compulsory inspection of tacho- Maintenance and cleaning

graphs The MTCO 1324 is equipped with modern,
The vehicle owner is obliged to have the maintenance-free technology. For this
installed MTCO 1324 inspected at regular reason, preventive maintenance work is not
intervals. required.
At least once every two years, the proper In case they are dirty, you may clean the
operation of the tachograph has to be housing, the display and the function keys
tested, e.g. in conjunction with the technical by means of a slightly moistened cloth. In
inspection of your vehicle. case this proves not sufficient, special
cleaning or preservative agents for plastics
Please ensure that the installation plate is may also be used.
replaced at each inspection and contains
the information required.

Technical data
MTCO 1324 (standard) E-Tacho 1323 (standard)

Full-scale value: 125 kph 125 kph
Display: 2 lines with 16 digits each, 1. line 7 digits
lit up via ignition 2. line 4 digits
Temperature: Operation: -25 through 70 °C Operation: -25 through 70 °C
Storage: -40 through 85 °C Storage: -40 through 85 °C
Voltage: 24 or 12 volt 24 or 12 volt
Power consumption: Stand-by typically: Stand-by typically 6 mA for
50 mA (12 V) 12 volt (without LED for function
30 mA (24 V) monitor)
Buffer battery: Lithium cell
EMC: Dir 95 54 EC ISO 7637 Dir 95 54 EC ISO 7637
Physical mass: 1350 g 470 g
Special equipment: • RPM record 3300 rpm • Full-scale value:
• additional record 100 / 140 / 180 kph
• ADR
• Full-scale value:
100 / 140 / 180 kph
• Digital vehicle speed display
Responsible for the contents: We reserve the right to make changes to technical
Continental Automotive GmbH details in the descriptions, specifications, and figures
contained in these operating instructions. Reprinting,
P.O. Box 1640
translations, and reproductions are not permitted
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen without written approval.
40 MTCO 1324
Table des matières
Aperçu du système ...................................................................................................... 42

Remarques générales .................................................................................................. 43
Eléments de commande .............................................................................................. 44
Etablir l'ordre de marche ............................................................................................. 45
Ouvrir le tiroir ............................................................................................................ 45
Charger le disque diagrammes chauffeur-2 ............................................................. 45
Charger le disque diagrammes chauffeur-1 ............................................................. 45
Régler les groupes de temps ................................................................................... 46
Enlever le disque diagrammes ................................................................................... 47
Echange chauffeurs ..................................................................................................... 48
Régler l'heure ............................................................................................................... 49
Messages ...................................................................................................................... 50
Un message apparaît ............................................................................................... 50
Afficher la mémoire d'erreur ..................................................................................... 50
Code d'erreurs - vue synoptique .............................................................................. 51
Eliminer l’erreur ........................................................................................................ 52
Synchronisation du plateau du disque ..................................................................... 52
Indicateur ...................................................................................................................... 53
Mettre le compteur kilométrique journalier à zéro .................................................... 53
Présentation du disque diagrammes ......................................................................... 54
Le bon disque diagrammes adapté à l'appareil ........................................................ 54
Enregistrements sur le recto du disque diagrammes ............................................... 55
Inscriptions dans la partie centrale ........................................................................... 55
Le verso du disque diagrammes .............................................................................. 56
Enregistrement des anomalies ................................................................................... 57
Annexe .......................................................................................................................... 57
Contrôle obligatoire pour tachygraphes .................................................................... 57
Entretien et nettoyage .............................................................................................. 57
Caractéristiques techniques ..................................................................................... 58
Définitions concernant ces instructions
chauffeur-1 = La personne conduisant le véhicule en ce

moment ou qui va le conduire.
chauffeur-2 = La personne qui ne conduit pas le véhicule.

Aperçu du système
instrument indicateur
(par ex. E-Tacho 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
disques diagrammes
Le tachygraphe MTCO 1324 avec sa temps de conduite, de travail et de repos

structure modulaire séparant l'indicateur et associés à chaque chauffeur.
le système d'enregistrement se met à la
pointe quant à sa capacité, sa technique et Un instrument indicateur homologué se
son design. Désormais en format radio DIN, trouve dans le champ visuel immédiat du
le MTCO 1324 représente un composant chauffeur, par ex. l'E-Tacho 1323 équipé
innovateur du système. d'un indicateur de vitesse analogique, d'un
compteur kilométrique numérique, d'une
Les chauffeurs 1 et 2 sélectionnent faci- montre et d'un compteur kilométrique jour-
lement les différents groupes du temps de nalier. Le contrôle de fonctionnement
travail par des touches de commande. signale des messages du MTCO 1324.
Les groupes du temps de travail enregistrés Le système forme une unité fiable en relation
et les symboles des disques diagrammes avec le capteur de tachygraphe intelligent
chargés sont visualisés par des synoptiques KITAS. Ce capteur fournit des impulsions en
sur l’afficheur à côté de la date, de l'heure et temps réel et des données chiffrées pour
de la distance parcourue. Toute anomalie capter le parcours et la vitesse.
intervenue sur l'appareil ou un composant
du système sera affichée automatiquement.
Comme toujours, vitesse et distance par- Nous vous souhaitons toujours bonne route.
courue sont enregistrées sur le disque dia-
grammes de même que les différents Votre Continental Automotive
42 MTCO 1324
Remarques générales
Les symboles figurant dans ces instructions • Le MTCO 1324 est installé et plombé par
ont la signification suivante : des personnes autorisées.
Merci de vous abstenir d'interven-
tions sur l'appareil et les lignes d'ali-
ATTENTION ! mentation.
Le texte à côté de ce symbole con-
tient des informations importantes
qu'il faut tenir en compte pour éviter ❒ Instructions concernant le trai-
l'endommagement de l'appareil. tement des disques diagrammes
• Pour le tachygraphe CE, le disque
REMARQUES diagrammes est personnel et ne
ou des informations supplémentaires pourra donc pas être transmis !
pouvant entraîner des dérangements • Utilisez les feuilles de diagramme du
en cas de non-respect sont repérées constructeur (disques diagrammes ori-
par ce symbole. ginaux). Veillez dans ce contexte à ce
que le calibre et la marque d'homolo-
gation soient corrects,
➥ voir la page 54.
Merci d'observer les instructions • Charger uniquement des disques dia-
mentionnées ! grammes impeccables, ils ne doivent ni
être pliés ni présenter des déchirures au
❒ Instructions concernant l'exploi- bord et/ou au niveau du trou de position-
tation du MTCO 1324 nement ni être ondulés ou endommagés
• Ouvrez le tiroir seulement pour charger d'une autre manière !
ou enlever les disques diagrammes. • Les disques diagrammes écrits doivent
Sinon laissez-le toujours fermé afin être conservés à un endroit à l'abri des
d'éviter des endommagements et de pré- risques d'endommagement, voir éga-
venir des encrassements. lement l'article 15 du règlement CEE no.
• N'employez pas le tiroir comme support, 3821/85.
par ex. pour écrire sur les disques dia-
grammes.
❒ Respectez les dispositions légales
• N'employez pas de produits de net-
• Toute intervention sur l'appareil de con-
toyage abrasifs pour nettoyer l'appareil
trôle ou sur la ligne de transmission des
ni des solvants tels que des agents de
signaux affectant l'enregistrement de
dilution ou de l'essence.
l'appareil de contrôle pourra porter
atteinte aux dispositions étatiques
pénales ou bien réglementaires, avant
tout dans le cas d'une intention dolosive!

Eléments de commande (page 2, illustration I)
a) "Tiroir droit" 3) Afficheur

• l'affichage initial est visualisé en per-
b) "Tiroir rabattable" manence.
• des messages / renseignements
Nota
apparaissent automatiquement,
En principe, la conduite des deux versions ➥ voir la page 50.
d'appareil est identique. Les opérations de
commande divergentes seront présentées à
Date heure
part.
Symbol disque +
symbol groupe de
temps, chauffeur-2
1) Clavier gauche
Symbol d'erreur
Touche permettant de déverrouiller
Lecture totatlisateur
le tiroir.
Symbol disque +
Touche permettant de régler le symbol groupe de
groupe de temps pour le chauffeur-1. temps, chauffeur-1
2) Clavier droit
Touche permettant de régler le 4) Plaque de séparation
groupe de temps pour le chauffeur-2. placée entre les disques diagrammes
pour chauffeur-1 et chauffeur-2.
Touche permettant la sélection des
fonctions : 5) Repère
• "Réglage heure", ceci permet de contrôler si la position du
➥ voir la page 49. support de disque diagrammes est cor-
• "Afficher mémoire d'erreur", recte dans le temps.
6) Support ovale de disque diagrammes
Touche pour régler l’heure et pour
afficher des messages d’erreurs 7) Plaque signalétique
actuels. Inscription du constructeur, du type
d'appareil, de la marque d'homologation
et du numéro de série.
44 MTCO 1324
Etablir l'ordre de marche (page 3, illustration II)
Ouvrir le tiroir 4. Le chauffeur-2 charge le disque dia-

grammes écrit dans le support ovale de
Le tiroir ne pourra être ouvert que si ...
disque diagrammes, le recto étant en
• le véhicule est à l'arrêt et haut.
• le contact est mis.
Veillez à ce que le disque dia-
1. Appuyer sur la touche . grammes se trouve au-dessous de
l'élément ressort (c).
5. Rabattre la plaque de séparation de

nouveau vers le bas.
Charger le disque diagrammes

¾ Le symbole "Ejection active" apparaît chauffeur-1
sur l’afficheur. En outre, une barre de 6. Le chauffeur-1 pose le disque dia-
déroulement signale que cette opé- grammes complété sur la plaque de
ration peut durer quelques temps. séparation dans le support de disque
¾ Attendez jusqu'à ce que le tiroir soit diagrammes, le recto étant en haut.
déverrouillé.
Veillez à ce que le disque dia-
2. a) Extraire le tiroir droit jusqu'à la butée. grammes se trouve au-dessous du
serre-disque (d) et au-dessous des
N'essayez pas de rabattre vers le ergots encliquetables (e) du support
bas cette version de tiroir ! ovale de disque diagrammes.
b) Extraire le tiroir rabattable jusqu'à la Remarque exploitation à 1 chauffeur

butée et rabattre vers le bas. Enlever, le
En cas d'exploitation à 1 chauffeur seul le
cas échéant, le disque diagrammes
disque diagrammes pour le chauffeur-1 est
chauffeur-1 de la plaque de séparation.
à charger sur la plaque de séparation.
3. Rabattre la plaque de séparation entiè-
rement vers le haut. Enlever, le cas 7. Contrôlez si la position du support de
échéant, le disque diagrammes disque diagrammes est correcte dans le
chauffeur-2. temps. L'échelle de temps du disque
diagrammes doit être réglée à la même
heure (f) qu'indiquée sur l'afficheur.
Charger le disque diagrammes ¾ Si ce n'est pas le cas, synchronisez le
chauffeur-2 positionement du plateau du disque,
Compléter dûment la partie centrale du
disque diagrammes avant de commen-
cer un parcours, ➥ voir la page 55.

8. a) Introduire le tiroir droit en coulissant Régler les groupes de temps
jusqu'à ce qu'il s'encliquette.
Exploitation à 2 chauffeurs
b) Amener le tiroir rabattable en
10. Le chauffeur-1 appuie sur la touche
position horizontale, puis l'introduire en
.
coulissant jusqu'à ce qu'il s'encliquette.
¾ Appuyer plusieurs fois sur la touche
9. L’affichage initial est visualisé : jusqu'à ce que le groupe de temps
¾ la date, l'heure et le kilométrage total, souhaité apparaisse sur l’afficheur.
¾ en outre les symboles pour disques Le chauffeur-2 appuie sur la touche
diagrammes chargés et la position .
actuelle des groupes de temps, à ¾ Appuyer plusieurs fois sur la touche
gauche celle du chauffeur-1 et à jusqu'à ce que le groupe de temps
droite celle du chauffeur-2. souhaité apparaisse sur l’afficheur.
Remarque sur l’affichage initial L'affichage initial apparaît automatiquement

• L'heure du MTCO 1324 est réglée sur dès que le véhicule commence à rouler et
indique :
l'heure légale du pays dans lequel le
véhicule est immatriculé. Le début et la • pour le chauffeur-1 " " et
fin de l'heure d'été sont mémorisés dans • pour le chauffeur-2 " ".
l'appareil et seront automatiquement
actualisés. ➥ Voir également la page 51 Exploitation à 1 chauffeur
"L'Code d'erreurs - vue synoptique". • En cas d'exploitation à 1 chauffeur seul
• Si un point d’exclamation apparaît à côté le disque diagrammes pour le chauffeur-
de la distance parcourue totale, cela 1 est à charger sur la plaque de sépa-
indique une anomalie. ➥ Voir également ration.
la page 51 "L'Code d'erreurs - vue • Il faut que le groupe de temps du
synoptique". chauffeur-2 soit de toute façon réglé sur
• Option : affichage v numérique temps de repos " ", sinon un message
L’affichage vitesse peut apparaître dans d'erreur sera affiché.
la 1ère ligne en fonction de l’équi-
Classement des groupes de temps
pement. Sinon, toutes les fonctions sont
analogues à l’affichage initial. = temps de conduite
= tous les autres temps de travail
= temps de permanence
(temps d'arrêt, temps de convoyeur,
temps de cabine couchette pendant
le trajet pour le chauffeur-2)
= pauses et temps de repos
46 MTCO 1324
Enlever le disque diagrammes
Enlevez votre disque diagrammes du 4. Réintroduire le tiroir en glissant jusqu'à

MTCO 1324 ce qu'il s'encliquette, après l’avoir
• en cas d'échange de chauffeurs ou de amené en position horizontale si le tiroir
véhicule, est rabattable.
• en fin de journée Nota
• ou au plus tard après 24 heures. Dans le cas où vous - pendant la procédure
d'éjection - auriez quand même coupé le
Le tiroir ne pourra être ouvert que si ... contact, il se peut qu'ensuite le tiroir ne se
• le véhicule est à l'arrêt et verrouille plus correctement après la fer-
• le contact est mis. meture. Dans ce cas, procédez comme suit :
1. Mettre le contact.
1. Appuyer sur la touche . ¾ Attendez jusqu'à ce que le processus
d'éjection soit terminé.
2. Ensuite, introduire le tiroir en glissant

jusqu'à ce qu'il s'encliquette.
3. Couper le contact de nouveau.
Arrêt automatique de l'enregistrement

¾ Le symbole "Ejection active" apparaît des groupes de temps et des distances
sur l'afficheur. Une barre de dérou- parcourues
lement indique que le MTCO 1324 Si le tiroir reste fermé pendant plus de 25
complète les enregistrements sur les heures, les disques diagrammes étant
disques diagrammes. chargés, le MTCO 1324 enregistrera pour
¾ Attendez jusqu'à ce que le tiroir soit les chauffeurs-1 et -2 automatiquement le
déverrouillé. groupe de temps " ". Le MTCO 1324
ménagera ainsi la batterie du véhicule.
Merci de laisser l'allumage en
marche pendant que le symbole A noter en cas d'arrêt du véhicule
"Ejection active" apparaît sur l'affi-
cheur ! Si le véhicule n'est pas employé
pendant une période assez longue,
veillez s.v.p. à ce qu'aucun disque
2. Extraire le tiroir droit jusqu'à la butée, diagrammes ne se trouve dans le
ou bien rabattre en plus le tiroir rabat- MTCO 1324. Par ex. au cours de
table vers le bas. travaux d'entretien / de réparation
3. Enlever les disques diagrammes et ou si le véhicule est mis hors de cir-
compléter l'inscription dans la partie culation.
centrale, ➥ voir la page 55.

Echange chauffeurs
2. Régler les groupes de temps souhaités.

¾ Le nouveau chauffeur-1 appuie sur la
touche , tandis que le chauffeur-2
appuie sur la touche .
Cas 2 :
disque dia-
disque dia-
Le chauffeur-1 ou le chauffeur-2 quitte le
grammes
chauffeur-1 grammes véhicule :
chauffeur-2
1. Le chauffeur concerné emmène son
disque diagrammes avec lui.
2. Le nouveau chauffeur-2 place son
disque diagrammes au-dessous de la
plaque de séparation.
Ou :
Le nouveau chauffeur-1 place son
disque diagrammes sur la plaque de
séparation.
enregistrement
comme A noter
chauffeur-2
échange enregistrement Dans le cas où il n'y aurait pas de nouveau
chauffeur comme chauffeur-2, passer le groupe de temps sur
chauffeur-1
temps de repos " ", sinon un message
d'erreur sera affiché.
Si le chauffeur change de véhicule au cours
Cas 3 :
de sa journée de travail, il faut qu'il emporte
le disque diagrammes avec lui et qu'il note le Le chauffeur-1 et le chauffeur-2 quittent
changement de véhicule au verso du disque le véhicule :
diagrammes. 1. Les deux enlèvent leur disque dia-
grammes de l'appareil.
Cas 1 :
2. Le nouvel équipage de véhicule charge
Les membres d'équipage se relayent les disques diagrammes dans l'appareil
entre eux, le chauffeur-2 se transforme selon la fonction respective (chauffeur-1
en chauffeur-1 : ou chauffeur-2).
1. Echanger les disques diagrammes.
¾ Le chauffeur-1 (dorénavant chauffeur-
2) place son disque diagrammes au-
dessous de la plaque de séparation, et
le chauffeur-2 (dorénavant chauffeur-
1) place le sien sur la plaque de sépa-
ration.
48 MTCO 1324
Régler l'heure
• La fonction REGLER L'HEURE est

accessible uniquement quand le
véhicule est à l'arrêt.
• Pour que le support de disque dia-
grammes se synchronise automati-
quement à l’heure, il faut que
l’allumage soit enclenché et qu’il n’y
ait pas de disque diagrammes dans = Appuyer brièvement sur la touche
le MTCO 1324. = Appuyer longuement sur la touche
1. Sélectionner le menu REGLER L'HEURE par

l'intermédiaire de .
2. Activer le compteur minutes sur ou ,

les minutes clignotent.
3. Maintenir la pression sur la touche ou

jusqu’à ce que la valeur souhaitée apparaisse.
4. Activer le compteur heures sur , les heures

clignotent.
5. Maintenir la pression sur la touche ou

jusqu’à ce que la valeur souhaitée apparaisse.
¾ La date sera automatiquement changée en
cas de modification de l'heure au-delà ou en
deça de zéro heure.
6. Confirmer le réglage de l’heure en appuyant

plus de 2 secondes sur la touche . L’affi-
chage initial sera reaffiché.
Nota
Si vous modifiez l'heure lorsqu'un disque est
présent, un symbol d'erreur sera affiché et l'heure
clignotera. Le MTCO 1324 vous rappellera de re
synchroniser le plateau du disque;

Messages
Le MTCO 1324 surveille la fonction du Afficher la mémoire d'erreur

système et signale automatiquement toute
Le motif du message d'erreur est indiqué
erreur intervenue sur un des composants,
dans le menu MEMOIRE D'ERREUR.
sur l’appareil ou bien au niveau de la con-
duite. Des messages et des renseigne-
ments peuvent être visualisés sur l’afficheur La fonction afficher MEMOIRE
immédiatement après avoir fermé le tiroir ou D'ERREUR est possible uniquement
à chaque occurrence. si le véhicule est à l’arrêt!
Un message apparaît
= Appuyer brièvement sur la touche

1 2 = Appuyer longuement sur la touche
• Le contrôle de fonctionnement (1) sur 1. Sélectionner le menu MEMOIRE

l'indicateur ou bien l'E-Tacho est allumé, D’ERREUR en appuyant deux fois
• sur l’afficheur du MTCO 1324, un point brièvement sur la touche .
d’exclamation (2) apparaît à côté de la
2. ou permettent de visualiser
distance parcourue totale et ...
d’autres erreurs actives.
• selon le type d'erreur, soit l'heure
affichée (3), soit les deux points entre les
chiffres cessent de clignoter.
• En plus, l'erreur est enregistrée dans
une mémoire électronique, ➥ voir Début de l’erreur
"Afficher la mémoire d'erreur". Symbole avec code d’erreur
• Le MTCO 1324 documentera quelques autres messages d’erreurs en attente
anomalies sur le disque diagrammes,
3. Rappeler l’affichage initial,
– Appuyer la touche plus de
2 secondes
– ou ne pas actionner de touche
pendant 20 secondes.
50 MTCO 1324
Code d'erreurs – vue synoptique
Message affiché Code Signification / mesure
 = • Le MTCO 1324 a automatiquement commuté au

début ou à la fin de la journée,
• ou bien l’heure a été réglée lorsque le support de
(l'heure clignote)
disque diagrammes était chargé.
Note : Synchronisez le plateau du disque,
ou ➥ voir la page 52.
 = Erreur pendant la synchronisation du plateau du

disque
Synchronisez le plateau du disque à nouveau,
 = Erreur sur l’entraînement du support de disque dia-

grammes
(les deux points ne clignotent Vérifiez que le disque a été correctement inséré.
pas)
 = Véhicule roule sans disque diagrammes

chauffeur-1 (Code d'erreur introuvable dans la
mémoire d'erreur.)
Insérez le disque chauffeur-1.
 = Disque diagrammes chauffeur-1 absent

 = Disque diagrammes chauffeur-2 absent
(Ce message apparaitra lors du passage de " "à
" " si le disque est absent.)
Insérez le(s) disque(s).
 = Erreur lors de la transmission CAN


 = Erreur d'appareil interne
 = Erreur de clavier, une touche a été actionnée trop

longtemps ou a été bloquée
 = Erreur ACL (afficheur)
➥ Suite à la page suivante

Message affiché Code Signification / mesure
 = Erreur sur le tiroir

Recommencez la procédure d'éjection et
fermez ensuite le tiroir.
 = Erreur dans le système d'enregistrement

 (Le MTCO 1324 enregistrera cette erreur sur le

disque, ➥ voir la page 57.)
 = Erreur sur la sortie d'impulsions "B7"
 = Interruption de la connexion à l'indicateur
 = Erreur dans la communication de transmetteur

 = erreur dans la clé transmetteur / le numéro de
série / le signal
(Le MTCO 1324 enregistrera cette erreur sur le
disque, ➥ voir la page 57.)
 = Coupure de la tension

(Le code erreur est introuvable dans la mémoire
d'erreur. Le MTCO 1324 enregistrera une chute de
tension sur le disque, ➥ voir la page 57.)
Eliminer l’erreur Synchronisation du plateau du

Le message ne s’éteindra automatiquement disque
qu’après l’élimination de l’origine, par 1. Ouvrir le tiroir et retirer les deux disques
exemple en cas de fausse manœuvre. diagrammes.
2. Refermer le tiroir.
Si un message se repète sans ¾ Le MTCO 1324 va synchroniser auto-
cesse, veuillez consulter immédia- matiquement le plateau du disque, et
tement un atelier spécialisé VDO ! le symbol d'erreur ainsi que l'heure
cesseront de clignoter.
3. Ouvrir le tiroir et charger de nouveaux

disques diagrammes, le cas échéant.
Le MTCO 1324 est de nouveau prêt à
fonctionner.
52 MTCO 1324
Indicateur (page 150, illustration III)
Nota Mettre le compteur kilométrique

Il est possible que la forme et les fonctions journalier à zéro
divergent de cet indicateur (E-Tacho 1323);
La dernière option réglée (horloge ou
pour de plus amples renseignements, se
compteur kilométrique journalier) est visua-
reporter aux instructions de service.
lisée sur la deuxième ligne de l’afficheur
1) Indication de la vitesse ACL.
2) Contrôle de fonctionnement 1. Passer l'affichage sur "Kilométrage jour-

Si la LED est allumée, il s'agit d'une nalier", le cas échéant, appuyer briè-
anomalie ou d'un événement, il manque vement sur la touche de remise à zéro.
par ex. un disque diagramme ou un 2. Ensuite, actionner la touche de remise à
composant du système ne fonctionne zéro pendant plus de 2 secondes.
pas de façon réglementaire. ¾ Le compteur kilométrique journalier
est remis à "0".
3) Afficheur ACL
(affichage à la mise du contact) Nota
• Affichage à 7 chiffres de la distance Le compteur kilométrique journalier peut
totale parcourue, le dernier chiffre être remis à zéro même en roulant.
indiquant des parcours de 100 m.
• Dans la ligne inférieure apparaissent
en option l'heure ou le compteur kilo-
métrique journalier.
4) Touche de remise à zéro

Touche permettant de commuter de
l’horloge au compteur kilométrique jour-
nalier.

Présentation du disque diagrammes
Le bon disque diagrammes adapté à A l'extérieur de l'UE, sont valables les

l'appareil (page 150, illustration IV) numéros d'homologation et les dispositions
nationales correspondantes.
Lors de l'emploi (la commande) de
disques diagrammes, veillez à ce En fonction du calibre et du modèle
que l’échelle (1) et le numéro d'appareil vous êtes autorisé à utiliser dans
d'homologation (2) du MTCO 1324 le MTCO 1324 les disques diagrammes sui-
sont en accord avec les indications vants :
(3) ou bien (4) figurant sur le disque
diagrammes.
Disque combiné Disque diagramme pour lecture Numéro d'homologation

électronique
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
CE = disques diagrammes pour le tachygraphe CE

= disque diagrammes pour le modèle d'appareil à enregistrement
de tours-moteur (option), par ex. le type : 1324.50111...
54 MTCO 1324
Enregistrements sur le recto du Nota
disque diagrammes Lorsque l’échelle est de 180 km/h,
(page 150, illustration V) l'enregistrement supplémentaire se
trouve à la position (8a).
1) Echelle de temps
Lecture de disques diagrammes
2) Marquage d'ouverture
Chaque ouverture du tiroir est docu- Additionnellement à la lecture directe des
mentée. enregistrements, il existe également la pos-
sibilité de lire exactement les données enre-
3) Evolution de la vitesse en km/h gistrées. Les services de vente VDO seront
à votre entière disposition si vous désirez de
4) Enregistrement des groupes de temps plus amples informations.
5) Partie centrale
6) Trou de positionnement ovale Inscriptions dans la partie centrale

Assure le positionnement correct de (page 151, illustration VI)
l’échelle temps du disque diagrammes.
Nota
7) Distance parcourue Les inscriptions du nom, du prénom ainsi
que les indications du début et de la fin d'uti-
Un mouvement ascendant
lisation sont prescrites par la loi et consti-
ou descendant cor-
tuent la base d'une évaluation ultérieure du
respond à 5 km.
= 5 km
disque diagrammes.
Nota a) ... avant le trajet

L'enregistrement de la le nom et le prénom du chauffeur
distance parcourue sera le lieu de départ
interrompu quand ...
la date de mise en place (ligne
supérieure)
• les commutateurs de groupes de
temps sont réglés sur temps de repos le numéro d'immatriculation du
" " pour les deux chauffeurs. véhicule
• l'allumage est arrêté et le kilométrage au début de la
journée de travail
• l'enregistrement supplémentaire
(option) n'est pas actif. b) ... après le trajet
Après l'enclenchement de l'allumage,
le lieu d'arrivée
l'enregistrement de la distance parcourue
continue correctement dans le temps. la date de retrait (ligne inférieure)
le kilométrage à la fin du trajet
8) Enregistrement supplémentaire
(option) les kilomètres parcourus
Saisie des groupes de travail supplé- (peuvent être inscrits)
mentaires, par ex. : emploi du feu bleu
avertisseur, de la sirène, etc.

Le verso du disque diagrammes 3) Zone pour la numéro d'homologation
(page 151, illustration VII) Cette partie du verso contient des indi-
cations sur les marques d'homologation
Pour le tachygraphe CE, il existe en principe
du disque diagrammes et des appareils
deux types de disques diagrammes :
pour lesquels le disque diagrammes est
c) sans enregistrement de tours-moteur homologué.
d) avec enregistrement de tours-moteur
4) Enregistrement des tours-moteur
1) Zone d'enregistrement pour groupes (option)
de temps L'enregistrement indiqué en tr/min au
Cette zone d'enregistrement sert à l'ins- verso du disque diagrammes pour le
cription manuelle des groupes de chauffeur-1.
temps. Des inscriptions doivent être
effectuées par ex. lorsque le personnel Nota
roulant exécute des travaux non à Les marquages (4a) sont visualisés à
proximité immédiate du véhicule et que allumage marche / arrêt.
l'appareil ne peut pas être manipulé, ou
en cas d'une éventuelle panne de l'enre-
gistrement des groupes de temps.
2) Partie centrale
Dans la partie centrale il est possible de
consigner à la main jusqu'à trois change-
ments de véhicule.
Sont à inscrire :
l'heure du changement de
véhicule
le numéro d'immatriculation du
nouveau véhicule
le kilométrage au début de la
journée de travail
le kilométrage à la fin du trajet
les km parcourus (peuvent être
inscrits)
56 MTCO 1324
Enregistrement des anomalies (page 151, illustration VIII)
Coupure de la tension • Le marquage (3) apparaît immédiatement

S'il y a de nouveau une tension, l'appareil après que l’anomalie se soit produite et
dessinera un trait (1) sur le disque dia- persiste jusqu'à ce que son origine soit
grammes peu après le démarrage. éliminée.
Coupure du transmetteur Anomalie sur les appareils

Anomalie du circuit de transmission géné- Des anomalies intervenues dans le système
rateur d'impulsions Ù MTCO 1324: d'enregistrement peuvent occasionner les
• Le marquage (2) apparaît dès que le enregistrements erronés suivants:
véhicule est à l'arrêt, l'enregistrement v • marquage (4), défaut dans le système
sera repris dès qu'il roulera de nouveau. du stylet d'enregistrement v.
ou • marquages (5) et (6), défaut dans le
système d'enregistrement pour l'enregis-
trement des groupes de temps et de la
distance.
Annexe
Contrôle obligatoire pour Entretien et nettoyage

tachygraphes Le MTCO 1324 est équipé d'une technique
Le propriétaire du véhicule est dans l'obli- moderne sans entretien. Il n'est donc pas
gation de faire contrôler régulièrement le nécessaire d'exécuter des travaux de main-
MTCO 1324 monté. tenance préventive.
Le fonctionnement correct doit être vérifié En cas d'encrassement, vous pouvez net-
au moins tous les deux ans, par ex. dans le toyer le boîtier, l’afficheur ainsi que les
cadre du suivi technique de votre véhicule touches de fonction à l'aide d'un torchon
moteur. légèrement mouillé. Si cela n'est pas suf-
fisant, vous pourrez utiliser également des
Faites renouveler la plaque de montage lors nettoyants spéciaux plastiques ou bien des
de chaque inspection et veillez à ce qu'elle produits d'entretien.
contienne les paramètres prescrits.

Caractéristiques techniques

Echelle : 125 km/h 125 km/h
Afficheur : 2 lignes à 16 caractères chacune, 1e ligne à 7 chiffres
éclairées par le contact 2e ligne à 4 chiffres
Température : utilisation : -25 à 70 ° C utilisation : -25 à 70 ° C
stockage : -40 à 85 ° C stockage : -40 à 85 ° C
Tension : 24 ou 12 volts 24 ou 12 volts
Consommation : en veille : 50 mA (12 volts) en veille 6 mA à 12 volts
30 mA (24 volts) (sans LED de contrôle de
fonctionnement)
Batterie-tampon : pile au lithium
CEM : DC 95 54 CE ISO 7637 DC 95 54 CE ISO 7637
Masse : 1350 g 470 g
Equipement spécial : • enregistrement des tours- • echelle :
moteur 3300 mn.-1 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• enregistrement supplémentaire
• ADR (règlement du transport
des produits dangereux)
• echelle :
100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• affichage de vitesse numérique
Responsable du contenu : Sous réserve de modifications de détails techniques

Continental Automotive GmbH par rapport aux descriptions, données et illustrations
de ces instructions de service. Reproduction, traduc-
P.O. Box 1640
tions et copies interdites sans autorisation écrite.
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen
58 MTCO 1324
Indice
Vista del conjunto ........................................................................................................ 60

Generalidades .............................................................................................................. 61
Elementos de mando ................................................................................................... 62
Uso del sistema MTCO 1324 ....................................................................................... 63
Abrir la bandeja ........................................................................................................ 63
Insertar la hoja de gráficos del conductor-2 ............................................................. 63
Insertar la hoja de gráficos para el conductor-1 ....................................................... 63
Ajuste del grupo horario ........................................................................................... 64
Sacar las hojas de gráficos ......................................................................................... 65
Cambio de conductor .................................................................................................. 66
Corregir la hora ............................................................................................................ 67
Mensajes ....................................................................................................................... 68
Aparición de un mensaje .......................................................................................... 68
Visualizar memoria de errores .................................................................................. 68
Resumen de los códigos de error ............................................................................. 69
Eliminar un error ....................................................................................................... 70
Ajuste del horario del disco ...................................................................................... 70
Instrumento indicador ................................................................................................. 71
Poner a cero el cuentakilómetros parcial ................................................................. 71
Descripción de la hoja de gráficos ............................................................................. 72
La hoja de gráficos correcta para su aparato ........................................................... 72
Registros en la cara delantera de la hoja de gráficos .............................................. 73
Anotaciones en el campo interior ............................................................................. 73
El dorso de la hoja de gráficos ................................................................................. 74
Registros de fallos ....................................................................................................... 75
Suplemento ................................................................................................................... 75
Revisión obligatoria de tacógrafos ........................................................................... 75
Mantenimiento y limpieza ......................................................................................... 75
Datos técnicos .......................................................................................................... 76
Definiciones válidas para este manual
Conductor-1 = Es la persona que está conduciendo o que conducirá el

vehículo.
Conductor-2 = Es la persona que no conduce el vehículo.

Vista del conjunto
Instrumento indicador
(p.ej. E-Tacho 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
Hojas de gráficos
Debido a su estructura modular con indi- horas de trabajo y las de reposo del con-
cación y registro separados, el tacógrafo ductor.
MTCO 1324 tiene nuevas dimensiones en
cuanto a las prestaciones, técnica y diseño. En el área de visión del conductor se
Con su tamaño de radio según DIN, el encuentra un instrumento indicador
MTCO 1324 constituye un componente de homologado, por ejemplo el E-Tacho 1323,
sistema innovador. con indicador analógico de la velocidad,
cuentakilómetros digital, reloj y cuentakiló-
Los conductores 1 y 2 seleccionan cómoda- metros parcial. El indicador de funciona-
mente los grupos de horas de trabajo mani- miento hace referencia a mensajes del
pulando los mandos correspondientes. MTCO 1324.
En el display se visualizan claramente la Combinado con el sensor de tacógrafo inte-
fecha, la hora, la distancia recorrida, los ligente, KITAS, el sistema constituye una
grupos de horas de trabajo y los símbolos unidad fiable. El sensor emite impulsos en
de las hojas de gráficos insertadas. Los tiempo real y datos codificados para el
errores detectados en el aparato o en un registro de la distancia recorrida y la velo-
componente del sistema se visualizarán de cidad.
forma automática.
Le deseamos un buen viaje en todo tiempo.
En la hoja de gráficos se registrarán como
siempre la velocidad y la distancia recorrida Su Continental Automotive
así como el período de conducción, las
60 MTCO 1324
Generalidades
He aquí el significado de los iconos gráficos • El MTCO 1324 es instalado y precintado

usados en el manual: por personas autorizadas.
No intervenga en el aparato ni en los
cables de conexión.
¡ATENCIÓN!
El texto al lado de este icono con-
tiene una información importante ❒ Indicaciones relacionadas con el
que debe ser observada para evitar manejo de las hojas de gráficos
fallos en el aparato. • ¡En el tacógrafo EC la hoja de grá-
ficos es individual y por tanto no
AVISOS transferible!
o información adicional cuya inob- • Utilice hojas de gráficos del fabricante
servancia puede conducir a fallos. (discos de diagrama originales). Ase-
gúrese de que el valor límite del campo
de medida y la marca de control coin-
ciden con los del aparato,
¡Se ruega observar las siguientes ➥ ver página 72.
indicaciones! • ¡Inserte únicamente hojas de gráficos
nuevas, no deben estar dobladas, ras-
❒ Indicaciones relacionadas con el gadas en la periferia y/o en el agujero,
funcionamiento del MTCO 1324 onduladas o dañadas de cualquier otra
• Abra la bandeja sólo para insertar o forma!
tomar las hojas de gráficos. Por lo • Manténganse guardadas las hojas de
demás, mantenga la bandeja cerrada gráficos usadas en un lugar protegido,
para evitar daños y la penetración de ver también artículo 15 del Reglamento
suciedades. de Circulación (CEE) Nº 3821/85.
• No utilice la bandeja como elemento de
apoyo, por ejemplo para escribir algo
❒ Indicación referente a disposiciones
sobre las hojas de gráficos.
legales
• No utilice limpiadores abrasivos para
• ¡Modificaciones realizadas en el aparato
limpiar el aparato, asimismo no utilice
de control o en las líneas de señal que
disolventes tales como diluyentes o
afecten a la funcionalidad del sistema,
gasolina.
en particular con intención fraudulenta,
pueden representar una infracción del
orden penal estatal o una infracción
reglamentaria!

Elementos de mando (Página 2, figura I)
a) "Bandeja rígida" 3) Display

• La información básica se visualiza de
b) "Bandeja abatible" forma permanente.
• Los mensajes / las indicaciones apa-
Nota
recen de forma automática,
El manejo de las dos ejecuciones del ➥ ver página 68.
aparato, son, principalmente idénticos. Los
pasos de maniobra que difieren se des-
Fecha + hora
criben por separado.
Símbolo de Grupos de
tiempo + disco
1) Campo de botones izquierdo diagrama conductor-2
Botón para desbloquear la Símbolo de error
bandeja. Totalizador de Kms
Botón para ajustar el grupo horario Símbolo de Grupos de
tiempo + disco
para el conductor-1. diagrama conductor-1
2) Campo de botones derecho

Botón para ajustar el grupo horario 4) Separador
para el conductor-2. separa las hojas de gráficos del con-
ductor-1 y conductor-2.
Botón para seleccionar las fun-
ciones: 5) Marca de control
• "Corregir hora", con ella se puede comprobar que el
➥ ver página 67. soporte de la hoja de gráficos está
• "Visualizar memoria de puesto conforme al horario.
errores", ➥ ver página 68.
6) Soporte ovalado para la hoja
Botones para ajustar el reloj y ver
los mensajes de error actuales. 7) Placa de características
En ella figuran el fabricante, el tipo de
aparato, la marca de control y el número
de serie.
62 MTCO 1324
Uso del sistema MTCO 1324 (Página 3, figura II)
Abrir la bandeja Insertar la hoja de gráficos del

La bandeja sólo se abre cuando ... conductor-2
• el vehículo esté parado y
Antes de comenzar un viaje, rellenar
• el contacto dado. el campo interior de la hoja de gráficos
en debida forma, ➥ ver página 73.
1. Pulsar la tecla .
4. El conductor-2 coloca la hoja de grá-
ficos rellenada con su parte superior
indicando hacia arriba en el soporte
ovalado.
Es importante que la hoja de gráficos
se encuentre debajo del elemento
tensor (c).
¾ En el display aparece un símbolo que
significa "Expulsión activada". 5. Volver a bajar el separador.
Además, una barra móvil indica que
esta acción puede tardar algún Insertar la hoja de gráficos para el
tiempo. conductor-1
¾ Espere hasta que se desbloquee la
bandeja. 6. El conductor-1 coloca la hoja de grá-
ficos rellenada con su parte superior
2. a) Extraer la bandeja rígida hasta el indicando hacia arriba sobre el sepa-
tope. rador en el soporte de la hoja de grá-
ficos.
¡No intente abatir este modelo de
Tenga cuidado de que la hoja de grá-
bandeja!
ficos esté ubicada debajo de la guía
(d) y debajo de las muescas fiadores
b) Extraer la bandeja abatible hasta el (e) del soporte oval de la hoja de grá-
tope y abatirla hacia abajo. ficos.
Sacar, en su caso, la hoja de gráficos
del conductor-1.
Nota acerca del uso: 1 conductor
3. Levantar el separador hacia arriba. En el modo de 1 conductor sólo se colocará
Sacar, en su caso, la hoja de gráficos la hoja de gráficos para el conductor-1 sobre
del conductor-2. el separador.

7. Compruebe que el soporte de la hoja de
gráficos está ajustado conforme al
horario. La escala de tiempo de la hoja
de gráficos ha de ajustarse a la hora
actual del display con ayuda de la
marca (f).
¾ Si no es así, por favor, ajuste la hora
de la bandeja portadiscos, ➥ ver
página 70.
Ajuste del grupo horario
8. a) Introducir la bandeja rígida hasta que
Uso: 2-conductores
encaje.
10. El conductor-1 pulsa el botón .
b) Poner la bandeja abatible a la
¾ Pulsar el botón varias veces hasta
posición horizontal e introducirla hasta
que en el display aparezca el grupo
que encaje.
horario deseado.
9. Aparecerá la información básica: El conductor-2 pulsa el botón .
¾ esto es: fecha, hora y kilometraje ¾ Pulsar el botón varias veces hasta
total, que en el display aparezca el grupo
¾ además se visualizan los símbolos horario deseado.
que significan "discos dentro" y el
ajuste actual del grupo horario, a la En el momento de poner en marcha el
izquierda para el conductor-1 y a la vehículo aparecerá de forma automática en
la información básica
derecha para el conductor-2.
• para el conductor-1 " " y
Observaciones a la información básica • para el conductor-2 " ".
• El reloj del MTCO 1324 indica la hora
legal del país donde está registrado el Uso: 1-conductor
vehículo. El comienzo y el fin del horario • En el modo de un solo conductor se
de verano están programados en el coloca en el separador sólo la hoja de
aparato y se actualizarán de forma auto- gráficos para el conductor-1.
mática. • Es imprescindible poner el grupo
➥ Ver también página 69 "Resumen de horario para el conductor-2 a reposo
los códigos de error". " ", ya que de lo contrario se emitirá un
• Si al lado del kilometraje total aparece el mensaje de error.
signo de admiración, hay un error.
➥ Véase también la página 69 Clasificación de los grupos horarios
"Resumen de los códigos de error". = Períodos de conducción
• Opción: Visualización v digital = Todas las demás horas de trabajo
Según el modelo, en la primera línea
puede estar visualizada la velocidad. Por = Disponibilidad
lo demás, las funciones son análogas a (tiempos de espera, horas en
la información básica. función de acompañante, horas
pasadas en la litera durante el viaje)
= Pausas y horas de repos
64 MTCO 1324
Sacar las hojas de gráficos
Extraiga su hoja de gráficos del MTCO 1324 Nota

en caso de Si, no obstante, Usted ha quitado el con-
• un cambio de conductor o vehículo, tacto, puede que a continuación la bandeja
• fin de jornada no quede perfectamente bloqueada
• o tras 24 horas a más tardar. después de cerrarla. En este caso, proceda
de la siguiente manera:
La bandeja sólo se abre cuando ...
• el vehículo esté parado y 1. Dar el contacto.
• el contacto dado. ¾ Espere hasta que la expulsión de la
bandeja haya terminado.
1. Pulse el botón . 2. Acto seguido, introducir la bandeja
hasta que quede encajada.
3. Cortar el contacto.
Desconexión automática del registro de

los grupos horarios y distancias reco-
rridas
Si la bandeja queda cerrada más de 25
horas con hojas de gráficos insertadas, el
¾ En el display aparecerá el símbolo de MTCO 1324 registrará de forma automática
"Expulsión activada". Una barra móvil el grupo horario " " tanto para el con-
señala que el MTCO 1324 está finali- ductor-1 como para el conductor-2. De esta
zando los registros en las hojas de manera el MTCO 1324 disminuirá el
gráficos. consumo de la batería del vehículo.
¾ Espere hasta que se desbloquea la
bandeja. Vehículo estacionado
¡No cortar el contacto mientras En caso de no conducir el vehículo

esté visualizado el símbolo de durante un prolongado tiempo,
"expulsión activada" en el display! tenga cuidado de que en el
MTCO 1324 no haya una hoja de
gráficos insertada. Por ejemplo
2. Extraer la bandeja rígida hasta el tope y
cuando se efectúen trabajos de
abatir además la bandeja si ésta es
mantenimiento / reparación o al
abatible.
retirar el vehículo del tráfico.
3. Retirar los discos y cumplimentar los
datos en el campo interior de la hoja de
gráficos, ➥ ver página 73.
4. Volver a introducir la bandeja hasta que
encaje, si fuera abatible ponerla antes
en posición horizontal.

Cambio de conductor
2. Ajustar los grupos horarios deseados.

¾ El nuevo conductor-1 manipula el
botón , y el conductor-2 el
botón .
Caso 2:
Conductor-1 o conductor-2 abandona el
vehículo:
Hoja Hoja
1. El conductor en cuestión toma su hoja
conductor-1 conductor-2 de gráficos.
2. El nuevo conductor-2 coloca su hoja de
gráficos debajo del separador.
o:
El nuevo conductor-1 coloca su hoja se
gráficos encima del separador.
Nota
Si no hay un nuevo conductor-2, habrá que
poner el grupo horario a reposo " ", ya que
Registro como de lo contrario se emitirá un mensaje de
conductor-2
error.
Cambio de conductor Registro como
conductor-1 Caso 3:
El conductor-1 y el conductor-2 aban-
donan el vehículo:
En caso de que un conductor cambie de 1. Ambos conductores toman su hoja de
vehículo durante su jornada diaria, éste está gráficos.
obligado a sacar la hoja de gráficos y
señalar en el dorso de la misma el cambio 2. La nueva tripulación coloca las hojas de
de vehículo. gráficos respectivamente (conductor-1
o conductor-2) en el aparato.
Caso 1:
Rotación de conductores, el conductor-
2 es ahora el conductor-1:
1. Intercambiar las hojas de gráficos.
¾ El conductor-1 (ahora conductor-2)
coloca su hoja de gráficos debajo del
separador y el conductor-2 (ahora
conductor-1) el suyo encima del
separador.
66 MTCO 1324
Corregir la hora
• La llamada a el funcionamiento
CORREGIR HORA sólo es posible
cuando el vehículo esté parado.
• Para que el soporte de la hoja de grá-
ficos sea sincronizado automáticamente
conforme al horario, es necesario que
el contacto esté dado y que no haya
= Pulsar brevemente la tecla
hoja de gráficos en el MTCO 1324. = Mantener pulsada la tecla algunos
segundos
1. Seleccionar el menú CORREGIR HORA

con .
2. Con o activar el contador de minutos,

los minutos parpadean.
3. Mantener presionado el botón o

hasta que aparezca el valor deseado.
4. Con activar el contador de horas, las

horas parpadean.
5. Mantener presionado el botón o

hasta que aparezca el valor deseado.
¾ Al sobrepasar la hora cero, en cualquier
sentido, se cambiará de forma automática la
fecha.
6. Validar el ajuste del horario manteniendo pre-
sionado el botón durante más de 2
segundos. Se presentará otra vez la infor-
mación básica.
Nota
Si se ajusta la hora con discos insertados, aparece
el símbolo de error y parpadea la hora. El MTCO
1324 le recuerda la actualización de la bandeja;
➥ véase página 70.

Mensajes
El MTCO 1324 controla el funcionamiento Visualizar memoria de errores

del sistema y avisa automáticamente de un
Para encontrar la causa del mensaje, ver el
error producido en un componente, en el
menú MEMORIA DE ERRORES.
aparato o en el manejo. Los mensajes y
avisos pueden aparecer inmediatamente en
la pantalla después de cerrar la bandeja o ¡El funcionamiento visualizar
en el momento de producirse el error. MEMORIA ERRORES sólo puede
ser activada cuando el vehículo esté
parado!
Aparición de un mensaje
1 2
= Pulsar brevemente la tecla
= Mantener pulsada la tecla algunos
• El indicador de funcionamiento (1) en segundos
el instrumento indicador o bien el E-
Tacho se ilumina,
1. Seleccionar el menú MEMORIA
• en la pantalla del MTCO 1324 aparece al ERRORES pulsando brevemente el
lado del kilometraje total un signo de botón dos veces.
admiración (2) y ...
2. Con o se pueden visualizar
• dependiendo del error, parpadea todo el
más errores activos.
reloj (3) ó los puntos de éste.
• Además se registrará el error en una
memoria electrónica, ➥ ver "Visualizar
memoria de errores".
• Algunos fallos los indica el MTCO 1324 Inicio del error
en la hoja de gráfico, ➥ ver página 75. Símbolo con código de error
existen más mensajes de error
3. Volver a activar la información básica,

– Mantener presionada el botón
durante más de 2 segundos
– o no pulsar ningún botón durante un
período de 20 segundos.
68 MTCO 1324
Resumen de los códigos de error
Aviso en display Código Significado / solución
 = • El MTCO 1324 ha cambiado automáticamente al

principio ó final del horario de verano,
• o al haber modificado el horario habiendo una
(Hora parpadea)
hoja de gráficos insertada.
Nota: Actualizar el horario del disco,
o ➥ ver página 70.
 = Error durante la actualización del horario del disco

Actualizar el horario del disco otra vez,
➥ ver página 70.
 = Error en el accionamiento del soporte de la hoja de

gráficos
(Los puntos del reloj no Verificar si el disco está correctamente
parpadean)
insertado.
 = Conducción sin hoja de gráficos conductor-1

(Este error no se ha encontrado en memoria.)
Insertar el disco del conductor-1.
 = No hay hoja de gráficos conductor-1

 = No hay hoja de gráficos conductor-2
(Este mensaje aparecerá cuando se cambia de
" " a " ", si por ejemplo no hay disco.)
Inserte el/los disco/s.
 = Error en la transmisión CAN


 = Error interno
 = Error de botón, botón presionado demasiado

tiempo
 = Error LCD
 = Error en la bandeja

Comenzar el proceso de expulsión y cerrar
después la bandeja.
➥ Continuar en la siguiente página

Aviso en display Código Significado / solución
 = Error en sistema registrador

 (Estos errores los indicará el MTCO 1324 en el

disco, ➥ ver página 75.)
 = Error en la salida impulso "B7"
 = Interrupcion de la comunicación con el instrumento
 = Error en la comunicación transmisor

 = Error en la clave transmisor / número de serie /
señal
(Estos errores los indicará el MTCO 1324 en el
disco, ➥ ver página 75.)
 = Interceptación de tensión

(Este error no se ha encontrado en memoria. Una
interrupción de la tensión el MTCO 1324 la
indicará en el disco, ➥ ver página 75.)
Eliminar un error Ajuste del horario del disco

Sólo después de eliminar la causa, por 1. Abrir la bandeja y retirar ambas hojas
ejemplo en caso de un error de manejo, se de gráficos.
apagará automáticamente el mensaje.
2. Volver a cerrar la bandeja.
¾ El MTCO 1324 actualizará automáti-
¡En caso de aparecer un mensaje camente la hora en la badeja de
una y otra vez sin cesar, vaya inme- discos el símbolo de error y el par-
diatamente a un Servicio Oficial de padeo del reloj desaparece.
VDO!
3. Abrir la bandeja y meter eventualmente
nuevas hojas de gráficos. El MTCO 1324
está otra vez preparado.
70 MTCO 1324
Instrumento indicador (Página 150, figura III)
Nota Poner a cero el cuentakilómetros

El diseño y la funcionalidad de este instru- parcial
mento indicador (E-Tacho 1323) pueden
En el display aparece en la segunda línea la
variar, consulte las instrucciones de servicio
última opción seleccionada: reloj o kilome-
correspondientes para mayor.
traje parcial.
1) Indicación de la velocidad
1. Seleccionar "kilometraje parcial", en su
2) Control de funcionamiento caso pulsar brevemente el botón de
Cuando el LED esté encendido es reset.
que hay un defecto o un evento, por 2. Acto seguido mantener presionado el
ejemplo: falta una hoja de gráficos o un botón de reset durante más de
componente del sistema no funciona 2 segundos.
correctamente. ¾ El cuentakilómetros parcial se pondrá
a "0".
3) Display de cristal líquido
(Visualización al dar el contacto) Nota
• Visor de 7 dígitos indicando el total de
Cabe la posibilidad de poner a cero el cuen-
los kilómetros recorridos, el último
takilómetros parcial estando el vehículo en
dígito corresponde a los hectómetros.
marcha.
• En la línea inferior aparecerá el reloj o
el cuentakilómetros según la
selección efectuada.
4) Botón de reset
Botón para cambiar de reloj a cuentaki-
lómetros parcial.

Descripción de la hoja de gráficos
La hoja de gráficos correcta para su En países no miembros de la UE son

aparato (Página 150, figura IV) válidas la correspondiente marca de control
y disposiciones nacionales.
Tenga en cuenta al emplear (pedir)
hojas de gráficos que el valor límite Según el valor límite del campo de medida y
del campo de medida (1) y la el modelo del aparato se podrán utilizar en
marca de control (2) del MTCO el MTCO 1324 las siguientes hojas de grá-
1324 deben coincidir con los datos ficos:
(3) y (4) que figuran en la hoja de
gráficos.
Hoja de gráficos combinada Hoja de gráficos para eva- Marca de control

luación electrónica
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
EC = Hoja de gráficos para el tacógrafo EC

= Hoja de gráficos para el modelo con registro de revoluciones (opción),
p.ej. tipo: 1324.50111...
72 MTCO 1324
Registros en la cara delantera de la Nota
hoja de gráficos (Página 150, figura V) Siendo el valor límite del campo de
medida 180 km/h, el registro comple-
1) Escala de tiempo
mentario se efectuará en la pos. (8a).
2) Marca de apertura
Cada apertura de la bandeja se docu-
Evaluación de hojas de gráficos
mentará.
Aparte de la lectura directa de los registros
3) Desarrollo de la velocidad en km/h cabe la posibilidad de evaluar con exactitud
los datos registrados. Su distribuidor VDO
4) Registro de los grupos horarios tendrá el placer de darle mayor información
al respecto.
5) Campo interior
6) Agujero de alojamiento ovalado

Garantiza la colocación correcta de la Anotaciones en el campo interior
hoja de gráficos con respecto al horario. (Página 151, figura VI)
7) Distancia recorrida Nota

La anotaciones de los apellidos y del
Cada registro ascendente
nombre así como los datos sobre el
o descendente corres-
comienzo y el fin de la utilización están pres-
ponde a 5 km.
= 5 km
critas por la ley y forman la base para una
evaluación posterior de la hoja de gráficos.
Nota
a) ... antes del viaje
La grabación de recorrido
se interrumpe si ... Apellidos y nombre del conductor
Lugar de salida
Fecha de colocación (línea
• el selector de grupo de tiempos se
superior)
encuentra en la posición de descanso
" " en ambos conductores. Matrícula del vehículo
• el contacto se ha quitado y Kilometraje al iniciar el trabajo
• el grabador adicional (opcional) no
esta activo. b) ... después del viaje
Después de poner el contacto la gra- Lugar de llegada
bación de distancia continuará a partir
Fecha de extracción (línea
de la misma posición donde quedó.
inferior)
Kilometraje fin de viaje
8) Registro complementario (opción)
Registro de grupos de trabajo adicio- Kilómetros recorridos
nales, p.ej.: uso de la luz azul con des- (se pueden anotar)
tellos, sirena etc.

El dorso de la hoja de gráficos 3) Campo de marcas de control
(Página 151, figura VII) Esta zona del dorso contiene los datos
sobre las marcas de control de la hoja de
Para el tacógrafo EC existen dos tipo de gráficos y de los aparatos para los que la
hojas de gráficos fundamentales:
hoja de gráficos esté homologada.
c) sin registro de revoluciones
4) Registro de revoluciones (opción)
d) con registro de revoluciones El registro correcto en tiempo real
(expresado en min-1) se efectúa en la
1) Campo de anotaciones para grupos
cara posterior del disco diagrama del
horarios
primer conductor.
Este campo de anotaciones sirve para
escribir a mano los grupos horarios. Las Nota
anotaciones se tendrán que efectuar Los trazos (4a) se muestran para el con-
cuando p.ej. el personal de conducción tacto puesto / quitado.
realice trabajos fuera del alcance del
vehículo y no pueda manejar el aparato
o en caso de un eventual fallo del
registro de los grupos horarios.
2) Campo interior
En el campo interior hay espacio sufi-
ciente para anotar a mano hasta 3
cambios del vehículo. Anótese:
Hora del cambio

Matricula del nuevo vehículo
Kilometraje inicial
Kilometraje final
Kilómetros recorridos
(se pueden anotar)
74 MTCO 1324
Registros de fallos (Página 151, figure VIII)
Tensión interrumpida • La marca (3) aparece al instante

Restablecida la alimentación eléctrica, el después de producirse el fallo y per-
aparato dibujará una raya (1) en la hoja de manece hasta eliminar la causa.
gráficos poco después de poner en marcha
el vehículo. Fallos del aparato
Fallos en el sistema de registro pueden
Fallo del transmisor causar los siguientes registros erróneos:
Fallo en la línea de transmisión transmisor • Marca (4), defecto en el sistema de
de impulsos Ù MTCO 1324: registro v.
• En el momento de pararse el vehículo • Marcas (5) y (6), defecto en el sistema
aparecerá la marca (2), en marcha se de registro de los grupos horarios y reco-
registrará otra vez v. rridos.
o
Anexo
Revisión obligatoria de tacógrafos Mantenimiento y limpieza

El titular del vehículo está obligado a hacer El MTCO 1324 está equipado con compo-
controlar regularmente su tacógrafo nentes técnicos modernos que no precisan
MTCO 1324. mantenimiento. Por lo tanto no es necesario
efectuar trabajos de mantenimiento preven-
El correcto funcionamiento debe ser com- tivos.
probado cada dos años como mínimo por
un Servicio Oficial. En caso de estar sucio el aparato, limpie la
caja, el display y los botones de función con
Recuerde que la placa de montaje debe ser un trapo ligeramente humedecido. Si sería
renovada después de cada revisión y con- insuficiente, también se pueden utilizar lim-
tener los datos solicitados. piadores o conservantes especiales para
materia plástica.

Datos técnicos
MTCO 1324 (estándar) E-Tacho 1323 (estándar)

Valor limite del 125 km/h 125 km/h
campo de medida:
Display: 2 líneas de 16 caracteres cada 1a línea 7 dígitos
una, iluminado al dar el contacto 2a línea 4 dígitos
Temperatura: Funcionamiento: -25 a 70 °C Funcionamiento: -25 a 70 °C
Almacén: -40 a 85 °C Almacén: -40 a 85 °C
Tensión: 24 o 12 voltios 24 o 12 voltios
Consumo de Modo reserva típico: Modo reserva típico 6 mA para
corriente: 50 mA (12 voltios) 12 voltios (sin LED de control
30 mA (24 voltios) de funcionamiento)
Bateria de respaldo: Celda de litio
CEM: Dir 95 54 EC ISO 7637 Dir 95 54 EC ISO 7637
Peso: 1350 g 470 g
Equipamiento • Registro de revoluciones • Valor limite del campo de
especial: 3300 r.p.m. medida: 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Registro complementario
• ADR
• Valor limite del campo de
medida: 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Indicador de velocidad digital
Responsable del contenido: Nos reservamos el derecho de modificar detalles téc-

Continental Automotive GmbH nicos que constan en las descripciones, datos e ilus-
traciones de las presentes instrucciones de servicio.
P.O. Box 1640
Quedan prohibidas la reimpresión, la traducción y la
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen reproducción de este manual sin la autorización
previa por escrito.
76 MTCO 1324
Índice
Visão geral do sistema ................................................................................................ 78

Indicações gerais ......................................................................................................... 79
Elementos de comando e controlo ............................................................................ 80
Produzir estado de prontidão para entrar em serviço .............................................. 81
Abrir gaveta .............................................................................................................. 81
Condutor-2 colocar o diagrama ................................................................................ 81
Condutor-1 colocar o diagrama ................................................................................ 81
Introduzir os grupos relativos ao tempo de trabalho ................................................ 82
Retirar o diagrama ....................................................................................................... 83
Mudança de condutor .................................................................................................. 84
Mudar a hora ................................................................................................................. 85
Mensagens .................................................................................................................... 86
Aparece uma mensagem ......................................................................................... 86
Indicar a memória de erros ....................................................................................... 86
Código de erros - plano geral ................................................................................... 87
Corrigir erros ............................................................................................................ 88
Acerto diagrama c / hora .......................................................................................... 88
Instrumento indicador ................................................................................................. 89
Colocar o conta-quilómetros a zero .......................................................................... 89
Descrição do diagrama ................................................................................................ 90
Diagrama adequado para o equipamento ................................................................ 90
Anotações na parte da frente do diagrama .............................................................. 91
Registo no campo interior ........................................................................................ 91
Verso do diagrama ................................................................................................... 92
Registo de danos ......................................................................................................... 93
Apêndice ....................................................................................................................... 93
Examinação obrigatória para tacógrafos .................................................................. 93
Manutenção e limpeza ............................................................................................. 93
Dados técnicos ......................................................................................................... 94
Definições nestas instruções
Condutor-1 = A pessoa, que de momento conduz a viatura ou que a vai con-

duzir.
Condutor-2 = A pessoa, que não conduz a viatura.

Visão geral do sistema
Instrumento indicator
(por ex. taquímetro-E 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
Diagramas
O tacógrafo MTCO 1324 apresenta, através condutor propriamente dito, ou seja, tempo
da sua construção modular com indicação e de condução, de trabalho e de descanso.
registo separados, novos critérios em efici-
ência, técnica e design. O MTCO 1324, no No campo de visão imediato do condutor
formato de um rádio-DIN, constitui um com- encontra-se um instrumento indicador
ponente inovativo do sistema. autorizado, por exemplo o taquímetro-
E 1323, com indicação analógica da velo-
Condutor-1 e condutor-2 marcam, conforta- cidade, contador digital da distância, horas
velmente, através das teclas de comando e conta-quilómetros. O controlo operacional
os respectivos grupos relativos ao horário chama a atenção para a mensagem do
de trabalho. MTCO 1324.
No visor aparecem, nitidamente, para além Juntamente com o inteligente sensor-tacó-

da data, da hora e da distância, os grupos, grafo, KITAS, o sistema forma uma unidade
introduzidos, relativos ao horário de tra- digna de confiança. O sensor fornece
balho e os símbolos dos diagramas colo- impulsos de tempo real e dados codificados
cados. Avarias no equipamento ou nalgum para apreensão da distância e da velo-
dos componentes do sistema são indicadas cidade.
automaticamente.
Como até agora são registados no

diagrama para além da velocidade e das Desejamos-lhe uma boa viagem.
distâncias, os horários relacionados com o
O vosso Continental Automotive
78 MTCO 1324
Indicações gerais
Os símbolos nestas instruções têm o • O MTCO 1324 é instalado e selado por

seguinte significado: pessoas competentes.
Não proceda a quaisquer trabalhos de
reparação no aparelho ou nos fios de
ATENÇÃO!
ligação.
O texto adjunto a este símbolo
contém informações importantes,
que têm de ser tidas em conside- ❒ Indicações para uso dos diagramas
ração para evitar danos no equipa- • No caso dos tacógrafos-EC, o
mento. diagrama é pessoal e como tal não é
transmissível!
INDICAÇÕES • Utilize diagramas do fabricante (discos
ou informações complementares, originais). Neste caso, ter em atenção se
que em caso de não serem tidas em o valor final da margem de medição e a
consideração, podem levar a danos marca de controlo concordam uma com
são assinaladas com este símbolo. a outra,
➥ ver página 90.
• Colocar apenas diagramas perfeitos,
estes não podem estar dobrados, não
Tenha, por favor, em atenção as
podem estar rasgados na sua controno
indicações citadas!
e/ou no orifício de registo, não podem
estar enrugados ou estar seja de que
❒ Indicações para o funcionamento do modo danificados!
MTCO 1324
• Os diagramas descritos têm de ser guar-
• Abra a gaveta apenas para colocar ou dados de maneira a estarem protegidos
retirar os diagramas. Para além, disso contra qualquer dano, ver também artigo
deve mantê-la sempre fechada para 15, regulamento (CEE) nr° 3821/85.
evitar danos e sujidade.
• Não utilize a gaveta como depósito, por
exemplo para os diagramas. ❒ Indicação relacionada com determi-
nações legais
• Não utilize produtos abrasivos, sol-
ventes ou gasolina para limpar o apa- • Quem proceder a alterações no apa-
relho. relho de controlo ou na adução do sinal,
que influenciem o registo do mesmo,
especialmente com intenções de fraude,
pode estar a ir contra as prescrições cri-
minais ou penais!

Elementos de comando e controlo (página 2, figura I)
a) "Gaveta de retenção" 3) Visor

• A indicação de base aparece con-
b) "Gaveta dobradiça" stantemente.
• Mensagens / indicações aparecem
Nota
automaticamente, ➥ ver página 86.
O manuseamento dos dois tipos de equipa-
mento é basicamente o mesmo. Variações
no modo de manuseamento são especial- Data + hora
mente citadas.
Simbolo diagrama +
grupo tempos trabalho,
condutor-2
1) Teclado-esquerdo Simbolo de erro
Tecla para desbloqueamento da Total de kms
gaveta. Simbolo diagrama +
grupo tempos trabalho,
Tecla para introduzir o grupo condutor-1
relativo ao horário de trabalho do
condutor-1.
4) Chapa de separação
2) Teclado direito entre o diagrama do condutor-1 e do
Tecla para introduzir o grupo condutor-2.
relativo ao horário de trabalho do 5) Marca de controlo
condutor-2. através desta pode-se verificar se a
Tecla para selectionar as funções: posição de registo do diagrama se
• "Mudar a hora", encontra temporal correcta.
➥ ver página 85.
6) Registo oval do diagrama
• "Indicar a memória de erros",
➥ ver página 86. 7) Logotipo
Teclas para regular a hora e para Fabricante, tipo de aparelho, marcas de
indicação de mensagens de erro controlo e número de série são visíveis.
actuais.
80 MTCO 1324
Produzir estado de prontidão para entrar em serviço (página 3, figura II)
Abrir a gaveta Condutor-2 colocar o diagrama

Só é possível abrir a gaveta,
Antes de iniciar um percurso marcar
quando ...
• o veículo está parado e de modo correcto o campo interior do
diagrama, ➥ ver página 91.
• a ignição está ligada.
4. O condutor-2 coloca o diagrama já

1. Premir a tecla.
marcado com a parte da frente para
cima na parte oval de registo do dia-
grama.
Tenha em atenção se o diagrama se
encontra por baixo do elemento com
mola (c).
5. Voltar a puxar a chapa de separação

para baixo.
¾ No visor aparece o símbolo "ejecção
activa". Adicionalmente, um indicador
de funcionamento indica que este Condutor-1 colocar o diagrama
processo pode durar algum tempo.
6. O condutor-1 coloca o diagrama já
¾ Espere até que a gaveta seja desblo-
marcado com a parte da frente para
queada.
cima na chapa de separação na parte
2. a) Gaveta de retenção puxar a gaveta de registo do diagrama.
até haver um embate. Tenha em atenção, se o diagrama se
encontra por baixo do fixador e (d)
Não tente dobrar este tipo de gaveta por baixo da cabeça do entalhe (e)
para baixo! da parte oval de registo do diagrama.
b) Gaveta dobradiça puxar até haver Nota 1-condutor-funcionamento

um embate e dobrar para baixo. No funcionamento condutor-1 apenas
Neste caso, condutor-1 retire o dia- colocar o diagrama para o condutor-1 na
grama da chapa de separação. chapa de separação.
3. Virar a chapa de separação para cima.
7. Verifique se o registo do diagrama se
Neste caso, condutor-2 retire o dia-
encontra na posição temporal correcta.
grama.
A escala temporal do diagrama deve-se
ajustar na marcação (f) para a hora
actual do visor.
¾ Caso não esteja correcto, proceda ao
acerto do diagrama, c / hora,
➥ ver página 88.

8. a) Gaveta de retenção introduzir até Introduzir os grupos relativos ao
engatar. tempo de trabalho
b) Gaveta dobradiça colocar em Condutor-2-funcionamento
posição horizontal e introduzir até 10. O condutor-1 acciona a tecla .
engatar. ¾ Premir a tecla as vezes necessárias
9. Aparece a indicação de base: até que o grupo relativo ao tempo
¾ com data, hora e totalidade de quiló- de trabalho desejado apareça no
metros, visor.
¾ para além disso, os símbolos para os O condutor-2 acciona a tecla .
diagramas introduzidos e a actual ¾ Premir a tecla as vezes necessárias
posição dos grupos relativos ao tempo até que o grupo relativo ao tempo
de trabalho, à esquerda para o con- de trabalho desejado apareça no
dutor-1 e à direita para o condutor-2. visor.
Notas relacionadas com a indicação de Assim que o veículo esteja em circulação

base aparece automaticamente a indicação de
base
• A hora do MTCO 1324 está regulada em • para o condutor-1 " " e
relação ao tempo jurídico do país, no
• para o condutor-2 " ".
qual o veículo está registado. Início e fim
do horário de Verão estão registados no Condutor-1-funcionamento
aparelho e são actualizados automatica-
• No funcionamento condutor-1 apenas
mente. ➥ Ver também página 87
colocar o diagrama para o condutor-1 na
"Código de erros - plano geral".
chapa de separação.
• Se aparecer ao lado do estado dos qui-
• O grupo relativo ao tempo de trabalho
lómetros um sinal de exclamação, isto
para o condutor-2 tem de ser,
significa que existe uma avaria.
imprescindivelmente, colocado em
➥ Ver também página 87 "Código de
tempo de descanso " ", caso contrário,
erros - plano geral".
aparece uma mensagem de erro.
• Opção: indicação digital-v
Consoante o equipamento pode apa- Divisão dos grupos relativos ao tempo
recer na primeira linha a indicação da de trabalho
velocidade. Para além disso, todas as
= Tempos de condução
outras funções são analógicas relativa-
mente à indicação de base. = Todos os outros tempos de trabalho
= Tempos em que se está disponível
ao serviço (tempos de espera,
tempos em que se é o condutor
adjunto, tempo de intervalo durante
a viagem para o condutor-2)
= Intervalos e tempos de descanso
82 MTCO 1324
Retirar o diagrama
Retire o diagrama do MTCO 1324 4. Introduzir novamente a gaveta até

• no caso de mudança de condutor ou de engatar, colocar, previamente, a gaveta
veículo, dobradiça em posição horizontal.
• no caso de ter terminado o horário de Nota
trabalho,
Caso tenha desligado a ignição durante o
• ou o mais tardar 24 horas depois. processo de injecção da gaveta, pode acon-
tecer que a mesma, depois de ter sido
Só é possível abrir a gaveta,
fechada,não tranque correctamente. Neste
quando ...
• o veículo está parado e caso, proceda da seguinte forma:
• a ignição está ligada. 1. Ligar a ignição.
¾ Espere até que o processo de
1. Premir a tecla . ejecção esteja completo.
2. Depois introduzir a gaveta até que

engate.
3. Desligar novamente a ignição.
Desligação automática do registo dos

grupos relativos ao tempo de trabalho e
da distância
Se a gaveta permanecer fechada mais do
¾ No visor aparece o símbolo "ejecção que 25 horas com os diagramas lá dentro,
activa". Um indicador de funciona- então o MTCO 1324 regista automatica-
mento mostra que o MTCO 1324 já mente para o condutor-1 e para o -2 os
acabou o registo dos diagramas. grupos relativos ao tempo de trabalho " ".
¾ Espere até que a gaveta esteja des- O MTCO 1324 poupa, deste modo, a bateria
bloqueada. do veículo.
Enquanto o símbolo "ejecção activa" Indicação no caso do veículo estar

aparecer no visor, por favor não parado
ligar a ignição!
Caso o veículo não seja utilizado
durante um longo período tenha em
2. Gaveta de retenção retirar até que haja
atenção que não se encontra
um choque e, respectivamente, dobrar
nenhum diagrama no MTCO 1324.
a gaveta dobradiça, adicionalmente,
Por exemplo, no caso de serviços
para baixo.
de manutenção ou reparação do
3. Retirar os diagramas e completar o veículo ou paragem deste.
registo no campo interior,
➥ ver página 91.

Mudança de condutor
2. Ajustar os grupos desejados relativos

ao tempo de trabalho.
¾ O novo condutor-1 acciona a tecla
, o condutor-2 a tecla .
Caso 2:
O condutor-1 ou o condutor-2 abandona
o veículo:
Diagrama
Diagrama 1. A pessoa em causa leva consigo o dia-
condutor-1
condutor-2 grama.
2. O novo condutor coloca o diagrama por
baixo da chapa de separação.
Ou:
O novo condutor coloca o seu diagrama
por cima da chapa de separação.
Nota
Se não vier nenhum novo condutor-2 então
deve mudar o grupo relativo ao tempo de
Anotado como trabalho para tempo de descanso " " caso
condutor-2
contrário, aparece uma mensagem de erro.
Mudança de Anotado como
condutor
condutor-1 Caso 3:
O condutor-1 e o condutor-2 abandonam
o veículo:
Se o condutor mudar de veículo durante o 1. Ambos retiram o diagrama do aparelho.
seu período de trabalho diário, então tem de
2. A nova tripulação do veículo coloca o
levar consigo o diagrama e anotar a
diagrama, consoante a sua função
mudança de veículo na parte traseira do
(condutor-1 ou condutor-2) no aparelho.
mesmo.
Caso 1:
A tripulação muda entre si: o condutor-2
torna-se no condutor-1:
1. Mudar os diagramas.
¾ O condutor-1 (agora condutor-2) põe
o seu diagrama por baixo da chapa
de separação e o condutor-2 (agora
condutor-1) por cima desta.
84 MTCO 1324
Mudar a hora
• O apelo ao funcionamento de MUDAR

A HORA só é possível quando os veí-
culos se encontram parados.
• Para que o registo do diagrama fique
automaticamente sincronizado com a
hora, é necessário que a ignição
esteja ligada e que não se encontre
nenhum diagrama no MTCO 1324. = Premir a tecla brevemente
= Premir a tecla durante mais tempo
1. Menu MUDAR A HORA com marcar.
2. Com ou activar o contador dos

minutos, estes piscam.
3. Manter a tecla ou premida até apa-

recer o valor desejado.
4. Com activar o contador das horas, estas

piscam.
5. Manter a tecla ou premida até que o

valor desejado apareça.
¾ Passando pelas 24 horas, a data muda auto-
maticamente.
6. Confirmar a mudança de horário, premindo a

tecla durante mais do que 2 segundos.
Aparece de novo a indicação de base.
Nota
Se acertar a hora com o diagrama colocado, irá
surgir um erro no display e a hora piscará. Aler-
tando para o acerto do diagrama com a hora.
Acerto diagrama c / hora; ➥ ver página 88.

Mensagens
O MTCO 1324 supervisiona o funciona- Indicar a memória de erros

mento do sistema e indica automatica-
Para descobrir a razão da mensagem de
mente, se existir alguma falha nalgum
erro, verifique a MEMÓRIA DE ERROS.
componente, no aparelho ou no comando
do mesmo. Mensagens e notas podem apa-
recer imediatamente depois de fechar a Só é possível chamar a função de
gaveta ou a qualquer momento no visor. indicação MEMÓRIA DE ERROS se
o veículo estiver parado!
Aparece uma mensagem
1 2
= Premir a tecla brevemente

• Os controlos operacionais (1) no indi- = Premir a tecla durante mais tempo
cador ou, mais precisamente, o tacó-
grafo-E brilha,
1. Seleccionar o menu MEMÓRIA DE
• no visor do MTCO 1324 aparece ao lado
ERROS premindo ligeiramente duas
do estado do conta-quilómetros um
vezes a tecla .
ponto de exclamação (2) e ...
• dependendo do tipo de erro quer no 2. Com ou podem ser indicados
display completo (3) ou na coluna entre outros erros que estejam activos.
os digitos deixará de piscar.
• Adicionalmente, o erro é registado numa
memória electrónica,
➥ ver "Indicar a memória de erros".
Início do erro
• Alguns danos do MTCO 1324 são
também documentados no diagrama, Símbolo com código de erros
➥ ver página 93. ainda existem outras mensagens de erros
3. Chamar de novo a indicação de base,

– Premir a tecla durante mais do
que 2 segundos
– ou durante 20 segundos não premir
nenhuma tecla.
86 MTCO 1324
Código de erros – plano geral
Mensagem exposta Código Significado / procedimento
 = • O MTCO 1324 altera de forma automática para a

hora de verão e inverno,
• a hora é mudada estando um diagrama intro-
(a hora pisca)
duzido.
Indicação: Ou a hora foi ajustada com o
ou diagrama colocado, ➥ ver página 88.
 = Erro no acerto data / hora

Acertar, mais uma vez, o diagrama com a hora,
➥ ver página 88.
 = Erro aquando do accionamento do registo do dia-

grama
(a coluna não pisca) Verifique se os diagramas, foram introduzidos
correctamente.
 = Viagem sem diagrama condutor-1

(O código de erro não pode ser encontrado na
memória de erros.)
Insira diagrama condutor-1.
 = Diagrama condutor-1 falta

 = Diagrama condutor-2 falta
(Esta mensagem aparece quando mudamos de
" " para " ", por exemplo quando o diagrama
está em falta.)
Insira o diagrama.
 = Erro no caso de transferência CAN


 = Erros internos no aparelho
 = Erro no teclado, tecla tempo demais premida ou

bloqueada
 = Erro LCD (visor)
➥ Continua na página seguinte

Verso do diagrama 3) Campo de marca de controlo
(página 151, figura VII) Esta parte do verso contém dados sobre
a marca de controlo do diagrama e do
Para os tacógrafos-EC existem, fundamen-
aparelho para o qual o diagrama é
talmente, dois tipos de diagramas:
aprovado.
c) sem registo de rotações
4) Anotação da frequência de rotação
d) com registo de rotações (opção)
O registo das rpm (se existente) é efec-
1) Campo de registo para grupos
tuado no verso do diagrama do con-
relativos ao tempo de trabalho
tudor-1.
Este campo de registo serve para o
registo manual dos grupos relativos ao Nota
tempo de trabalho. Os registos devem
Os símbolos (4a) são mostrados quer a
ser efectuados quando, por ex., o tra-
ignição esteja ligada / desligada.
balho do pessoal especializado não se
realizar na imediação directa do veículo
e o aparelho não poder ser manuseado
ou no caso de uma supressão eventual
do registo dos grupos relativos ao tempo
de trabalho.
2) Campo interior
No campo interior podem ser apon-
tados, manualmente, até três mudanças
de veículo. Deve-se anotar:
Hora de mudança do veículo

Número de matrícula do novo
veículo
Quilómetros aquando do início do
tempo de trabalho
Quilómetros percorridos aquando
do início do tempo de trabalho
Quilómetros percorridos
(podem ser anotados)
92 MTCO 1324
Registo de danos (página 151, figura VIII)
Corte de tensão • A marcação (3) surge logo a seguir ao

Ao haver de novo tensão, o aparelho aparecimento do dano e permanece até
desenha, pouco após o arranque, um traço que a causa tenha sido resolvida.
(1) no diagrama.
Danos no equipamento
Interrupção de transmissão Danos no sistema de registo podem causar
Dano no trajecto de transmissão do gerador os seguintes registos de erros:
de impulsos Ù MTCO 1324: • Marcação (4), avaria no sistema de
• Assim, que o veículo pare aparece a registo-v.
marcação (2), no caso de voltar a • Marcação (5) e (6), avaria no sistem de
arrancar tem de novo lugar o registo-v. registo para a anotação dos grupos rela-
ou tivos ao tempo de trabalho e ao per-
curso.
Apêndice
Examinação obrigatória para tacó- Manutenção e limpeza

grafos O MTCO 1324 está equipado por uma
O dono do veículo tem a obrigação de técnica moderna, que não necessita de
mandar examinar regularmente o manutenção. Por isso, trabalhos preven-
MTCO 1324 montado. tivos de manutenção não são necessários.
No mínimo todos os dois anos o funciona- No caso de sujidade, pode limpar a caixa, o
mento regular tem de ser examinado, por visor assim como as teclas de comando
ex. no ramo do controlo técnico do seu com um pano ligeiramente húmido. Caso
veículo. isto não seja suficiente podem ser utilizados
produtos normais de limpeza.
Providencie que, após cada revisão, a placa
instalada seja renovada e que esta con-
tenha os dados prescritos.

Dados técnicos
MTCO 1324 (normal) Taquímetro-E 1323 (normal)

Margem de medição 125 km/h 125 km/h
do valor final:
Visor: 2 linhas com 16 caracteres 1. linha 7-espaços
cada uma, iluminado através 2. linhas 4-espaços
da ignição
Temperatura: Funcionamento: -25 até 70 °C Funcionamento: -25 até 70 °C
Armazenamento: -40 até 85 °C Armazenamento: -40 até 85 °C
Tensão: 24 ou 12 volt 24 ou 12 volt
Consumo de corrente: Manutenção típica: Manutenção típica 6 mA no
50 mA (12 volt) caso de 12 volt
30 mA (24 volt) (sem controlo operacional LED)
Bateria Célula de lítio
compensadora:
EMC: Directiva 95 54 CE ISO 7637 Directiva 95 54 CE ISO 7637
Peso: 1350 g 470 g
Equipamento • Anotação de frequência de • Margem de medição do
especial: rotação 3300 min-1 valor final: 100 / 140 / 180
• Registo complementar km/h
• ADR
• Margem de medição do
valor final: 100 / 140 / 180
km/h
• Indicação digital da velo-
cidade
Responsável pelo conteúdo: Reservado o direito a alterações de pormenores téc-

Continental Automotive GmbH nicos em relação às descrições, dados e figuras
constantes neste manual de instruções. É proibida a
P.O. Box 1640
reimpressão, tradução ou multiplicação sem a autori-
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen zação por escrito.
94 MTCO 1324
Indice
Panoramica del sistema .............................................................................................. 96

Avvertenze generali ..................................................................................................... 97
Elementi di comando ................................................................................................... 98
Predisporre il pronto servizio ..................................................................................... 99
Apertura del cassetto ............................................................................................... 99
Inserimento del disco tachigrafico per il secondo autista ......................................... 99
Inserimento del disco tachigrafico per il primo autista .............................................. 99
Regolazione dei gruppi di orari ............................................................................... 100
Rimozione dei dischi tachigrafici ............................................................................. 101
Cambio autisti ............................................................................................................ 102
Regolazione dell'ora .................................................................................................. 103
Messaggi ..................................................................................................................... 104
Visualizzazione di un messaggio ............................................................................ 104
Visualizzazione memoria errori .............................................................................. 104
Codice errore - Riepilogo ........................................................................................ 105
Eliminazione dei problemi ....................................................................................... 106
Aggiornamento della regolazione del porta disco ................................................... 106
Strumento indicatore ................................................................................................. 107
Azzeramento dei chilometri parziali ........................................................................ 107
Descrizione del disco tachigrafico ........................................................................... 108
Utilizzo del disco tachigrafico appropriato .............................................................. 108
Registrazioni sulla parte anteriore del disco tachigrafico ....................................... 109
Registrazioni nel campo interno ............................................................................. 109
Parte posteriore del disco tachigrafico ................................................................... 110
Registrazione dei guasti ............................................................................................ 111
Appendice ................................................................................................................... 111
Obbligo di verifica per i tachigrafi ........................................................................... 111
Manutenzione e pulizia ........................................................................................... 111
Dati tecnici .............................................................................................................. 112
Definizioni utilizzate nella presente guida all'uso
Primo = la persona che conduce il veicolo anche per breve tempo, ovvero
autista che si trovi all'interno del veicolo al fine, se necessario di con-
durlo.
Secondo = la persona che non conduce il veicolo.

autista

Panoramica del sistema
Il tachigrafo MTCO 1324 stabilisce, grazie A immediata portata visiva dell'autista un

alla sua realizzazione modulare con visua- affidabile strumento indicatore, ad
lizzazione e registrazione separate, nuovi esempio l'E-Tacho 1323, con indicatore
standard di prestazioni, tecnica e design. In analogico della velocità, contatore digitale di
formato radio, a norma DIN, MTCO 1324 è percorso, ora e chilometraggio parziale. Il
un nuovo componente innovativo del simbolo di controllo funzionamento
sistema. rimanda a messaggi del tachigrafo
MTCO 1324.
Il primo e il secondo autista possono sele-
zionare agevolmente i propri gruppi di orari Con il sensore per tachigrafo intelligente
di lavoro per mezzo dei pulsanti di comando. KITAS, il sistema costituisce un'affidabile
unità. Il sensore invia impulsi in tempo reale
Sul display verranno visualizzati data, ora, e dati cifrati per la rilevazione del percorso e
percorso, gruppi di orari di lavoro utilizzati e della velocità.
simboli dei dischi tachigrafici inseriti. Even-
tuali anomalie di funzionamento del dispo-
sitivo o di un componente del sistema
verranno automaticamente visualizzate. Vi auguriamo buon viaggio.
Come sempre verranno registrati su disco Continental Automotive

tachigrafico la velocità, il percorso e gli
orari di guida, lavoro e riposo riferiti agli
autisti.
96 MTCO 1324
Avvertenze generali
I simboli nella presente guida all'uso hanno • Il tachigrafo MTCO 1324 viene installato
il seguente significato: e piombato da personale autorizzato.
Non accedere in alcun modo al dispo-
sitivo e ai relativi conduttori elettrici.
ATTENZIONE!
Il testo accanto a questo simbolo
contiene importanti informazioni da ❒ Avvertenze per l'utilizzo dei dischi
osservare per evitare danni al dispo- tachigrafici
sitivo. • Il diagramma di un tachigrafo EC è
personalizzato, quindi non trasferibile
AVVERTENZE a terzi!
o informazioni complementari la cui • Utilizzare solo dischi tachigrafici del pro-
mancata osservanza può causare duttore (dischi tachigrafici originali). Veri-
anomalie sono contrassegnate dal ficare la coincidenza dei valori di fondo
presente simbolo. scala e i dati relativi all'omologazione,
➥ vedere pagina 108.
• Utilizzare soltanto dischi tachigrafici privi
di difetti, non piegati ed esenti da strappi
Osservare le seguenti avvertenze! ai fori periferici e di trazione e non
ondulati o in altro modo danneggiati !
❒ Avvertenze sul funzionamento del • I dischi tachigrafici compilati devono
tachigrafo MTCO 1324 essere conservati in modo da proteggerli
da danneggiamenti, vedere anche l'art.
• Aprire il cassetto solo per inserire o
15 del regolamento CEE n. 3821/85.
rimuovere il disco. Tenerlo altrimenti
chiuso per evitare danni o sporcizia.
• Non utilizzare il cassetto come piano ❒ Avvertenze sulla legislazione
d'appoggio, ad esempio per la compila- • Chi apporti modifiche al dispositivo di
zione dei dischi tachigrafici. controllo o ai cavi di connessione dei
• Non impiegare detergenti abrasivi per la segnali, tali da influire sulla registrazione
pulizia del dispositivo, o solventi come del dispositivo di controllo stesso, in par-
diluenti o benzina. ticolare con intenzione fraudolenta, si
rende colpevole di infrazione alle norme
penali e civili !

Elementi di comando (Pagina 2, figura I)
a) "Cassetto bloccato" 3) Display

• Vissualizza permanentemente le indi-
b) "Cassetto ribaltabile" cazioni di base.
• Messagi e segnalazioni compaiono
Osservazioni
automaticamente,
Il sistema comandi di ambedue i tipi, ossia è ➥ vedere pagina 104.
in linea di massima identico. Particolari istru-
zioni stanno a indicare altri tipi di comandi.
Data + ora
1) Pulsanti di sinistra Simbolo disco + gruppi

Pulsante per lo sblocco del cas- tempi, autista 2
setto. Simbolo errore
Pulsante per la regolazione dei Chilometraggio totale

gruppi di orario per il primo autista. Simbolo disco + gruppi
tempi, autista 1
2) Pulsanti di destra
Pulsanti per la regolazione dei
gruppi di orario per il secondo 4) Piastra di separazione
autista. Tra i dischi tachigrafici del primo e del
secondo autista.
Tasto per la selezione delle fun-
zioni: 5) Marcatura di controllo
• "Regolazione ora", essa consente di verificare il corretto
➥ vedere pagina 103. posizionamento dell’alloggiamento del
• "Visualizzazione memoria disco tachigrafico dal punto di vista
errori", ➥ vedere pagina 104. dell’orario.
Tasto per la regolazione dell’ora e 6) Perno ovale di trazione del disco

per la visualizzazione dei mes- tachigrafico
saggi di errore.
7) Targhetta
vi sono riportati produttore, modello del
dispositivo, contrassegni e numero di
serie.
98 MTCO 1324
Presdisporre il pronto servizio (Pagina 3, figura II)
Apertura del cassetto 4. Collocare il disco tachigrafico compilato

dal secondo autista sul perno ovale di
Il cassetto può essere aperto solo
trazione con la parte anteriore verso
quando ...
• il veicolo è fermo e l'alto.
• la chiave di accensione è ruotata Assicurarsi che il disco tachigrafico
in posizione di acceso. sia inserito sotto la molla (c).
1. Premere il pulsante . 5. Riportare in basso la piastra di sepera-

zione.
Inserimento del disco tachigrafico

per il primo autista
6. Collocare il disco tachigrafico compilato
¾ Sul display viene visualizzato il dal primo autista sulla piastra di separa-
simbolo "Espulsione attiva". Inoltre zione, inserendolo sul perno di trazione
una barra indicatrice visualizza il con la parte anteriore verso l'alto.
decorso della procedura.
¾ Attendere sino a quando il cassetto Far attenzione che il foglio del dia-
sarà sbloccato. gramma si trovi sotto il pressore (d) e
2. a) Estrarre il cassetto bloccato sino alla sotto il nasello (e) del quadrante ovale.
sua battuta.
Nota per l'utilizzo con un solo autista
Non tentare di ribaltare questo tipo
Per l'utilizzo con un solo autista collocare
di casseto verso il basso!
sulla piastra di separazione solo il disco
b) Estrarre il cassetto ribaltabile sino alla tachigrafico per il primo autista.
sua battuta, piegandolo verso il basso.
Se necessario estrarre il disco tachi- 7. Verificare il corretto posizionamento
grafico del primo autista. dell’alloggiamento del disco tachi-
grafico dal punto di vista dell’orario.
3. Sollevare la piastra di separazione. Se Regolare la scala dei tempi del disco
necessario estrarre il disco tachigrafico tachigrafico in modo che l'ora indicata
del secondo autista. dal contrassegno (f), coincida con l'ora
visualizzata dal display.
¾ Nel caso attivare l'aggiornamento
Inserimento del disco tachigrafico della regolazione del porta disco,
per il secondo autista ➥ vedere pagina 106.
Prima della partenza compilare accu-

ratamente il campo interno del disco,
➥ vedere pagina 109.

8. a) Ritrarre il cassetto bloccato sino alla Regolazione dei gruppi di orari
sua battuta.
Utilizzo con due autisti
b) Riportare il cassetto ribaltabile in
posizione orizzontale e ritrarlo sino a 10. L'autista 1 preme il pulsante .
udirne la battuta di rientro. ¾ Premere ripetutamente il pulsante
sino a visualizzare il gruppo orario di
9. Appaiono le indicazioni di base: lavoro desiderato.
¾ Data, ora e chilometraggio totale. L'autista 2 preme il pulsante .
¾ Simboli per i dischi tachigrafici inseriti ¾ Premere ripetutamente il pulsante
e la posizione dei gruppi di orari di sino a visualizzare il gruppo orario di
lavoro, a sinistra per il primo autista, a lavoro desiderato.
destra per il secondo autista.
Alla partenza del veicolo comparirà automa-
Nota riguardo alle indicazioni di base ticamente l'indicazione di base
• L'orario del tachigrafo MTCO 1324 è • per il primo autista " " e
regolato sull'ora legale del Paese nel • per il secondo autista " ".
quale il veicolo è immatricolato. Inizio e
fine del periodo estivo sono inseriti nel Utilizzo con un solo autista
dispositivo e vengono aggiornati in modo • Per l'utilizzo con un solo autista collocare
automatico. ➥ Vedere pagina 105 sulla piastra di separazione solo il disco
"Codice errore - Riepilogo". tachigrafico per il primo autista.
• Se accanto all’indicazione dei chilometri • Il gruppo orario di lavoro del secondo
totali appare un punto esclamativo, si è autista deve essere assolutamente
verificato un guasto. ➥ Vedere pagina impostato sul tempo di riposo " ". Non
105 "Codice errore - Riepilogo". effettuando tale impostazione, verrà
visualizzato un messaggio di errore.
• Opzionale: indicazione digitale della
velocità Ripartizione dei gruppi di tempi
Secondo il modello nella 1a riga può
= Tempi di guida
apparire l’indicazione della velocità.
Tutte le funzioni sono altrimenti analoghe = Ulteriori tempi di lavoro
alle indicazioni di base. = Orari di disponibilità
(tempi di attesa, tempi di cabina del
secondo autista, tempi trascorsi in
cuccetta durante la marcia del
veicolo)
= Intervalli e tempi di riposo
100 MTCO 1324

Rimozione dei dischi tachigrafici
Rimuovere il disco tachigrafico dal 4. Ritrarre il cassetto sino alla sua battuta,
MTCO 1324 dopo averlo riportato in posizione oriz-
• nel caso di un cambio autisti o di veicolo, zontale.
• al termine dell'orario di lavoro,
Nota
• o al più tardi dopo 24 ore.
Se tuttavia è stata spento il quadro durante
Il cassetto può essere aperto solo la procedura di estrazione dischi, può darsi
quando ... che, in seguito, il cassetto non si chiuda più
• il veicolo è fermo e nel modo dovuto. Se ciò accadesse, pro-
• la chiave di accensione è ruotata cedere nel modo seguente:
in posizione di acceso.
1. Inserire l'accensione.
¾ Attendere la conclusione della
1. Premere il pulsante . dinamica d'espulsione.
2. Successivamente, chiudere il cassetto
fino ad udire lo scatto di chiusura.
3. Disinserire l'accensione.
Interruzione automatica della registra-

zione dei gruppi di tempi e dei percorsi
¾ Il display visualizza il simbolo "Espul- Se il cassetto rimane chiuso con il disco
sione attiva". La barra indicatrice tachigrafico inserito per un periodo supe-
mostra che il tachigrafoMTCO 1324 riore alle 25 ore, il tachigrafo MTCO 1324
termina la registrazione sui dischi registra automaticamente il gruppo di tempi
tachigrafici. " " per il primo e il secondo autista. Il tachi-
¾ Attendere sino a quando il cassetto grafo MTCO 1324 risparmia in questo modo
sarà sbloccato. la batteria del veicolo.
Non disinserire l'accensione, Avvertenze per il fermo veicolo

mentre il display indica il simbolo
"espulsione in corso"! Nel caso in cui il veicolo non venga
utilizzato per più lunghi periodi di
tempo, per esempio durante lavori
2. Estrarre rispettivamente il cassetto
di manutenzione o di riparazione o
bloccato sino alla battuta e piegare
se fuori servizio, assicurarsi che non
pure il cassetto ribaltabile verso il
sia inserito alcun disco tachigrafico
basso.
all'interno del tachigrafo
3. Estrarre i dischi tachigrafici e com- MTCO 1324.
pletare la compilazione del campo
interno, ➥ vedere pagina 109.

Cambio autisti
2. Registrazione dei gruppi di tempi desi-

derati.
¾ Il nuovo primo autista preme il pul-
sante , il secondo autista preme il
pulsante .
Caso 2:
Il primo autista o il secondo lascia il
Disco tachigrafico veicolo:
primo autista Disco tachigrafico
secondo autista
1. L'interessato porta con sé il disco.
2. Il nuovo secondo autista inserisce il suo
disco sotto il supporto separatore.
oppure:
Il nuovo primo autista inserisce il suo
disco tachigrafico sopra il supporto
separatore.
Nota
Nel caso in cui non ci sia un nuovo secondo
Registrazione autista, posizionare i gruppi di tempi su
come tempi di riposo " ". Sarà altrimenti visua-
Cambio autisti lizzato un messaggio di errore.
Registrazione come
primo autista
Caso 3:
Il primo e il secondo auista lasciano il
veicolo:
L'autista, se cambia veicolo durante il suoo-
rario di lavoro, deve portare con se il disco 1. Ognuno ritira il proprio disco tachi-
tachigrafico e annotare sul retro del disco grafico dal dispositivo.
tachigrafico stesso tale cambiamento. 2. Il nuovo equipaggio del veicolo colloca il
disco tachigrafico nel dispositivo a
Caso 1:
seconda dei rispettivi ruoli (primo o
L'equipaggio si scambia i ruoli: il secondo autista).
secondo autista diventa conducente:
1. Scambio dei dischi tachigrafici.
¾ Il primo autista (ora secondo) inse-
risce il suo disco tachigrafico sotto il
supporto separatore e il secondo
autista (ora primo) sopra il supporto
stesso.
102 MTCO 1324

Regolazione dell'ora
• L'attivazione della funzione REGOLA-

ZIONE DELL’ORA è possibile solo a
veicolo fermo.
• Perché l’alloggiamento del disco tachi-
grafico si sincronizzi automaticamente
con l’orario l’accensione deve essere
inserita e nel tachigrafo MTCO 1324
non vi deve essere nessun disco = Premere brevemente il tasto
tachigrafico. = Premere a lungo il tasto
1. Selezionare il menù REGOLAZIONE

DELL’ORA premendo il pulsante .
2. Con o attivare il contaminuti, i minuti

lampeggiano.
3. Tenere premuto il pulsante o finché

non appare il valore desiderato.
4. Con attivare il contaore, le ore lampeg-

giano.
5. Tenere premuto il pulsante o finché

non appare il valore desiderato.
¾ Quando si supera la mezzanotte in avanti o
indietro la data viene modificata automatica-
mente.
6. Confermare la variazione dell’orario tenendo

premuto il tasto per più di 2 secondi.
Vengono visualizzate nuovamente le indica-
zioni di base.
Nota
Se si regola l'orario mentre un disco è inserito il
simbolo di errore compare nel display e l'ora lam-
peggia. L'MTCO 1324 ricorderà di aggiornare la
regolazione del porta disco; ➥ vedere pagina 106.

Messaggi
Il tachigrafo MTCO 1324 controlla il funzio- Visualizzazione memoria errori

namento del sistema e segnala automatica-
Per scoprire la ragione del messaggio di
mente i guasti che si verificano in uno dei
errore fare riferimento al menù MEMORIA
componenti, nell’apparecchio o nei
ERRORI.
comandi. I messaggi e le segnalazioni
possono essere visualizzati immediata-
mente dopo la chiusura del cassetto o ogni La funzione visualizza MEMORIA
volta che appaiono sul display. ERRORI è può essere richiamata
solo a veicolo fermo!
Visualizzazione di un messaggio
1 2
= Premere brevemente il tasto
= Premere a lungo il tasto
• Il controllo funzionamento (1) sullo

strumento indicatore o sull'E-Tacho lam- 1. Selezionare il menù MEMORIA
peggia, ERRORI premendo brevemente il tasto
• sul display del tachigrafo MTCO 1324 per due volte.
appare un punto esclamativo accanto 2. Con o è possibile visualizzare
all’indicazione dei chilometri totali (2) e ... altri errori attivi.
• a seconda del tipo di errore l'indicazione
completa di orario (3) oppure i due punti
tra le cifre smetteranno di lampeggiare.
• L'errore viene inoltre registrato in una
memoria elettronica, ➥ vedi "Visualizza- Inizio errore
zione memoria errori". Simbolo con codice errore
• Alcuni guasti vengono documentati dal Sono presenti altri messaggi di errore
MTCO 1324 anche sul disco tachi-
grafico, ➥ vedere pagina 111.
3. Richiamare le indicazioni di base
– Premere per più di due secondi il
pulsante
– oppure non premere nessun tasto
per 20 secondi.
104 MTCO 1324

Codici errore - Riepilogo
Messaggio che appare Codice Significato / grandezza

sul display
 = • L'MTCO 1324 si è aggiornato automaticamente

all'inizio o fine del periodo ora legale,
• oppure se l’orario è stato impostato con il disco
(orario lampeggiante)
tachigrafico inserito.
Nota: Aggiornamento della regolazione del porta
oppure disco, ➥ vedere pagina 106.
 = Errore durante l' aggiornamento della regolazione

del porta disco
Nuovo aggiornamento della regolazione del
porta disco, ➥ vedere pagina 106.
 = Errore nell’azionamento dell’alloggiamento del

disco tachigrafico
(due punti non lampeggianti) Controllare se i dischi diagramma sono inseriti
correttamente.
 = Partenza senza disco tachigrafico primo autista

(Codice errore non compreso nella memoria errori.)
Inserire il disco diagramma autista 1.
 = Manca il disco tachigrafico del primo autista

 = Manca il disco tachigrafico del secondo autista
(Questo messaggio appare quando si commuta da
" " l a " ", per es. quando manca il disco.)
Inserire il disco (i dischi).
 = Errore nella trasmissione CAN


 = Errore interno
 = Errore del pulsante, pulsante premuto molto tempo

o bloccato
 = Errore LCD (Display)
➥ Segue a pagina successiva

Messaggio che appare Codice Significato / grandezza
sul display
 = Errore al cassetto

Iniziare la procedura di estrazione e chiudere il
cassetto subito dopo.
 = Errore nel sistema registratore

 (L'MTCO 1324 registra questo errore sul disco,

➥ vedere pagina 111.)
 = Errore all’uscita impulso "B7"
 = Interuzione nella comunicazione verso lo stru-

mento
 = Errore nella comunicazione trasduttore

 = Errore nel key trasduttore / numero di serie /
segnale
(L'MTCO 1324 registra questo errore sul disco,
➥ vedere pagina 111.)
 = Interruzione tensione

(Codice errore non compreso nella memoria errori.
L'MTCO 1324 registra l'interruzione di tensione sul
disco, ➥ vedere pagina 111.)
Eliminazione dei problemi Aggiornamento della regolazione

Il messaggio scompare automaticamente del porta disco
solo dopo che è stata eliminata la causa, per 1. Aprire il cassetto ed estrarre entrambi i
esempio in caso di errore nell’utilizzo. dischi.
2. Richiudere il cassetto.
Nel caso in cui l’errore si ripeta con- ¾ L'MTCO 1324 aggiorna automatica-
tinuamente contattare immediata- mente l'orario del porta disco, e il
mente un’officina autorizzata VDO! simbolo errore e l'orario smetteranno
di lampeggiare.
3. Aprire il cassetto e se necessario intro-
durre dischi nuovi. Il tachigrafo
MTCO 1324 è nuovamente pronto a
funzionare.
106 MTCO 1324

Strumento indicatore (Pagina 150, figura III)
Nota 4) Pulsante reset

Il design e le funzioni dello strumento indi- Pulsante per il passaggio della visualiz-
catore (E-Tacho 1323) possone variare zazione dall'ora ai chilometri parziali.
rispetto a quanto di sequito riportato. Per
ulteriori informazioni consultare le respettive
guide all’uso. Azzeramento dei chilometri parziali
1) Indicatore di velocità Il display CL visualizza nella seconda riga
l'opzione impostata per ultima: ora o chilo-
2) Controllo funzionamento metri parziali.
Il LED si accende in presenza di
un'anomalia o di eventi come l'assenza 1. Impostare la visualizzazione dei chilo-
di un disco tachigrafico o il funziona- metri parziali. Se necessario premere
mento irregolare di un componente del brevemente il pulsante di reset.
sistema. 2. Mantenere premuto il pulsante reset per
3) Display LC più di due secondi.
(Avviso con accensione ON) ¾ Il contachilometri parziale verrà
• Visualizzazione a sette cifre della per- azzerato.
correnza totale. L'ultima cifra indica le Nota
centinaia di metri. Il contachilometri parziale può essere
• Nella riga inferiore possono essere azzerato anche durante la marcia.
visualizzati a scelta l'ora i chilometri
parziali.

Descrizione del disco tachigrafico
Utilizzo del disco tachigrafico Al di fuori dell'UE sono validi i dati di omolo-
appropriato (Pagina 150, figura IV) gazione e le prescrizioni vigenti in ciascuna
nazione.
Assicurarsi, in fase di utilizzo (e di
A seconda dei valori di fondo scala e del tipo
ordinazione) dei dischi tachigrafici,
di dispositivo, utilizzare per il tachigrafo
che i valori di fondo scala (1) e MTCO 1324 i dischi tachigrafici di seguito
i dati di omologazione del tachi- elencati:
grafo (2) MTCO 1324, coincidano
rispettivamente con i dati (3) e (4)
riportati sul disco tachigrafico.
Disco tachigrafico Kombi Disco tachigrafico per analisi Dati di omologazione

elettronica
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
EC = dischi tachigrafici per tachigrafo EC

= disco tachigrafico per i dispositivi con registrazione del numero di giri del
motore (opzione), es. Tipo: 1324.50111...
108 MTCO 1324

Registrazioni sulla parte anteriore mentari, per esempio impiego del lam-
del disco tachigrafico peggiatore a luce blu, sirena e via
(Pagina 150, figura V) dicendo.
1) Scala dei tempi Nota
Per un valore di fondo scala di 180 km/h
2) Rilevazione dell'apertura
la registrazione supplementare si trova
Ogni apertura del cassetto verrà docu-
in pos. (8a).
mentata.
Analisi dei dischi tachigrafici
3) Andamento delle velocità in km/h
Oltre alla lettura diretta delle registrazioni,
4) Registrazione gruppi di tempo esiste anche la possibilità di una esatta
analisi dei dati indicati. Per ulteriori informa-
5) Campo interno zioni consultare i punti vendita VDO.
6) Foro ovale di trazione
Assicura l'esatto posizionamento dei
dischi tachigrafici. Registrazioni nel campo interno
(Pagina 151, figura VI)
7) Percorsi calcolati
Nota
Un movimento ascen- Le registrazioni del cognome, nome, inizio e
dente o discendente corri- fine dell'utilizzo sono obbligatorie a norma di
sponde a 5 km. legge e costituiscono la base per la suc-
= 5 km
cessiva analisi del disco tachigrafico.
Nota
a) ... all'inizio del viaggio
La registrazione distanze Cognome e nome del conducente
verrà interrotta qualora:
Luogo di partenza
Dati di inserimento (riga in alto)
• l gli interruttori dei gruppi siano in
posizione di riposo " " per entrambi Targa del veicolo
gli autisti, Indicazione del contachilometri
• l il quadro sia stata spento e all'inizio del viaggio
• l l'opzione di registrazione addi-
zionale sia inattiva. b) ... al termine del viaggio
Dopo aver riacceso il quadro la registra- Luogo di arrivo

zione delle distanze percorse riprenderà Data di rimozione (riga in basso)
correttamente in termini di orario e posi-
Indicazione del contachilometri
zione.
alla fine del viaggio
8) Registrazione supplementare Chilometri percorsi

(Opzione) (possono venire registrati)
Rilevazione dei gruppi di lavoro supple-

Parte posteriore del disco 3) Campo per i numeri di omologazione
tachigrafico (Pagina 151, figura VII) Questa sezione della parte posteriore
contiene dati relativi all'omologa-zione
I tachigrafi EC sono in linea di massima del disco tachigrafico ed ai dispositivi per
reperibili in due diversi tipi
i quali il diagramma è omologato.
c) senza registrazione della frequenza di
giri 4) Registrazione della frequenza di giri
d) con registrazione della frequenza di giri (Opzione)
La registrazione esatta (in rpm) per il
1) Campo di registrazione per gruppi di primo autista viene tracciata nella parte
tempi posteriore del disco tachigrafico.
Questo campo di registrazione serve per
la registrazione manuale dei gruppi di Nota
tempi. Tali registrazioni devono essere I riferimenti (4a) compariranno a signi-
effettuate quando per esempio il per- ficare quadro spento/acceso.
sonale di guida esegue lavori non nelle
immediate vicinanze del veicolo e quindi
il dispositivo non può essere utilizzato,
oppure in caso di guasto del registratore
dei gruppi di tempi.
2) Campo interno
Nel campo interno possono essere
annotati a mano fino a 3 cambi di
veicolo. È necessario annotare quanto
elencato di seguito:
Ora del cambio di veicolo
Numero targa del nuovo veicolo
Indicazione del contachilo-metri
all'inizio del lavoro
Indicazione del contachilo-metri
alla fine del viaggio
Percorsi effettuati
(possono venire registrati)
110 MTCO 1324

Registrazione dei guasti (Pagina 151, figura VIII)
Interruzione della tensione • La marcatura (3) compare subito dopo

Al ripristino della tensione il dispositivo l'insorgere dell'anomalia e perdura sino
traccia subito dopo l'avvio un trattino (1) sul all'eliminazione della causa.
disco tachigrafico.
Guasti al dispositivo
Interruzione della comunicazione con il Le anomalie del sistema di registrazione
trasduttore possono essere causate dagli errori di regi-
Anomalia del percorso di trasmissione fra il strazione di seguito elencati:
generatore d'impulsi Ù MTCO 1324: • Marcatura (4), difetto nel sistema di
• Non appena il veicolo si arresta, scrittura a 'v'.
compare la marcatura (2). Alla partenza • Marcatura (5) e (6), difetto nel sistema di
riprende la normale registrazione a 'v'. scrittura per i gruppi di tempi e registra-
oppure zione del percorso.
Appendice
Obbligo di verifica per i tachigrafi Manutenzione e pulizia

Il proprietario del veicolo ha l'obbligo di fare Il tachigrafo MTCO 1324 è realizzato con
controllare periodicamente il tachigrafo moderne tecnologie e non richiede manu-
MTCO 1324 installato. tenzione. Non sono pertanto necessarie
operazioni preventive di manutenzione.
Verificare il regolare funzionamento almeno
ogni due anni, per esempio in occasione L'apparecchio, il display e i tasti funzione
della revisione tecnica del veicolo. possono essere puliti con un panno legger-
mente inumidito. Se ciò non fosse suffi-
Assicurarsi dopo ogni verifica che la tar- ciente, possono essere utilizzati anche
ghetta venga rinnovata e contenga i dati speciali detergenti o prodotti di cura per
prescritti. materiali sintetici.

Dati tecnici
MTCO 1324 (Standard) E-Tacho 1323 (Standard)

Valore di fondo scala: 125 km/h 125 km/h
Display: 2 righe ciascuna di 16 caratteri, Prima riga 7 posizioni
illuminato mediante accensione Seconda riga 4 posizioni
Temperatura: esercizio: -25 fino a 70 °C esercizio: -25 fino a 70 °C
magazzino: -40 fino a 85 °C magazzino: -40 fino a 85 °C
Tensione: 24 o 12 volt 24 o 12 volt
Assorbimento di cor- Tipico in standby: Tipico in standby 6 mA a 12 volt
rente: 50 mA (12 volt) (senza LED di controllo funzio-
30 mA (24 volt) namento)
Batteria tampone: Celle al litio
Massa: 1350 g 470 g
Dotazione particolari: • Registrazione frequenza giri • Valori di fondi scala:
3300 rpm 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Registrazione supplementare
• ADR
• Valori di fondi scala:
100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Indicatore digitale della
velocità
Responsabile per il contenuto: Con riserva di apportare modifiche ai dettagli tecnici

Continental Automotive GmbH contenuti nelle descrizioni, indicazioni e figure del
presente libretto per l’uso. La ristampa, la traduzione
P.O. Box 1640
e la riproduzione del presente libretto per l’uso non
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen sono permesse, salvo esplicita autorizzazione scritta.
112 MTCO 1324

Inhoudsopgave
Systeemoverzicht ...................................................................................................... 114

Algemene voorschriften ............................................................................................ 115
Bedieningselementen ................................................................................................ 116
Gereed maken voor ingebruikname ......................................................................... 117
Lade openen .......................................................................................................... 117
Tachoschijf van chauffeur-2 plaatsen ..................................................................... 117
Tachoschijf van chauffeur-1 plaatsen ..................................................................... 117
Tijdgroepen instellen .............................................................................................. 118
Tachoschijf verwijderen ............................................................................................ 119
Wisseling van chauffeur ............................................................................................ 120
Tijd instellen ............................................................................................................... 121
Meldingen ................................................................................................................... 122
Er verschijnt een melding ....................................................................................... 122
Foutgeheugen weergeven ...................................................................................... 122
Foutcode - overzicht ............................................................................................... 123
Storingen verhelpen ............................................................................................... 124
Tijdsaanpassingsprocedure van de centreernok uitvoeren .................................... 124
Snelheidsmeter .......................................................................................................... 125
Dagteller op nul zetten ........................................................................................... 125
Beschrijving tachoschijf ........................................................................................... 126
De juiste tachoschijf bij het apparaat ..................................................................... 126
Vastgelegde gegevens op de registratiezijde van de tachoschijf ........................... 127
Noteringen op middenveld ..................................................................................... 127
De achterkant van de tachoschijf ........................................................................... 128
Registratie van storingen .......................................................................................... 129
Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 129
Controleplicht voor tachografen ............................................................................. 129
Onderhoud en reiniging .......................................................................................... 129
Technische gegevens ............................................................................................ 130
Definities in deze bedieningshandleiding
Chauffeur-1 = De persoon, die het voertuig momenteel bestuurt of zal gaan

besturen.
Chauffeur-2 = De persoon, die het voertuig niet bestuurt.

Systeemoverzicht
Snelheidsmeter
(bijv."E-Tacho" 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
Tachoschijven
De tachograaf MTCO 1324 zet door zijn In het directe gezichtsveld van de chauffeur
modulaire opbouw met gescheiden snel- bevindt zich een toegelaten snelheids-
heidsweergave en registratie nieuwe maat- meter, bijvoorbeeld de "E-Tacho" 1323, met
staven in prestatie, techniek en design. De analoge snelheidsweergave, digitale kilo-
MTCO 1324 vormt in het DIN-radioformaat meterteller, tijdfunctie en dagteller. De func-
een vernieuwende systeem-component. tiecontrole LED verwijst naar meldingen
van de MTCO 1324.
Chauffeur-1 en chauffeur-2 kiezen comfor-
tabel via bedieningstoetsen de betreffende Samen met de intelligente snelheidssignaal-
werktijdgroepen uit. gever, KITAS, vormt het systeem een
betrouwbare eenheid. De sensor levert real-
Op het display verschijnen overzichtelijk time-pulsen en gecodeerde gegevens ter
naast datum, tijd en het aantal afgelegde registratie van het aantal afgelegde kilo-
kilometers, de ingestelde tijdgroepen en meters en de snelheid.
symbolen van de ingevoerde tachoschijven.
Storingen van het apparaat of een systeem-
component worden automatisch weerge-
geven. Wij wensen u een goede reis.
Zoals tot nu toe gebruikelijk, worden op de Uw Continental Automotive

tachoschijf de snelheid en het aantal afge-
legde kilometers, alsook de rij-, werk- en
rusttijden van de chauffeur geregistreerd.
114 MTCO 1324

Algemene voorschriften
De symbolen in deze bedieningshandleiding • De MTCO 1324 wordt door geautori-

hebben de volgende betekenis: seerde personen geïnstalleerd en ver-
zegeld. Verandert u a.u.b. niets aan
het apparaat en aan de bedrading.
ATTENTIE!
De tekst naast dit symbool bevat
belangrijke informatie, die in acht ❒ Voorschriften m.b.t. de behandeling
genomen dient te worden om een van de tachoschijven
beschadiging van het apparaat te • Bij de EC-tachograaf is de tachoschijf
vermijden. persoonsgebonden en daarom niet
overdraagbaar!
VOORSCHRIFTEN • Gebruikt u alleen tachoschijven van de
of additionele informatie, die bij het producent (originele diagramschijven).
niet in acht nemen tot storingen kan Neemt u daarbij de overeenstemming
leiden, zijn met dit symbool geken- van de eindwaarde van het meetbereik
merkt. en het keuringsteken in acht,
➥ zie pagina 126.
• U mag alleen onbeschadigde tacho-
schijven invoeren. Deze mogen niet
Neemt u a.u.b. de weergegeven geknikt, niet aan de zijkant en/of bij het
voorschriften in acht! opnamegat ingescheurd, niet gekreukt of
op wat voor manier dan ook beschadigd
❒ Voorschriften m.b.t. het gebruik van zijn!
de MTCO 1324 • U dient de beschreven tachoschijven
• Opent u de lade alleen voor het aan- zodanig te bewaren, dat deze beveiligd
brengen of verwijderen van de tacho- zijn tegen beschadigingen, zie hiervoor
schijven. Houdt u deze verder steeds ook artikel 15 van de VO (EEG) nummer
gesloten om beschadigingen te ver- 3821/85.
mijden en om vervuiling te voorkomen.
• Gebruikt u de lade a.u.b. niet als onder-
❒ Verwijzing naar wettelijke bepalingen
steuning voor bijvoorbeeld het
beschrijven van de tachoschijven. • Wie veranderingen aan het controle-
apparaat of aan de signaaltoevoer, die
• Gebruikt u voor het reinigen van het
de registratie van het controle-apparaat
apparaat geen schurende reinigingsmid-
aanstuurt, uitvoert, in het bijzonder met
delen of oplosmiddelen, zoals verdunner
de opzet om te misleiden, kan in conflict
of benzine.
komen met de van toepassing zijnde
wettelijke bepalingen.

Bedieningselementen (pagina 2, afbeelding I)
a) "Vergrendelde lade" 3) Display

• Permanent verschijnt het standaard
b) "Naar beneden klapbare lade" display.
• Meldingen / aanwijzingen verschijnen
Opmerking
automatisch, ➥ zie pagina 122.
De bediening van de beide uitvoeringen van
het apparaat met is in principe identiek.
Datum + tijd
Afwijkende bedieningsstappen zijn speciaal
beschreven.
Schijf- + tijdgroepen-
symbool, chauffeur-2
1) Toetsenveld links
Foutsymbool
Toets voor het ontgrendelen van
Totaal kilometerstand
de lade.
Schijf- + tijdgroepen-
Toets voor het instellen van de tijd- symbool, chauffeur-1
groep voor chauffeur-1.
2) Toetsenveld rechts
4) Scheidingsplaat
Toets voor het instellen van de tijd-
tussen de schijven van van chauffeur-1
groep voor chauffeur-2.
en chauffeur-2.
Toets voor het kiezen van de func-
ties: 5) Controlemarkering
• "Tijd instellen", daarmee kan de juiste positie van de
➥ zie pagina 121. opname-eenheid voor tachoschijven
• "Foutgeheugen weergeven", m.b.t. de tijd gecontroleerd worden.
➥ zie pagina 122. 6) Eivormige centreernok voor
Toetsen voor het instellen van de tachoschijven
tijd en voor het weergeven van
actuele storingsmeldingen. 7) Typeplaatje
producent, type apparaat, keuringsteken
en serienummer zijn weergegeven.
116 MTCO 1324

Gereed maken voor ingebruikname (pagina 3, afbeelding II)
Lade openen Tachoschijf van chauffeur-2 plaatsen

De lade kan alleen geopend worden,
Voor het begin van een rit dient u de
indien ...
tachoschijf volgens de voorschriften
• het voertuig stilstaat en
in te vullen, ➥ zie pagina 127.
• het contact ingeschakeld is.
4. Chauffeur-2 drukt zijn tachoschijf met
1. Toets bedienen. de registratiezijde naar boven over de
eivormige centreernok heen.
Let u er op, dat de tachoschijf onder
het lipje (c) geschoven is.
5. Nu de scheidingsplaat naar beneden

klappen.
¾ Op het display verschijnt het symbool Tachoschijf van chauffeur-1 plaatsen

"Uitwerpen actief". Additioneel wordt
d.m.v. een verlichte balk weerge- 6. Chauffeur-1 plaatst zijn schijf met de
geven, dat dit proces even kan duren. registratiezijde naar boven boven op de
¾ Wacht u, totdat de lade ontgrendeld is. scheidingsplaat over de centreernok.
Let u er op, dat de tachoschijf zich
2. a) Vergrendelde lade er tot de aanslag onder de aandruklip (d) en onder de
uittrekken. vergrendeling (e) van de eivormige
centreernok voor tachoschijven
Probeert u de vaste lade niet naar bevindt.
beneden te klappen!
Opmerking 1-chauffeur-gebruik
b) Naar beneden klapbare lade er tot
Gedurende het 1-chauffeur-gebruik dient
de aanslag uittrekken en naar beneden
alleen de tachoschijf voor chauffeur-1 op de
klappen.
scheidingsplaat gelegd te worden.
Eventueel hierbij de tachoschijf van
chauffeur-1 van de scheidingsplaat ver- 7. Controleert u de juiste positie van de
wijderen. opname-eenheid voor tachoschijven
3. Scheidingsplaat geheel naar boven m.b.t. de tijd. U dient de tijdschaal van de
klappen. Eventueel hierbij de tachoschijf tachoschijf t.o.v. de markering (f) op de
van chauffeur-2 verwijderen. actuele tijd van het display in te stellen.
¾ Indien dit niet het geval is, s.v.p. de
procedure voor de tijdaanpassing van
de centreernok starten,
➥ zie pagina 124.

8. a) De vergrendelde lade er tot aan de Tijdgroepen instellen
vergrendeling inschuiven.
2-chauffeurs-gebruik
b) De naar beneden klapbare lade in 10. Chauffeur-1 bedient de toets .
horizontale positie brengen en er tot aan ¾ Toets zo vaak indrukken, totdat de
de vergrendeling inschuiven. gewenste tijdgroep op het display
9. Nu verschijnt het standaard display: verschijnt.
¾ met datum, tijd en het totaal afge- Chauffeur-2 bedient de toets .
legde aantal kilometers en, ¾ Toets zo vaak indrukken, totdat de
¾ bovendien de symbolen voor inge- gewenste tijdgroep op het display
voerde tachoschijven en de actuele verschijnt.
stand van de tijdgroepen, links voor
Zodra het voertuig rijdt, verschijnt automa-
chauffeur-1 en rechts voor
tisch in het standaard display
chauffeur-2.
• voor chauffeur-1 " " en
Opmerkingen m.b.t. het standaard • voor chauffeur-2 " ".
display
• De tijd van de MTCO 1324 is op de wet- 1-chauffeur-gebruik
telijke tijd van het land ingesteld, alwaar • Gedurende het 1-chauffeur-gebruik dient
het voertuig geregistreerd is. Begin en u alleen de tachoschijf voor chauffeur-1
einde van de zomertijd zijn in het op de scheidingsplaat te leggen.
apparaat vastgelegd en worden automa- • De tijdgroep voor chauffeur-2 in dit
tisch geactualiseerd. ➥ Zie ook pagina geval op rusttijd " " instellen, aan-
123 "Foutcode - overzicht". gezien anders een storingsmelding ver-
• Verschijnt naast de stand van de kilome- schijnt.
terteller een uitroepteken, dan is er
sprake van een storing. ➥ Zie ook Indeling van de tijdgroepen
pagina 123 "Foutcode - overzicht". = Rijtijden
• Optie: digitale v-weergave = Alle overige werktijden
Afhankelijk van de uitrusting kan in de = Diensttijden
eerste regel de snelheid weergegeven (wachttijden, bijrijdertijd, slaap-
worden. Verder zijn alle functies analoog cabinetijd gedurende de rit voor
aan het standaard display. chauffeur-2)
= Pauzes en rusttijden
118 MTCO 1324

Tachoschijf verwijderen
Verwijdert u uw tachoschijf uit de 4. De lade er weer tot aan de vergren-

MTCO 1324 deling inschuiven, De naar beneden
• bij een wisseling van chauffeur of van klapbare lade hiervoor eerst weer in de
voertuig, horizontale positie brengen.
• bij einde werktijd Opmerking
• of na uiterlijk 24 uur. Indien u toch het contact uitgeschakeld
heeft, kan het voorkomen, dat vervolgens de
De lade kan alleen geopend worden, lade na het sluiten niet meer correct ver-
indien ... grendelt. In dit geval dient u als volgt te werk
• het voertuig stilstaat en te gaan:
• het contact ingeschakeld is.
1. Contact inschakelen.
¾ Wacht u, totdat het uitwerpproces
1. Toets bedienen.
beeindigd is.
2. Daarna de lade er tot vergrendeling

inschuiven.
3. Contact weer uitschakelen.
Automatische uitschakeling van de

registratie van de tijdgroepen en het
aantal afgelegde kilometers
¾ Op het display verschijnt het symbool Blijft de lade langer dan 25 uur met inge-
"Uitwerpen actief". Een balk geeft voerde tachoschijven gesloten, dan regis-
aan, dat de MTCO 1324 gegevens op treert de MTCO 1324 automatisch voor
de tachoschijven schrijft. chauffeur-1 en chauffeur-2 de tijdgroep
¾ Wacht u, totdat de lade ontgrendeld " ". De MTCO 1324 belast hierdoor de
is. accu van het voertuig niet.
Aanwijzingen bij stilstand van het

Gedurende de tijd, dat het symbool
voertuig
"Uitwerpen actief" op het display
verschijnt, mag u het contact niet Indien het voertuig langere tijd niet
uitschakelen! gebruikt wordt, neemt u dan a.u.b.
in acht, dat er zich geen tachoschijf
2. Vergrendelde lade er tot aan de in de MTCO 1324 bevindt. Bijvoor-
aanslag uittrekken resp. de naar beeld bij onderhouds- / repara-
beneden klapbare lade vervolgens tiewerk-zaamheden of bij stillegging
naar beneden klappen. van het voertuig.
3. Tachoschijven verwijderen en de
beschrijving op het middenveld comple-
teren, ➥ zie pagina 127.

Wisseling van chauffeur
2. Nu de gewenste tijdgroepen instellen.

¾ De nieuwe chauffeur-1 bedient de
toets , chauffeur-2 de toets .
Situatie 2:
Chauffeur-1 of chauffeur-2 verlaat het
voertuig:
1. De betreffende chauffeur neemt zijn
Tachoschijf
chauffeur-1
tachoschijf mee.
Tachoschijf
chauffeur-2
2. De nieuwe chauffeur-2 legt zijn tacho-
graafschijf onder de scheidingsplaat.
Of:
De nieuwe chauffeur-1 legt zijn tacho-
schijf op de scheidingsplaat.
Opmerking
Komt er geen nieuwe chauffeur-2, dan dient
u de tijdgroep op rusttijd " " te schakelen,
aangezien anders een storingsmelding ver-
Registratie schijnt.
chauffeur-2
Wisseling van Registratie

Situatie 3:
chauffeur chauffeur-1 Chauffeur-1 en chauffeur-2 verlaten het
voertuig:
1. Beide nemen hun tachoschijf uit het
Wisselt de chauffeur binnen zijn dagelijkse apparaat.
werktijd van voertuig, dan moet deze zijn
2. De nieuwe voertuigbemanning plaatst
tachoschijf meenemen en deze wisseling
de tachoschijf, afhankelijk van de
van voertuig op de achterkant van de tacho-
functie (chauffeur-1 of chauffeur-2), in
schijf noteren.
het apparaat.
Situatie 1:
De voertuigbemanning wisselt onder
elkaar, chauffeur-2 wordt chauffeur-1:
1. Tachoschijven uitwisselen.
¾ Chauffeur-1 (nu chauffeur-2) legt zijn
tachoschijf onder de scheidingsplaat
en chauffeur-2 (nu chauffeur-1) op de
scheidingsplaat.
120 MTCO 1324

Tijd instellen
• Het oproepen van de functie TIJD

INSTELLEN is alleen bij een stilstaand
voertuig mogelijk.
• Opdat zich de opname-eenheid voor
tachoschijfjes automatisch met de tijd
synchroniseert, moet de ontsteking
ingeschakeld zijn en er mag zich
geen tachoschijfje in de MTCO 1324 = Toets kort bedienen
bevinden. = Toets lang bedienen
1. Menu TIJD INSTELLEN met kiezen.
2. Met of de minutenteller activeren, de

minuten knipperen.
3. Toets of ingedrukt houden, totdat de

gewenste waarde verschijnt.
4. Met urenteller activeren, de uren knip-

peren.
5. Toets of ingedrukt houden, totdat de

gewenste waarde verschijnt.
¾ Bij het over- of onderschrijden van nul uur
wordt de datum automatisch veranderd.
6. Tijdverstelling bevestigen, door de toets

langer als 2 seconden te bedienen. Nu ver-
schijnt het standaard display weer.
Opmerking
Indien u de tijd instelt terwijl er zich toch een tacho-
schijf in de MTCO 1324 bevindt, zal het fout-
symbool in het display verschijnen en zal de tijd-
weergave gaan knipperen. De MTCO 1324 wijst u
er hiermee op, de tijdaanpassing van de cen-
treernok te starten; ➥ zie pagina 124.

Meldingen
De MTCO 1324 bewaakt de functie van het Foutgeheugen weergeven

systeem en meldt automatisch, indien er
De oorzaak van de storings- of foutmelding
sprake is van een storing van een com-
herleidt u uit het menu FOUTGEHEUGEN.
ponent, het apparaat of van de bediening.
Meldingen en aanwijzingen kunnen onmid-
dellijk na het sluiten van de lade of bij elk Het oproepen van de functie FOUT-
optreden op het display verschijnen. GEHEUGEN weergeven is alleen bij
stilstaand voertuig mogelijk!
Er verschijnt een melding
1 2
= Toets kort bedienen
= Toets lang bedienen
• De functiecontrole (1) op de snel-

heidsmeter brandt, 1. Menu FOUTGEHEUGEN kiezen door de
• op het display van de MTCO 1324 ver- toets twee keer kort te bedienen.
schijnt naast de stand van de kilometer-
2. Met of kunnen verdere actieve
teller een uitroepteken (2) en ...
storingen weergegeven worden.
• afhankelijk van het type storing/fout gaat
de tijdsweergave (3) knipperen of stopt
het knipperen van de dubbele punt in de
tijdsweergave.
• Tevens wordt de storing in een elektro- Storingsbegin
nisch geheugen geregistreerd, Symbool met foutcode
➥ zie "Foutgeheugen weergeven". verdere storingsmeldingen voorhanden
• Enkele storingen registreert de
MTCO 1324 ook op de tachoschijf,
➥ zie pagina 129. 3. Standaard display weer oproepen,
– toets langer als 2 seconden
bedienen
– of 20 seconden lang geen toets
bedienen.
122 MTCO 1324

Foutcode - overzicht
Meldingen in het display Code Betekenis / maatregel
 = • De MTCO 1324 is automatisch op het begin of

het einde van de zomertijd omgeschakeld,
• of de tijd versteld werd met het ingelegde tacho-
(Tijd knippert)
schijfje.
Attentie: tijdaanpassing van de centreernok
of starten, ➥ zie pagina 124.
 = Fout bij de tijdaanpassingsprocedure van de cen-

treernok
Tijdaanpassing van de centreernok nogmaals
starten, ➥ zie pagina 124.
 = Storing bij de aandrijving van de opname-eenheid

voor tachoschijfjes
(Dubbele punt knippert niet) Controleer of de tachoschijf correct geplaatst is.
 = Rit zonder tachoschijf chauffeur-1

(Foutcode kan in het foutgeheugen niet gevonden
worden.)
Tachoschijf van chauffeur-1 plaatsen.
 = Tachoschijf chauffeur-1 ontbreekt

 = Tachoschijf chauffeur-2 ontbreekt
(Deze melding verschijnt, zodra er wordt overge-
schakeld van " " op " ", zonder dat de tacho-
graafschijf aanwezig is.)
Tachograafschijf(/-schijven) plaatsen.
 = Storing bij CAN-transmissie


 = Interne storing apparaat
 = Storing toetsenbord, toets te lang bediend of

geblokkeerd
 = LCD-storing (display)
➥ Wordt vervolgd op de volgende pagina

Meldingen in het display Code Betekenis / maatregel
 = Storing van de lade

Lade nogmaals openen en vervolgens weer
sluiten.
 = Storing in het schrijfsysteem

 (De MTCO 1324 registreert deze fouten op de

tachograafschijf, ➥ zie pagina 129.)
 = Storing bij pulsuitgang "B7"
 = Onderbreking naar snelheidsmeter
 = Storing bij communicatie signaalgever

 = Storing in key meeteenheid / serienummer /
signaal
(De MTCO 1324 registreert deze fouten op de
tachograafschijf, ➥ zie pagina 129.)
 = Spanningsonderbreking
(De foutcode kan niet worden gevonden in het
fout-geheugen. De MTCO 1324 zal een span-
nings-onderbreking op de tachograafschijf regis-
treren, ➥ zie pagina 129.)
Storingen verhelpen Tijdsaanpassingsprocedure van de

Pas na het verhelpen van de oorzaak, bij- centreernok uitvoeren
voorbeeld bij een bedieningsfout, verdwijnt 1. Lade openen en beide tachoschijfjes
de melding automatisch. verwijderen.
2. Lade weer sluiten.
Indien een melding zich steeds her- ¾ De MTCO 1324 voert automatisch de
haalt, neemt u dan a.u.b. onmiddellijk tijdsaanpassing van de centreernok
contact op met een gespecialiseerd uit, vervolgens verdwijnt het fout-
VDO-garagebedrijf! symbool en stopt het knipperen van
de tijd in het display.
3. Lade openen en eventueel nieuwe

tachoschijfjes inleggen. De MTCO 1324
is weer bedrijfsgereed.
124 MTCO 1324

Snelheidsmeter (pagina 150, afbeelding III)
Opmerking Dagteller op nul zetten

Design en functies kunnen van dit Op het LCD-display verschijnt in de tweede
instrument (E-Tacho 1323) afwijken, gede- regel de als laatst ingestelde optie: de tijd of
tailleerde informatie vindt u in de betreffende de dagteller.
bedieningshandleiding.
1. Display op "dagteller" instellen, even-
1) Snelheidsweergave tueel Reset-toets kort indrukken.
2) Functiecontrole 2. Aansluitend de Reset-toets langer dan 2
Indien de LED brandt, is er sprake seconden indrukken.
van een storing of een voorval, bijvoor- ¾ De dagteller wordt op "0" teruggezet.
beeld er ontbreekt een tachoschijf of een
systeemcomponent functioneert niet Opmerking
correct. U kunt de dagteller ook gedurende de rit op
nul zetten.
3) LCD-display
(weergave bij Contact Aan)
• Weergave d.m.v. 7 cijfers van het
totale aantal afgelegde kilometers.
Het laatste cijfer geeft de afstand in
100 m-gedeelten aan.
• In de onderste regel verschijnt naar-
keuze de tijd of de dagteller.
4) Reset-toets
Toets voor het omschakelen van de tijd-
functie naar de dagteller.

Beschrijving tachoschijf
De juiste tachoschijf bij het apparaat Buiten de EU gelden de overeenkomstige

(pagina 150, afbeelding IV) nationale keuringstekens en bepalingen.
Neemt u bij het gebruik (en Afhankelijk van de eindwaarde van het
bestelling) van tachoschijven a.u.b. meetbereik en de uitvoering van het
in acht, dat de eindwaarde van het apparaat mag u in de MTCO 1324 de navol-
meetbereik (1) en het keurings- gende tachoschijven gebruiken:
teken (2) van de MTCO 1324 met
de gegevens (3) resp. (4) op de
tachoschijf overeenstemmen.
Combischijven Tachoschijven voor Keuringstekens

elektronische analyse
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
EC = Tachoschijven voor de EC-tachograaf

= Tachoschijf voor de uitvoering van het apparaat met registratie van het
toerental (optie), bijv. type: 1324.50111...
126 MTCO 1324

Vastgelegde gegevens op de regis- Opmerking
tratiezijde van de tachoschijf Bij een eindwaarde van het meetbereik
(pagina 150, afbeelding V) van 180 km/h bevindt zich de additionele
registratie-eenheid bij pos. (8a).
1) Tijdschaal
Analyse van tachoschijven
2) Openingsregistratie
Elk openen van de lade wordt geregis- Behalve het directe aflezen van de geregis-
treerd. treerde gegevens bestaat ook de moge-
lijkheid de geregistreerde gegevens exact te
3) Snelheidsverloop in km/h analyseren. Voor meer informatie kunt u
contact opnemen met één van de VDO-
4) Registratie van tijdgroepen partners.
5) Middenveld
6) Eivormig centreergat Noteringen op middenveld

garandeert de juiste positionering van de (pagina 151, afbeelding VI)
tachoschijf.
Opmerking
7) Aantal afgelegde kilometers Noteringen zoals naam en voornaam,
Eén opwaartse resp.neer- alsook gegevens m.b.t. begin en einde van
waartse beweging komt gebruik zijn wettelijk verplicht en vormen de
overeen met 5 km. basis voor een latere analyse van de tacho-
= 5 km schijf.
Opmerking a) ... voor de rit
De registratie van de afge- Naam en voornaam van de

legde weg wordt onder- chauffeur
broken als ... Plaats van vertrek
• de tijdgroepschakelaars beiden op Inlegdatum (bovenste regel)

rusten " " staan, Kenteken van het voertuig
• het contact uitgeschakeld is en Kilometerstand bij aanvang dienst
• de optionele extra schrijfstift niet
actief is. b) ... na de rit
Na inschakelen van het contact zal de Plaats van aankomst
afstandregistratie in overéénstemming Verwijderdatum (onderste regel)
met tijd en positie worden voortgezet.
Kilometerstand bij einde dienst
8) Additionele registratie (optie) Aantal afgelegde kilometers
Registreren van additionele tijdgroepen, (kunnen ingegeven worden)
bijv.: inzet van zwaailicht, sirene P.T.O.,
etc.

De achterkant van de tachoschijf 3) Veld keuringsteken
(pagina 151, afbeelding VII) Dit gedeelte van de achterkant bevat
gegevens over het keuringsteken van de
Voor de EC-tachograaf bestaan er in
tachoschijf en van de apparaten,
principe twee typen tachoschijven:
waarvoor de tachoschijf toegelaten is.
c) zonder registratie van het toerental
4) Registratie toerental (optie)
d) met registratie van het toerental
De juiste registratie (in min-1) vindt op de
achterkant van de tachoschijf voor
1) Schrijfveld voor tijdgroepen chauffeur-1 plaats.
Dit schrijfveld dient voor het handmatig Opmerking
registreren van de tijdgroepen. U dient
De markeringen (4a) verschijnen bij
deze dan te registreren, indien bijv. de
contact aan / uit.
voertuigbemanning werkzaamheden
niet in de directe omgeving van het
voertuig uitvoert en het apparaat niet
bediend kan worden of bij een eventuele
uitval van de tijdgroepenregistratie.
2) Middenveld
Op het middenveld kunnen maximaal
drie wisselingen van voertuig handmatig
genoteerd worden.
U dient het volgende in te geven:
Tijd wisseling van voertuig

Kenteken van het nieuwe
voertuig
Kilometerstand bij aanvang dienst
Kilometerstand bij einde dienst
Aantal afgelegde kilometers
(kunnen ingegeven worden)
128 MTCO 1324

Registratie van storingen (pagina 151, afbeelding VIII)
Spanningsonderbreking • De markering (3) verschijnt onmiddellijk

Is er weer spanning voorhanden, dan tekent na het optreden van de storing en blijft
het apparaat kort na het wegrijden een bestaan, totdat de oorzaak verholpen is.
streep (1) op de tachoschijf.
Storingen van het apparaat
Onderbreking signaal Storingen in het registratiesysteem kunnen
Storing van de signaaloverdracht signaal- de volgende verkeerde registraties veroor-
gever Ù MTCO 1324: zaken:
• Zodra het voertuig staat, verschijnt de • Markering (4), defect in het snelheidsre-
markering (2), tijdens het rijden vindt de gistratiesysteem.
snelheids-registratie weer plaats. • Markering (5) en (6), defect in het regis-
of tratiesysteem voor de tijdgroepen en de
afstand.
Appendix
Controleplicht voor tachografen Onderhoud en reiniging

De eigenaar van het voertuig is wettelijk ver- De MTCO 1324 is met moderne, onder-
plicht, de ingebouwde MTCO 1324 regel- houdsvrije techniek uitgerust. Preventieve
matig te laten controleren. onderhoudswerkzaamheden zijn daarom
niet noodzakelijk.
U dient ten minste om de twee jaren de cor-
recte werking te controleren, bijv. gelijktijdig Bij vervuiling kunt u de behuizing, het display,
met de technische controle van uw motor- alsook de functietoetsen met een vochtige
voertuig. doek reinigen. Is dit niet voldoende, dan
mogen ook speciale kunststofreinigings- of
Controleert u, dat de installatiestikker bij onderhoudsmiddelen gebruikt worden.
elke controle vernieuwd wordt en de ver-
plichte informatie bevat.

Technische gegevens
MTCO 1324 (standaard) Snelheidsmeter "E-Tacho"

1323 (standaard)
Eindwaarde 125 km/h 125 km/h
meetbereik:
Display: 2 regels met elk 16 tekens, 1e regel, 7 cijfers
verlicht met ingeschakeld 2e regel, 4 cijfers
contact
Temperatuur: Bedrijf: -25 tot 70 °C Bedrijf: -25 tot 70 °C
Opslag: -40 tot 85 °C Opslag: -40 tot 85 °C
Voedingsspanning: 24 of 12 Volt 24 of 12 Volt
Stroomverbruik: Stand-by typisch: Stand-by typisch 6 mA bij 12
50 mA (12 V) Volt (zonder functiecontrole-
30 mA (24 V) LED)
Bufferbatterij: Lithiumcel
Gewicht: 1350 g 470 g
Speciale uitvoering: • Registratie toerental • Eindwaarde meetbereik:
3300 min-1 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Extra schrijfstift
• ADR
• Eindwaarde meetbereik:
100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Digitale weergave van de
snelheid
Verantwoordelijk voor de inhoud: Wijzigingen van technische details t.a.v. de beschrij-

Continental Automotive GmbH vingen, gegevens en afbeeldingen van deze
gebruiksaanwijzing zijn voorbehouden. Nadruk, ver-
P.O. Box 1640
taling en vermenigvuldiging zijn zonder schriftelijke
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen toestemming niet toegestaan.
130 MTCO 1324

Indholdsfortegnelse
Systemoversigt .......................................................................................................... 132

Generelle anvisninger ................................................................................................ 133
Betjeningselementer .................................................................................................. 134
Klargøring til drift ....................................................................................................... 135
Åbn skuffen ............................................................................................................ 135
Ilægning af chauffør-2 diagramark ......................................................................... 135
Ilægning af chauffør-1 diagramark ......................................................................... 135
Indstilling af tidsgrupper ......................................................................................... 136
Udtagning af diagramark ........................................................................................... 137
Chaufførskift ............................................................................................................... 138
Indstilling af klokkeslæt ............................................................................................ 139
Meldinger .................................................................................................................... 140
Fremkomst af melding ............................................................................................ 140
Visning af fejlhukommelse ...................................................................................... 140
Fejlkode - oversigt .................................................................................................. 141
Fjernelse af fejl ....................................................................................................... 142
Tidsindstilling af diagramarkmedbringer ................................................................. 142
Displayinstrument ...................................................................................................... 143
Nulstilling af dagskilometertæller ............................................................................ 143
Diagramarks-beskrivelse ........................................................................................... 144
Det rigtige diagramark til apparatet ........................................................................ 144
Optegnelser på diagramarks-forsiden .................................................................... 145
Angivelser i det indvendige felt ............................................................................... 145
Diagramarkets bagside .......................................................................................... 146
Notering af fejl ............................................................................................................ 147
Bilag ............................................................................................................................ 147
Kontrolpligt for fartskrivere ...................................................................................... 147
Vedligeholdelse og rengøring ................................................................................. 147
Tekniske data ......................................................................................................... 148
Definitioner i denne vejledning
Chauffør-1 = Den person, som for øjeblikket styrer eller vil styre køretøjet.
Chauffør-2 = Den person, som ikke styrer køretøjet.

Systemoversigt
Displayinstrument
(f.eks. E-Tacho 1323)
MTCO 1324
KITAS
Diagramark
Den fartskriver MTCO 1324 sætter nye I chaufførens umiddelbare synsfelt er der et
standarder for effekt, teknik og design på godkendt displayinstrument, f.eks.
grund af sin modulopbygning med adskilt E-Tacho 1323 med analogt hastigheds-
display og registrering. MTCO 1324 danner display, digital vejstrækningstæller, klok-
en innovativ systemkomponent i DIN-radio- keslæt og dagskilometertæller.
format. Funktionskontrollen refererer til meldin-
gerne fra MTCO 1324.
Chauffør-1 og chauffør-2 vælger nemt og
enkelt de ønskede arbejdstidsgrupper ved Sammen med den intelligente fartskriver-
hjælp af betjeningstaster. sensor, KITAS, danner systemet en påli-
delig enhed. Sensoren giver impulser med
I displayet kommer de indstillede arbejds- korrekt tid og indkodede data videre til regi-
tidsgrupper og symbolerne for de ilagte dia- strering af vejstrækningen og hastigheden.
gramark let og overskueligt frem ved siden
af dato, klokkeslæt og vejstrækning. Fejl ved
apparatet eller ved en systemkomponent
vises automatisk. Vi ønsker Dem rigtig god kørsel i fremtiden.
Som hidtil vises på diagramarket hastig- Deres Continental Automotive

heden og vejstrækningen samt køre-,
arbejds- og hviletiderne for chaufførerne.
132 MTCO 1324

Generelle anvisninger
Symbolerne i denne vejledning har følgende • MTCO 1324 skal installeres og plom-
betydning: beres af autoriserede personer.
Foretag venligst ikke ændringer ved
apparatet og ved tilførselslednin-
OBS! gerne.
Teksten ved siden af dette symbol
indeholder vigtige informationer,
som skal følges for at undgå, at ❒ Anvisninger vedrørende behandling
apparatet beskadiges. af diagramark
• Ved EC-fartskriveren er diagramarket
ANVISNINGER personrelateret og kan følgelig ikke
eller yderligere informationer, som overdrages!
kan føre til fejl, hvis de ikke følges, er
• Anvend diagramark fra producenten
mærket med dette symbol.
(originale diagramskiver). Vær herved
opmærksom på, at slutværdi for måle-
område og kontroltegn stemmer
overens, ➥ se side 144.
Følg venligst de nævnte
anvisninger! • Læg kun diagramark i, som er helt i
orden, de må ikke knækkes, overfladen
og/eller medbringerhullet må ikke være
❒ Anvisninger vedrørende drift af ødelagt, ikke være bølgede eller beska-
MTCO 1324 digede på anden måde!
• Åbn kun skuffen for at lægge diagramark • De beskrevne diagramark skal opbe-
i eller for at tage dem ud. Ellers skal den vares, så de er beskyttede mod skader,
altid holdes lukket for at undgå beskadi- se endvi-dere artikel 15 i VO (EEC) nr.
gelse og for at forebygge tilsnavsning. 3821/85.
• Brug ikke skuffen som underlag, f.eks.
når der skrives på diagramarkene.
• Brug ikke rengøringsmidler, som kan ❒ Lovmæssige bestemmelser, som
ridse, ved rengøring af apparatet og skal følges
heller ikke opløsningsmidler som for- • Den der foretager ændringer på kontrol-
tynder eller benzin. apparatet eller ved signalføringen, som
har indflydelse på kontrolapparatets
noteringer, og særligt hvis dette gøres
for at vildlede, kan overtræde statslige
straffe- eller ordensforskrifter!

Betjeningselementer (side 2, figur I)
a) "Fast skuffe" 3) Display

• Grunddisplayet kommer permanent
b) "Klapbar skuffe" frem.
• Meldinger / anvisninger kommer auto-
Bemærk
matisk frem, ➥ se side 140.
Betjeningen af de to apparatversioner er i
princippet identisk. Betjeningstrin, som er
Dato + tid
forskellige, er nævnt specielt.
Diagramark + tidsgrup-
pesymbol, chauffør-2
1) Tastefelt til venstre
Fejlsymbol
Taste til oplåsning af skuffen.
Totalkilometerstand
Taste til indstilling af tidsgruppen
Diagramark + tidsgrup-
for chauffør-1. pesymbol, chauffør-1
2) Tastefelt til højre

Taste til indstilling af tidsgruppen
for chauffør-2. 4) Skilleplade
Taste til valg af funktioner: mellem diagramark for chauffør-1 og
• "Indstilling af klokkeslæt", chauffør-2.
➥ se side 139.
5) Kontrolmarkering
• "Visning af fejlhukommelse", Her kan det kontrolleres, at diagramark-
➥ se side 140. medbringeren er sat på den rigtige tid.
Taster til indstilling af klokkeslæt og
til display af aktuelle fejlmeldinger. 6) Ovalt diagramarkmedbringer
7) Typeskilt
Producent, apparattype, kontroltegn og
serienummer er synlige.
134 MTCO 1324

Klargøring til drift (side 3, figur II)
Åbn skuffen Ilægning af chauffør-2 diagramark i

Skuffen kan kun åbnes, hvis ...
Før en kørsel startes, skrives der
• køretøjet står stille og korrekt på det indvendige felt af dia-
• tændingen er sluttet til. gramarket, ➥ se side 145.
1. Tryk på taste . 4. Chauffør-2 lægger det påskrevne dia-

gramark med forsiden opad ind i den
ovale diagramarkmedbringer.
Pas på, at diagramarket ligger under
fjederelementet (c).
5. Klap igen delepladen ned.
¾ I displayet kommer symbolet "Eject Ilægning af chauffør-1 diagramark

aktiv" frem. Endvidere vises på dis-
playet, at denne proces kan vare lidt. 6. Chauffør-1 lægger det påskrevne dia-
¾ Vent, indtil skuffen låses op. gramark med forsiden opad på dele-
pladen i diagramarkmedbringeren.
2. a) Træk den faste skuffe ud indtil Pas på, at diagramarket ligger under
anslag. nedholderen (d) og under indgrebs-
tappen (e) på den ovale diagramark-
Forsøg ikke at klappe denne skuffe- medbringer.
version nedad!
Bemærk ved 1-chauffør-drift
b) Træk den klapbare skuffe ud til
Ved 1-chauffør-drift må der kun lægges dia-
anslag og klap den nedad.
gramarket til chauffør-1 på delepladen.
Tag eventuelt chauffør-1 diagramarket
ud fra delepladen. 7. Kontrollér, at diagramarkmedbringeren
3. Klap delepladen helt op. Tag eventuelt er sat på den rigtige tid. Diagramarkets
chauffør-2 diagramark ud. tidsskala skal indstilles ved markeringen
(f) på det aktuelle klokkeslæt i displayet.
¾ Hvis det ikke er tilfældet, start venligst
indstillingen af medbringeren for dia-
gramark; ➥ se side 142.

8. a) Skub den faste skuffe ind, indtil den Indstilling af tidsgrupper
går i indgreb.
2-chauffør-drift
b) Bring den klapbare skuffe i vandret 10. Chauffør-1 bekræfter tasten .
position og skub den ind, indtil den går i ¾ Tryk på tasten, indtil den ønskede
indgreb. tidsgruppe kommer frem i displayet.
9. Grunddisplayet kommer frem: Chauffør-2 bekræfter tasten .
¾ med dato, klokkeslæt og samlet kilo- ¾ Tryk på tasten, indtil den ønskede
meterstand, tidsgruppe kommer frem i displayet.
¾ derudover symbolerne for indlagte
Så snart køretøjet kører, kommer auto-
diagramark og den aktuelle stilling for
matisk frem i grunddisplayet
tidsgrupperne, til venstre for chauffør-
1 og til højre for chauffør-2. • for chauffør-1 " " og
• for chauffør-2 " ".
Bemærker vedrørende grunddisplayet
• Klokkeslættet i MTCO 1324 er indstillet 1-chauffør-drift
på tiden i det land, hvor køretøjet er regi- • Ved 1-chauffør-drift lægges kun diagra-
streret. Start og slut på sommertid er lagt market til chauffør-1 på delepladen.
ind i apparatet og aktualiseres auto- • Tidsgruppen for chauffør-2 skal indstilles
matisk. ➥ Se endvidere side 141 på hviletid " ", da der ellers kommer en
"Fejlkode - oversigt". fejlmelding frem.
• Hvis der kommer et udråbstegn frem ved
siden af det samlede kilometertal, fore- Tidsgruppeopdeling
ligger der en fejl. ➥ Se endvidere side = Styretider
141 "Fejlkode - oversigt".
= Alle øvrige arbejdstider
• Valgmulighed: digitalt v-display
Alt efter udstyr kan hastighedsdisplayet = Beredskabstider
komme frem i den 1. linie. Alle funktioner (Ventetider, medchaufførtid, soveka-
er ellers analoge med grunddisplayet. binetid, mens chauffør-2 kører)
= Pauser og hviletider
136 MTCO 1324

Udtagning af diagramark
Tag Deres diagramark ud af MTCO 1324 Bemærk

• ved skift af chauffør eller køretøj, Hvis De alligevel har slukket for tændingen
under udtagning, kan det forekomme, at
• ved arbejdsslut
skuffen efter lukningen ikke låser korrekt.
• eller senest efter 24 timer. I dette tilfælde gør De således:
Skuffen kan kun åbnes, hvis ... 1. Tænd for tændingen.
• køretøjet står stille og ¾ Vent, indtil ejectforløbet er afsluttet.
• tændingen er sluttet til.
2. Skub derefter skuffen ind, indtil den går i
indgreb.
1. Tryk på taste .
3. Sluk igen for tændingen.
Automatisk afbrydelse af tidsgrupper og

vejstrækningsregistrering
Hvis skuffen er lukket mere end 25 timer
med indlagte diagramark, registrerer
MTCO 1324 automatisk tidsgruppen " "
for chauffør-1 og -2 MTCO 1324 skåner
således batteriet til køretøjet.
¾ I displayet kommer symbolet "Eject
aktiv" frem. I displayet vises, at Anvisninger når køretøjet står stille
MTCO 1324 udarbejder optegnel-
Hvis køretøjet i længere tid ikke
serne på diagramarkene.
benyttes, bedes De være
¾ Vent, indtil skuffen låses op.
opmærksom på, at der ikke er noget
diagramark i MTCO 1324. F.eks.
Sluk ikke for tændingen, mens
ved vedligeholdelses- / reparations-
symbolet "Eject aktivt" vises i dis-
arbejde eller ved standsning af
playet!
køretøjet.
2. Træk den faste skuffe ud indtil anslag,

eller klap endvidere den klapbare
skuffe ned.
3. Tag diagramarkene ud og færdiggør
påskriften i det indvendige felt,
➥ se side 145.
4. Skub igen skuffen ind, indtil den går i
indgreb, sæt først den klapbare i
vandret position.

Chaufførskift
2. Indstilling af de ønskede tidsgrupper.

¾ Den nye chauffør-1 aktiverer tasten
, chauffør-2 tasten .
Eksempel 2:
Chauffør-1 eller chauffør-2 forlader køre-
tøjet:
1. Den pågældende tager sit diagramark
Diagramark
Chauffør-1 Diagramark med.
Chauffør-2
2. Den nye chauffør-2 lægger sit dia-
gramark under delepladen.
eller:
Den nye chauffør-1 lægger sit dia-
gramark på delepladen.
Bemærk
Hvis der ikke kommer en ny chauffør-2, skal
tidsgruppen stilles på hviletid " ", da der
ellers kommer en fejlmelding.
Notering som
Chauffør-2
Eksempel 3:
Chaufførskift
Notering som Chauffør-1 og chauffør-2 forlader køre-
Chauffør-1 tøjet:
1. Begge tager deres diagramark ud af
apparatet.
Hvis chaufføren skifter køretøj i løbet af sin
2. De nye chauffører lægger diagramarket,
daglige arbejdstid, skal han tage diagramar-
alt efter funktion (chauffør-1 eller
ket med og notere skift af køretøj på bag-
chauffør-2) ind i apparatet.
siden af diagramarket.
Eksempel 1:
Chaufførne skifter med hinanden,
chauffør-2 bliver til chauffør-1:
1. Udskiftning af diagramarkene.
¾ Chauffør-1 (nu chauffør-2) lægger sit
diagramark under delepladen og
chauffør-2 (nu chauffør-1) på dele-
pladen.
138 MTCO 1324

Indstilling af klokkeslæt
• Det er kun muligt at kalde funktionen

INDSTILLING AF KLOKKESLÆT
frem, når køretøjet står stille.
• For at diagramarkmedbringeren auto-
matisk indstilles efter klokkeslættet,
skal tændingen være tændt, og der
må ikke være noget diagramark i
MTCO 1324. = Tryk kort på tasten
= Tryk længe på tasten
1. Vælg menuen INDSTILLING AF KLOK-

KESLÆT med .
2. Aktivér minuttælleren med eller ,

Minutterne blinker.
3. Hold tasten eller nede, indtil den

ønskede værdi kommer frem.
4. Aktivér timetælleren med , timerne blinker.
5. Hold tasten eller nede, indtil den

ønskede værdi kommer frem.
¾ Hvis kl. 00.00 passeres (begge veje),
ændres datoen automatisk.
6. Bekræft indstillingen af klokkeslæt ved at holde

tasten nede mere end 2 sekunder. Grund-
displayet kommer frem igen.
Bemærk
Hvis man indstiller klokkeslættet med diagramark
ilagt, vil der vises en fejlkode på displayet og klok-
keslættet blinke. MTCO 1324 vi gøre opmærksom
på, at diagramarkindstillingen skal justeres;
➥ se side 142.

Meldinger
MTCO 1324 overvåger systemets funktion Visning af fejlhukommelse

og melder automatisk, hvis der foreligger en
For at finde ud af årsagen til fejlmeldingen,
fejl i en komponent eller i betjeningen. Mel-
se da i fejlhukommelse-menuen.
dinger og anvisninger kan straks komme
frem, når skuffen er lukket, eller de kommer
frem i displayet, når de forekommer. Opkald af funktionen display af
FEJLHUKOMMELSE kan kun fore-
tages, hvis køretøjet står stille!
Fremkomst af melding
1 2
= Tryk kort på tasten
= Tryk længe på tasten
• Funktionskontrollen (1) ved displayin-
strumentet eller E-Tacho lyser,
• i MTCO 1324's display kommer der ved 1. Vælg menuen FEJLHUKOMMELSE
siden af det samlede kilometertal et ved to gange at trykke kort på
udråbstegn (2) og ... tasten.
• afhængig af fejltype vil klokkeslættet (3) 2. Med eller kan der vises flere
eller kolonpunkterne i klokkeslættet ikke aktive fejl.
blinke mere.
• Endvidere registreres fejlen i en elek-
tronisk hukommelse, ➥ se "Visning af
fejlhukommelse".
• Nogle fejl dokumenterer MTCO 1324 Fejlbegyndelse
også på diagramarket, ➥ se side 147. Symbol med fejlkode
yderligere fejlmeldinger til stede
3. Kald grunddisplayet frem igen,

– Hold tasten nede længere end
2 sekunder
– eller lad være med at trykke på
nogle taster i 20 sekunder.
140 MTCO 1324

Fejlkode - oversigt
Melding i display Kode Betydning / foranstaltning
 = • MTCO 1324 har automatisk skiftet over til start

eller slut på sommer-/vintertid,
• eller hvis der er stillet på klokkeslættet, mens dia-
(Klokkeslæt blinker)
gramarket sidder i.
Bemærk: Opdater tidsindstillingen af, med-
eller bringer for diagramark, ➥ se side 142.
 = Fejl ved opdatering af tidsindstillingen af med-

bringer for diagramark
Opdater tidsindstillingen af medbringer for dia-
gramark igen, ➥ se side 142.
 = Fejl ved drift af diagramarkmedbringeren

Kontroller om diagramark er korrekt ilagt.
(Kolonpunkter blinker ikke)
 = Kørsel uden diagramark chauffør-1

(Fejlkode kan ikke findes i fejlhukommelse)
Ilæg diagramark for chauffør-1.
 = Diagramark chauffør-1 mangler

 = Diagramark chauffør-2 mangler
(Denne meddelelse vil vises, når der med mang-
lende diagramark, skiftes fra " " til f.eks " ".)
Ilæg diagramark.
 = Fejl ved CAN-overførsel


 = Intern apparatfejl
 = Tastaturfejl, tasten trykket ned for længe eller blo-

keret
 = LCD-fejl (display)
 = Fejl ved skuffen

Start oplukning af diagramarkskuffe og luk
derefter igen.
➥ Fortsættes på næste side

Melding i display Kode Betydning / foranstaltning
 = Fejl i skrivesystemet

 (MTCO 1324 vil registrere disse fejl på diagramark,

➥ se side 147.)
 = Fejl ved impulsudgang "B7"
 = Afbrydelse til displayinstrument
 = Fejl ved sensor-kommunikation

 = Fejl ved sensorkode / serienummer / signal
(MTCO 1324 vil registrere disse fejl på diagramark,
➥ se side 147.)
 = Strømafbrydelse
(Fejlkoden kan ikke findes i fejlhukommelsen.
MTCO 1324 vil registrere strømafbrydelse på dia-
gramark, ➥ se side 147.)
Fjernelse af fejl Tidsindstilling af diagramarkmed-

Først når årsagen er fjernet, eksempelvis bringer
ved en betjeningsfejl, slukkes den automa- 1. Åbn skuffen og tag begge diagramark
tiske melding. ud.
2. Luk skuffen igen.
Hvis en melding hele tiden gen- ¾ MTCO 1324 vil automatisk opdatere
tages, bedes De venligst omgående tiden for diagramarksmedbringer, og
kontakte et VDO-specialværksted! fejlsymbolet vil stoppe med at blinke.
3. Åbn skuffen og læg eventuelt nye dia-

gramark i. MTCO 1324 er driftsklar igen.
142 MTCO 1324

Displayinstrument (side 150, figur III)
Bemærk Nulstilling af dagskilometertæller

Design og funktioner kan afvige fra dette I LC-displayet kommer det sidst indstillede
displayinstrument (E-Tacho 1323), ønsker valg frem i anden linie: Klokkeslæt eller
De detaljerede informationer kan disse dagskilometerstand.
findes i den tilhørende driftsvejledning.
1. Indstil displayet på "Dagskilometer-
1) Hastighedsdisplay stand", tryk evt. på reset-tasten.
2) Funktionskontrol 2. Tryk derefter på reset-tasten længere
Hvis LED lyser, foreligger der en fejl end 2 sekunder.
eller andet, f.eks. mangler der et dia- ¾ Dagstælleren stilles tilbage på "0".
gramark, eller en komponent i systemet
fungerer ikke korrekt. Bemærk
Dagskilometertælleren kan også tilbage-
3) LC-display
stilles under kørslen.
(Display ved tænding tænd)
• 7-cifret display af den samlede tilba-
gelagte vejstrækning, det sidste ciffer
angiver 100-m-strækninger.
• I den nederste linie kommer efter
ønske klokkeslættet eller dagskilome-
tertælleren frem.
4) Reset-taste
Taste til skift fra klokkeslæt til dagskilo-
metertæller.

Diagramarks-beskrivelse
Det rigtige diagramark til apparatet Uden for EU gælder de tilsvarende nationale
(side 150, figur IV) kontrolmærker og bestemmelser.
Vær venligst opmærksom på ved Alt efter slutværdi for måleområdet og appa-
anvendelse (bestilling) af diagra- ratversion må følgende diagramark
markene, at slutværdien for anvendes i MTCO 1324:
måleområdet (1) og kontrol-
mærket (2) for MTCO 1324
stemmer overens med angivelserne
(3) eller (4) på diagramarket.
Kombiskive Diagramark til elektronisk vur- Kontrolmærker

dering
100-24 EC 4K 100-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
100-3300-24 EC 4K 100-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
125-24 EC 4K 125-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
125-3300-24 EC 4K 125-3300-24/2 EC 4B e1-85
140-24 EC 4K 140-24/2 EC 4B e1-83
180-24 EC 4B e1-83
EC = Diagramark til EC-fartskrivere

= Diagramark til apparatversion med omdrejningsregistrering
(valgmulighed), f.eks. type: 1324.50111...
144 MTCO 1324

Optegnelser på diagramarks- Bemærk
forsiden (side 150, figur V) Ved en slutværdi for måleområdet på
180 km/h befinder ekstranoteringen sig
1) Tidsskala
på pos. (8a).
2) Åbningsmarkering
Vurdering af diagramark
Hver gang skuffen åbnes, dokumenteres
det. Udover den direkte aflæsning af opteg-
nelser er det også muligt at foretage en
3) Hastighedsforløb i km/h eksakt vurdering af de registrerede data.
Yderligere informationer om dette kan De få
4) Tidsgruppe-notering hos en VDO-salgsafdeling.
5) Indvendige felt
6) Ovalt medbringerhul Angivelser i det indvendige felt

sikrer, at diagramarket positioneres med (side 151, figur VI)
den rigtige tid.
Bemærk
7) Kørt vejstrækning Angivelser af navn og fornavn samt angi-
velser af start og slut på anvendelsen er
En bevægelse opad eller
foreskrevet i loven og danner grundlag for
nedad svarer til 5 km.
en senere vurdering af diagramarket.
= 5 km
a) ... før kørslen
Bemærk Chaufførens navn og fornavn
Optagelse af vejstrækning Frakørselssted
vil blive afbrudt, hvis … Ilæggelsesdato (øverste linie)
Køretøjets registreringsnummer
• l tidsgruppekontakterne er indstillet til Kilometerstand ved arbejdsbegyn-
hviletid " " for begge chauffører, delse
• l tændingen er blevet afbrudt og
• l ekstra optagelse (Option) ikke er b) ... efter kørslen
aktiv. Ankomststed
Når tændingen er sat til igen, vil opta- Udtagelsesdato (nederste linie)
gelsen af den tilbagelagte vejstrækning
blive fortsat korrekt hvad angår tid og Kilometerstand ved kørselsslut
stilling. Kørte kilometer
(kan indføres her)
8) Ekstranotering (valgmulighed)
Registreret af ekstra arbejdsgrupper,
f.eks.: Brug af blåt lys, udrykningshorn
etc.

Diagramarkets bagside 3) Kontrolmærkefelt
(side 151, figur VII) Denne del af bagsiden indeholder angi-
velser vedrørende kontrolmærkerne på
Til EC-fartskriveren er der grundlæggende
diagramarket og apparaterne, som dia-
to diagramarks-typer:
gramarket er tilladt til.
c) uden omdrejningsregistrering
4) Omdrejningsregistrering
d) med omdrejningsregistrering
(valgmulighed)
1) Skrivefelt til tidsgrupper Den korrekte optegnelse med hensyn til
Dette skrivefelt bruges til indførelser af omdrejninger (i min-1) foretages på bag-
tidsgrupper med hånden. Disse indfø- siden af diagramarket for chauffør-1.
relser skal foretages, hvis f.eks. chauf-
Bemærk
førpersonalet udfører arbejde, som ikke
er i umiddelbar nærhed af køretøjet, og Markeringen (4a) vises når tændingen er
apparatet derfor ikke kan betjenes, eller on/off.
hvis tidsgrupperegistreringen eventuelt
afbrydes.
2) Indvendige felt
I det indvendige felt kan der med hånden
anføres op til køretøjer.
Der skal anføres:
Klokkeslæt for skift af køretøj

Det nye køretøjs registrerings-
nummer
Kilometerstand ved arbejdsbegyn-
delse
Kilometerstand ved kørselsslut
Kørte kilometer
(kan indføres her)
146 MTCO 1324

Notering af fejl (side 151, figur VIII)
Strømafbrydelse • Markeringen (3) kommer frem straks

Når der igen er strøm, tegner apparatet kort efter, at fejlen er opstået og bliver ved,
efter start en streg (1) på diagramarket. indtil årsagen er fjernet.
Følerafbrydelse Apparatfejl
Fejl på transmissionsstrækning impulsføler Fejl i registreringssystemet kan forårsage
Ù MTCO 1324: følgende fejloptegnelser:
• Så snart køretøjet står stille, kommer • Markering (4), defekt i v-skrivesystemet.
markeringen (2), ved kørsel kommer • Markering (5) og (6), defekt i skrivesy-
v-optegnelsen igen. stemet til tidsgrupperne og vejopteg-
eller nelsen.
Bilag
Kontrolpligt for fartskrivere Vedligeholdelse og rengøring

Køretøjsejeren har pligt til regelmæssigt at MTCO 1324 er udstyret med moderne, ved-
lade den indbyggede MTCO 1324 kon- ligeholdelsesfri teknik. Det er derfor ikke
trollere. nødvendigt med forebyggende vedligehol-
delse.
Mindst hvert andet år skal det kontrolleres,
at den arbejder korrekt, f.eks. sammen med Ved tilsnavsning kan De rengøre kabinettet,
den tekniske kontrol af Deres motorkøretøj. displayet samt funktionstasterne med en let
fugtet klud. Hvis dette ikke er tilstrækkeligt,
Sørg for, at installationsmærket bliver kan der anvendes specielle kunststofrengø-
fornyet ved hver efterkontrol, og at det inde- rings- eller plejemidler.
holder de foreskrevne angivelser.

Tekniske data

Slutværdi for 125 km/h 125 km/h
måleområde:
Display: 2 linier med hver 16 tegn, 1. linie 7-cifret
oplyst ved hjælp af tænding 2. linie 4-cifret
Temperatur: Drift: -25 til 70 °C Drift: -25 til 70 °C
Lager: -40 til 85 °C Lager: -40 til 85 °C
Spænding: 24 eller 12 Volt 24 eller 12 Volt
Strømforbrug: Standby typisk: Standby typisk 6 mA ved 12 Volt
50 mA (12 Volt) (uden funktionskontrol-LED)
30 mA (24 Volt)
Pufferbatteri: Lithiumcelle
Masse: 1350 g 470 g
Særligt udstyr: • Omdrejningsregistrering • Slutværdi for måleområde:
3300 min-1 100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Ekstranotering
• ADR
• Slutværdi for måleområde:
100 / 140 / 180 km/h
• Digitalt hastighedsdisplay
Ansvarlig for indholdet: Der forbeholdes ret til ændringer af tekniske detaljer
Continental Automotive GmbH i forhold til beskrivelserne, informationerne og bille-
derne i denne driftsvejledning. Eftertryk, oversæt-
P.O. Box 1640
telse og mangfoldiggørelse er ikke tilladt uden skriftlig
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen tilladelse.
148 MTCO 1324

Aftermarket Distributor:
Continental Trading GmbH
P.O. Box 1640
D-78006 Villingen-Schwenningen
E-mail: tachograph@vdo.com
VDO – A trademark of the Continental Corporation

III
IV V
1
3
1
2 4
5
6
7
4
3
8a

VI VII
c)
3
1
a)
3
2
d)
2
b)
4
4a
VIII
1
3
2
4 5
151
Continental Brasil Indústria Automotiva Ltda.
Av. Senador Adolf Schindling, 131
Guarulhos / SP
07042-020
www.vdo.com
A2C53333992
40301629 OPM 000 AC
BA00.1324.01 111 800
Printed in Brazil I © 10.2009 I Continental Brasil Ind. Automotiva Ltda.
21 Glossary
Glossary
AdBlue® (ISO 22241/DIN 70070/AUS32)
AdBlue is the brand name for a water-clear,
synthetic 32.5 per cent solution of high-purity
urea in demineralised water that is used for
the final treatment of exhaust gases in a SCR
catalytic converter. AdBlue® is a registered
trademark of the VDA (Verband der Auto-
mobilindustrie = Automobile Industry Associ-
ation) in Germany. Designation in North
America: Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).
WFN5RUXV9L2067295
822 ATF 220G-5

2019-10_EN

Manual de Operación - Grúa Tadano ATF220 G5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Operación - Grúa Tadano ATF220 G5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

Vehicle identification number

2 General safety instructions 15

4 Components and operating elements 53

4.5 Carrier cab - shifting an driving 70

5 Operation of on-board computer 91

5.13.2 "Tyre pressure" menu 131

6.2 Loading the mobile crane 146

7 Putting into operation 150

9 Removing outrigger beams *) 217

10 Installing outrigger beams *) 225

11 Driving mode 233

11.1 General principles 233

11.3.1 Starting the engine 241

12 Driving mode in winter 303

13 Special equipment 309

14.2 Engine 317

14.5.3 Outrigger hydraulic system 320

16 Emergency operation 343

17 Service and maintenance 355

17.8.1 Introduction 375

17.9.1 Engine 377

17.14.3 Requirements 451

17.14.10 Checking transfer case breathers 456

17.22.1 Valve function check 487

18 Crane testing instructions 491

18.2 Checking the load-bearing steel structures 491

19 Removal from operation 493

20 Technical data 495

1.1 Using the operating manual

Using the operating manual

▪ Further operating manuals depending on the installed special equipments or options.

Definition of the direction specifications

Symbols and safety instructions

Type and source of danger

Tips and recommended actions

Provides information if adherence to specific instructions is important for

1.2 Vehicle identification number, name plate

1 Name plate 2 Chassis number

The following labels should be present on the mobile crane:

1.3 In case of Damage

2 General safety instructions

2.1 Basic Safety Information

2.1.1 Use of the Mobile Crane

from -25 °C to +40 °C ambient temperature.

2.1.2 Personnel Requirements

4. Replace faulty ladders immediately.

Skilled Repair Technicians

Personal Protective Equipment

2.1.3 Planning Use

When going to the installation location

When carrying out the planned work

Required crane equipment

Permissible Ground Pressure

In case of an unstable support, there is a risk of tipping and thus a risk of

Calculating the support area

Permissible ground pressure (extract from DIN 1054)

Slopes and depressions

ing to the type of ground.

T Depth of depression A Safe distance α Gradient

2.1.4 Ramming or pulling out posts or sheet piles

Aligning the Mobile Crane